JP2005224942A - Numerical control device - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To obtain a machining method of a numerical control device that rapidly processes a workpiece that requires offset machining. <P>SOLUTION: The machining method automatically carries out in sequence following steps of: measuring the difference between the actual shape of a machined workpiece and the target shape instructed in a machining program as the workpiece remains fixed in a machine; specifying the part left unmachined more than a predetermined reference value of the workpiece as a machining allowance according to the measured result to create an offset machining program for making the remaining part machined in the predetermined reference value; and machining the workpiece again according to the created offset machining program. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2005,JPO&NCIPI

Description

  The present invention relates to a processing method in the field of machining.

  A series of operations such as determination of a machining procedure, selection of a tool, creation of a machining program, machining, and inspection when performing machining using a numerically controlled machine tool are performed as follows in the conventional methods. It was. Machining procedures are determined with the skills and skills of advanced engineers and highly skilled technicians, and the selection of tools depends on the machining materials, machine tools, and machining accuracy. It was performed with the skills and skills of engineers and highly skilled technicians.

  Creating a machining program requires a lot of skillful knowledge. For example, after determining various factors such as the machine tool to be used, the material and mounting method of the workpiece, the tool used, the machining sequence, and the machining conditions, the machining program is followed. Since the tool movement path is calculated according to the shape of the workpiece and is created by tape punching according to the NC format, the machining process is subject to various conditions even when automated by a numerical controller. It does not include advanced processing to cope with it, and although there is no need for advanced skills, a technician who can judge various condition changes of the machining program and can take countermeasures is required. Further, it has been performed by technicians using various measuring instruments and measuring methods to inspect whether or not the workpiece after the machining process matches the specified shape accuracy and dimensional accuracy.

In the method of creating a machining program by an automatic program, a part of the menu contents of a question is displayed graphically using a CRT display device in interactive input, that is, an NC program automatic creation device A program creation menu is displayed on the graphic display screen, and an NC program automatic creation apparatus that automatically creates an NC program by sequentially processing data input in accordance with the display displays a part of the contents of the program creation menu. There is shown a storage means for storing data necessary for display as a graphic, and a display means for reading out the data stored in the storage means and displaying it on a graphic display screen (for example, Patent Document 1). ).
Further, in an electric discharge machining apparatus that displays an NC process format and inputs to fill in necessary data, that is, as an electric discharge machining apparatus, the electric discharge machining apparatus is program-controlled by a control device including an input unit / display unit and a numerical control device. A display is provided with a CRT display device, a process sheet format screen is displayed on the CRT display device, and data is embedded on the process sheet format screen (for example, Patent Document 2). .
Moreover, as a method for inputting information necessary for workpiece machining in a pattern, that is, as a method for inputting machining information in a numerically controlled machine tool, a program input screen of a control device includes a workpiece machining program input area, a HELP information area, Information required for workpiece machining is displayed in the HELP information area while always displaying a format guide listing the names of items to be entered in the entry order in the workpiece machining program input area. Is displayed as a pattern (for example, Patent Document 3).
Moreover, when inputting the shape after machining, tolerance is inputted for each shape element or group of a plurality of shape elements constituting the machining shape, and machining path information is created so that the dimension after machining falls within the tolerance. The thing is shown (for example, patent document 4).
In addition, in the menu type input, any of the X-axis coordinate values of the start point and end point of the end face groove, the depth of the end face groove, the diameter of the end face groove, the length of the end face groove, or the angle from the reference line of the C axis An example of inputting these is shown (for example, Patent Document 5).
Moreover, what uses the means which inputs a finishing shape by measuring a master workpiece is shown (for example, patent document 6).
Moreover, what inputs a dimension line, a dimension, and a dimension difference on a CRT screen is shown (for example, patent document 7).
Further, there is shown a method for displaying the contents of a file storing tool codes on a display and sequentially inputting tool codes when setting the execution order of machining steps (for example, Patent Document 8).
Moreover, what has shown the figure which inputs a tolerance is shown for every shape structure part (for example, patent document 9).
In addition, an element type, shape data, a projection surface, a part name, and a shape name are used to input a machining shape (for example, Patent Document 10).
Further, there is shown one that can select a shape and a menu using symbolic keys for graphic input and can confirm an input result (for example, Patent Document 11).
And what displays and displays a figure shape using X, Z, SR, R on a CRT screen is shown (for example, patent document 12).

For those using a program creation technique based on knowledge accumulation / inference, an attempt is made to introduce an expert system into a process design that is a joint between CAD and CAM (for example, Patent Document 13).
Moreover, what produces NC data by the input with respect to a raw material, a part shape, a tool, and a question is shown (for example, patent document 14).
Also, based on the assigned information, machining figure input means for inputting a machining figure to be machined by a plurality of machining machines, machine allocation means for analyzing the inputted machining figure and assigning a predetermined machining machine to each line segment, and A machine that automatically generates an NC program necessary for each processing machine to process a predetermined line segment is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 15).
In addition, an NC lathe having an automatic programming function is provided with means for measuring the workpiece material dimensions with the workpiece material mounted, and inputting the measured workpiece material shape data into the automatic programming device. (For example, patent document 16).
In the method of automatically determining the machining range of each spindle so that the machining times of a plurality of spindles are equal from the input workpiece shape and material shape, a division point and a division direction in which the machining range can be set are set. Determine the order of adoption, set the machining range sequentially according to the order of adoption from the dividing point and direction, determine the machining process for each spindle, calculate the required machining time for each machining process, compare each machining time, and input Judge the machining time comparison value from the machining time balance allowable value of the data, check the existence of other settable division points and division directions, and repeat the above processing if the allowable value is not reached A method for searching for the best division method is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 17).
In addition, it is shown that a program is input by guidance displayed on the screen, or machining data is input in accordance with a program creation procedure, and a program that automatically selects a pattern that minimizes the movement distance within the group is generated ( For example, Patent Document 18).

As for the control method of numerically controlled machine tools, the final machining shape shown in the drawing is classified according to the specific machining content specified in advance and machining information is input for those using the program creation method by machining element integration Thus, what prevents erroneous input of machining information to a program is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 19).
In addition, a part program is created by combining a subprogram for each machining process and a main program that calls each subprogram in the order of the machining process (for example, Patent Document 20).
Further, there is shown a method of dividing a processing element into points, lines, and surfaces in processing modes and further disassembling into a single processing unit (for example, Patent Document 21).

Moreover, what selects automatically the tool which does not interfere with a workpiece | work in tool selection is shown (for example, patent document 22).
In the case of hole machining, there is shown a technique in which a hole type shape is registered for each hole type and a tool for machining the maximum diameter is automatically determined from the hole type (for example, Patent Document 23).
In addition, as a programming method in the interactive numerical control device, the selection of the tool is performed by the interactive numerical control device, and the optimum tool for machining is automatically selected and determined among the tools having a tool life, so that the human A device that eliminates the need for judgment and operation and prevents human error and improves operability is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 24).

  Moreover, what automatically determines a tool for preparing a prepared hole is shown (for example, Patent Document 25).

Moreover, what selects a drilling tool by inference using a production rule is shown (for example, patent document 26).
In addition, as a tool automatic selection method, the tool is read from the tool file corresponding to the machining shape, the cutting condition is read from the material material data and the cutting condition file of the tool, the machining time for each tool is calculated, and the shortest machining time is calculated. A tool that automatically selects a tool having the shortest machining time by selecting a tool is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 27).
Further, as a method for selecting a tool for grooving in automatic programming, the cutting edge width for each grooving is stored in advance, and the cutting edge width equal to or smaller than the maximum groove width among one or more groove portions included in the specified part shape. A tool that allows automatic selection of a tool by selecting a tool having the maximum cutting edge width from among the tools having the above (for example, Patent Document 28).
In addition, as a method of selecting a screw machining tool in automatic programming, a machining process name and tool shape data that can be used for each tool are stored in advance, and a screw machining tool is obtained from a screw depth and a pitch obtained from specific part shape data. A tool that enables automatic selection of a tool by selecting is shown (for example, Patent Document 29).
In addition, as a tool selection method in automatic programming, a tool data file including the machining process name and tool shape data is registered in advance in the tool, and the tool that does not interfere with the workpiece can be automatically selected from the specified file, improving operability (For example, Patent Document 30).
In addition, the processing direction, processing tool, and shape are used as rules for automatically determining the type of process, tool used, and processing range, and the tool to be held is selected by comparing the cutting edge angle and finishing angle. (For example, patent document 31).
In addition, in the numerical control information creation device that divides the machining range using the tool data of the tool registered in advance, the one that determines the machining process according to the tool by specifying the preferential use of the registered tool is shown. (For example, Patent Document 32).
In addition, an interactive screen for selecting a tool to be used includes steps for inputting a desired tool diameter, searching in a magazine, searching in a file, and searching for an alternative tool (for example, Patent Document 33).
In addition, a cutting amount is calculated by comparing a workpiece cutting shape and a material workpiece shape, and a cutting tool corresponding to the cutting amount is selected from a tool master file (for example, Patent Document 34).
In addition, a table for setting determination criteria for tool selection is provided, tool selection is performed based on this table, tool data is displayed on the CRT in the order determined to be suitable for machining according to the result, and the operator is suitable for machining. A tool for specifying a tool is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 35).
In addition, there is a tool for selecting a tool that satisfies the outer cutting edge diameter of twice or less (correctly half or less) of the concave curvature radius of the minimum curvature radius and two conditions that can pass through the narrow portion of the minimum width. (For example, patent document 36).
Further, as a method for integrating tools in a plurality of inner diameter machining steps, there is shown a method for comparing the respective machining diameters and depths and determining whether or not to integrate using a discrimination of a single tool (for example, a patent) Reference 37).
Also, database for machine tools, machine tool specific features, workpiece characteristics, cutting tool features, processing methods, general machining boundary data for workpieces, bits suitable for use in a given machine tool Stores subroutines that determine possible corresponding machining data from stored data including material grade and bit form data, artificially knows the material of the workpiece, the type of cutting tool and the desired surface quality of the workpiece Determining the suitability of multiple cutting bit materials for workpiece material, suitability of multiple cutting edge shapes, suitability of multiple sets of work data in combination, and output of work data by subroutines It is shown that the machine tool is controlled according to one set of display and display data group (for example, Patent Document 38).
In addition, a method for selecting a groove tool by groove recognition and a finish symbol is shown as a groove machining method (for example, Patent Document 39).

  Regarding the tool use order determination system, the order by the first order determination means is rearranged according to the proximity evaluation means so that the movement of the workpiece is minimized within the range in which the tool use order is not changed as the tool use order determination system. Thus, what is intended to reduce the number of steps in the production preparation process and the manufacturing process is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 40).

As a method for determining the processing order, there is shown a method for determining a processing order so that processing with high required accuracy is performed last based on processing accuracy data (for example, Patent Document 41).
In addition, as a method for determining a machining method in the creation function of the numerical control function, an outer shape machining portion and an inner diameter machining portion are recognized based on the input material shape and part shape, and the machining portion for each of the inner diameter machining portions. Based on the shape of this, it is shown that it is possible to automatically divide into a forward machining part that performs forward cutting at an optimal point and a reverse machining part that performs reverse cutting (for example, patents) Reference 42).
In addition, a process type for extracting a machining area from an inner diameter machining area based on the shape element data and machining a characteristic machining area and a machining range in each process type are automatically determined ( For example, Patent Document 43).
In addition, it is shown that a plurality of machining process data registered in advance and a plurality of machining procedures corresponding to the machining process are stored, and a tool to be used and a cutting condition are determined by specifying the machining process / machining procedure. (For example, patent document 44).
Moreover, what sets the execution order of a process process by designating a tool code is shown (for example, patent document 45).
In addition, the tool information including at least the insertion angle of the tool into the workpiece is used to divide the region to be machined according to the shape into regions corresponding to one or a plurality of machining steps, and based on the region corresponding to the machining step A method for creating numerical control information is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 46).

In the case where the tool order is taken into account in the form in which the machining order is determined, the tool order after the change is considered even when the machining order is changed due to specific circumstances (for example, Patent Document 47). ).
In addition, as another example of taking the tool order into consideration in the form in which the machining order has been determined, the tool order after the change is also taken into account when the machining order is changed due to specific circumstances. (For example, Patent Document 48).
Also, a shape element for which grooving is specified is extracted, and based on the shape of the groove shape element and the characteristics of the adjacent shape element, the process type, process sequence, and machining range for grooving are automatically determined. Is shown (for example, Patent Document 49).

  In addition, when the tool order is taken into consideration, the efficiency is compared when the tool is not used, and the result is reflected in the machining order (for example, Patent Document 50).

Regarding the method of determining machining conditions, the cutting conditions such as cutting speed and feed rate are stored in numerical tables, and based on this table, the optimum cutting conditions are determined by collating with input data such as workpiece material and shape. Is shown (for example, Patent Document 51).
In addition, a menu for finishing surface roughness is displayed on the display, and processing conditions are determined in response to the selection (for example, Patent Document 52).
In addition, as a machine tool, the workpiece is automatically processed at the correct rotation and cutting speed by taking out the data from the rotation speed and cutting speed data storage means by means of machining bit selection and workpiece designation and controlling the motor. (For example, Patent Document 53).
In addition, as a method for determining the cutting conditions in the numerical control information creation device, the cutting amount is automatically changed according to the cutting amount change coefficient obtained from the material diameter and thickness, and the numerical control information for roughing is performed using the changed cutting amount. By making it the structure which produces | generates, what can change the cutting amount according to a raw material and the shape of a process automatically is shown (for example, patent document 54).
In addition, in the drilling definition by the NC automatic programming system, a table that stores coefficients that determine machining conditions for each work material, hole type, and tool diameter is provided, and the defined hole shape is registered and stored in advance. When the hole shape is selected, the hole condition constituting the hole shape, the coefficient of the machining condition read from the table according to the tool diameter, the cutting condition, and the one for setting the machining condition according to the feed rate are shown (for example, Patent Document 55).
Also, machining condition table, tool table, end mill coefficient table, table of feed coefficient corresponding to cutting speed and end mill diameter of work material are stored, and arbitrary input consisting of tool ID, cutting width, scallop height and cutting depth Among the data groups, various stored data corresponding to the input data are used to obtain the data that has not been input, the feed speed and the spindle speed are obtained, and the obtained results are displayed. (For example, patent document 56).
Also, there is shown a method for determining the optimum spindle speed and the maximum depth of cut in the minimum diameter portion, and determining the machining allowance to be repeated until the maximum diameter is obtained by calculating the diameter and the optimum spindle speed that are sequentially increased by the notch (for example, Patent Document 57).
In addition, the machining allowance of the work material is divided into multiple stages of cutting amounts, and the optimal combination of the predetermined spindle speed and feed rate is selected according to the cutting tool to be used and the cutting amount. What is selected for each cutting operation is shown (for example, Patent Document 58).
Moreover, what reads and determines the cutting condition table by a diameter and a length scale is shown (for example, patent document 59).
In addition, there is shown a tool for determining a tool feed in which a machining load is always constant according to a material shape that changes every moment during machining (for example, Patent Document 60).

The tool path determination method is based on the input information such as the distinction between a straight line and an arc, the specification of the start point of the straight line, the specification of the end point of the straight line, the specification of the arc, and the like. For the case where the mutual relationship with the straight line or the circular arc is not fixed, it is assumed that the tool is in contact with each other and the tool only advances at the contact point, and includes a calculation unit that automatically calculates information on a desired tool path. (For example, patent document 61).
In addition, a database storing shape information and processing information of a processing target, or a database storing a model expressed by a Bezier (BEZIE) curved surface, and an optimal processing trajectory of the processing tool on the processing target based on the information described above. The shortest distance between two points on the Bezier curve is obtained by approximating the trajectory determined by the optimum trajectory determining device and the optimal trajectory determining device for determining the optimal machining trajectory of the machining tool, or by approximating the Bezier curve with a polyhedron. A three-dimensional machining system including a control device that controls a machining tool based on data of a teaching device that determines each control parameter of the machining tool based on the tool trajectory obtained in this way is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 62).
Further, the machining shape is formed as a line drawing, and an offset line corresponding to the contour machining tool for machining the machining shape is formed and stored, and a first identification code is added to the pixels forming the offset line, and appears in the offset line. A second identification code is added to the pixels that form the vertex and a single line, and when the machining shape is scanned in a certain direction, the pixels that intersect the scanning line are counted. An area with an even count value is determined as a pixel outside the processing area, an odd number area is determined as a processing area, and a machining area other than the contour line is processed. A two-dimensional tool path generation method for forming a one-stroke two-dimensional tool path based on the overlap amount is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 63).
Further, as a method for creating tool path data, the machining surface data constituted by the shape model data is converted into a plurality of tangent plane data constituting a triangle, and the correspondence table of the plurality of tangential plane data with respect to a predetermined area map set in advance The predetermined tangent plane data is obtained from the area map including the occupation area of the tool holder that holds the tool and the correspondence table, and the tool holder and the tangent plane data are checked for interference, and the tangent plane with the interference part is determined as the tool. A tool that creates tool path data corrected so as to avoid the holder is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 64).
In addition, as a method of creating tool path data, machining surface data constituted by shape model data is converted into a plurality of tangent plane data constituting a triangle, and the tangent plane data is classified into a plurality of sections by a preset two-dimensional area map. In this example, predetermined tangent plane data is obtained from a section including a machining portion, and tool path data is created so that the tool does not interfere with the tangential plane data. Also, it is shown that the machining path on the workpiece surface is determined by efficiency and accuracy, such as cutting in one direction, reciprocating and cutting, turning around in the way of one stroke writing, and determining the start point and end point. (For example, Patent Document 65).
Further, there is shown a method in which a portion that can be cut with a grooving tool is determined for an arbitrary finished shape, and then a tool path suitable for cutting the portion is extracted (for example, Patent Document 66).
In addition, the cycle movement path of the tool for roughing to the finished shape is automatically determined based on the finish shape data of the workpiece and the depth data that determines the depth of cut at the height of the tool to be machined. In a numerical control device having a combined fixed cycle function to extract automatically, finishing shape data and cutting edge angle data indicating the cutting edge angle of the tool are input, and the data in each block of the finishing shape data is corrected according to the cutting edge angle data The cutting edge angle correcting means for performing the cutting is provided, and the finish shape data corrected by the cutting edge angle correcting means is used for extracting the optimum movement path of the tool together with the cutting amount data (for example, Patent Document 67). .
In addition, when inputting the shape after machining, tolerance is input for each shape element or group of a plurality of shape elements constituting the machining shape, and machining path information is created so that the dimension after machining falls within the tolerance. The thing is shown (for example, patent document 68).
Also, a tool path that generates no tool interference based on the selected tool diameter and CAD data is shown (for example, Patent Document 69).
Moreover, what calculates the tool path | route of NC machine based on process shape data and process process data is shown (for example, patent document 70).

As a method considering the tool shape, a method of automatically selecting a corresponding offset amount from a data file from a fitting tolerance name and designated dimension data is shown (for example, Patent Document 71).
In addition, there is shown what checks whether there is no interference between the surrounding environment and the tool used when the offset processing is performed (for example, Patent Document 72).
In addition, the tool offset shape data divided for each machining process sent from the tool offset shape data creation means is received and temporarily stored in the buffer memory, and tool path data is created from the tool offset data and the specified tool movement path, and the tool An NC program suitable for the numerically controlled machine tool to be used is generated by the post processor from the path data and the specified cutting conditions, and the NC program that is transferred sequentially is converted into an operation command by the numerical control unit to perform numerically controlled machining on the workpiece. A machining system applied by a machine tool is shown (for example, Patent Document 73).

As a method for creating cycle machining by inputting only the final contour shape, there is shown a method in which a rough machining repetition path along a product shape is automatically obtained when a material shape and a product shape are inputted (for example, Patent Document 74).
Also, when the material shape is shifted in the cutting direction by the depth of cutting in the cutting conditions, and there is an intersection between the material shape and the workpiece shape, the machining range is divided at the intersection, and the shifted material shape is within the workpiece shape. In the case of the divided machining range that exists, a cutting path that cuts along the workpiece shape is generated, and when the shifted material shape exists outside the workpiece shape, a cutting path that sequentially cuts by the cutting depth is generated. (For example, patent document 75).

  As for the method of creating cycle machining, there is a method for determining the optimum spindle speed and the maximum depth of cut at the smallest diameter part, determining the diameter and the optimum spindle speed that are sequentially increased by the depth of cut, and repeating the machining allowance to the maximum diameter. (For example, patent document 76).

Regarding the method of determining, dividing, and machining the area, a curve that is offset from the closed curve by the tool radius offset amount when machining the area (convex part) sandwiched between the outline curve and at least two closed curves. The one that continuously processes the remaining portion excluding the crossing portion (when the tool enters this portion, the other convex portion is excessively cut) is shown (for example, Patent Document 77).
Further, there is shown a method for automatically determining a machining range for each machining process when workpiece shape / material shape data is input (for example, Patent Document 78).
Further, there is shown a technique in which the machining area is roughly divided into two parts, PG1 and PG2, and a tool path is generated for each of them (for example, Patent Document 79).
In addition, a reference data memory that prepares area division judgment criteria and setting criteria for machining area division processing of an automatic machine that divides the machining area for each machining method by interactive processing and automatic processing with the machining design data output screen And there was another machine process area such as center machining or reaming in the step hole area, the step machining area judgment part, the pocket machining area judgment part, the recessed part area division processing part that judges the step hole or pocket from the machining setting data A plurality of shape element determination units for determining a processing region step by step according to a shape type for each processing method based on a determination criterion for a processing region of a workpiece, a division determination unit that assigns an identification code in case A plurality of shape element division processing units for registering the regions divided according to the determination results in correspondence with the setting criteria, and a processing region data file for the created data. Those comprising a data memory is shown (for example, patent document 80).
Further, there is shown a method in which division points are determined using the area of the entire processing region so that the areas of the primary processing and the secondary processing are equal (for example, Patent Document 81).
In addition, each minimum machining inner diameter is calculated for one or a plurality of inner diameter cutting tools registered in advance, and it is determined whether or not the inner diameter turning tool interferes with the workpiece when machining the inner diameter machining area, In the case of interference, a drill or end mill is used, and in the case of no interference, a means for automatically determining a process for dividing into one or a plurality of machining areas based on the minimum machining inner diameter is provided. (For example, Patent Document 82).
Also, when the material shape is shifted in the cutting direction by the depth of cutting in the cutting conditions, and there is an intersection between the material shape and the workpiece shape, the machining range is divided at the intersection, and the shifted material shape is within the workpiece shape. In the case of the divided machining range that exists, a cutting path that cuts along the workpiece shape is generated, and when the shifted material shape exists outside the workpiece shape, a cutting path that sequentially cuts by the depth of cut is generated. (For example, Patent Document 83).
Moreover, what performs process division | segmentation by removal volume is shown (for example, patent document 84).

  As these collection systems, machine tool control method, machine tool data, workpiece data, cutting tool data, specific processing method, database of machine data, etc. are stored in the data processing device so that the operator does not have deep knowledge However, what enables optimum cutting is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 85).

In addition, as a control means of a computer-controlled machine tool, the operation condition of the machine tool is established from the input workpiece parameter and stored data, and the machine control device is operated, so that skill is not required. An apparatus that accurately and uniformly processes a workpiece is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 86).
In addition, as an NC information creation system, there is shown a system in which NC information having high reliability can be easily obtained by displaying and outputting an operation procedure in an interactive format and contents of input data in a list format. (For example, patent document 87).
In addition, as a numerical control device with a roughing function, it is possible to control the roughing process automatically when a roughing process is required when processing a product from a material. What is shortened is shown (for example, patent document 88).
Also, as the NC data creation method for the side area machining, the side surface rough machining shape is created by deleting the shape element cut into the side surface finish shape, and the NC data for rough machining is created by this side surface rough machining shape. There has been shown a technique that reduces shape input, reduces input mistakes, and greatly reduces the time required to input side surfaces (for example, Patent Document 89).
In addition, by inputting the final workpiece shape and the material shape in the turning process, one or a plurality of chucking locations up to the final workpiece shape and the turning range in the chucking are automatically determined collectively. Alternatively, there is shown a machining range automatic determination method in turning that takes into account that a machining range determination means is provided (for example, Patent Document 90).
In addition, as a machining information creation system, by defining and arranging machining parts having technical information such as graphic information, position information, dimensional tolerances, surface roughness, etc. on each machining surface, it is possible to quickly respond to product design changes, etc. The one that can change the processing information is shown (for example, Patent Document 91).
In addition, there is shown a device that includes means for inputting machining shape information, dimension information, and tolerance information, and obtains a machining dimension that satisfies the tolerance by the machining shape information, dimension information, and tolerance information (for example, Patent Document 92).
In addition, the machining target value, which is the median value of the machining dimension, is automatically calculated based on the coordinate value of each point that constitutes the machining contour shape of the workpiece and the dimensional tolerance in a machine tool, etc. A technique for recognizing a high-precision machining part from the difference and determining an optimum machining method is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 93).
Also, material data. Tool data. And the like (see, for example, Patent Document 94).
In addition, a resident monitoring means that monitors the target system by simple processing and detects a state change, and a non-resident that is activated only when the monitoring means detects a state change and checks whether the state change is correct A confirmation unit, a non-resident control information generation unit that is activated only when the confirmation unit confirms that the state change is correct, analyzes the state change and generates control information corresponding to the state change, and a control unit that controls each unit. A control-type expert system provided is shown (for example, Patent Document 95).

  From another point of view, the automatic process design processing method in machining is based on the machining mode determination unit that determines the constraint condition (machining mode) between the machining areas at the time of machining and the part model as the process design processing method in machining. A reference surface determining unit for determining a processing reference surface and a process plan drafting / verifying unit are provided to realize an efficient process work design without any mistake (for example, Patent Document 96).

JP 59-30109 A JP 59-161704 A JP-A 61-105612 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 4-85605 JP-A-4-148306 JP-A-4-331038 JP-A-4-352006 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-146943 JP-A-5-158523 JP-A-5-329744 JP-A-2-306308 JP-A-4-370808 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 62-226267 JP-A-4-148306 JP-A-2-306308 JP-A-4-76707 JP-A-6-63841 Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 3-119206 JP 58-46408 A JP 59-75307 A JP 58-46408 A JP 60-127947 A JP-A-62-181853 JP-A-2-36046 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 62-181854 JP-A-1-188249 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2-109657 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-58052 Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-58017 Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-60388 JP-A-3-294146 JP-A-4-54506 JP-A-4-75850 JP-A-4-331038 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-208340 JP-A-5-228786 JP-A-5-277892 JP-A-1-234135 JP-A-3-251907 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2-167647 JP 62-57852 A JP-A-2-139158 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-166039 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-119821 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-146943 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-179509 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 61-251906 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 61-251907 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-184740 JP-A-62-251046 JP 58-82646 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 58-1226039 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2-15904 JP-A-2-172653 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-256645 JP-A-4-310347 JP-A-5-146944 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-245539 JP-A-5-277892 JP-A-6-39677 JP-A 61-250706 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 62-115504 JP-A-62-221004 JP-A-63-24305 JP-A-63-24306 JP-A-2-30458 JP 62-107305 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 4-85605 JP-A-5-228786 JP-A-5-329744 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 62-15607 JP 63-6605 A JP-A-5-274221 Japanese Patent Publication No.52-35158 JP-A-5-80829 JP-A-5-146944 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 60-12752 JP 61-178148 A JP 62-19909 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 62-140741 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-156506 JP-A-4-369006 JP-A-5-80829 JP-A-5-104396 JP-A-1-234135 JP-A-2-59252 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-46007 JP-A-3-60953 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-92245 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-161245 Japanese Patent Publication No. 3-51547 JP-A-4-352006 JP-A-6-4119 JP-A-6-39677 JP-A-3-3008 JP-A-2-15949

Incidentally, there is a case where the machining error of only a part of the workpiece is outside the allowable range, and the machining error of the other part is within the allowable range. However, in the conventional NC processing apparatus described above, even when a processing error of only a part of the workpiece is outside the allowable range, it is excluded as a rejected product.
The present invention has been made in order to solve such problems, and a machining method using a numerical control device capable of reducing the generation of rejected products compared to the prior art and capable of quickly processing a workpiece requiring correction machining. The purpose is to provide.

  In the machining method using the numerical control device according to the present invention, an error between the actual shape of the workpiece machined according to the machining program and the target shape instructed by the machining program is fixed to the machine. Based on the measurement result, the remaining machining part where the machining allowance remains beyond a predetermined reference value is specified based on the measurement result, and the machining allowance of the remaining machining part is determined as the predetermined reference. A step of generating a machining program for correction machining to be equal to or less than a value, and a step of reworking the workpiece according to the generated machining program for correction machining, and each of the steps is automatically executed in order. To do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to quickly process a workpiece that requires correction processing.

Example 1
The following is a specific description of a workpiece that uses turning as an initial process.
1, 2 and 3 show examples of flowcharts of this processing method.
The outline of the processing method of this flowchart will be described as follows.
Start with step 1. In step 2, various files are registered. In step 3, processing data is input (in this step 3, various files are used to facilitate input. This section will be described later). In step 5, an addition request warning is given, and the operator returns to step 2 and adds an insufficient file. On the other hand, in step 4, it is determined whether or not the file is acceptable. In step 10, it is determined whether or not material measurement is necessary. If necessary (1), the process continues from step (1) in FIG. On the other hand, if the result is NO, the processing program generation processing for each process is started in step 11, and the processing processing is started from step 12.

In the processing, n = 0 for initialization of the process number is performed in step 12, and the process is counted with n = n + 1 in step 13, and processing from the first process is started.
In step 14, whether or not measurement on the machine is possible and measurement on the machine is possible. In step 15, n-process workpiece machining, measurement, correction, and rework are performed, and if another process finishing is unnecessary, step Continue to 17. If another process finishing is necessary, the process returns to step 11 and repeats from the generation of the machining program of the other process finishing machining process.
On the other hand, if measurement on the machine is not possible in step 14, the process of n-process workpiece, measurement outside the machine, correction, and rework is performed in step 16, and if another process finish is not necessary, continue to step 17. . If another process finishing is necessary, the process returns to step 11 and repeats from the generation of the machining program of the other process finishing machining process.
In step 17, it is determined whether or not the final process of the process number has been completed. If not, the process returns to step 13 and is repeated.
If the final process of the process number is completed in step 17, the presence or absence of the next identical work is determined in step 18, and if there is a work, the process returns to step 12 and is repeated. On the other hand, if there is no next identical work, it is determined in step 19 whether or not there is a different graphic work. If it is present, it is determined in step 20 whether or not it is a typical graphic processed so far. In the case of, return to step 3 and repeat.
On the other hand, if it is not a typical figure, the process returns to step 2 and is repeated.
If there is no workpiece with a different figure in step 19, the process ends in step 21.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the material measurement is performed in step 10 (1), each of the process number: n = 0 and the sampling number: n3 = 0 is determined in step 22 from (1) in FIG. Initialization is performed, a process count is performed at step 23 with n = n + 1, and at step 24, it is determined whether or not material measurement of n processes is necessary. If material measurement is required, whether or not statistical processing of the material is possible is determined in step 25. If statistical processing of the material is not possible, whether or not measurement on the machine is possible is determined in step 26, and measurement on the machine is possible. If not, in step 27, n-process material measurement and a machining program are generated.
Next, in step 28, n-process workpiece machining, on-machine measurement, correction, and rework processing are performed. If not necessary, it is determined in step 34 whether or not the final process of the process number has been completed. If not, the process returns to step 23 and is repeated.
When the final process of the process number is finished in step 34, the presence or absence of the next identical work is determined in step 35. If there is a work, the process returns to step 22 and is repeated. On the other hand, if there is no next identical work (3), the process continues to step 19 from (3) in FIG. (The processing after step 19 has already been described.)
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 24 that n-process material measurement is not necessary (2), the process continues from step (2) in FIG.
If it is determined in step 25 that material statistical processing is necessary, the number of samplings is counted in step 30 at n3 = n3 + 1. In the next step 31, it is determined whether or not the number of samplings has been reached. If it has been reached, material measurement and data organization are performed in step 32. If it is determined that the value is within the allowable value (2), the process continues to step 36 from (2) in FIG. Otherwise, if not within the allowable value, continue to step 26. (The processing after step 26 has already been described.)
On the other hand, if the number of samplings is not reached in step 31 (2), the process continues to step 36 from (2) in FIG.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 26 that measurement on the machine is impossible, measurement of the material outside the machine, generation of a machining program, machining of the workpiece, measurement outside the machine, correction, and rework processing are performed at step 29. As a result, if another process finish is necessary, the process returns to step 23 and is repeated. Alternatively, if another process finish is unnecessary, the process returns to step 34 and is repeated.

When it is determined that the n-process material measurement is not necessary in step 24 already described, if the sampling number is not reached in step 31, and if the variation is within the allowable value in step 33, (2) Step 3 is continued from (2) of 3.
After these steps, the following is performed.
In step 36, it is determined whether or not measurement on the machine is possible. If measurement on the machine is possible, it is determined whether or not the same-shaped workpiece is repeated in step 37. If the same-shaped workpiece is repeated, n is determined in step 39. When the workpiece processing of the process, the measurement on the machine, the correction, and the reworking are performed and the other process finishing is not necessary (4), the process continues to step 34 from (4) of FIG. When another process finishing is necessary (5), the process is repeated from step (5) in FIG.

  If the same workpiece is not repeated in step 37, a machining program with on-machine measurement with material statistical processing of n processes is generated in step 38. When this process ends, the process continues to step 39.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 36 that measurement on the machine is impossible, it is determined in step 40 whether or not the same-shaped workpiece is repeated. When the measurement outside the machine, the correction, and the reworking are performed and the different process finishing is unnecessary (4), the process continues to step 34 from (4) in FIG. When another process finishing is necessary (5), the process is repeated from step (5) in FIG.

  If the same workpiece is not repeated in step 40, a machining program with out-of-machine measurement with material statistical processing of n processes is generated in step 41. When this process ends, the process continues to step 42. (The processing after step 42 has already been described.)

  In step 2, files such as a tool file, a machine tool file (including a machining time file and a file relating to the mounting method), a shape file, a screw shape file, a screw pilot hole file, a dimension tolerance file, and a machining method symbol file. Finishing symbol file, finishing allowance file, material file, cutting condition file, surface treatment file, tempering file, shape and position accuracy file, cost file, process file, machining method file, etc. are registered.

The tool file is a file in which various data relating to a tool are filed in the format shown in FIGS.
The tool file is filed together with the machine tool file, and the tool usage conditions (for example, maximum value of cut, minimum value, maximum value of feed, minimum value, allowable range of interrupted cutting, etc.) are determined from both files as tool file. Automatically determined by logical operation using data with machine tool file. This result is used for determination and determination of cutting conditions as tool usage conditions for machine tools.
The tool file adopts and expands the known EXAPT format similarity to the main cutting edge, and the secondary cutting edge (the secondary cutting edge is designed to allow multiple inputs such as the first, second ...). Divide and input. A function definition including a capability definition and a machining figure are created from the input value by internal processing of the numerical controller. This result is used to select a tool in comparison with the input figure.

78 to 81 are examples of inputting a stationary tool.
78-81,
The sequence 1000 is an input example of a tool for turning.
Sequence: 1000 is a byte,
Tool identification number: 1,
The shank identification number uses a JIS shank identification number;
CCLNL2525M1204W,
Chip identification number: CNMG120404,
Breaker specifications;
Breaker width (blade edge): 1.5 mm, Breaker width (blade edge): 1.5 mm, Breaker height (blade edge): 0.5 mm, Breaker height (blade edge): 0.5 mm, Breaker height Angle: 0 degree,
Cutting edge (L / R); L,
Main cutting edge specifications;
The cutting edge angle κ is inputted as +5 degrees counterclockwise with the direction of the shank side from the cutting edge as 0 degrees around the intersection of the extension line of the shank extension direction and the cutting edge reference position: +5 degrees,
Although this input method is different from the input method based on the JIS standard, unifying the input of all tools is easy in the processing in the computer and is very advantageous.
Clearance angle αo: 5 degrees, side rake angle γf: −5 degrees, back rake γp: −5 degrees, nose radius: 0.4,
Specifications of secondary cutting edge (1); secondary cutting edge angle κ'1: +85 degrees, clearance angle ακ'1: 5 degrees Specifications of secondary cutting edge (2); secondary cutting edge angle κ'2: Skip When there is no input data, it is abbreviated as skip.The skip operation in the control device is performed by setting a dedicated key or setting it to a soft menu key.), Clearance angle ακ′2: skip.
Specifications of secondary cutting edge (3); all skipped (distance from reference cutting edge point, X, Z, secondary cutting edge angle κ'3, clearance angle ακ'3)
The size of the shank; □ / ◯ is used to identify the shape of the shank, □ indicates a square shank: 1, and ○ indicates a round shank: 2. Since this example is a square shank, 1 is input. Diameter / width: Enter the diameter for round shanks and the width for square shanks. In this example, the height is input only in the case of 25 mm, height; square shank. In this example, 25 mm is input.
XT / ZT is a column for inputting the tool to be mounted in the X direction and the category of the tool to be mounted in the Z direction. 1 is the tool for mounting the length of the shank in the X direction, 2 is the length of the shank in the Z direction Tool. This example is an example of a tool in which 1 is input and the length of the shank is attached in the X direction.
Depending on the state of the cutting edge of the tool, a tool with the shank length attached in the X direction can be used for machining in the X direction and Z direction, and a tool for attaching the shank length in the Z direction can be used for machining in the Z direction. Directional machining is possible as well. These determinations are included in the tool file registration process.
The distance from the reference position of the tool holder to the reference point of the cutting edge is input to the reference cutting edge point. In this example, X: +105 mm and Z: +7 mm are input.
For the amount of protrusion from the tool holder, the amount of tool protrusion from the tool holder is input. In this example, X: 25 mm and Z: 0 mm are input.
The protrusion angle from the tool holder is used for input when the tool is tilted and attached to the holder. This example is skipped.
The mounting angle of the tool holder is an input column when the holder with the tool attached is tilted when mounting to the machine. This example is skipped.
The tool rigidity is expressed by the amount of deflection of the tool corresponding to the load, and is input in units of μm / N separately for the X direction load and the Z direction load. In this example, X: 0.001 μm / N and Z: 0.001 μm / N are input.
Tool stiffness can be calculated using a cantilever static load equation or the finite element method, and it is calculated by these, but there are a lot of descriptions due to the number of steps for automatic discrimination when the shape is complicated. Therefore, in this example, only a calculation result is input without describing a specific content example of automatic calculation processing.
Further, in order to obtain more accuracy, an actual measurement result may be input without using calculation. When automatic calculation is performed, a mathematical expression developed by the basic expression (1) is used.
δmax = W × L ³ / (3 × E × I) (1)
Tip clamp is a throw-away type; Clamp-on type: C, Pin lock type One side restraint type: E, Pin lock type Two side restraint type: P, Insert type: I, Brazing type: B, Screwing type: S, solid type: L, clamp on type or pin lock type surface constrained double clamp type: M, wedge lock type: W
In addition, about a grindstone, when using an adhesion | attachment method or a fusion | melting method, it handles as brazing type: B.
Since this example is a clamp-on type, C is input.
Cutting limit;
The cutting limit in the case of the throw-away method is automatically calculated and input by tool data processing by the tool capability calculation processing in step 2208 shown in FIG. The calculation result in this example is inputted as the maximum value: 12.43 mm and the minimum value = R: 0.4 mm.
In the case of brazing, solid, etc., automatic calculation input is not possible, so manual input is required.
Feed limit;
The feed limit is automatically calculated and input by the tool data processing based on the tool capability calculation processing in step 2208. The calculation result in this example is inputted as a maximum value: 0.39 mm and a maximum value: 0.01 mm.
Moreover, it does not have to be an automatic calculation input and can be input manually. Prioritize manual input.
The maximum cutting strength is determined by the rigidity of each tool. In this example, a limit value of 5 μm is used.
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit;
The intermittent cutting allowable limit specifies cutting strength, limit frequency, maximum cutting depth, and minimum cutting depth in consideration of safety when using a tool, and is input by experience values. In this example, cutting strength: 666.6 N, limit frequency: 80 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 1.2 mm, maximum feed: 0.25 mm are input.
Side rake angle of secondary cutting edge; γf κ'1: -5 degrees, γf κ'2: skip, γf κ'3: skip
Sub-blade back rake: γp κ′1: −5 degrees, γp κ′2: skip, γpκ′3: skip Tool material Enter the JIS, ISO, or manufacturer standard code along with the standard abbreviation for the tool material. In this example, JISP 20 is input.
The tool material has a conversion table, has a method that can convert from ISO code to manufacturer code, and from manufacturer code to ISO code, and adopted a method that complements the inconsistency of codes when reading various file data. Examples of the tool material conversion table are shown in FIGS. 125 to 12727.
The input tool material gives the degree of freedom of creation of the tool file by using a method that can be read as the tool material of the cutting condition file by the file even if the symbol of each manufacturer is used. Hereinafter, the same processing is performed for the tool material.
Roughing tool / finishing tool classification (R / F);
The roughing tool and finishing tool can be identified by the throwaway tip symbol in the case of a throw-away tool, but not in the case of brazing or solid.
R for roughing tools and F for finishing tools. In this example, R is input.
Specifications of groove tools;
Groove tool width: skip, tool machining depth: skip The machine identification number is linked to the tool identification number and is registered, so the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
With the above input, the input of the tool identification number: 1 was completed.
Similarly, tool identification numbers: 2 and 3 in the sequences 1001 and 1002 in FIG. 78 are input.

Next, input of the groove tool having the tool identification number: 4 will be described.
Sequence: 1003,
Tool identification number: 4,
Shank identification number: JIS43-4
Chip identification number: JIS4194-08-04
Breaker Specifications; Skip Cutting Edge (L / R): R
Main cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge angle κ: + 90 °, clearance angle α0: 6 °, side rake angle γf: 0 °, back rake γp: 6 °,
Nose radius: 0.4mm,
Specifications of secondary cutting edge (1);
Secondary cutting edge angle κ′1: −1 degree, clearance angle ακ′1: 1 degree,
Specifications of secondary cutting edge (2);
Secondary cutting edge angle κ′2: +1 degree, clearance angle ακ′2: 1 degree,
Specifications of minor cutting edge (3); skip,
The size of the shank;
□ / ○: 1, diameter / width: 19 mm, height: 25 mm,
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 1
Reference edge point;
X: 110 mm, Z: 0,
Projection amount from the tool holder;
X: 30 mm, Z: 0,
Projection angle from tool holder: 0 degrees Tool holder mounting angle: 0 degrees Tool rigidity;
X: 0.002 μm / N, Z: 0.168 μm / N,
Tip clamp: B,
Cutting limit; skip,
Feed limit; maximum value: 0.18 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 714.3N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit;
Cutting strength: 285.7 N, limit frequency: 40 Hz, maximum depth of cut: skip, maximum feed: 0.07 mm / rev
Side rake angle of secondary cutting edge;
γf κ'1: 0, γf κ'2: 0, γf κ'3: skip,
Sub-blade back rake;
γp κ′1: 0, γp κ′2: 0, γp κ′3: skip,
Tool material: JISP20,
Roughing tool / Finishing tool classification (R / F): F
Specifications of groove tools;
Groove tool width: 5.015 mm, tool depth: 20 mm
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
Thus, the input of the groove tool having the tool identification number: 4 is completed.

Next, input of the screw tool having the tool identification number: 5 will be described.
Sequence: 1004
Tool identification number: 5
Shank identification number: JIS49-4
Chip identification number: JIS4104-05-04
Breaker specifications; skip,
Cutting edge (L / R): R
Main cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge angle κ: −30 degrees, clearance angle α0: 6 degrees, side rake angle γf: 0 degrees,
Back rake γp: 6 degrees
Nose radius: 0.2mm
Specifications of secondary cutting edge (1);
Secondary cutting edge angle κ'1: +30 degrees, clearance angle ακ'1: 6 degrees,
Specifications of secondary cutting edge (2); skip,
Specifications of minor cutting edge (3); skip,
Shank size: □ / ○: 1, diameter / width: 25 mm, height: 25 mm,
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification, XT / ZT: 1,
Reference edge point; X: +123 mm, Z: -4.5 mm,
Projection amount from tool holder; X: 43 mm, Z: 0 mm,
Projection angle from tool holder: 0 degree,
Tool holder mounting angle: 0 degree,
Tool rigidity; X: 0.004 μm / N, Z: 0.004 μm / N,
Tip clamp: B,
Cutting limit: Maximum value: 1 mm, Minimum value: 0.01 mm,
Feed limit; maximum value: 9 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 1250N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit: Cutting strength: 500 N, limit frequency: 40 Hz,
Maximum depth of cut: 0.3 mm, Minimum depth of cut: 0.15 mm,
Side rake angle of secondary cutting edge; γf κ′1: 0 degree, γf κ′2: skip, γf κ′3: skip,
Sub-blade back rake; γp κ′1: 0 degree, γp κ′2: skip, γp κ′3: skip,
Tool material: JISP20
Roughing tool / Finishing tool classification (R / F): F
Specifications of groove tools;
Groove tool width: 9 mm, tool machining depth: 16 mm
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the screw tool having the tool identification number: 5.

Next, input of the screw tool having the tool identification number: 6 will be described.
Sequence: 1005
Tool identification number: 6
Shank identification number: JIS50-4
In the following, this tool is input in accordance with the input of the screw tool having the tool identification number: 5, but the description is omitted because it is the same except for the edge of the cutting edge: L.
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the screw tool having the tool identification number: 6.

Next, input assuming an inner diameter tool having a tool identification number of 7 will be described.
Sequence: 1006
Tool identification number: 7
Shank identification number: JIS48-S
Chip identification number: JIS B4104-03-01
Breaker specifications: Breaker width (cutting edge): 1.5 mm, Breaker width (cutting edge): 1.5 mm, Breaker height (cutting edge): 0.5 mm, Breaker height (cutting edge): 0 .5mm, Breaker angle: 0 degree Cutting edge (L / R): L,
Main cutting edge specifications: Cutting edge angle κ: 273 degrees, clearance angle α0: 6 degrees, side rake angle γf: 3 degrees, back rake γp: 0 degrees,
Nose radius: 0.4mm,
Sub cutting edge (1) Specifications; Sub cutting edge angle κ'1: -3 degrees, clearance angle α κ'1: 6 degrees Specifications of sub cutting edge (2); Skip,
Specifications of minor cutting edge (3); skip,
Shank size; □ / ○: 2, diameter / width: 9 mm, height: skip,
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Reference edge point; X: -20 mm, Z: 55 mm,
Projection amount from tool holder: X0mm, Z: 55mm,
Projection amount from tool holder: 0 degree,
Tool holder mounting angle: 0 degrees Tool rigidity; X: 0.094 μm / N, Z: 0.094 μm / N
Tip clamp: B
Cutting limit; maximum value: 0.5 mm, minimum value: 0.1 mm,
Feed limit; maximum value: 0.15 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 55N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit: Cutting strength: 22 N, limit frequency: 20 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 0.2, minimum depth of cut: 0.05,
Side rake angle of secondary cutting edge; skip,
Sub-blade back rake; skip,
Tool material: JISP10,
Roughing tool / Finishing tool classification (R / F): F
Specifications of groove tool; skip,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
Thus, the input of the inner diameter tool having the tool identification number: 7 is completed.

Next, input of an inner diameter groove tool having a tool identification number: 8 will be described.
Sequence: 1007
Tool identification number: 8
Shank identification number: JIS52-S
Chip identification number: JIS B4104-08-07
Breaker specifications; skip,
Cutting edge (L / R): L,
Specifications of main cutting edge: Cutting edge angle κ: 0 degree, clearance angle α0: 6 degree, side rake angle γf: 0 degree, back rake γp: 6 degree,
Nose radius: 0.4mm,
Specifications of minor cutting edge (1); minor cutting edge angle κ′1: +273 degrees, clearance angle ακ′1: 6 degrees,
Specifications of minor cutting edge (2); minor cutting edge angle κ′2: +273 degrees, clearance angle ακ′2: 6 degrees,
Specifications of secondary cutting edge (3); skip shank size; □ / ○: 2, diameter / width: 13 mm, height: skip,
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Reference edge point, X: -20 mm, Z: 45 mm,
Projection amount from tool holder; X: 0 mm, Z: 45 mm,
Projection angle 0 degrees from the tool holder,
Tool holder mounting angle: 0 degrees Tool rigidity; X: 0.022 μm / N, Z: 0.022 μm / N,
Tip clamp: B,
Cutting limit: Since it is a groove tool, the cutting depth is skipped.
Feed limit; maximum value: 0.15 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 227N,
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit; Cutting strength: 91 N, Limit frequency: 20 Hz, Maximum depth of cut: Skip, Minimum depth of cut: Skip,
Side rake angle of secondary cutting edge; skip,
Sub-blade back rake; skip,
Tool material: JISP10,
Roughing tool / finishing tool classification (R / F): F
Specifications of groove tools;
Groove tool width: 5 mm, tool depth: 5.5 mm,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
Thus, the input of the inner diameter tool having the tool identification number: 8 was completed.

82 to 85 are examples of input of the rotary tool.
82 to 85,
Tool identification number: 9 is an input example of a drill. In this regard, differences from the stationary tool will be described.
Sequence: 1008
Tool identification number: 9
Shank identification number: DMT2, (first symbol: D represents a drill, MT2 below the second symbol represents the second drill shank of Morse taper)
Insert identification number: Skip Tool diameter specifications;
The tool diameter specification consists of the tool diameter, tolerance symbol, upper dimensional difference, and lower dimensional difference. You can enter the tool diameter, tool diameter tolerance symbol, upper and lower dimensional differences. .
If only the tolerance symbol is entered, it is not necessary to enter the dimensional difference above, below or below the tolerance. When a tool is read and used after the dimension file is registered, the tool diameter and tolerance symbol are used as keywords as in the case of figure input, and the lower dimension difference is read or calculated using the read data. This is because this system possesses functions that complement the system.
In this example, tool diameter: 19 mm, tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: skip, and lower dimensional difference: skip are input.
Specification of the tool width; since it is a drill, there is no need to input, so skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 145mm,
Length under neck: 165mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
The specifications of the cutting edge are provided with a format that can input up to two-stage shapes. Cutting edge (1), taper / angle classification; taper is 1, and angle is 2.
Type of taper / angle; enter standard symbol for reference.
For example, Morse taper 2 is like MT2. Taper / angle size,
Cutting edge diameter, length of cutting edge diameter,
Cutting edge (2), taper / angle classification,
Taper / angle type, taper / angle size,
It consists of
The input of this example is the cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2 (angle), taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 118 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 19 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 145mm,
Cutting edge (2); taper / angle classification: skip, type of taper / angle: skip, taper / angle size: skip,
Number of teeth: Since this is a standard two-flute drill, enter 2 in this example.
Rotation direction: Enter R for right rotation and L for left rotation. In this example, right is R.
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: +165 mm,
Tool rigidity; X direction: 0.002 μm / N,
Z direction: skip,
The rigidity of the drill in the Z direction can be calculated using the fixed column formula or the finite element method, but it is difficult to make the current tool conditions constant by combining the rigidity with the cutting ability. There is sex. Therefore, it is excluded.
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; since it is a drill, there is no input, so skip,
Feed limit;
Class: Enter the mm / min or mm / rev class of the feed limit. In this example, 1, the maximum value: 0.5 mm / rev, the minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 2500N
Intermittent cutting tolerance (1);
Cutting strength: 1000 N, limit frequency: 60 Hz, maximum depth of cut: skip,
Maximum feed: 0.05mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a drill, skipping,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a drill, so skip,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): R,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
Thus, the input of the drill with the tool identification number: 9 is completed.

Next, input of a center hole drill with a tool identification number: 10 will be described.
Sequence: 1009,
Tool identification number: 10,
Shank identification number: DA2-JISB4304, where the first symbol is a drill and A2 is a center hole drill A2 of JISB4304.
Chip identification number: skip,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 5 mm, tolerance symbol: h9, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.030 (above, the lower dimensional difference indicates a complementary result)
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 3mm,
Length under neck: 65mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1), taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 118 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 2 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 3 mm,
Cutting edge (2), taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 60 degrees,
Number of blades: 2
Rotation direction: R (right rotation)
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2 (ZT),
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: +65 mm,
Tool rigidity: X direction: Skip, Z direction: Skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit: Since it is a center hole drill, there is no input, so skip,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.08 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 250N
Intermittent cutting allowable limit (1); Cutting strength: 100 N, limit frequency: 40 Hz, maximum depth of cut: skip, maximum feed: 0.03 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a center hole drill, skipping
Gear processing tool specifications; this example is a center hole drill, so skip
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the center hole drill with the tool identification number: 10.

Subsequently, the center hole drill with the tool identification number: 11 is input in accordance with the A2 center hole drill with the tool identification number: 10 in the sequence 1009.
Sequence: 1010,
Tool identification number: 11,
Shank identification number: DB4-JIS4304, where the first symbol is a drill and B4 is a center hole drill B4 of JISB430.
Chip identification number: skip,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 8.5 mm, tolerance symbol: h9, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.043, (above, the lower dimensional difference indicates a complementary result) The same shall apply hereinafter.)
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 6mm,
Neck length: 15mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1), taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 118 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 4 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 6 mm,
Cutting edge (2), taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 60 degrees,
Number of blades: 2
Rotation direction: R (right rotation)
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2 (ZT),
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: +15 mm,
Tool rigidity: X direction: Skip, Z direction: Skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit: Since it is a center hole drill, there is no input, so skip,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.15 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 750N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: 300 N, limit frequency: 50 Hz, maximum depth of cut: skip, maximum feed: 0.05 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a drill, skipping,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a drill, so skip,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
Thus, the input of the center hole drill with the tool identification number: 11 is completed.
With this B4, the center hole shape file is read out, and the specifications, chamfering diameter, and chamfering depth of the shape B can be obtained from the nominal diameter d: 4 mm.

Next, input of a space drill with a tool identification number: 12 will be described.
Sequence: 1011
Tool identification number: 12,
Shank identification number: DMT2
Chip identification number: skip,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 19 mm, tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: skip, lower dimensional difference: skip,
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 140 mm,
Length under neck: 160mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1), taper / angle classification: 2, type of taper / angle: skip, taper / angle size: 180 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 19 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 140 mm,
Cutting edge (2), taper / angle classification: skip, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: skip,
Number of blades: 2
Rotation direction: R (right rotation)
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: 140 mm,
Tool rigidity; X direction: 0.002 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; skipping because there is no input because it is a space drill,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.5 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 2500N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: 1000 N, Limit frequency: 60 Hz, Maximum depth of cut: Skip,
Maximum feed: 0.15 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a space drill, skipping,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a space drill, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): R,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the space drill with the tool identification number: 12.

Next, input of a drill with a tool identification number: 13 will be described.
Sequence: 1012,
Tool identification number: 13,
Shank identification number: D,
Insert identification number: Skip Specification of tool diameter; Tool diameter: 4.8 mm, Cross symbol: Skip, Upper dimension difference: Skip, Lower dimension difference: Skip,
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 59mm,
Neck length: 59mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 118 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 4.8 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 59 mm,
Cutting edge (2), taper / angle classification: skip, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: skip,
Number of teeth: 2 Rotation direction: R (Right rotation)
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: 59 mm,
Tool rigidity: X direction: 25.5 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; since it is a drill, there is no input, so skip,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.15 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 750N,
Intermittent cut tolerance limit (1) Cutting strength: 250 N, limit frequency: 50 Hz, maximum depth of cut: skip, maximum feed: 0.03 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a drill, skipping,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a drill, so skip,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): R,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the drill with the tool identification number: 13.

Next, input of a reamer with a tool identification number: 14 will be described.
Sequence: 1013,
Tool identification number: 14,
Shank identification number: R,
Chip identification number: skip,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 5 mm, cross symbol: m5, upper dimensional difference: +0.009, lower dimensional difference: +0.004,
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 23 mm,
Neck length: 52mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 90 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 5 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 21 mm,
Cutting edge (2); taper / angle classification: skip, type of taper / angle: skip, taper / angle size: skip,
Number of teeth: 6 Rotation direction: R (Right rotation)
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: +52 mm,
Tool rigidity: X direction: 47.73 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; because it is a reamer, there is no input, so skip,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 1.5 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.5 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 750N,
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: 300 N, limit frequency: 50 Hz, maximum depth of cut: skip, maximum feed: 0.5 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is reamer, skip
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a reamer, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the reamer having the tool identification number: 14.

Next, input of a drill with a tool identification number: 15 will be described.
Sequence: 1014
Tool identification number: 15,
Shank identification number: D,
Chip identification number: skip,
Tool diameter specifications; tool diameter: 4.2 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip,
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 54 mm,
Length under neck: 54mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 118 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 4.2 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 54 mm,
Cutting edge (2); taper / angle classification: skip, type of taper / angle: skip, taper / angle size: skip,
Number of blades: 2
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: +54 mm,
Tool rigidity; X direction: 33.395 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; since it is a drill, there is no input, so skip,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 0.15 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 650N,
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: 250 N, limit frequency: 45 Hz, maximum depth of cut: skip, maximum feed: 0.03 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a drill, skipping,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a drill, so skip,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): R,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the drill with the tool identification number: 15.

Next, input of a tap with a tool identification number: 16 will be described.
Sequence: 1015,
Tool identification number: 16,
Shank identification number: T,
Chip identification number: skip,
Specification of tool diameter; tool diameter: 5 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip,
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 16,
Neck length: 25,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 90 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 5 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 14 mm,
Cutting edge (2); skip,
Number of teeth: 3 Rotation direction: R (Right rotation)
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: +25 mm,
Tool rigidity: Since it is a tap, the feed is automatically determined, so there is no need for input.
X direction: Skip, Z direction: Skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cut limit; since it is a tap, there is no input, so skip,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 0.8 mm / rev, Minimum value: 0.8 mm / rev, (Since it is a tap, there is no maximum or minimum, and the same feed as the pitch is input to both.)
Maximum cutting strength: Since it is a tap, the torsional rigidity may be input or omitted.
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: Skip, limit frequency: Skip, maximum depth of cut: Skip, maximum feed: 0.8 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; Thread classification: Depending on thread type, metric thread: M, Whitworth thread: W, unified thread: UNC, UNF, pipe parallel thread: G, pipe taper thread: R, Rc, Rp Enter abbreviations such as. The modal is M. Since this example is a metric thread: Enter M.
Pitch: 0.8 mm, right / left thread classification: R (right thread), accuracy: skip,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a tap, so skip,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the tap with the tool identification number: 16.

Next, input of the cemented carbide blade end mill with the tool identification number 17 will be described.
Sequence: 1016,
Tool identification number: 17,
Shank identification number: FBED2160S
Chip identification number: skip,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 16 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.050,
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 25 mm,
Neck length: 35mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 180 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 16 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 25 mm,
Cutting edge (2); taper / angle classification: skip, type of taper / angle: skip, taper / angle size: skip,
Number of blades: 2
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 1,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 35 mm, Z: 0,
Tool rigidity: X direction: skip, Z direction: 0.024 μm / N,
Tip clamping method: B,
Cutting limit; maximum value: 16 mm, minimum value: 0.05 mm,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 0.2 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.05 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 600N
Intermittent cutting allowable limit (1); Cutting strength: 250 N, Limit frequency: 60 Hz, Maximum depth of cut: 8 mm, Maximum feed: 0.15 mm / rev,
Tool material: M20,
Threading tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Gear processing tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the cemented carbide blade end mill with the tool identification number 17.

Next, input of a cemented carbide blade end mill with a tool identification number of 18 will be described.
Sequence: 1017,
Tool identification number: 18,
Shank identification number: FSED2100S
Chip identification number: skip,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 10 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.050,
Tool width specifications; skip,
Tool cutting edge length: 20 mm,
Neck length: 24mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 180 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 10 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 20 mm,
Cutting edge (2); taper / angle classification: skip, type of taper / angle: skip, taper / angle size: skip,
Number of teeth: 2 Rotation direction: R (Right rotation)
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: +24 mm,
Tool rigidity: X direction: 0.051 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; maximum value: 10 mm, minimum value: 0.05 mm,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.1 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 300N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1): Cutting strength: 150 N, limit frequency: 60 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 4 mm, maximum feed: 0.05 mm / rev,
Tool material: M20,
Threading tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Gear processing tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
Thus, the input of the cemented carbide blade end mill with the tool identification number: 18 is completed.

Next, the input of the side cutter with the tool identification number: 19 will be described.
Sequence: 1018,
Tool identification number: 19,
Shank identification number: S,
Chip identification number: Skip for solid high speed steel,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 45 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.050,
Tool width specifications; tool width: 8 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: +0.09, lower dimensional difference: 0.0,
Tool cutting edge length: Skip because it is a side cutter,
Neck length: skip because it is a side cutter
Cutting edge specifications; skipped because it is a side cutter,
Number of blades: 18
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 1 (XT),
Cutting edge reference point; X: +50 mm, Z: 0,
Tool rigidity: X direction: 0.006 μm / N, Z direction: 0.006 μm / N,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; maximum value: 8.5 mm, minimum value: 0.02 mm,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 0.36 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.18 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 9400N,
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: 940 N, Limit frequency: 17 Hz, Maximum depth of cut: 2.5 mm, Maximum feed: 0.18 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH55,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a side cutter, skipping,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a side cutter, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
The input of the side cutter with the tool identification number: 19 is thus completed.

Next, input of an end mill having a tool identification number of 20 will be described.
Sequence: 1019,
Tool identification number: 20,
Shank identification number: F,
Chip identification number: skipped because it is solid,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 8 mm, cross symbol: h10, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.058,
Specification of tool width; skipped because it is an end mill,
Tool cutting edge length: 11 mm,
Length under neck: 11mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 180 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 8 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 11 mm,
Cutting edge (2); skip,
Number of blades: 2,
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: 11 mm,
Tool rigidity; X direction: 0.022 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; maximum value: 8 mm, minimum value: 0.05 mm,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.03 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 220N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1): Cutting strength: 110 N, limit frequency: 60 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 2.5 mm, maximum feed: 0.01 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Gear processing tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the end mill with the tool identification number: 20.

Next, input of an end mill having a tool identification number: 21 will be described.
Sequence: 1020,
Tool identification number: 21,
Shank identification number: F,
Chip identification number: skipped because it is solid,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 6 mm, cross symbol: h10, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.048,
Specification of tool width; skipped because it is an end mill, length of tool cutting edge: 8mm,
Length under neck: 8mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 180 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 6 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 8 mm,
Cutting edge (2); skip,
Number of blades: 2,
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 1,
Cutting edge reference point; X: +8 mm, Z: 0,
Tool rigidity; X direction: 0.027 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; maximum value: 6 mm, minimum value: 0.05 mm,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.015 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 185N,
Intermittent cutting tolerance (1); Cutting strength: 90 N, Limit frequency: 60 Hz, Maximum depth of cut: 2. mm, maximum feed: 0.01 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Gear processing tool specifications; this example is an end mill, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XLD001 is input.
This completes the input of the end mill with the tool identification number: 21.

Next, input of the hob with the tool identification number: 22 will be described.
Sequence: 1021,
Tool identification number: 22,
Shank identification number: H,
Chip identification number: skipped because it is solid,
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 65 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip,
Tool width specifications; tool width: 65 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip,
Tool cutting edge length: skip,
Neck length: skip,
Cutting edge specifications: Skip Number of blades: 10
Rotation direction: R (right rotation)
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 1
Cutting edge reference point; X: 3.25 mm, Z: 0,
Tool rigidity: X direction: 0.008 μm / N, Z direction: 0.008 μm / N,
Tip clamping method: L,
Cutting limit; maximum value: 5.625 mm, minimum value: 0.01 mm,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1
Maximum value: 0.05 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.05 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 625N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1): Cutting strength: 300 N, limit frequency: 60 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 0.8 mm, maximum feed: 0.1 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH55,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a hob, skipping,
Specifications of gear cutting tool; Module / diametral pitch classification: M for a module and D for a diametral pitch. Since this example is a module, M is input.
M / DP size: 2.5, pressure angle: 20 degrees, tooth end height: 3.125 mm, tooth root length: 3.125 mm,
Non-topping: 1 / Semi-topping: 2 / Topping: 3 Category: Since this example is non-topping, enter “1”.
Tooth roundness: 0.985mm,
Accuracy: JIS, ISO, grade entry: JIS3,
Dislocation amount: 0,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XHB001 is input.
This completes the input of the hob with the tool identification number 22.

Next, input of the grinding wheel for inner diameter grinding with a tool identification number: 23 will be described.
Sequence: 1022,
Tool identification number: 23,
Shank identification number: GW176-S,
Chip identification number: WA180J6V
Specification of tool diameter; tool diameter: 10 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip,
Specification of the tool width; skipping because it is a grindstone for internal grinding
Tool cutting edge length: 13 mm,
Neck length: 20mm,
Cutting edge specifications;
Cutting edge (1); taper / angle classification: 2, taper / angle type: skip, taper / angle size: 180 degrees, cutting edge diameter: 10 mm, cutting edge diameter length: 13 mm,
Cutting edge (2); skip,
Number of blades: skipped because it is a cylindrical grindstone
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2,
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: 20 mm,
Tool rigidity; X direction: 0.204 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: B,
Cutting limit: Since the cutting of the grinding wheel for inner diameter grinding is different from that of milling cutters, it is used in place of the applied width of the grinding wheel, and the maximum value: 10 mm and the minimum value: 3 mm are input.
Feed limit; Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 0.001 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.001 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 250N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: 125 N, limit frequency: 60 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 3 mm, maximum feed: 0.0005 mm / rev,
Tool material: WA,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a grinding wheel for internal grinding, skipping
Gear processing tool specifications; this example is a grinding wheel for internal grinding, skipping
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XGI001 is input.
The input of the grinding wheel for inner diameter grinding with the tool identification number: 23 is thus completed.

Next, input of the grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding with a tool identification number: 24 will be described.
Sequence: 1023,
Tool identification number: 24,
Shank identification number: G1-A,
Chip identification number: WA46K7V
Tool diameter specifications: Tool diameter: 455 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip,
Specification of tool width; skipping because it is a grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding
Tool cutting edge length: 75mm,
Neck length: Skip because it is a grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding
Cutting edge specifications; skipping because it is a grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding
Number of blades: Skip because it is a cylindrical grindstone,
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 2
Cutting edge reference point; X: 0, Z: 75 mm,
Tool rigidity; X direction: 0.001 μm / N, Z direction: skip,
Tip clamping method: B,
Cutting limit: Since the cutting of the grinding wheel for outside diameter grinding is different from milling cutters, it is used in place of the grindstone application width, and the maximum value: 75 mm and the minimum value: 5 mm are input.
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 0.003 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.001 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: 5000N
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1); Cutting strength: 2000 N, limit frequency: 30 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 75 mm, maximum feed: 0.001 mm / rev,
Tool material: WA,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding.
Gear processing tool specifications; this example is a grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding.
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): F,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, XGE001 is input.
This completes the input of the outer diameter grinding wheel with the tool identification number: 24.
Thus, the tool input in this example is completed.

Next, input of a side cutter (circular saw) having a tool identification number of 25 will be described.
Sequence: 1024
Tool identification number: 25,
Shank identification number: S,
Chip identification number: Skip for solid high speed steel,
Tool diameter specifications; tool diameter: 315 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0, lower dimensional difference: -0.1,
Tool width specifications; tool width: 5 mm, cross symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: +0.09, lower dimensional difference: 0.0,
Tool cutting edge length: Skip because it is a side cutter,
Neck length: skip because it is a side cutter
Cutting edge specifications; skipped because it is a side cutter,
Number of blades: 40,
Rotation direction: R (right rotation),
X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT): 1 (XT),
Cutting edge reference point; X: +157.5 mm, Z: 0,
Tool rigidity: X direction: μm / N, Z direction: μm / N,
Tip clamping method: B,
Cutting limit; maximum value: mm, minimum value: mm,
Feed limit;
Category: Feed limit, mm / min or mm / rev category: 1,
Maximum value: 5 mm / rev, minimum value: 0.4 mm / rev,
Maximum cutting strength: N,
Intermittent cutting tolerance limit (1): Cutting strength: 5000 N, limit frequency: 30 Hz, maximum depth of cut: 5 mm, maximum feed: 0.4 mm / rev,
Tool material: SKH51,
Threading tool specifications; this example is a side cutter, skipping,
Gear cutting tool specifications; this example is a side cutter, skipping,
Roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F): R,
As the machine identification number, since the tool identification number and the machine identification number are registered in a linked manner, the identification number of the machine tool to be used is entered.
In this example, CSW001 is input.
This completes the input of the side cutter (circular saw) with the tool identification number: 25.

The machine tool file is a file in which various data relating to the specifications and performance of the machine tool are filed in the format shown in FIGS.
58 to 76 are simplified input examples assuming the work figure of this example for the sake of explanation. This is not an exhaustive list of all machine tool files in the virtual factory.

Prior to the description of the input example, a general input method will be described as follows.
The machine tool sequence starts from 2000 in this example.
The machining function uses a machine identification number, for example, an identification symbol of a plant number, but since this division is not subdivided, it is configured by adding a subdivision division to the processing method symbol (see FIG. 118).
For example, in turning, bar machine machining process: LB, single center hole support machining process: LCF, both center hole support machining process: LC, special both center hole support machining process: LCS, chucking turning process: LF, and outside Diameter grinding process: GE, inner diameter grinding process: GI, etc.
For the machine identification number, a plant number is used so as not to be confused.
The absolute value / increment value category (Abs / Inc) is a coordinate setting category, which is switched by G code (G90; absolute value, G91; increment value): 1, increment value: 2, absolute value: 3, Sort by
The minimum movement set value is input in units of μm and 0.001 deg for each control axis.
The maximum movement amount is input in units of mm and deg for each system and each control axis.
The fixed origin is input in units of mm and deg for each system and each control axis.
For the processable dimensions, a maximum value and a minimum value are input in mm for each system and each control axis.
For the distance between centers, enter the maximum and minimum values in mm only for machine tools capable of both center operations.
Enter the tilt limit to display the ability to tilt the hole.
For the machining limit of the tilted hole in the X direction, the range of tilt angles is input in units of deg for each of Z, Y, (A).
As the machining limit of the tilt hole in the Z direction, the range of the tilt angle is input in units of deg for each of X, Y, and C.
As the processing limit of the tilt hole in the Y direction, the range of tilt angles is input in units of deg for each of Z, X, and (B).
For the maximum allowable processing weight, the maximum material weight that can be loaded on the machine tool is input in N units. As the spindle capacity (1), the first workpiece spindle: W and the tool spindle: T are input, and the respective capacities are input.
In the first region, the torque constant: T and the output constant: W are input, and the rotation speed range (minimum rotation speed and maximum rotation speed) and output (kW) are input.
In the second region, the torque constant: T and the output constant: W are input, and the rotation speed range (minimum rotation speed and maximum rotation speed) and output (kW) are input.
As the spindle capacity (2), the second workpiece spindle: W and the tool spindle: T are input, and the respective capacities are input.
In the first region, the torque constant: T and the output constant: W are input, and the rotation speed range (minimum rotation speed and maximum rotation speed) and output (kW) are input.
In the second region, the torque constant: T and the output constant: W are input, and the rotation speed range (minimum rotation speed and maximum rotation speed) and output (kW) are input.
As the mechanical efficiency, the power efficiency of the first main shaft (1) and the second main shaft (2) is input.
As the main shaft rigidity of the first main shaft (1), the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the axial direction and the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the radial direction are input.
As the main shaft rigidity of the second main shaft (2), the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the axial direction and the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the radial direction are input.
For the tailstock rigidity of the first tailstock (1), input the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the axial direction and the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the radial direction. To do.
For the tailstock rigidity of the second tailstock (2), enter the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the axial direction, and the maximum allowable load (N) and rigidity (μm / N) in the radial direction. To do.
For the maximum permissible depth of cut x feed, the first spindle (1) cut (mm) and feed per revolution (mm / rev), the second spindle (2) cut (mm) and feed per revolution (mm / rev) are input. To do.
Rotational speed specifications of the first spindle (1);
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the first spindle (1) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
The presence / absence of gear shift is classified and input as follows: None: 1, Present: 2.
The gear shift automatic / manual classification is classified into automatic: 1 and manual: 2 and input.
The gear shift range is divided into U, M, L, and S, and the maximum rotation speed and the minimum rotation speed are input.
The rotation speed specification of the second spindle (2) is input according to the first spindle.
As the first rapid traverse rate (1), the maximum rapid traverse rate (m / min, × 10 3 deg / min) of each axis of the first system is input.
As the second fast-forwarding speed (2), the maximum fast-forwarding speed (m / min, × 10 3 deg / min) of each axis of the second system is input.
The first minimum cutting feed rate (1) and the second minimum cutting feed rate (2) are the minimum cutting feed rates (unit: m / min or × 10 3 deg / min) of each axis of the first and second systems. input.
As the first maximum cutting feed rate (1) and the second maximum cutting feed rate (2), the maximum cutting feed rate (m / min or × 10 3 deg / min) of each axis of the first and second systems is input. .
The first feed power / efficiency (1) is input with feed power: kW and efficiency: η for each axis of the first system.
The second feed power / efficiency (2) is inputted with feed power: kW and efficiency: η of each axis of the second system.
In the first feed unit category (1), the feed unit of each axis of the first system; mm / rev: 1 or mm / min: 2 is input.
In the second feed unit category (2), the feed unit of each axis of the first system; mm / rev: 1 or mm / min: 2 is input.
In the first tool change (1), a pot number: P or a tool number change: N classification and the number of tools in the first system tool calling method are input.
In the second tool change (2), a pot number: P or a tool number change: N classification and the number of tools in the second system tool calling method are input.
For machine accuracy capability, input the capability possessed by the machine tool for cross width, finish symbol, finish surface roughness, straightness, flatness, roundness, cylindricity, parallelism, perpendicularity, coaxiality, runout, etc. To do. The input unit is mm, but the finished surface roughness is input in μm.
Machine accuracy special ability (with conditions) is the machine tool's possession of conditional ability, cross width (conditions: cutting, feed, tool nose radius), finish symbol (conditions: cutting, feed, tool nose radius), finish surface roughness (Conditions: cutting, feed, tool nose radius), shape / position accuracy symbol and capability value (conditions: cutting, feed, tool nose radius, rotation speed, tool diameter) are entered.
As the finishing allowance capacity classification, a random finishing allowance: 1 or a constant finishing allowance: 2, and a system classification are input.
As the operation reference time of the machine tool, a fixture replacement time, a workpiece coordinate setting time, a tool preparation time, a workpiece replacement time, a tool replacement time, and a chip replacement time are input in units of hours (Hr).
Master for grinding process machine; special grinding master inputs the grinding wheel width and minimum processing grinding width in units of mm in the categories of fixed-size grinding, indirect fixed-size grinding, and stop grinding.
Master for drill / tap process machine; Drill / tap special master inputs maximum drill diameter and maximum tap diameter.
Master for milling process machines; Milling special master inputs maximum diameter end mill, maximum diameter face mill, maximum diameter side cutter in mm.
Enter the maximum diameter and maximum length, which are allowable dimensions of the installation tool, in mm.

The file relating to the operation time of the machine tool is shown in the machine tool operation reference time and the machine tool operation reference time in the machine tool file. The construction of the machine tool operation reference time is as follows.
Spindle start / stop time (1, 2), rapid feed positioning time (1; X, Y, Z, 2; X, Y, Z), tailstock operation time (forward; 1, 2, backward; 1, 2, )) Coolant start / stop time (1, 2). These are entered in units of 0.00001Hr. Here, 1, 2 indicate a first main shaft and a second main shaft. The same applies hereinafter.

An input example from FIG. 58 will be described.
As described above, the machine tool file starts from the sequence 2000.
First, an example of input of a cutting function file, sequence: 2000 will be described.
Processing function: SW (cutting machine)
Machine identification number: CSW001 (circular saw cutting machine)
Absolute value / increment value classification (Abs / Inc): 3 (absolute value),
Minimum movement set value: X: 1 μm, Y: Skip (If there are no input items, nothing is input to the file as in the case of tool file input. In the description, skip is used), Z: 1 μm, A: Skip, B: Skip, C: Skip,
Maximum travel distance: X: 200 mm, Y: 150 mm, Z: 1500 mm, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip,
Fixed origin: X: -50 mm, Y: +150 mm, Z: 0, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip,
Processable dimensions: MaxX: 150 mm, MinX: 10 mm, MaxY: 150 mm, MinY: 0 mm, MaxZ: 1500 mm, MinZ: 10 mm, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip,
Center distance; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in X direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Z direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Y direction; skip,
Maximum allowable processing weight: 7740N
Spindle capacity (1); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle): T,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the first region: T,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 30 rev / mm,
Maximum rotational speed: 500 rev / mm, output: 22.5 kW
2nd area; skip spindle capacity (2); skip,
Mechanical efficiency; (1): 0.85, (2): skip,
Spindle rigidity (1); Axial direction: Skip,
Radial direction: Maximum allowable load: 8000N,
Rigidity: 0.001 μm / N
Spindle rigidity (2); skip,
Tailstock rigidity (1); skip, tailstock rigidity (2); skip,
Maximum allowable depth of cut x feed: Spindle (1), width of cut: 8 mm, feed per revolution: 5 mm,
Spindle (2); skip,
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the first spindle (1) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 500 rev / mm, minimum rotation speed: 30 rev / mm
Presence / absence of gear shift: 1, Automatic / manual classification of gear shift: Skip,
U range: Skip, M range: Skip, L range: Skip,
S range: skip,
Spindle (2) Rotation speed; skip,
Rapid feed rate (1); X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 20 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip,
Fast forward speed (2); skip,
Minimum cutting feed rate (1); X: 0.05 m / min, Y: 0.05 m / min, Z: 0.05 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip,
Minimum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Maximum cutting feed rate (1); X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 6 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip,
Maximum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Feed power / efficiency (1): X: 2 kW, 0.95 η, Y: skip, Z: 5 kW, 0.95 η, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip,
Feed power / efficiency (2); Skip Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min (1); X: 2, Y: 2, Z: 2,
A: Skip, B: Skip, C: Skip,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min classification (2); skip,
Tool change (1); pot number / tool number change classification: N, number of tools: 1,
Tool change (2); skip,
Machine accuracy capability; intersection width: 0.05 mm, finishing symbol: 2 M, finished surface roughness: 25 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: 0.05 mm, roundness: skip, cylindricity: skip, parallelism: 0 .05mm, perpendicularity: skip, coaxiality: skip, runout: skip,
Machine precision special ability (with conditions); Skip Finishing allowance classification: Skip,
Machine tool operation reference time; fixture change: skip, workpiece coordinate setting: 0.025 Hr, tool preparation: 0.1 Hr, workpiece change: 0.05 Hr, tool change: 0.02 Hr,
Tip change: skip,
Special grinding master; skip,
Drill / tap special master; skip,
Milling Special Master; Maximum Diameter End Mill: Skip, Maximum Diameter Front Milling: Skip, Maximum Diameter Side Cutter: 315mm,
Allowable dimensions of mounting tool; maximum diameter: 400 mm, maximum length: 15 mm,
Spindle start / stop time (1, 2): Since the saw blade is always rotated from the completion of operation preparation to the end of work to make the start / stop time zero, skip and fast feed positioning time are not affected by the machining cycle time. (1; X: 0.00006Hr, Y: 0.00006Hr, Z: 0.00006Hr, 2; skip), tailstock operation time (work clamp forward; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip, reverse; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip, coolant start / stop time (coolant is always supplied from the completion of operation to the end of work and the saw blade is cooled, so it does not affect the machining cycle time, skip)
This completes the input of the cutting machine.

Next, input the file of the compound lathe. The composite lathe has a plurality of machining functions, and there are overlapping portions when input is made for each of them.
Sequence: 2001
Processing function: L,
Machine identification number: XLD001
Absolute / incremental value classification (Abs / Inc): 1,
Minimum movement set value: X: 1 μm, Y: 1 μm, Z: 1 μm, A: 0.001 deg, B: 0.001 deg, C: 0.001 deg,
Maximum travel distance: X: 400 mm, Y: 150 mm, Z: 1500 mm, A: ± 30 deg, B: ± 30 deg, C: ± 360 deg,
Fixed origin: X: +300 mm, Y: +75 mm, Z: +1500 mm, A: 0 deg, B: 0 deg, C: 0 deg,
Processable dimensions: MaxX: 300 mm, MinX: 0, MaxY: 75 mm, MinY: 0, MaxZ: 1500 mm, MinZ: 0, MaxA: 30 deg, MinA: 0, MaxB: 30 deg, MinB: 0, MaxC: 360 deg, MinC: 0,
Distance between centers, MaxZ: 1550 mm, MinZ: 0,
The following items (the machining limit of the inclined hole in the X direction, the machining limit of the inclined hole in the Z direction, the machining limit of the inclined hole in the Y direction) are machining functions; B, D, DR, ME, T, Because it is a file concerning, skip.
Maximum allowable processing weight: 4000N
Spindle capacity (1); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): W, constant torque in the first region / constant output classification: T
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 0, maximum rotational speed: 1000 rpm, output: 15 kW
Section of constant torque / constant output in the second region: W,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 1000 rpm,
Maximum rotation speed: 6000 rpm, output: 15 kW,
Spindle capacity (2); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): T,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the first region: T,
Rotational speed range / output; Minimum rotational speed: 0, Maximum rotational speed: 1500rpm, Output: 3kW
Section of constant torque / constant output in the second region: W,
Rotational speed range / output; Minimum rotational speed: 1500rpm,
Maximum rotation speed: 10000rpm, output: 3kW,
Mechanical efficiency; (1): 0.85, (2): 0.95,
Main shaft rigidity (1); Axial direction; Maximum permissible load: 30000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N Radial direction; Maximum permissible load: 6000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N
Main shaft rigidity (2); Axial direction; Maximum allowable load: 10000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N radial direction; Maximum allowable load: 2000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N
Tailstock rigidity (1); axial direction; maximum permissible load: 15000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N radial direction; maximum permissible load: 3000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N
Tailstock rigidity (2); skip,
Maximum allowable depth of cut x feed; spindle (1); depth of cut: 7 mm,
Feed per revolution: 0.7 mm / rev; spindle (2); incision: 2 mm
Feed per rotation: 0.2 mm / rev,
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the first spindle (1) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 6000 rpm, minimum rotation speed: 0,
Gear shift: 1,
Since there is no gear shift, the following items are skipped. (Automatic / manual classification of gear shift, U range, maximum rotation speed, minimum rotation speed, M range, maximum rotation speed, minimum rotation speed, L range, maximum rotation speed, minimum rotation speed, S range, maximum rotation speed, minimum Rpm),
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the second spindle (2) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 10000 rpm, minimum rotation speed: 0,
Gear shift: 1,
Since there is no gear shift, the items up to the minimum rotation speed of the S range are skipped.
Rapid feed rate (1); X: 15 m / min, Y: 10 m / min, Z: 15 m / min,
A: 10 × 10 3 deg / min, B: 10 × 10 3 deg / min, C: 10 × 10 3 deg / min,
Fast forward speed (2); skip,
Minimum cutting feed rate (1); X: 0, Y: 0, Z: 0, A: 0, B: 0, C: 0,
Minimum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Maximum cutting feed rate (1); X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 5 m / min,
A: 5 × 10 3 deg / min, B: 5 × 10 3 deg / min, C: 5 × 10 3 deg / min,
Maximum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Feed power / efficiency (1): X: 2 kW, η: 0.95, Y: 1 kW, η: 0.95, Z: 2 kW, η: 0.95, A: 0.5 kW, η: 0.95, B: 0.5 kW, η: 0.95, C: 2 kW, η: 0.95,
Feed power / efficiency (2); skip,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min (1); X: 1, Y: 1, Z: 1, A: 2, B: 2, C: 2,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min category (2); skip tool change (1); pot number / tool number change category: N, number of tools: 64
Tool change (2); skip,
Machine accuracy capability; cross width: 0.010 mm, finish symbol: 3 L,
Finished surface roughness: 6.3 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: 0.005 mm, roundness: 0.003 mm, cylindricity: 0.010 mm, parallelism: 0.005 mm, perpendicularity: 0.003 mm, Coaxiality: 0.003 mm, runout: 0.006 mm,
Machine precision special ability (with conditions);
Intersection width: skip,
Finish symbol: 4L, depth of cut: 0.1 mm, feed: 0.05 mm / rev, tool nose radius: 0.4 mm,
Finished surface roughness: 0.8 μm, depth of cut: 0.1 mm, feed: 0.05 mm / rev,
Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm,
Symbol of shape / position accuracy: see FIG. 139 (e), capacity value: 0.003 mm, depth of cut: 0.1 mm, feed: 0.05 mm / rev, tool nose radius: 0.4 mm, rotation speed: 400 rpm,
(Tool diameter: skip)
Symbol of shape / position accuracy: skip, skip from ability value to (tool diameter),
Finishing allowance classification: 1 (Random finishing allowance),
Machine tool operation reference time; fixture change: 0.1 Hr, workpiece coordinate setting: 0.05 Hr, tool preparation: 0.2 Hr, workpiece change: 0.03 Hr, tool change: 0.0005 Hr,
Tip change: 0.005Hr,
Special grinding master; skip,
Drill / tap special master; skip milling special master; skip,
Allowable dimensions of mounting tool; maximum diameter: 80 mm, maximum length: 300 mm,
Spindle start / stop time (1: 0.0012Hr, 2: skip), fast feed positioning time (1; X: 0.00006Hr, Y: 0.00006Hr, Z: 0.00006Hr, 2; skip, A: skip, B: skip, C: skip), tailstock operation time (forward; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip, reverse; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip), coolant start / stop time (1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip),
This completes the input of the turning function file for the compound lathe.

Next, an example of processing function file input for drilling, sequence: 2002 will be described.
Sequence: 2002
Processing function: D,
Machine identification number: XLD001
Absolute / incremental value classification (Abs / Inc): 1,
Minimum movement set value: X: 1 μm, Y: 1 μm, Z: 1 μm, A: 0.001 deg, B: 0.001 deg, C: 0.001 deg,
Maximum movement amount; Sequence: Same as 2001.
Fixed origin; sequence: same as 2001.
Processable dimensions: Sequence: Same as 2001.
Center distance; sequence: same as 2001.
Machining limit for inclined holes in the X direction;
+ Z direction: 30 deg, -Z direction: 30 deg, + Y direction: 30 deg, -Y direction: 30 deg, + A direction: 30 deg, -A direction: 30 deg,
Machining limit for inclined holes in the Z direction;
+ X direction: 30 deg, -X direction: 30 deg, + Y direction: 30 deg, -Y direction: 30 deg, + C direction 360 deg, -C direction: 360 deg,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Y direction;
+ Z direction: 30 deg, -Z direction: 30 deg, + X direction: 30 deg, -X direction: 30 deg, + B direction: 30 deg, -B direction: 30 deg
Maximum allowable processing weight: Same as sequence: 2001.
Spindle capacity (1); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Spindle capacity (2); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Mechanical efficiency; sequence: same as 2001.
Spindle stiffness (1); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Spindle rigidity (2); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Tailstock stiffness (1); Sequence: same as 2001.
Tailstock rigidity (2); skip,
Maximum allowable depth of cut x feed; spindle (1); skip,
Spindle (2); incision: 2 mm,
Feed per rotation: 0.2 mm / rev,
Number of rotations of the first spindle (1); sequence: same as 2001.
Rotation speed of the second spindle (2); Sequence: same as 2001.
Rapid feed rate (1); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Fast forward speed (2); skip,
Minimum cutting feed rate (1); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Maximum cutting feed rate (1); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Minimum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Maximum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Feed power / efficiency (1); Sequence: Same as 2001.
Feed power / efficiency (2); skip,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min (1); X: 2, Y: 2, Z: 2, A: 2, B: 2, C: 2,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min classification (2); skip,
Tool change (1); Sequence: Same as 2001.
However, the number of N tools is 64 in total for all function tools.
Tool change (2); skip,
Machine accuracy capability; intersection width: 0.05 mm, finishing symbol: 1D, finished surface roughness: 100 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: skip, roundness: skip, cylindricity: skip, parallelism: skip, straight Angle: skip, coaxiality: skip, runout: skip,
Machine precision special ability (with conditions); skip,
Finishing allowance classification; skip,
Machine tool operation reference time; fixture change: 0.1 Hr, workpiece coordinate setting: 0.05 Hr, tool preparation: 0.2 Hr, workpiece change: 0.03 Hr, tool change: 0.0005 Hr,
Tip change: skip,
Special grinding master; skip,
Drill / tap special master; maximum drill diameter: 25 mm
Milling Special Master; Skip,
Allowable dimensions of mounting tool; maximum diameter: 80 mm, maximum length: 300 mm,
Spindle start / stop time (1: 0.0012Hr, 2: skip), rapid feed positioning time (1; X: 0.00006Hr, Y: 0.00006Hr, Z: 0.00006Hr, 2; skip, A: 0. 00006Hr, B: 0.00006Hr, C: 0.00006Hr), tailstock operation time (forward; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip, reverse; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip), coolant activation / Stop time (1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip),
This completes the input of the machining function file for drilling a composite lathe.

Next, an example of processing function file input for reamer hole finishing, sequence: 2003, will be described.
Sequence: 2003
Processing function: DR,
Machine identification number: XLD001
Items other than those described below are omitted because they are the same as the processing function D of the sequence 2002.
Machine accuracy capability; tolerance width: 0.005 mm, finishing symbol: 3DR, finished surface roughness: 6.3 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: skip, roundness: 0.005 mm, cylindricity: 0.010 mm, Parallelism: skip, perpendicularity: 0.003 mm, coaxiality: skip, runout: skip,
Milling special master; maximum diameter end mill: 25 mm, maximum diameter front milling: 80 mm, maximum diameter side cutter: 80 mm,
This completes the input of the machining function file for reamed hole finishing of the compound lathe.

Next, a file of milling of sequence: 2004 will be described.
Sequence: 2004
Processing function: M,
Machine identification number: XLD001
Items other than those described below are omitted because they are the same as the processing function D of the sequence 2002.
Machine accuracy capability; tolerance width: 0.020 mm, finishing symbol: 2 M, finished surface roughness: 12 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: 0.010 mm, roundness: skip, cylindricity: skip, parallelism: 0 .010 mm, perpendicularity: 0.010 mm, coaxiality: skip, runout: skip,
Milling special master; maximum diameter end mill: 25 mm, maximum diameter front milling: 80 mm, maximum diameter side cutter: 80 mm,
This completes the input of the machining function file for the milling of the composite lathe.

Next, the file of the side cutter processing of sequence: 2005 will be described.
Sequence: 2005
Processing function: MSD,
Machine identification number: XLD001
Items other than those described below are omitted because they are the same as the processing function D of the sequence 2002.
Machine accuracy capability; tolerance width: 0.015 mm, finishing symbol: 2 M, finished surface roughness: 12 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: 0.010 mm, roundness: skip, cylindricity: skip, parallelism: 0 .008 mm, perpendicularity: 0.010 mm, coaxiality: 0.008 mm, runout: skip,
Milling Special Master; Maximum Diameter End Mill: Skip, Maximum Diameter Front Milling: Skip, Maximum Diameter Side Cutter: 80mm,
This completes the input of the machining function file for the side cutter machining of the composite lathe.

Next, a tapping file of sequence: 2006 will be described.
Sequence: 2006,
Processing function: T,
Machine identification number: XLD001
The following items are the same as the processing function D of the sequence 2002, and will be omitted.
Drill / tap special master; maximum drill diameter: skip, maximum tap diameter: 25 mm,
This completes the input of the machining function file for tapping the composite lathe.

Next, the boring file of sequence: 2007 will be described.
Sequence: 2007,
Processing function: B,
Machine identification number: XLD001
Items other than those described below are omitted because they are the same as the processing function D of the sequence 2002.
Mechanical accuracy capability; tolerance width: 0.005 mm, finishing symbol: 3 L, finished surface roughness: 6.3 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: skip, roundness: 0.005 mm, cylindricity: 0.010 mm, Parallelism: skip, perpendicularity: 0.003 mm, coaxiality: skip, runout: skip,
This completes the input of the machining function file for boring of the compound lathe.

Next, the hobbing file of sequence: 2008 will be described.
Sequence: 2008,
Processing function: H,
Machine identification number: XHB001,
Absolute value / increment value classification (Abs / Inc): 3,
Minimum movement set value, X: 0.1 μm, Y: 0.1 μm, Z: 0.1 μm, A: 0.001 deg, B: 0.001 deg, C: 0.001 deg,
Maximum travel, X: 350 mm, Y: 150 mm, Z: 300 mm, A: ± 60 deg, B: skip, C: ± ∞ deg,
Fixed origin: X: +300 mm, Y: +75 mm, Z: +300, A: +60 deg, B: skip, C: 0 deg,
Processable dimensions, MaxX: 300 mm, MinX: 0, MaxY: Skip, MinY: Skip, MaxZ: 300 mm, MinZ: 0, MaxA: 60 deg, MinA: 0, MaxB: Skip, MinB: Skip, MaxC: ∞deg, MinC : 0,
Distance between centers; MaxZ: 350 mm, MinZ: 0,
Machining limit of inclined hole in X direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Z direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Y direction; skip,
Maximum allowable processing weight: 4000N
Spindle capacity (1); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): W,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the first region: T,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 0, maximum rotational speed 600 rpm, output: 7.5 kW,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the second area: skip,
Spindle capacity (2); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): T,
First torque constant / output constant division: T, rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 10 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 1000 rpm, output: 3.7 kW,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the second area: skip,
Mechanical efficiency; (1): 0.95, (2): 0.95,
Main shaft rigidity (1); axial direction; maximum allowable load: 8000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N, radial direction; maximum allowable load: 4000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Main shaft rigidity (2); axial direction; maximum allowable load: 3000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N, radial direction; maximum allowable load: 3000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Tailstock rigidity (1); axial direction; maximum allowable load: 4000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N, radial direction; maximum allowable load: 4000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Tailstock rigidity (2); skip,
Maximum allowable depth of cut x feed; spindle (1); depth of cut: 2 mm, feed per revolution: 1.5 mm,
Spindle (2); skip,
Rotational speed specifications of the first spindle (1);
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the first spindle (1) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 600 rpm, minimum rotation speed 0,
Presence / absence of gear shift: 1, Automatic / manual classification of gear shift: Skip,
Rotational speed specifications of the first spindle (2);
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the first spindle (2) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 1000 rpm, minimum rotation speed: 10 rpm,
Presence / absence of gear shift: 1, Automatic / manual classification of gear shift: Skip,
Rapid feed rate (1): X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 5 m / min, A: 10 × 10 3 deg / min, B: skip, C: 216 × 10 3 deg / min,
Fast forward speed (2); skip,
Minimum cutting feed rate (1); X: 0.05 m / min, Y: 0.05 m / min, Z: 0.05 m / min, A: 5 deg / min, B: skip, C: 0 deg / min,
Minimum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Maximum cutting feed rate (1): X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 5 m / min, A: 10 × 10 3 deg / min, B: skip, C: 216 × 10 3 deg / min,
Maximum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Feed power / efficiency (1): X: 1 kW, 0.95 η, Y: 2 kW, 0.95 η, Z: 2 kW, 0.95 η, A: 0.5 kW, 0.95 η, B: Skip, C: 1 kW, 0.95η,
Feed power / efficiency (2); skip,
Feed unit: division of mm / rev or mm / min (1); X: 2, Y: 2, Z: 1, A: 2, B: skip, C: 2,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min classification (2); skip,
Tool change (1); pot number / tool number change classification: N, number of tools: 5,
Tool change (2); skip,
Machine accuracy capability; tolerance width: 0.008 mm, finishing symbol: 3H, finished surface roughness: 6.3 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: skip, roundness: skip, cylindricity: 0.010 mm, parallelism : Skip, perpendicularity: skip, coaxiality: 0.005 mm, runout: 0.005 mm,
Machine precision special ability (with conditions); skip,
Finishing allowance classification; skip,
Machine tool operation reference time: fixture change: 0.1 Hr, workpiece coordinate setting: 0.05 Hr, tool preparation: 0.2 Hr, workpiece change: 0.03 Hr, tool change: 0.001 Hr,
Tip change: skip,
Special grinding master; skip,
Drill / tap special master; skip,
Milling Special Master; Skip,
Allowable dimensions of mounting tool; maximum diameter: 75 mm, maximum length: 150 mm,
Spindle start / stop time (1: 0.0012Hr, 2: skip), rapid feed positioning time (1; X: 0.00006Hr, Y: 0.00006Hr, Z: 0.00006Hr, 2; skip, A: 0. 00006Hr, B: 0.00006Hr, C: skip), tailstock operation time (forward; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip, reverse; 1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip),
Coolant start / stop time (1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip),
This completes the hobbing input.

Next, the file of the outer diameter grinding process of sequence: 2009 will be described.
Sequence: 2009,
Processing function: GE,
Machine identification number: XGE001,
Absolute value / increment value classification (Abs / Inc): 1 (G code switching),
Minimum movement set value: X: 0.1 μm, Y: 0.1 μm, Z: 0.1 μm, A: skip, B: skip, C: 0.001 deg,
Maximum travel distance: X: 400 mm, Y: 150 mm, Z: 1500 mm, A: skip, B: skip, C: ± ∞ deg,
Fixed origin: X: +300 mm, Y: +75 mm, Z: +1500 mm, A: skip, B: skip, C: 0 deg,
Machinable dimensions, MaxX: 300 mm, MinX: 0, MaxY: 75 mm, MinY: 0, MaxZ: 1500 mm, MinZ: 0, MaxA: Skip, MinA: Skip, MaxB: Skip, MinB: Skip, MaxC: ∞deg, MinC : 0,
Distance between centers: MaxZ: 1500 mm, MinZ: 0,
Machining limit of inclined hole in X direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Z direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Y direction; skip,
Maximum allowable processing weight: 4000N
Spindle capacity (1); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): W
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the first region: T,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 10 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 100 rpm, output: 2.2 kW,
Section of constant torque / constant output in the second region: W,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 100 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 800 rpm, output: 2.2 kW,
Spindle capacity (2); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): T,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the first region: W,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 990 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 4000 rpm, output: 45 kW,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the second area: skip,
Mechanical efficiency; (1): 0.85, (2): 0.98,
Main shaft rigidity (1); Axial direction; Maximum allowable load: 6000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Radial direction: Maximum allowable load: 30000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Main shaft rigidity (2); Axial direction; Maximum allowable load: 6000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Radial direction: Maximum allowable load: 30000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Tailstock rigidity (1); axial direction; maximum allowable load: 6000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Radial direction: Maximum allowable load: 30000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Tailstock rigidity (2); skip,
Maximum allowable depth of cut x feed; spindle (1); skip,
Spindle (2); skip,
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the first spindle (1) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 800 rpm, minimum rotation speed: 10 rpm, presence / absence of gear shift: 1, automatic / manual classification of gear shift: skip,
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the second spindle (2) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 4000 rpm, minimum rotation speed: 990 rpm, presence / absence of gear shift: 1, automatic / manual classification of gear shift: skip,
Rapid feed rate (1); X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 15 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: 288 × 10 3 deg / min,
Fast forward speed (2); skip,
Minimum cutting feed rate (1); X: 0 mm / min, Y: 0 mm / min, Z: 0 mm / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: 0 deg / min, maximum cutting feed rate (1); X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 15 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: 288 × 10 3 deg / min,
Minimum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Maximum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Feed power / efficiency (1): X: 3 kW, 0.95 η, Y: 1 kW, 0.95 η, Z: 3 kW, 0.95 η, A: skip, B: skip, C: 2 kW, 0.95 η,
Feed power / efficiency (2); skip,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min (1); X: 1, Y: 1, Z: 1, A: skip, B: skip, C: 1
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min classification (2); skip,
Tool change (1); pot number / tool number change classification: N, number of tools: 5,
Tool change (2); skip,
Mechanical accuracy capability; tolerance width: 0.001 mm, finishing symbol: 4G, finished surface roughness: 0.8 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: skip, roundness: 0.001 mm, cylindricity: 0.005 mm, Parallelism: skip, squareness: skip, coaxiality: 0.002 mm, runout: 0.005 mm,
Machine precision special ability (with conditions); skip,
Finishing allowance classification; skip,
Machine tool operation reference time; fixture change: 0.1 Hr, workpiece coordinate setting: 0.05 Hr, tool preparation: 0.2 Hr, workpiece change: 0.03 Hr, tool change: 0.1 Hr, insert change: skip,
Special grinding master; Wheel width; 75mm
Processing minimum grinding width: Fixed grinding: 5 mm, Indirect grinding: 1 mm, Stop grinding: 1 mm,
Drill / tap special master; skip,
Milling Special Master; Skip,
Allowable dimensions of mounting tool; maximum diameter: 500 mm, maximum length: 100 mm,
Spindle start / stop time (1: 0.0012Hr, 2: skip), fast feed positioning time (1; X: 0.00006Hr, Y: skip, Z: 0.00006Hr, 2; skip, A: skip, B: Skip, C: skip), tailstock operation time (forward; 1: skip, 2: skip, reverse; 1: skip, 2: skip), coolant start / stop time (1: 0.0006Hr, 2: skip) ,
This completes the input of outer diameter grinding.

Next, the file of the internal grinding process of sequence: 2010 will be described.
Sequence: 2010,
Processing function: GI,
Machine identification number: XGI001,
Absolute value / increment value classification (Abs / Inc): 1 (G code switching),
Minimum movement set value: X: 0.1 μm, Y: 0.1 μm, Z: 0.1 μm, A: skip, B: skip, C: 0.001 deg,
Maximum travel distance: X: 200 mm, Y: 100 mm, Z: 1500 mm, A: skip, B: skip, C: ± ∞ deg,
Fixed origin: X: +150 mm, Y: +50 mm, Z: +1500 mm, A: skip, B: skip, C: 0 deg,
Machinable dimensions, MaxX: 150 mm, MinX: 0, MaxY: 50 mm, MinY: 0, MaxZ: 750 mm, MinZ: 0, MaxA: Skip, MinA: Skip, MaxB: Skip, MiNB: Skip, MaxC: ∞deg, MinC : 0,
Center distance; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in X direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Z direction; skip,
Machining limit of inclined hole in Y direction; skip,
Maximum allowable processing weight: 1000N
Spindle capacity (1); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): W,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the first region: T,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 0 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 150 rpm, output: 2.2 kW,
Section of constant torque / constant output in the second region: W,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 150 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 800 rpm, output: 2.2 kW,
Spindle capacity (2); WS / TS (work spindle / tool spindle classification): T,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the first region: W,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 990 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 6000 rpm, output: 7 kW,
Section of constant torque / constant output in the second region: W,
Rotational speed range / output; minimum rotational speed: 6000 rpm, maximum rotational speed: 40000 rpm, output: 15 kW,
Classification of constant torque / constant output in the second area: skip,
Mechanical efficiency; (1): 0.85, (2): 0.98,
Main shaft rigidity (1); Axial direction; Maximum allowable load: 6000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Radial direction: Maximum allowable load: 6000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Main shaft rigidity (2); Axial direction; Maximum allowable load: 3000 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Radial direction: Maximum allowable load: 1500 N, rigidity: 0.001 μm / N,
Tailstock rigidity (1); skip,
Tailstock rigidity (2); skip,
Maximum allowable depth of cut x feed; spindle (1); skip,
Spindle (2); skip,
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the first spindle (1) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum number of revolutions: 800 rpm, minimum number of revolutions: 0 rpm, presence / absence of gear shift: 1, automatic / manual classification of gear shift: skip,
The maximum and minimum rotation speeds of the second spindle (2) are automatically copied and input when the previous rotation speed range is input.
Maximum rotation speed: 40000 rpm, minimum rotation speed: 3000 rpm, presence / absence of gear shift: 1, automatic / manual classification of gear shift: skip,
Rapid feed rate (1); X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 15 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: 288 × 10 3 deg / min,
Fast forward speed (2); skip,
Minimum cutting feed rate (1); X: 0 m / min, Y: 0 m / min, Z: 0 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: 0 deg / min,
Minimum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Maximum cutting feed rate (1): X: 5 m / min, Y: 5 m / min, Z: 15 m / min, A: skip, B: skip, C: 288 × 10 3 deg / min,
Maximum cutting feed rate (2); skip,
Feed power / efficiency (1): X: 2 kW, 0.95 η, Y: 1 kW, 0.95 η, Z: 2 kW, 0.95 η, A: skip, B: skip, C: 2 kW, 0.95 η,
Feed power / efficiency (2); skip,
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min (1); X: 1, Y: 1, Z: 1, A: skip, B: skip, C: 1
Feed unit: mm / rev or mm / min classification (2); skip,
Tool change (1); pot number / tool number change classification: N, number of tools: 5,
Tool change (2); skip,
Mechanical accuracy capability; tolerance width: 0.001 mm, finishing symbol: 4G, finished surface roughness: 0.8 μm, straightness: skip, flatness: skip, roundness: 0.001 mm, cylindricity: 0.003 mm, Parallelism: skip, squareness: skip, coaxiality: 0.002 mm, runout: 0.005 mm,
Machine precision special ability (with conditions); skip,
Finishing allowance classification; skip,
Machine tool operation reference time; fixture change: 0.1 Hr, workpiece coordinate setting: 0.05 Hr, tool preparation: 0.2 Hr, workpiece change: 0.03 Hr, tool change: 0.1 Hr, insert change: skip,
Special grinding master; Wheel width; 13mm
Processing minimum grinding width; fixed-size grinding: skip, indirect fixed-size grinding: 1 mm, stop grinding: 1 mm,
Drill / tap special master; skip,
Milling Special Master; Skip,
Allowable dimensions of mounting tool; maximum diameter: 50 mm, maximum length: 750 mm,
Spindle start / stop time (1: 0.0012Hr, 2: skip), fast feed positioning time (1; X: 0.00006Hr, Y: 0.00006Hr, Z: 0.00006Hr, 2; skip, A: skip, B: skip, C: 0.00006Hr), tailstock operation time (forward; 1: skip, 2: skip, reverse; 1: skip, 2: skip), coolant start / stop time (1: 0.0006Hr, 2: Skip)
This completes the input of the internal diameter grinding process.

A file relating to the attachment method A file relating to the attachment method is separated into a turning system, a milling system, a grinding system and the like as an attachment file. In this example, a file configuration in which a turning system, a milling system, and a grinding system (outer diameter / inner diameter) are summarized will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 7373 to 76, the input format is displayed by a sequence number, chucking capacity (classification of the chucking ability of the nail (combination of whether the chucking portion rotates or is stationary, and the chucking location. , RE: rotation, outer diameter chucking, etc. Symbols and functions are: R: rotation / S: fixed, E: outer diameter chucking / I: inner diameter chucking / P: presser foot / D: driving pin )), Machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimension, number of chucking claws, equal / unequal division of nail interval, nail unequal division angle used when inputting only for unequal (1, 2, 3, 4), nail stroke (one side), nail synchronous / asynchronous movement classification, nail position shift amount, nail direction specifying nail movement direction, nail position from machine reference position Up to the reference position Separation (X, Y, Z), claw width, claw height, through hole specifications (hole diameter, hole depth), claw shape dimensions and capability classification (X: start point coordinate, end point coordinate, capability (ability) Classification), Z: start point coordinate, end point coordinate, but when the direction of the nail for designating the movement direction of the nail is designated, X is read as Y: Y-X as in the input format, Z: ZY, ZX), claw position / pressing direction (claw direction, claw reference position: X, Z) of the presser method, fixture identification number, and the like.
If there are a plurality of fixtures with the same machine identification number, the sequence numbers are newly entered one after another. The selection is performed by using the figure input as a key for classification of chucking ability and maximum / minimum of the chucking dimension.

Turning files are
73 to 76, the sequence number, chuck ability (claw chucking ability classification (R: rotation, S: fixed, E: outer diameter chucking, I: chucking, P: presser foot, D : Driving pin)), machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimensions, number of chucking claws, equal / individual division of nail interval, nail unequal division angles (1, 2, 3, 4 ), Nail stroke (one side), nail synchronous / asynchronous movement classification, nail position shift amount, nail direction (nail movement direction), distance from machine reference position to nail reference position (X, Y , Z), claw width, claw height, through hole specifications (hole diameter, hole depth), claw shape dimensions and capability classification (X: start point coordinate, end point coordinate, capability (capability category), Z; Start point coordinates, end point coordinates), claw position and presser direction of presser foot method (claw direction, claw reference position: , Z), and inputs a fixture identification number.
These input results are shown in FIGS.

Milling files are
73 to 76, sequence number, chucking capacity (claw chucking capacity classification (R: rotation, S: fixed, E: outer diameter chucking, I: inner diameter chucking, P: presser foot) ), Machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimensions, number of chucking nails, equal / unequal division of nail spacing, nail unequal division angles (1, 2, 3, 4), nail Stroke (one side), nail synchronous / asynchronous movement classification, nail position shift amount, nail direction (nail movement direction), distance from machine reference position to nail reference position (X, Y, Z), Claw width, claw height, through-hole specifications (hole diameter, hole depth), claw shape dimensions and capability classification (X: start point coordinate, end point coordinate, capability (capacity category), Z: start point coordinate, end point Coordinate), claw position and presser direction of the presser foot method (claw direction, claw reference position: X, Z), fixture information Enter the number.
These input results are shown in FIGS.

Grinding file is
Of the items shown in FIGS.
For cylindrical grinding with both centers supported,
Enter the sequence number, chucking ability (claw chucking ability classification (R: rotation, D: driving pin)), machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimensions, and fixture identification number.
For internal or external grinding of chucking support,
73 to 76, sequence number, chucking capacity (claw chucking capacity classification (R: rotation, S: fixed, E: outer diameter chucking, I: inner diameter chucking, P: presser foot) ), Machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimensions, number of chucking nails, equal / unequal division of nail spacing, nail unequal division angles (1, 2, 3, 4), nail Stroke (one side), nail synchronous / asynchronous movement classification, nail position shift amount, nail direction (nail movement direction), distance from machine reference position to nail reference position (X, Y, Z), Claw width, claw height, through-hole specifications (hole diameter, hole depth), claw shape dimensions and capability classification (X: start point coordinate, end point coordinate, capability (capacity category), Z: start point coordinate, end point Coordinate), claw position and presser direction of the presser foot method (claw direction, claw reference position: X, Z), fixture information Enter the number.
These input results are shown in FIGS.

Cost-related files Cost files are used as basic data for calculating machining costs. An example is shown in FIG.
The content is
Machine identification number,
Worker cost; wedge: Wo
Machine tool cost; Machine charge: Cm
Operating cost; Running charge: Cr
Tool cost; Tool charge: Ct
"Throw away chip: Cts
End mill: Cte
Drill: Ctd
Tap: Ctt
Side cutter: Cts
Hob: Cth
Reamer; Ctr
Outside diameter grinding wheel: Ctg
Inner diameter grinding wheel: Cti
Other costs: Co
Etc. This cost file is a table of results obtained by converting various expenses per hour.
As other methods, initial costs such as machine tool purchase costs, annual expenses, etc. and usage conditions (for example, annual operating hours, presence / absence of shift work, shift work hours pattern, holiday pattern, etc.) were added. There is also a method in which the cost is obtained by inputting as a table and giving an hourly cost calculation formula based on this data file.
An input example of this example is shown in FIG.

Material file The material file is composed of items such as JIS symbol, presence / absence of heat treatment, tensile strength, hardness, cutting resistance, etc. as shown in FIG. 124 as a material file. It has a format that can read out the numerical values of various items using as a keyword.

Finishing fee file (grinding fee, finishing fee)
Specific examples of the finishing allowance file are shown in FIGS. 120 to 123. It has a format that can be divided into the outer diameter, the inner diameter, and the tempering allowance without being included, and can read the grinding finish allowance per diameter by the combination of the diameter and the length.
In addition, the bar material finishing allowance can be obtained as the finished length of the product, the end face according to the finished diameter, and the outer diameter finishing allowance.

Files related to machining methods (files for automatic cutting path determination or automatic cutting path determination method)
As a result of macroscopic evaluation of the input material shape, finish shape, material, etc., based on the removal direction determination data, the processing method of the previous example that has already been processed is read from the file and used.
The file format is D / L (diameter to length ratio), X direction allowance, Z direction allowance, removal direction, material shape data, and finish shape data. To do.

Threading method; follow-up method, escape second method, combination follow-up method Screw processing methods include a follow-up method, a relief second method, and a combined follow-up method depending on the method of giving a cut.
In the follow-up method, the same cut is given in the direction perpendicular to the thread cross section (for example, in the case of an outer diameter screw, the cut is in the X-axis direction), and the cut cross-sectional area is given by an equal cross-sectional area every time.
In the relief second method, a cut is given along the second half angle of the thread feed direction, the thread is machined with the front cutting edge in the feed direction, and finally the second half angle in the feed direction is finished.
Needless to say, the same cross-sectional area is cut in this case as well.
The combined follow-up method is a method that combines the follow-up method and the escape second method, and alternately processes the front half angle and the rear half angle in the thread feeding direction. In this case as well, an equal cross-sectional area is cut.

Files related to cutting conditions Examples of cutting condition files corresponding to this input figure are, as shown in FIGS. 128 to 136, turning, side cutter processing, end mill processing, drill processing, tapping, reaming, hobbing, etc. With the workpiece material and tool material as keywords, the cutting speed, cutting and feed conditions are filed, and the machining conditions can be read using the workpiece material, tool material and tool diameter. Has been.
In addition, since it is very difficult to make the tool material of the cutting condition file compatible with all kinds of tool symbols for each manufacturer, the tool material of the cutting condition file is displayed based on ISO.
The input tool material gives the degree of freedom of creation of the tool file by using a method that can be read as the tool material of the cutting condition file by the file even if the symbol of each manufacturer is used.
Covering all the continuous numerical values in the cutting condition file requires a very large storage capacity, so the file has only specific conditional numerical values and interpolates the numerical values of the given point sequence by fuzzy theory The necessary cutting conditions are obtained by substituting them into the formula and the tool life calculation formula. The material material symbol and tool material symbol used in the file are preferably standardized symbols. Therefore, when a specific symbol is used, a conversion table is provided and a method capable of complying with any standard is adopted. Based on this premise, the conversion table is prepared in this embodiment, but the data is created by the machine tool manufacturer or the end user so that the contents of the file can be changed, modified, and added freely. It was.
This working method is as follows.
This can be achieved by calling the desired file on the screen, moving the cursor to the location where the cursor is to be changed, deleting unnecessary data, repeating the input of new data, or inputting additional data to an unentered location. .

File related to surface treatment The file related to surface treatment consists of JIS symbols with surface treatment symbols as keywords as shown in Fig. 137 as surface treatment files, and items such as dimensions that increase due to surface treatment. It is.
This method of use is a surface treatment symbol input by graphic input, JIS processing procedure, data that can be used for processing such as finishing dimension processing, process setting, etc. by obtaining the dimension to be increased or decreased.

Refining-related file The refining-related file is configured as a refining file in which items such as the content of heat treatment, presence / absence of hardness designation, applied material, etc. are filed using heat treatment symbols as keywords as in the example shown in FIG.
This method of use is used to check process settings, erroneous input of hardness specification, errors in applied material, etc. and selection of processing conditions.

Files related to graphics Files related to graphics are classified into dimensional tolerances, screw shapes, and shapes.
Dimension Tolerance File Examples of dimension tolerance files are shown in FIGS.
Examples of basic tolerance files as other methods are shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, and examples of tolerance calculation expressions are shown in the following expressions (2) to (8).
The dimensional tolerance file files the upper dimensional difference and the lower dimensional difference using a tolerance symbol according to the ISO standard as a keyword.
The file used for the basic file and the method using the tolerance calculation formula is a table of basic dimensional differences (upper dimensional difference or lower dimensional difference) shown in FIG. 113, an IT basic tolerance table shown in FIG. 114, and FIG. It is configured to file a basic numerical value serving as a reference based on a tolerance symbol, a dimension, a tolerance grade, and the like.

  The items of the shape file are configured according to the input format. Each format is shown in FIG. 89 for an example of a groove shape file, in FIG. 90 for an example of a center hole shape file, and in an example of a key groove shape file. 91, an example of the key type shape file is shown in FIG. 92, an example of the end face key groove shape file is shown in FIG. 93, an example of the hole shape file is shown in FIG. 94, and an example of the tap hole shape file is shown in FIG. FIG. 95 shows an example of an internal cam shape file, FIG. 96 shows an example of an end face direction cam shape file, FIG. 97 shows an example of a cylindrical groove cam shape file, and FIG. 98 shows a groove shape file of a cylindrical groove cam. Fig. 99 shows an example of an outer shape cam shape file, Fig. 10000 shows an example of an end face groove cam shape file, Fig. 101 shows an example of an end face groove cam shape file, and Fig. 102 shows an example of a groove shape file of an end face groove cam. Plane / cylindrical polygon shape file Examples are examples of the internal gear shape file in FIG. 103, is in Fig. 104, examples of the external gear shape file, shown in FIG. 105.

Tapered Shape File An example of a tapered shape file is shown in FIG. In this example, the taper, the reference diameter, the small diameter, and the total length can be obtained using the type of taper as a keyword.

Thread shape file (M male thread)
An example of the screw shape file is shown in FIG. This example shows a metric male thread, and uses the thread classification, nominal diameter, thread pitch, and grade as keywords to determine the dimensional difference between the outer and effective diameters, the dimensional difference below, and the minimum roundness of the valley. It is a configuration that can be obtained.

  Other shape file items include, for example, a screw shape file, a taper screw shape file, a screw fill shape file, a ground fill shape file, bolts, nuts, knurled eyes “(S1019)”, and create files as necessary. You can enter it.

  Screw pilot hole file An example of a screw pilot hole file is shown in FIG. In this example, the diameter of the prepared hole and the chamfered diameter of the screw can be obtained by using the nominal diameter of the screw and the pitch of the screw as keywords.

Each shape file can be arbitrarily given to the end customer. In other words, companies with a high standardization level can reduce the number of input items and improve input productivity by creating this file.
The standardized items can be rewritten arbitrarily on the input screen after input by auto-completion. When rewritten, the key code of the cited shape file on the input display device is automatically deleted.
Standardization is a file format that can be used for some items instead of all items.
However, if the input is left blank but not an essential item, the process is continued, and if it is an essential item, an alarm is given.

File related to material shape When a plurality of finished shapes can be processed from one material shape, it is possible to omit inputting the same material by providing a material shape file.
The material file format is the same as the material input format. The work file identification number is used as the material file identification number.

File for Finishing Roughness A file for finishing roughness is shown in FIG. 119 as an example of a finishing symbol file. The finish symbol is used as a keyword, and the surface roughness range and the symbol on the drawing are filed. This file is used by determining the necessity of the finishing process and replacing the roughness data with the finishing symbol number. The processing conditions are calculated and determined based on the surface roughness as a result of the replacement.

File relating to shape error A file relating to shape error is shown in FIG. 139 as an example of a shape and position accuracy file. In this configuration, the necessity of the reference plane and the accuracy name are filed using the shape and position accuracy symbols as keywords. This usage checks for incorrect input of shape and position accuracy symbols and errors in the reference plane.

Processing Method Symbol File An example of the processing method symbol file is shown in FIG.
It is the structure which calculates | requires the content of processing by using a processing method symbol as a keyword. This usage is used to determine a machining process and to check against a machine tool file. If a machining method symbol that is not in the file is specified, or if a machining method symbol that is not in the machine tool file is specified, warning processing is performed.

FIG. 4 is an example of a flowchart for registering files. Beginning in step 200, tool data is input in step 210. 78 to 81 show examples of the tool data input format, and FIGS. 82 to 85 show examples of rotary tools.
As stationary tool data, specifications such as a tool identification number, a shank identification number, a chip identification number, a breaker specification, a specification of a main cutting edge, a nose radius, a specification of a secondary cutting edge, and the like are input. The input example is an input based on JIS, but an input format is added to compensate for a portion that is considered to be a defect in JIS and a portion that is lacking in JIS.
As the rotary tool data, specifications such as a tool identification number, a shank identification number, a tool size (diameter, cutting edge length, total length, tip angle, number of cutting edges), tool material, and the like are input. Examples of specific inputs have already been described.

Tool data processing is performed at step 220, tool file registration is performed at step 230, and the presence / absence of other tool data is determined at step 240. If not, continue to the next step 250.
Here, it is also possible to use a sequential processing method in which the tool data processing is performed while inputting the tool data by combining the steps 210 and 220 without going through the procedure separated from the steps 210 and 220. Alternatively, all tools may be input in step 210, tool data processing for all tools in step 220, and tool file registration processing and batch processing methods for all tools in step 230.

Here, the contents of the tool data processing in step 220 are shown in FIG.
The tool data processing procedure at step 220 is processed as follows.
In this process, the functions held by the tool are determined, calculated, selected, and determined by the processing device based on the tool shape data, and input of functions based on human judgment is omitted to prevent erroneous input and limited function input. The purpose is to create a file that can use the maximum functions of the tool.
Beginning at step 2200, at step 2201, the first symbol of the tool identification number is discriminated to determine whether it is a stationary tool or a rotating tool.
Processing with the first symbol of the tool identification number is as follows. The rotating tools are D, R, T, F, B, A, S, H, and G. Symbols not belonging to this are stationary tools. O is processed as other tools.
Here, D: Drill R: Reamer T: Tap F: Milling (end mill, face milling)
B: Boring A: Facing S: Side cutter H: Hob G: Grinding wheel

  If it is determined in step 2201 that the tool is a stationary tool, in step 2202, various tool angles of the input data, such as main cutting edge, sub cutting edge, cutting angle (cutting edge angle, inclination angle), rake angle, clearance angle, etc. Read the reference edge point, shank geometry, etc.

In step 2203, the division and the processing angle of the main cutting edge and the auxiliary cutting edge are calculated from the cutting angle, rake angle, clearance angle, reference edge point, and shank shape dimension of the cutting edge.
Depending on the mounting angle of the shank to the turret, the division of the machining location will change, but it will be determined as mounting on a normal square turret. Therefore, the machining location and machining angle when the installation angle is changed are changed depending on the case.
As already explained, the input XT / ZT indicates the tool to be installed in the X direction and the column for inputting the category of the tool to be installed in the Z direction. 1 is the tool for attaching the length of the shank in the X direction, 2 is the Z direction It is a tool for attaching the longitudinal length of the shank.
This is used to determine the machining location of the tool without changing it.
As the division of the first-order machining location, the division of the machining location of the main cutting edge is determined. As a result, the inner diameter machining tool, inner diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool, outer diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool or end face machining tool, outer diameter groove machining tool, inner diameter, based on the tool shank. A groove machining tool and an end face groove machining tool (trapezoidal screw machining tools are included in this grooving tool category). There may be a plurality of machining points with one tool. These results are memorize | stored in the machining location of the tool of a memory | storage part.
Here, the XT / ZT column has 2 inputs (a tool for attaching the length of the shank in the Z direction). An input with a shank diameter is an inner diameter machining tool, and the inner diameter machining tool, inner diameter and Divided into end face machining tools.
The XT / ZT column has 1 input (a tool that attaches the length of the shank in the X direction), and a tool without an input of the shank diameter is an outer diameter machining tool depending on whether the cutting angle is positive or negative and the reference edge point. It is classified into an outer diameter and end face machining tool, an outer diameter machining tool or an end face machining tool, an outer diameter groove machining tool, an inner diameter groove machining tool, and an end face groove machining tool.
Even if there is an input for the shank diameter, if the XT / ZT column has one input (a tool that attaches the length of the shank in the X direction), it can be used as an X direction tool, so Process.
In addition, a general tool (triangular screw tools are included in this category) has one minor cutting edge angle. When the minor cutting edge angle is 2, grooving tools, 3 or more are special tools.
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6, when the minor cut angle is one or two, the shank diameter is input, the cutting angle is positive; the inner diameter and the end face machining tool The shank diameter is input, the cutting angle is negative; Inner diameter machining tool No shank diameter input, cutting angle: positive, reference cutting edge point: 1 or 2; Outer diameter and end face machining tool No shank diameter input, cutting angle: negative, reference cutting edge point: 1 or 2; outer Diameter machining tool or end face machining tool No shank diameter input, cutting angle: 90 °, reference edge point: 1 or 2, Shank width relief radius input: None; outer diameter groove tool Shank diameter input, cutting angle : 90 °, reference cutting edge point: 1, 3 or 2, 4, input of shank width relief radius: none; ID groove tool no input of shank diameter, cutting angle: 90 °, reference cutting edge point: 1, 2, shank Width relief radius input: Yes; end face Determined as of the tool.
An end face machining tool is a tool that can be machined by moving parallel to the end face, or the main cutting edge face is placed parallel to the end face and moved (pressed) at right angles to the end face. It is a tool that can be cut.

As the division of the first rank machining location, the division of the machining location of the main cutting edge was determined by the above procedure. When there are a plurality of sub cutting edges, the divisions of the processing points of the sub cutting edges are sequentially determined. As the third rank, the divisions of the machining locations are recalculated by using only the dimensional conditions, excluding the shank shape conditions, and all the divisions of the machining locations provided by the tool are determined. (Excluding the shank condition makes it possible to add a section of the machining location where the inner diameter tool is used for the outer diameter and the outer diameter tool is used for the inner diameter.)
By this processing, it is possible to cover the maximum category of machining points of the tool.

The classification code of the tool machining location is as follows.
Machining location Category code Inner diameter machining tool ； I
Inner and end face machining tools ； I & IF
Internal groove tool IG
Internal thread tool; IH
Outside diameter processing tool ； E
Outer diameter and end face machining tool; E & EF
Outer diameter groove tool EG
OD screw tool ； EH
End face machining tool ； F
End face groove tool FG
End face screw tool; FH
Here, processing is performed as IFG = FG and EFG = FG.

In step 2204, the processing angles of the main cutting edge and the auxiliary cutting edge are calculated using the equations (9) to (16) based on the cutting angle, the edge angle, the protrusion angle from the tool holder, and the mounting angle of the tool holder.
For example, in the case of a left hand tool (right cutting edge tool)
Main cutting edge angle = 180 [deg] − (cutting angle: κ) − (sub cutting angle: κ ′) (9)
Roughing start angle = 90 [deg] + (sub-cut angle)-A [deg] + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (10)
Finishing start processing angle = 90 [deg] + (sub cutting angle) −B [deg] + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (11)
Roughing end point angle = (cut angle) + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (12-1)
Finishing processing end angle = (cut angle) + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (12-2)
In the case of a right-hand tool (left cutting edge tool)
Main cutting edge angle = 180 [deg] − (cutting angle: κ) − (sub cutting angle: κ ′) (9)
Roughing start angle = 90 [deg]-(sub-cutting angle) + A [deg] + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (13)
Finishing processing start angle = 90 [deg] − (sub cutting angle) + B [deg] + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (14)
Roughing processing end angle = 180 [deg] + (sub-cutting angle) + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (15)
Finishing processing end angle = 180 [deg] + (sub-cutting angle) + (projection angle from tool holder) + (tool holder mounting angle) (16)
Here, A: 1.5 and B: 3 are used in this example. This constant can be changed and set as appropriate according to the situation.
In addition, the tool clearance margin angle is obtained by adding or subtracting constants A and B for the machining start angle (entrance angle), and the machining end point angle (escape angle) is 0 [deg]. In the case of a groove tool, the tool clearance margin angle of the main cutting angle is 0 [deg]. The code for the minor cutting angle of the groove tool follows general standards.
As a result of the calculation, the processing start angle and end point angle are stored.
Subsequently, the machining angle of the secondary cutting edge is repeatedly calculated, and the machining angles corresponding to the divisions of all machining locations are calculated and stored. The machining angle of the secondary cutting edge is calculated by the above formula by replacing the main and secondary cutting angles.

In step 2205, it is determined whether or not it is a throw-away chip.
If it is determined in step 2205 that it is a throw-away tip based on the tip code, in step 2206, the roughing tool and finishing tool classification are added to the classification of each machining location by a reference symbol to complete the function of the tool.

  If it is determined in step 2205 that the tip is not a throw-away tip, the function of the tool is completed by checking the data in step 2207 and adding classifications of roughing and finishing tools according to the input data. When this process ends, the process continues to step 2208.

In step 2208, the tool capability is calculated.
The tool capability is, for example, a maximum cutting depth, a minimum cutting depth, a maximum feed amount, a minimum feed amount, a maximum cutting strength, and the like. These calculations in the standard throw-away tip are based on the equations (17) to (20).
Maximum cutting depth = (length of cutting edge ridge) x sinκ (17)
Length of cutting edge ridge = (r × cosecεr × secεr) − (R × cosecεr × cosεr−R) − (R × tanεr) (18)
Here, κ is a cutting angle, r is a reference inscribed circle, εr is an apex angle, and R is a nose radius.
“Calculating numerical values with the tool identification number of 1 in this example as an example,
The depth of cut is (
12.7 × cosec80 × sec80) − (0.4 × cosec80 × sec80−0.4) − (0.4 × tan80) = 12.436 [mm]
From the minimum cutting depth = R, the minimum cutting depth is 0.4 mm. "
Maximum feed amount = kb × (breaker width) × (tan α × cosκ−tankt) (mm / rev) (19)
Here, kb is the maximum feed coefficient with respect to the breaker width, α is the clearance angle, κ is the cut angle, and kt is the clearance angle margin (can be selected and determined freely, but cannot be larger than the clearance angle).
“Calculating numerical values using the tool identification number of 1 in this example as an example,
The maximum feed amount is: maximum feed amount = 0.5 × 1.5 × (tan 5 ° × cos 7 ° −tan 2 °) = 0.389 [mm / rev]
It is. "
Minimum feed amount = value per revolution of the minimum feed speed of the control device (mm / rev) (20)
The tool capability is calculated according to the classification of the main cutting edge, the secondary cutting edge, and the machining location.

In step 2210, the processing result from step 2203, the division of the main and sub cutting edge machining locations, the main and sub cutting edge machining angles, the roughing or finishing division, and the tool capability are recorded in the storage unit. When this process ends, the process ends at step 2211, returns to step 220, and continues to step 230.
The recorded results for this example are shown in FIGS.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2201 that the tool is a rotating tool, in step 2209, the rotating tool is classified based on the tool identification number and the ascending order is arranged based on the tool diameter. In particular, a tool having F as the first symbol of the tool identification number is divided into a face mill and an end mill according to the tool diameter and the length of the cutting edge.
The division criteria are
(1/2) x tool diameter <cutting edge length when end mill: FE,
The case of (1/2) × tool diameter ≧ cutting blade length is defined as face milling: FF.
As a result, D: drill, R: reamer, T: tap, FE: end mill, FF: face mill, B: boring, A: facing, S: side cutter, O: other.
When this processing is completed, the processing results so far are recorded in the tool file storage unit in step 2210. When this recording process ends, the process ends at step 2211 and returns to step 230.

In step 2209, the rotary tools are classified for each type of tool and arranged in the order of the size of the tools so that the tool file can be read quickly.
This processing procedure is shown in FIG.
Beginning at step 220900, the tool identification number is read at step 220901.
Since tool identification numbers other than those specified in advance are not accepted, if they are entered in error, an alarm warning is issued in step 220910, requiring correction processing. When this process ends, the process ends at step 220924 and returns to step 2209.
In step 220901 to step 220909 and step 220914, the specified tool identification number is classified, and in step 220911 to step 220913 and step 220915 to step 220920, the data is recorded in a file for each rotary tool. When recording is completed in this file, it is determined whether or not there is already recorded tool data in step 220921, and if there is, the data is rearranged in ascending order of the tool diameter in step 220922, and further for each tool diameter in step 220923. Sort data in ascending order of tool length. When this process ends, the process ends at step 220924 and returns to step 2209.
Alternatively, if it is determined in step 220921 that there is no recorded tool data, the process ends in step 220924 and returns to step 2209.

  Although already described, after the process of step 220, the tool file registration is ended in step 230, and the presence or absence of other tool data is determined in step 240. If there is, the process returns to step 210 and repeats. Otherwise, if there is none, the process continues to step 250.

  From step 250, a procedure for registering other files is shown. In step 250, file data is input. In the next step 260, the file is registered, and in step 270, the presence / absence of other file data of the same type is discriminated. If not, the presence / absence of another type of file data is determined in step 280, and if present, the process returns to step 250 and repeats up to step 280. If there is no file, the various file registration processing is terminated at step 290. When this process is completed, the process returns to step 2 of the main process and continues to step 3.

  FIG. 44 shows the finished shape of the metric display workpiece in this embodiment, FIG. 43 shows the workpiece material shape, and FIGS. 142 to 160 show examples of the input in step 3.

In FIG. 142, sequence 1 is an example of input in a format for inputting general items of the workpiece. Since this is common to machining such as turning and milling, some items are not input in this example. This includes a work identification number (part code): M135A224-11A (not input in this example, but if it is desired to specify machine identification, fixture identification, or process identification as a sub number, for example, (machine identification): XLD001, (Process identification): LA1, (Mounting tool identification): Inputs such as REXLD001 (or the variable block input method can be used) are added, and the workpiece material identification number (this example) In the case of using a material file, the data is automatically complemented to the material data reading material shape from the file using the identification number of the workpiece material as a keyword.) Work name: JIKU, Total length: 210. mm (hereinafter, the dimension of the shape is input in mm in the case of metric, and in the following description, the unit symbol mm is omitted.) Full width (In this example, the input is input because the workpiece is a turning shape object. None, but if entered with a milled shape, the next material diameter will be the thickness or height.), Material diameter (no entry in this example, enter the material outer diameter for rod material) , Work material: SCM440H, Work material hardness: HRC30, Work heat treatment (No input in this example, enter “1” when material tempering is performed), Work material weight (per piece) : 8.3Kg, workpiece material dimension (the length of the rod material as it is, not the length per piece. In this example, there is no input. For example, a standard length of 4.0 m is input. In the case of 4000. ), Processed process (in this example, there is no input, for example, if the processed process has a center hole, enter CMS-1), specifications for non-finished finish; finish symbol : 2L, finish surface roughness (no input in this example, for example, if 50 μm is specified, enter 50.), measurement data for each process: 1 (when measuring, 1 when not measuring: 0 or no input), designated number of machining: 10, number of machining completed (automatically counts up every time machining is performed), revision: used to change data once entered. (There is no input in this example. The symbol is advanced and input every time it is revised using A to Z in the revision order.) Creator: HIRAI, Date: 91125, Comment: Enter the necessary information freely Enter an abbreviated symbol that can be easily remembered. In this example, AUTO-PROCESS was entered.
This input was made possible by reprinting the same characters written in the drawings as they were.
The initial value of the sequence number is 1. The input of one input line is completed and the next number is automatically entered.

Sequences 2 to 14 are formats for inputting a material shape.
This data input includes sequence, step number, previous C / R chamfer (details of items to be input (hereinafter, description of similar parts and similar parts is omitted); C / R, size), specifications of start point coordinates (Diameter, length), end point coordinates (diameter, length), arc radius, subsequent C / R chamfer (C / R, size), taper / angle / gradient specifications (section, type, (Size) is input in tabular format.
This example is an example of inputting material shapes from sequence 2 to 14 from FIG. 43 of the material diagram. The origin of shape input is the left end face and the center line (0, 0), and the upper half of the figure is input counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the center line. As a result, the graphic space is always input on the right side. The same input method is used for the finished shape. There is also a method of inputting a figure in the clockwise direction opposite to this, but the input direction is for each promise, and if the processing procedure based on this promise is used, the same result can be obtained regardless of which is used. .

In the material of this example, by inputting the material center of the start point coordinates (diameter: 0, length: 0.) and the end point coordinates (diameter: 0., length: 214.) of the first step, Since this is unnecessary data, this is omitted and the second input is advanced to the first input. First stage: start point coordinates (diameter: 0, length: 214.0), end point coordinates (diameter: 58.0, length 214.0) to 13th stage: start point coordinates (diameter: 58.0, length Ending with the starting point coordinates (diameter: 0, length; 0).
Here, the column number is automatically counted up and does not need to be input.
Further, when the end point coordinate and the next start point coordinate coincide with each other, the next start point coordinate is omitted and input.
In this case, even if the input is omitted, the device automatically compensates. In FIG. 142 to FIG. 160, the numerical values that are automatically input, automatically complemented, and automatically counted up are indicated by two erase lines.
This input example is a convenience on a document that cannot be displayed in multiple colors for illustration purposes, and is indicated by two erasing lines. Display on a real machine such as a numerical controller, electronic computer, personal computer, etc. For example, black and white reversal and black shading, blue reversal and blue shading, blue reversal and black reversal, and the like are identified by combinations of other colors and character decorations. The input and processing are performed according to this description.

The general promise of input display is as follows.
Input is automatic input, automatic count-up, auto-completion (When the end point coordinates of this stage are input, the start point coordinates of this stage automatically quote the previous end point coordinates. When the start point coordinates are input, they are compared with the end point coordinates of the previous stage. If they do not match, the diameter and length are automatically added to complement the diameter and length.) In addition, the above quotation, the left quotation, etc. can be made simple by making the cursor operation easier. Configure for input. In the input example, erasing by one line indicates citation, and erasing by two lines indicates automatic input, automatic count up, and automatic complement.
This input example is shown by a single erasing line or two erasing lines on a document that cannot be displayed in multiple colors for illustration purposes, and is a real machine such as a numerical controller, electronic computer, personal computer, etc. For example, the black and white inversion and the black shading, the blue inversion and the blue shading, the blue inversion and the black inversion, and the like are configured so as to be identified by a combination of other colors and character decorations. . The input and processing are performed according to this description.

In addition, when inputting the length, the increment value (incremental) is input with a ± sign. If the input is ± unsigned, it is determined as an absolute value (absolute) and processed.
In this input example, the material shape is input with only an absolute value, and the finishing shape is input with an absolute value and a partial increment value.

The initial value of the column number is 1, and the next number is automatically input along with the input lineup of one row based on the above processing method.
The arc radius ± is input in such a way that + is counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the start point coordinate to the end point coordinate, and-is clockwise (clockwise) from the start point coordinate to the end point coordinate.
Since the arc data of the column number: 2 in this example is a counterclockwise arc from the start point to the end point, it is +10. Enter.
The C / R section of the previous C / R chamfer at each stage identifies 45-degree C chamfering or 45-degree C chamfering if C is input and R-chamfering or R-cornering if R is input. The subsequent C / R chamfering is the same as the previous C / R chamfering.
The subsequent C / R chamfers in the steps of this example: 6, 8, 11, 12 are R3. , R5. , R5. , R5. Enter,.
There is no input in this example, but other C / R chamfering, taper / angle / gradient specifications: taper / angle / gradient classification, taper / angle / gradient, so that other inputs can be made easily. Type, size, etc. can also be entered.

For the taper, angle, and gradient sections, T is input for taper, A is input for angle, and S is input for gradient.
The type must be 4 alphanumeric characters. The first two letters are Morse Taper: MT, Jacobs Taper: JT, National Taper (American Standard Taper): NT, Brown Sharp Taper: BT (B & ST), etc. In order to express the size of each taper, a number is used for the last two letters to facilitate reading from the taper file.
In addition to this, the taper, angle and gradient symbolized by creating a file freely can be input easily by the user.
In the case of taper and gradient, the magnitude is entered by entering the numerator above (to the left) the decimal point and the denominator below (to the right) the decimal point. Input can be in units of 00001 degrees.
The size used when reading the data from the file by entering a symbol in the type section is right-justified and a size number is entered. The data read out in this manner is displayed as a gradient value converted to a decimal point.

FIGS. 143 to 160 are examples of inputting the finishing shape.
From the sequence 15 of this example, the finishing shape is input.
In addition to the material shape input format, this data can be entered with tolerance symbols, vertical dimension differences, finish symbols, finish surface roughness, shape position accuracy, screw specifications, tempering specifications, and surface treatment specifications. I tried to be able to input.
In FIG. 44, the center hole is at the point (0, 0), but in addition to being a solid workpiece, this direction requires machining from the left. The angle: 60 and the format: A2 are input to the sequence 15 for the right center hole. If it is hollow, input from the center hole side at the position (0, 0.).

  Since the first row is unnecessary data as described above, the second row is omitted and the start point coordinates (diameter: 0, length: 160.) and end point coordinates (diameter: 20,. The 38th stage from the length: 160.) ends with the sequence 53 of start point coordinates (diameter: 25., length: 0.), end point coordinates (diameter: 0., length: 0.).

  This detailed input from the first stage is skipped without input because the previous C / R chamfer has no data (hereinafter abbreviated as skip when there is no input data. For skipping, a dedicated key is provided, or Do this by setting to the soft menu key, and the previous C / R chamfering input method was described in the section on material shape input.), Specification of start point coordinates; , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: skip, lower dimensional difference: skip, length: 160. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip, end point coordinate specifications; diameter: 20. , Tolerance symbol: H7, (When this H7 is input, the upper dimensional difference: +0.021 and the lower dimensional difference: 0.0 are read from the dimensional tolerance file using H7 and diameter 20. Automatically entered.) Moving to FIG. 144, length: 160. , Tolerance symbol: Skip, Upper dimensional difference: Skip, Lower dimensional difference: Skip, Arc radius specification, Rear C / R chamfer; C / R: R, Size: 0.4, Finish symbol: 2L Finished surface roughness: skip, shape position accuracy: skip, taper / angle / gradient specifications: skip, go to Fig. 145, screw specifications: skip, tempering specifications: skip, surface treatment Source: Skip, which ends the first stage input.

  When the cursor is returned (cursor return is performed by setting a dedicated key or setting this to the soft menu key), column number 2 is automatically entered and the cursor is input to the previous C / R chamfer. Return to item C / R.

The input from the second stage is input in accordance with the first stage, but the specification of the start point coordinates can be referred to the end point coordinates of the first stage, so the cursor is moved to the end point coordinates. In this case, since the end point coordinates are the same data as the first stage, if the above quote (the above quote is provided by setting a dedicated key or setting this to the soft menu key), the end point coordinates are specified. Specifications: Diameter 20. , Tolerance symbol: H7, upper dimensional difference: +0.021, lower dimensional difference: 0.0, length: 160. Is the specifications of the starting point coordinates of the second stage; Diameter: 20. , Tolerance symbol: H7, upper dimensional difference: +0.021, lower dimensional difference: 0.0, length: 160. And automatically complete. Next, the second end point coordinates; length: 175. Rear chamfer: C1. Enter. (The description of the input item to be skipped is omitted because it is duplicated since it has been explained in the first stage. In the case of duplication, it will be omitted in the same manner, and only new items will be explained.)
The cursor is returned and the input from the third stage is sequentially repeated in the manner described above.

Input the specifications of the 18th stage screw.
Classification: Depending on the type of screw, a metric thread: M, Whitworth screw: W, Unified thread: UNC, UNF, Pipe parallel thread: G, Pipe taper thread: R, Rc, Rp, etc. The modal is M.
Pitch; the pitch of the designated screw is entered in mm, and in the inch system, the number of ridges is entered (in the case of fractions, the number of ridges converted to decimals is input).
R / L: Input the right hand of the screw, right screw: R, left screw: L. The modal is R.
Accuracy: The accuracy of the screw is input based on JIS.
Thread accuracy JIS class 2 male threads are input as JIS 6g or JIS 6h, and female threads are input as JIS 5H or JIS 6H.
Thread finish symbol: Enter the same finish symbol as above. Here, the nominal size of the outer diameter of the inch-type screw is input in inches, and the numerical value excluding No is input for the small diameter of the unified screw.
This identification is performed by a symbol input in the thread classification.
The diameter of the inch series screw is 1-1.4 for an input of 1-1 / 4 inch, and the length is input with a metric.
The diameter of the unified screw is a small diameter that does not directly indicate the diameter: No. 0-12 Is entered, and only the designated numerical values of 0 to 12 are input. (In the processing stage, it is discriminated by the symbol input in the thread classification.)
In the following, when inputting screws, the above example is used.

  Based on the above description, this example inputs classification: M, screw diameter: pitch: 1.5, R / L: R, accuracy: JIS 6g.

  As for the input of the 20th roundness, the roundness symbol: ◯ is input as the symbol for inputting the shape position accuracy, and 0.003 is input as the allowable value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (h), the position accuracy symbol includes a roundness symbol, a coaxiality symbol, a parallelism symbol, flatness, cylindricity, squareness, straightness, runout, and the like. is there.

  The input of the specification of the arc radius of the 21st stage is the size: -30. (Here, the direction of the circle is entered with the start point and end point connected to the start point side as clockwise rotation (clockwise) as-, and counterclockwise rotation (counterclockwise) as +.), Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension Difference: 0. , Lower dimensional difference: -0.030, and Finished surface roughness: 6.3S.

  22nd stage diameter 80. h6 to diameter 84. As shown in FIGS. 146 to 147, the taper input to h 6 is the start point coordinates (diameter: 80., tolerance: h 6, upper dimensional difference: 0.0, lower dimensional difference: −0.019, length 115.) and end point coordinates (diameter: 84., tolerance: h6, upper dimensional difference: 0.0, lower dimensional difference: -0.022, length: 95.).

  23rd stage diameter: 84. For the input of the coaxiality of h6, the coaxiality symbol; ◎, the allowable value of 0.005, the reference position of the reference stage;

  The input of the parallelism of the end surface of the 26th stage is the parallelism symbol in the symbol of the input of the shape position accuracy; //, 0.005 in the allowable value, the reference position in the reference stage; the 28th stage with the display of B Enter 28.

  To input the specifications of the end point coordinates for which the tolerance is specified for the length of the 27th stage, the diameter: specify the citation above (110. is automatically input), the tolerance symbol: skip, the dimensional difference above: Skip, dimensional difference below: Skip, length: -10. (Since tolerance is specified, enter it in increments.) Tolerance symbol: skip, top dimension difference: 0. , Lower dimensional difference: -0.05, so that mixed use of absolute value and increment value is possible.

  As for the input of the 37th stage screw, according to the 18th stage, classification: M, screw diameter: pitch: 1.5, R / L: L, accuracy: JIS 6g, are input.

As described above, the file for facilitating input prepares items for which JIS standards are defined and items for which industry standards are established. In addition, this file has a degree of freedom in which the contents of the file can be changed or added or items can be added according to the standards of each machine tool manufacturer or end user. The specific contents are dimension tolerance file, finish symbol file, groove shape file, key groove shape file, key type shape file, end face key groove shape file, hole shape file, tap hole shape file, cylindrical polygon shape file, An internal gear shape file, an external gear shape file, a screw shape file, a taper screw shape file, a screw fill shape file, a ground fill shape file, a taper shape file, a center hole shape file, and the like.
Also, as standard of machine tool manufacturers and end users, end face groove cam shape file, end face groove cam groove shape file, end face direction cam shape file, outer shape cam shape file, inner shape cam shape file, cylindrical groove cam shape file, cylindrical groove cam The same input format as the file format capable of providing the groove shape file is used.

As the tolerance symbol, a tolerance symbol according to the ISO standard is input. By inputting the tolerance symbol, the input of the upper dimensional difference and the lower dimensional difference is omitted. Diameter or length and tolerance symbol, arc radius size and tolerance symbol, groove width and tolerance symbol, keyway width and tolerance symbol, keyway depth and tolerance symbol, depth and tolerance symbol, distance from center of start point coordinate and tolerance symbol Dimension tolerance file from the shoulder tolerance and symbol, plane width size and tolerance symbol, straddle tooth thickness and tolerance symbol, etc. The dimensional difference below and is automatically entered.
Examples of dimension tolerance files are shown in FIGS. Examples of basic tolerance files as other methods are shown in FIGS. 113 to 11414, and examples of tolerance calculation expressions are shown in the following expressions (2) to (8).
If there is no tolerance symbol, enter the upper and lower dimensional differences. It is not necessary to enter if tolerance is not required.
Here, in the sequence 16 of FIG. 143 in this example, the specifications of the end point coordinates; The dimensional difference above and below H7 are automatically read and input as follows. Read the hole type H page of the dimensional tolerance file of FIG. The upper dimensional difference: +0.021 and the lower dimensional difference: 0.000 of the intersection of the row and the seventh grade column included are read out and automatically entered into the columns 84-95. The result is shown in FIG.
In addition, the basic file and tolerance calculation formulas are based on the basic file size differences (upper or lower dimensional differences) shown in FIGS. 113 to 114, IT basic tolerances, IT tolerance grade differences, and tolerances. (1) When the basic dimensional difference is the above dimensional difference (tolerance symbols; a, b, c, cd, e, ef, f, fg, g, h, )
Upper dimensional difference = Basic upper dimensional difference (2)
Lower dimensional difference = Upper dimensional difference-IT basic tolerance (3)
(2) When the underlying dimensional difference is the following dimensional difference (tolerance symbols; j, k, m, n, p, r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z, za, zb, zc,)
Upper dimensional difference = Lower dimensional difference + IT basic tolerance (4)
Lower dimensional difference = underlying lower dimensional difference (5)
(3) Tolerance symbol: Dimensional difference on js = + IT basic tolerance / 2 (6)
Lower dimensional difference =-IT basic tolerance / 2 (7)
In the case of inner diameter (1) When the underlying dimensional difference is the dimensional difference below (tolerance symbols: A, B, C, CD, E, EF, F, FG, G, H,)
Upper dimensional difference = Lower dimensional difference + IT basic tolerance (4)
Lower dimensional difference = underlying lower dimensional difference (5)
(2) When the basic dimensional difference is the above dimensional difference (tolerance symbols: J, K, M, N, P, R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z, ZA, ZB, ZC,)
Upper dimensional difference = Basic upper dimensional difference (2)
Lower dimensional difference = Upper dimensional difference-IT basic tolerance (3)
(3) Tolerance symbol; Dimensional difference on Js = + IT basic tolerance / 2 (6)
Lower dimensional difference =-IT basic tolerance / 2 (7)
(4) Dimensional difference on tolerance symbols P to ZC for tolerance classes 3 to 7 = Dimensional difference on the basis of tolerance classes 8 to 16 + IT tolerance class difference (8)
Lower dimensional difference = Upper dimensional difference-IT basic tolerance (3)
Find using.
Here, the sequence 16 in FIG. 143 of this example, the specifications of the end point coordinates; The upper dimensional difference and the lower dimensional difference of H7 are automatically read out, calculated, and input as follows.
In FIG. 113, the basic dimensional difference is represented by a tolerance symbol: hole type H and diameter 20. It is 0 when calculated from the point of intersection with the line. In FIG. 114, the IT basic tolerance is changed to a tolerance grade: IT7 column and a diameter of 20. Therefore, the diameter is 0.021 when calculated from the point of intersection with the line exceeding 18 and 30 or less.
As a result, the above dimensional difference = lower dimensional difference + IT basic tolerance = 0 + 0.021 = + 0.021
Lower dimensional difference = underlying lower dimensional difference = 0
This result is automatically entered into columns 84-95.
The result is shown in FIG. If the upper dimensional difference and the lower dimensional difference are automatically input and complemented by inputting a tolerance symbol thereafter, they are automatically input. Abbreviated.

The finish symbol has a format that can display both the inverted triangle display of the old JIS method and the roughness display of ISO if necessary. In the old JIS method, the number is the number of inverted triangles ~: blank, ~ ×: 0, ▽: 1 , ▽▽: 2, ▽▽▽: 3, ▽▽▽▽: 4, Finishing symbol 5: 5 in FIG. 119, Finishing symbol 6: 6 in FIG. 119, and processing method symbol (FIG. 118 processing method symbol file) ), For example, adding L, M, MPC, G, etc. For example, 1L, 3G, etc., which are also called finish symbols in the input of this example.
In the ISO system, a finishing symbol and a finished surface roughness numerical value are input. For example, the finishing symbol column is G for the machining method symbol, and the finishing surface column is a symbol for specifying the measuring method, for example, centerline average roughness: a, maximum height: S, 10-point average roughness: Z is selected and added, and input is made as in (6.3a), (6.3S), and (6.3Z).

The machining method symbol (FIG. 77) is entered in addition to the finishing symbol.
The method of using the machining method symbol file is determined by reading the inside of the intersection between the finishing symbol and the machining method symbol when it is 1, and when it is 0, it is determined that machining is impossible. However, when finishing symbols 5 and 6 are entered, it is necessary to input finishing roughness. If there is no input, an alarm is given. If the finishing symbol number is 1 after reading the finishing symbol number corresponding to the roughness rank 1 to 4 in the finishing symbol file and reading in the intersection の between the finishing symbol number and the machining method symbol in the machining method symbol file When it is possible to process, and 0, it is determined that processing is impossible.

  The finish surface roughness is entered in micrometer units. For example, 6.3S is input. (If it is not necessary for the inverted triangle display of the old JIS method, it may be omitted.)

  The shape and position accuracy are input based on JIS. The accuracy of the shape and position is input with the three elements of symbol, reference surface, and accuracy, and the check for each is checked with the shape and position accuracy file of FIG. 139 to confirm the pass / fail of the symbol and the necessity of the reference surface. For the symbols and accuracy content, the symbols shown in (a) to (h) of FIG. 139 are input for the following straightness, flatness, roundness, cylindricity, parallelism, squareness, coaxiality, and runout, respectively. I tried to do it.

  The method for inputting the specifications of the taper, angle, and gradient is as described in the material input described above.

  The input of the specifications of the screw has already been described above and will be omitted.

  As the specifications of tempering, the tempering symbol, tempering hardness, and tempering depth are input. The tempering symbol is composed of alphanumeric characters as in the example shown in FIG. 138 and is input using this. As the tempered hardness, a predetermined hardness value such as Rockwell C: HRC, Rockwell 15N: 15N or HR15N, Vickers: HV, Brinell: HB, etc. is input as the required hardness. Since the tempering depth differs depending on the material, the necessary depth is specified. The heat treatment symbol, hardness designation, and applicable material are checked against the file contents shown in FIG. 138 to determine whether the input is appropriate, and an alarm is issued for an inappropriate input to request the operator to correct it.

  The surface treatment is input based on JIS, for example, zinc plating: MFZn20-c2.

  The above input is performed for each level (if there is no input item, there is no need for input). All levels are input.

Sequences 54 and 55 shown in FIG. 149 are examples in which specifications of lengths across steps are input. In this example, the input of the specification of the length across the stages is an input in which the reference stage is set to 1 and the designated stage is set to 9 stages, and the reference stage is set to 9 and the designated stage is set to 28 stages.
Reference stage: 1, reference position start point / end point shoulder classification: E (select from start point: S, end point: E. Description of similar parts and similar parts is omitted hereinafter), machining specification stage: 9, reference position Length from: +50. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: +0.050, lower dimensional difference: 0. Enter.
Reference stage: 9, reference point start / end shoulder classification: E, process specification stage: 28, length dimension from reference position: +150. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: -0.010, lower dimensional difference: -0.090.

A sequence 56 shown in FIG. 149 is an example of inputting the specifications of the subsequent center hole.
Angle: 60, Format: B4,

Sequences 57 to 60 shown in FIG. 149 are examples in which grooving is input. In sequence 57, groove number: 1, reference step: 4, division from start / end shoulder (S / E): S, processing designation step: 4, division of designated position reference groove end surface (S / E): S , Dimensions from shoulder; size of dimension from start / end shoulder: 0. , Tolerance symbol: Skip, Upper dimensional difference: Skip, Lower dimensional difference: Skip, Groove type (Standardized and registered groove type, file registered by entering this registration symbol In this example, since this type of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input.
Specifications of groove bottom; Diameter: 31. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip, finish symbol: 2L, finished surface roughness: skip, groove width specifications; groove width: 5. , Tolerance symbol: Skip, Upper dimensional difference: Skip, Lower dimensional difference: Skip, Start point side groove end surface finish; Finish symbol: 2L, Finish surface roughness: Skip, End side groove end surface finish; Finish symbol: 2L, Finish surface roughness Length: Skip, cornering of groove; size on start side: 0.4, size on end side: 0.4, cornering on groove: chamfering, cornering of groove corner Division (C / R): Skip, Size: 0. , Chamfering at end point side of groove angle, chamfering division (C / R): C, size: 1. Enter.
For the groove numbers 2, 3, and 4, each numerical value is input according to the sequence 57.

A sequence 61 in FIG. 150 is an example in which the keyway in FIG. 50 is input.
As shown in sequence 61, keyway number: 1, front stage: 38, rear stage: 36, keyway classification (If you standardize and register the type of keyway, it will be registered by entering this symbol. In this example, since this type of setting is not set, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Key groove width specifications; Key groove width: 8. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0. , Lower dimensional difference: -0.03, Finish symbol: 2M, Finished surface roughness: Skip, Overall length of keyway: 30.82, Specifications of keyway depth; Processing specification level: 37, Depth classification: H (Diameter method: W, Depth method: D, Center method: H is selected and specified as a method for specifying depth), Depth: 8.5, Tolerance symbol: Skip, Upper dimensional difference: 0. , Dimensional difference below: -0.1, Finishing symbol: 2M, Finished surface roughness: Skip, Keyway type: 1 (Standardized key type, for example, one side bottom keyway: 1, both side bottom key Register as follows: groove: 2, single-end end mill keyway: 3, double end mill keyway: 4, slotter groove: 5. By entering this symbol, the cutter type and keyway shape can be specified. No need to enter the cutter category because the file is read and automatically input.) If this type is not set, the cutter specifications; Category: S (End mill: E, Side Cutter: S, Other: B, and input.), Cutter diameter: 45. , Specifications of key groove reference position; shoulder step: 38, section from start / end shoulder: E, dimension from shoulder: 0. , Angle from the reference position of the keyway: 0. Enter.

  Sequences 62 and 63 in FIG. 150 are examples in which the end face key groove in FIG. 45 is input. In the sequence 62, the keyway number: 2, the previous stage: 8, the rear stage: 10, and the keyway classification (If standardized and registered the keyway type, the file registered by entering this symbol will be In this example, since this type of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input. 7. Key groove width specifications; Key groove width: 8. Tolerance symbol: H8 (When this symbol is input, the upper dimension difference: 0.0 and the lower dimension difference: +0.022 are automatically input using the keyway width 8. as a parameter), finishing symbol : 2M, Finished surface roughness: Skip, Total length of keyway: 9. (Since this example is a through groove, it is input as a slotter groove, so input 9.), key groove depth specifications; machining specification level: 9, depth: 4. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: +0.1, lower dimensional difference: 0. , Finishing symbol: 2M, Finishing surface roughness: Skip, Keyway type: 5 (The input method of this item was described above in the keyway of sequence 61.) If this type is not set, the specifications of the cutter; Category: B (The input method of this item was described in the sequence 61 key groove.), Cutter diameter: Skip (Specify the cutter diameter as it is a slotter process), Key groove reference position specifications; Shoulder Stage: 9, classification from start point / end point: S (the input method of this item was described above in the sequence 61 keyway), dimension from shoulder: 0. , Angle from the reference position of the keyway Enter.

  Since the sequence 63 is a groove whose phase of the key groove of the sequence 62 is shifted by 180 degrees, if the key number: 3 is input, the above quote is continued and the angle from the reference position of the last key groove: +180. Exit by typing

  FIG. 151 is an example in which the 1-5 reamer hole in the view A of FIG. 45 is input. In sequence 64, machining order: 1, hole number: 1, machining designation level: 9, hole type (when standardized and registered the hole type, it was registered by entering this symbol and number. Since the file is read and input automatically, no further input is necessary.) In this example, since this type of setting is not made, the symbol: R (Drill: D, Reamer: R, Dish pan: C, Chamfering) Counterbore: S, Taper: T, Hole: B, etc.), Specification of reference position; Hole number: 1, Rotation angle from reference value: -90. Degree, starting point / ending point from shoulder: skip, dimension from shoulder: skip, hole center position from axis: skip, angle with Z axis: skip, angle with X axis: angle with skip, Y axis: Skip, hole specifications; hole step number: 1 (Each step can be input with a format that can input multi-step holes with concentric circles with different diameters, but in this example, it is a single reamer hole. Stage number: 1)), hole diameter: 5. , Shape: S (taper: T, angle: A, straight: S, select more), taper / angle size: skip, tolerance symbol: H8 (when this symbol is entered, hole diameter: 5 Is automatically entered as the upper dimensional difference: +0.018, the lower dimensional difference: 0.), finishing symbol: 3DR, finished surface roughness: skip, countersink, dishing Original: Chamfering and dishing classification: S (Chamfering: C, dishing: Select from S), Chamfering, dishing diameter: 6. , Panning angle: 90. Degrees, specifications of hole depth; redness classification: D (select from diameter width method: W, depth method: D, center method: H), depth: 5. , Street / stop classification (P / S): S (street: P, stop: S, select more), tolerance symbol: skip, top dimension difference: skip, bottom dimension difference: skip, finish of hole bottom Symbol: Skip, Finished surface roughness of hole bottom: Skip, Number of holes: 1, Specifications of hole position (1); Processing pitch circle diameter: 40. , Circumferential direction division angle classification (C / N): C (Equal division: C, Unjust division: N is selected) Hole number: 1, Division angle: 0 are input. The hole position can also be input in the XY coordinates using the hole position specification (2).

  This example is a simple reamer hole input example, but as you can see from the input format, this input method is compatible with all types of holes, multi-stage holes, drilling angles, etc. An input format for hole positions based on XY coordinates is provided, and this processing method also includes a processing method that enables output of command values that can be processed.

  152 is an example of inputting the 6-M5 screw hole in the view A of FIG. The 6-M5 screw holes in FIG. 45A are divided and input into four holes at equal intervals of 90 degrees in sequence 65 and two holes at intervals of 180 degrees in sequence 66. In sequence 65, machining order: 1, tap hole number: 1, machining designation stage: 9, tap hole type (standardized and registered hole type, register by entering this symbol and number) This file is read and automatically input, so no further input is necessary.) In this example, since this type of setting is not made, symbol: M (metric screw: M, Whitworth screw: W, unified screw) : UNC, UNF, pipe parallel thread: G, pipe taper thread: R, Rc, Rp, etc.), reference position specifications; reference tap hole number: 1, rotation angle from reference position: -45. Degree, dimension from start / end shoulder: skip, center from hole center position: skip, angle with Z axis: skip, angle with X axis: skip, angle with Y axis: skip, specifications of tapped holes (A) Tap diameter: 5. , Tap pitch: 0.8, right twist / left twist classification (R / L): R (select from right twist: R, left twist: L), number of tap holes: 4, specification of hole position (1); Processing pitch circle diameter: 40. , Division in circumferential direction (C / N): C (select from equal division: C, illegal division: N), tap hole number: 1, division angle: -90. Degree, tapped hole specifications (b); shape: S (taper: T, angle: A, straight: S, select more), taper / angle size: skip, counterbore, countersunk dimensions; Counterbore / dish removal category: S (select from Chamfering: C, Dish removal: S), Drawer / dishout diameter: 5.2, Dish removal angle: 90. Depth, counterbore depth classification: skip (when specified, diameter width method: W, depth method: D, center method: H, select from), counterbore depth: skip, depth of tapped hole Specifications: Depth: 7. , Street / stop classification: S (select from street: P, stop: S), specifications of tap pilot hole; pilot hole diameter: 4.2, pilot hole depth: 10.5.

  This example is an input example of a tapped hole at a simple position. As can be seen from the input format, this input method is an input format that can handle any drilling angle, a hole position on a concentric circle, or a hole based on XY coordinates. A position input format is provided, and this processing method includes a processing method that enables output of a command value that can be processed.

  In the sequence 66, a quotation is input in accordance with the sequence 65. Input items with different input values are: machining order: 2, tap hole number: 2, rotation angle from reference position: 0. Degrees, number of tapped holes: 2, split angle: -180. Degree.

Sequences 67 and 68 in FIG. 153 are examples of inputting the internal cam in the section CC in FIG.
In sequence 67, cam number: 1, machining specification level: 4, reference specifications of internal cam; reference angle: 0. Degree, reference circle: 22. , Cam type (If standardized and cam type is registered, the registered file is read and input automatically by inputting these symbols and numbers, so no further input is required.) Then, since this kind of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Point number: 1, specification of start point coordinates; distance from center: 11. , Tolerance symbol: H6 (The symbol is H8, but the radius is increased and the tolerance grade is increased to be equal to the diameter value. When this H6 is entered, the distance from the center: 11. Dimensional difference: +0.011, lower dimensional difference: 0.), angle: 0. Degree, upper tolerance: +. 001 degrees, lower tolerance:-. 001 degree, specification of end point coordinate; distance from center: 19. Tolerance symbol: H6 (The symbol shown is H8, but the radius is increased and the tolerance grade is increased to be equal to the diameter value. When this H6 is entered, the distance from the center: 19. Dimensional difference: +0.013, lower dimensional difference: 0 is automatically input), angle: -180. Degree, above tolerance:. 0 degrees, lower tolerance:. 0 degrees, arc radius specifications; radius size: 15. Tolerance symbol: H6 (The symbol in the figure is H8, but the radius is increased and the tolerance grade is increased to be equal to the diameter value. When this H6 is entered, the distance from the center: 15. Dimensional difference: +0.011 and lower dimensional difference: 0 are automatically entered.), Arc center angle: skip, distance to arc center: skip, cam surface finish; finish symbol: 2M, Finished surface roughness: skip, cam chamfer specifications; start chamfer chamfer / chamfer classification (C / R): skip (can be machined with a special tool. Input for preparation. No need to skip.), Size: Skip, Chamfering / Chamfering (C / R): C, Size: 0.5. The sequence 68 is the second point input. In accordance with sequence 67, a citation is also input.

  The above input example is an example of input of the start point, end point coordinates and arc radius. Basically it is a format that can input a point sequence, but as you can see from the input format, an input format that can also specify the arc center coordinates by the arc center angle instead of the arc radius and the distance to the arc center. In addition, the present processing method includes a processing method that enables output of a command value that enables these processing.

Sequences 69 to 72 in FIG. 154 are examples of inputting the end face direction cam in the F views of FIGS. 5151 to 52.
In sequence 69, cam number: 2, machining designation step: 15, end face direction cam specifications; reference angle: 0. Degree, reference circle: 61. Reference stage: 9. , Cam type (If standardized and cam type is registered, the registered file is read and input automatically by inputting these symbols and numbers, so no further input is required.) Then, since this kind of setting is not made, input is skipped and the next item is input. Point number: 1, specifications of start point coordinates; angle: 0. Degree, upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, division from start / end shoulder: E, dimension from shoulder: -25. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0. Lower dimensional difference: -0.020, specifications of end point coordinates; angle: -90. Degree, upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, division from start / end shoulder: E, dimension from shoulder: -25. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0. , Lower dimensional difference: -0.020, arc radius specification: radius size: skip, tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: skip, lower dimensional difference: skip, arc center angle: skip, arc Center start / end shoulder classification (S / E): skip, dimension from arc center shoulder: skip, cam surface finish specifications; finish symbol: 2M, finish surface roughness: skip, cam corner Chamfer specifications: Chamfering / Chamfering of corners on the outer peripheral side (C / R): C (Select from Chamfering: C, Chamfering: R), Size: 0.5, Inner peripheral side Chamfer / Chamfer classification (C / R): Skip, Size: Skip. The sequences 70 to 72 are also input using quotations in accordance with the sequence 69.

  The above input example is an example of input of the start point and end point coordinates. It is basically a format that can input point sequences, and as you can see from the input format, it has an input format that can specify an arc curved surface by the arc radius, the angle of the arc center, the dimension from the shoulder of the arc center, This processing method includes a processing method that enables output of command values that can be processed.

Sequences 73 to 76 in FIG. 155 are examples of inputting the cylindrical groove cam in the G view of FIGS. 5353 to 54.
In sequence 73, cam number: 3, machining designation stage: 20, reference specifications of cylindrical cam; reference angle: 0. Degree, division from start / end shoulder (S / E): S, dimension from shoulder: −5. , Cam type (If standardized and cam type is registered, the registered file is read and input automatically by inputting these symbols and numbers, so no further input is required.) Then, since this kind of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Point number: 1, specifications of start point coordinates; angle: 0. Degrees, upper tolerance: +0.05 degrees, lower tolerance: -0.05 degrees, length: 0. Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: +0.05, lower dimensional difference: -0.05, end point coordinate specifications; angle: +90. Degree, upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, length: -20. Tolerance symbol: skip, top dimension difference: +0.01, bottom dimension difference: -0.01, arc radius specification; radius size: skip, tolerance symbol: skip, top dimension difference: skip, bottom Dimensional difference: Skip, arc center angle: skip, arc center start / end shoulder classification (S / E): skip, arc center shoulder dimension: skip, groove type (standardized groove If the type is registered, the registered file is read and input automatically by inputting this symbol, so there is no need to input it later.) In this example, this type is not set, so input Skips and inputs the next item. Specifications of groove width; groove width: 6. , Tolerance symbol: H8 (When this H8 is input, the upper dimensional difference: +0.018 and the lower dimensional difference: 0 are automatically input using the groove width: 6. as a parameter.) Symbol: 2M, Finished surface roughness: Skip, Finished symbol on the right side of the groove: 2M, Finished surface roughness: Skip, specification of groove depth; Depth: 5. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip, finish symbol: 2M, finish surface roughness: skip, cornering specifications; left size: 0.5, right size S: Left citation (left citation is provided with a dedicated key or soft menu key set to this) (0.5), chamfering specifications; left corner of groove angle Chamfering and chamfering division (C / R): C, size: 1. Enter the chamfered chamfer classification (C / R): left citation (C) and size: left citation (1.).

  The above input example is an example of input of the start point and end point coordinates. Basically, it is a format that can input point sequences, but as you can see from the input format, it has an input format that allows you to specify an arc surface according to the arc radius, the angle of the arc center, and the dimension from the shoulder of the arc center. This processing method includes a processing method that enables output of command values that can be processed.

Sequences 77 and 78 in FIG. 156 are examples in which the outer shape cam in the view H in FIG. 55 is input.
In the sequence 77, the cam number: 4, the machining specification step: 27, the reference specifications of the outer cam; the reference angle: 0. Degree, reference circle: 110. , Cam type (If standardized and cam type is registered, the registered file is read and input automatically by inputting these symbols and numbers, so no further input is required.) Then, since this kind of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Point number: 1, specification of start point coordinates; distance from center: 55. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip, angle: 0. Degree, upper tolerance: +0.05, lower tolerance: -0.05, end point coordinates; distance from center: 40. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip, angle: 180. , Upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, arc radius specification; radius size: 50. , Tolerance symbol: h6 (When this h6 is input, the upper dimension difference: 0.0 and the lower dimension difference: -0.016 are automatically input using the radius size: 50. as a parameter), arc Center angle: Skip, Distance to arc center: Skip, cam surface finish specifications; Finish symbol: 3G, Finish surface roughness: Skip, Width chamfer specifications of the cam on the start point side; Corner chamfer / Chamfering section (C / R): C, size: 0.5, specifications of chamfering of the cam at the end point of the width; chamfering chamfering / chamfering section (C / R): left quotation ( C), Size: Enter the quote (0.5) on the left. Similarly, the sequence 78 is input. The result is as shown in FIG.

  The above input example is an example of input of start point, end point coordinates and arc radius. Basically, it is a format that can input a sequence of points, but as you can see from the input format, an input format that can specify an arbitrary circular curved surface according to the arc radius, the angle of the arc center, and the dimension from the shoulder of the arc center. In addition, the present processing method includes a processing method that enables output of a command value that enables these processing.

Sequences 79 and 80 in FIG. 157 are input examples of the end face groove cam in the H views in FIGS. 55 to 56.
In sequence 79, cam number: 5, processing specification level: 28, cam type (if standardized and cam type is registered, the file registered by inputting this symbol and number is read and automatically entered. In this example, since this type of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Cam division (I / E): E (select from inner circumferential cam: I, outer circumferential cam: E), point number: 1, specification of start point coordinates; , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip, angle: 0. Degree, upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, end point coordinates; distance from center point: 39. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimension difference: skip, lower dimension difference: skip, angle: +180. Degree, upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, arc radius specification; radius size: -44. Tolerance symbol: h7 (When this h7 is input, the upper dimension difference: 0 and the lower dimension difference: -0.018 are automatically input with the radius size: -44. As a parameter), arc The center position of the radius: Distance from the center of the radius center: Skip, Center angle from the reference point: Skip, Groove type (Register the groove type as standardized, and register by entering this symbol. In this example, since this type of setting is not set, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Specifications of cam groove; groove width: 8. , Tolerance symbol: H8 (When this H8 is input, the upper dimensional difference: +0.018 and the lower dimensional difference: 0 are automatically input using the groove width: 8. as a parameter.) Finishing symbol: 2M, Finished surface roughness: Skip, Finishing of large groove surface; Finishing symbol: 2M, Finishing surface roughness: Skip, depth of cam groove; Depth: 4. , Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: +0.1, lower dimensional difference: 0. , Finishing symbol: 2M, Finished surface roughness: Skip, Cornering specifications of groove bottom; Groove small diameter side: 0.5, Groove large diameter side: 0.5, Groove corner chamfering specifications; Chamfering / Chamfering of groove angle (C / R): C (Chamfering: C, Chamfering: R, select more), Size: 0.5, Groove corner chamfering / Chamfering on the large diameter (C / R): Left citation (C), Size: Left citation (0.5).

  The above input example is an example of input of start point, end point coordinates and arc radius. Basically, it is a format that can input point sequences, but as you can see from the input format, specify the arc center position: distance from center of radius center, center angle from reference point, or X coordinate, Y An input format that can specify an arbitrary circular curved surface by coordinates is provided, and this processing method has a processing method that enables output of command values that can be processed.

FIG. 158 shows an input example of a regular decagon polygon in the view A of FIG.
In the sequence 81, the plane number is 1, the specification of the reference position; the previous stage: 11, the processing designation stage: 12, the section from the start / end shoulder (S / E): S, the distance from the shoulder: 0. , Angle: 0. , Plane type (If standardized and registered plane type, the registered file is read and automatically entered by inputting this symbol, so there is no need for further input.) Then, since this kind of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Number of planes: 10, plane dimensions; width size: -10. , Tolerance symbol: Skip, Top dimension difference: Skip, Bottom dimension difference: Skip, Side finish symbol on the reference position side: Skip, Finish surface roughness: Skip, Side finish symbol on the non-reference position side: 2M, Finish surface Roughness: skip, dimensions of outer cylindrical plane depth; measurement specification stage: 12, depth classification: H (select from diameter width method: W, depth method: D, center method: H), depth S: 25. Tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: 0. , Lower dimensional difference: -0.05, Finish symbol: 2M, Finish surface roughness: Skip.

FIG. 159 shows an input example of the internal gear in the section BB in FIG.
In sequence 82, internal gear number: 1, specification of reference position; front stage: 5, rear stage: 7, machining designation stage: 6, section from start / end shoulder (S / E): E, dimension from shoulder: 10. , Angle: 0. , Gear type (If the gear type is registered after standardization, the registered file is read and input automatically by inputting this symbol, so there is no need for further input.) Then, since this kind of setting is not made, the input is skipped and the next item is input. Gear specifications: Spur gear / Helical gear classification (S / H): S (Spur gear: S, Helical gear: H, or more) Reference section (basic): T (Tooth right angle Plane: T, Axis perpendicular to the axis: A.) Tooth profile: JISB1701 (Select standard numbers such as JISB1702, ISOR53, USASB6, 1, etc.), Module: 1.5, Pressure angle: 20. Number of teeth: 18, twist angle: 0. , Lead: skip, angle / lead classification (A / L): skip, upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, tooth width (valid): 10. Overpin diameter: 23.648, upper dimensional difference: +0.06, lower dimensional difference: 0.0. , Pin diameter: 2.52, finishing specifications; method: E (hob cutting: H, gear shaper cutting: S, tooth grinding: G, shaving: V, gear honing: R, electrical discharge machining: E ), Finishing symbol: skip, finishing surface roughness: 3.0S. In addition to this, there is also a format that allows input of the specifications of the straddle tooth thickness of the specified method for measuring the tooth thickness of the gear; tooth thickness, number of straddle teeth, tolerance symbol, upper dimensional difference, lower dimensional difference I tried to be able to input with a high degree.

FIG. 160 shows an input example of the external gear in the section JJ in FIG.
In sequence 83, external gear number; 1, specifications of reference position; front stage: 30, rear stage: 32, machining designation stage: 31, section from start / end shoulder (S / E): S, dimension from shoulder: 0. , Angle: 0. Degree, gear type (If you standardize and register the gear type, you can input this symbol to read the registered file and input it automatically, so you don't need to input it later.) In the example, since this kind of setting is not made, input is skipped and the next item is input. Gear specifications: Spur gear / helical gear classification (S / H): S (select from Spur gear: S, helical gear: H), reference cross section (basic): T (tooth Right-angle plane: T, axis-right-angle plane: A, and more.), Tooth profile: JISB1701 (select standard numbers such as JISB1701, ISOR53, USASB6.1), module: 2.5, pressure angle: 20. Degree, number of teeth: 19, twist angle: 0. , Lead: skip, angle / lead classification (A / L): skip, upper tolerance: skip, lower tolerance: skip, tooth width (valid): 10. , Specifications of straddling tooth thickness; tooth thickness: 18.451, number of straddling teeth: 3, tolerance symbol: skip, upper dimensional difference: -0.01, lower dimensional difference: -0.025, finishing specifications Method: H (hob cutting: H, gear shaper cutting: S, tooth grinding: G, shaving: V, gear honing: R, electric discharge machining: E, selection), finishing symbol: 3H, finishing surface roughness : Enter skip. In addition to this, the specification of the overpin of the specified method for measuring the tooth thickness of the gears is also possible, and there is a format that can input the overpin diameter, the upper dimensional difference, the lower dimensional difference, and the pin diameter. I tried to do that. If input is performed as described above, step 3 is completed.

In step 6, finish graphic processing is performed according to the procedure shown in FIG.
This determines the final shape dimension to be machined based on the input data and calculates the shape dimension before surface processing.
Final finished shape dimensions are processed from data with tolerance symbol or tolerance (upper dimensional difference, lower dimensional difference) input in nominal dimensions such as diameter, length, radius, width, depth, angle, screw, etc. Calculate the final finish average dimension. In addition, when surface treatment is performed, there are cases where the surface shape is added to the finished shape dimension and cases where the surface shape is reduced.

These processes start at step 600. In step 610, the sequence counter is set to the sequence of finishing shape step number 1 (16 in this example). In step 620, the presence or absence of dimensional tolerance data is determined including the screw tolerance symbol. If not, it is determined in step 640 whether or not it is the end of the finished shape sequence, and if it is not the end, the counter is incremented by 1 in step 641, and the process returns to step 620 and is repeated. In this case, the finished shape dimension is calculated by equation (21).
Finishing dimension = nominal dimension + {(upper dimensional difference) + (lower dimensional difference)} / 2 (21)
Here, the finishing shape dimension and the nominal dimension are read as diameter, length, radius, width, depth, angle, screw, etc., and the input data is processed.

For screws, the upper and lower dimensions of the outer diameter or inner diameter and the upper and lower dimensions of the effective diameter of the male screw or female screw are read from the screw shape file and averaged to obtain the finished shape dimensions. .
The procedure for reading the upper dimension and the lower dimension from the thread shape file from the specification input value of the 18th stage screw in this example is shown in FIG. 116 thread shape file (M male thread), category: M, designation. From the column indicated by the lower arrow in the figure corresponding to diameter: 72, pitch: 1.5, accuracy: JIS 6g
Outer diameter; upper dimension: 71.968, lower dimension: 71.732
Effective diameter; upper dimension: 70.994, lower dimension: 70.833
Is read out.
The result of the averaging calculation process is
Outside diameter; (71.968 + 71.732) /2=71.850
Effective diameter; (70.994 + 70.833) /2=70.914
It becomes.
The way to read the upper and lower dimensions from the screw shape file based on the input values of the 37th stage screw is as follows: From the screw shape file (M male thread) in FIG. : 25, Pitch: 1.5, Accuracy: JIS 6g
Outer diameter; upper dimension: 24.968, lower dimension: 24.732
Effective diameter; upper dimension: 23.994, lower dimension: 23.844
Is read out.
The result of the averaging calculation process is
Outer diameter; (24.968 + 24.732) /2=24.850
Effective diameter; (23.994 + 23.844) /2=23.919
It becomes.
Since the effective diameter of the screw is not included in the input items of this example and there is no predetermined file location, it is stored in the temporary area of the storage unit.
Although it is easy to make it possible to input the effective diameter and other information in detail in the input format, this example is an alternative method using a screw file to avoid complicated input.

  When the processing of this sequence is completed, it is determined in step 640 whether or not it is the end of the finished shape sequence.

If it is determined in step 640 that the finish shape sequence is the end, the surface treatment designation processing is performed, and in step 650, the sequence counter is set to n (set to the finish shape column number 1 sequence, 16 in this example). In step 660, it is determined whether or not surface treatment is designated. If it is determined in step 660 that surface treatment is designated, the process proceeds to step 670 to perform surface treatment designation processing. When this processing is completed, the presence / absence of the next sequence is determined in step 680, and if the next sequence is present, the sequence is advanced by 1 in step 681 and the process returns to step 660 and is repeated. If there is no next sequence in step 680, the series of processes are all finished in step 690 and the process returns to step 6 of the main process to continue to the next step 7. On the other hand, if no surface treatment is specified in step 660, the process continues to step 680. Step 680 and subsequent steps have already been described above.
The processing results are shown in FIGS. 161 to 172.
In finishing graphic processing, it is determined whether or not grooving processing is input by general graphic input processing. It is necessary to include an item for selecting how to process each segment of the figure by determining whether or not to perform the processing.
The figure discrimination of the grooving input is performed at step 807.

The calculation of the shape dimension before the surface treatment in step 670 is performed as follows. Starting at step 6700, the presence / absence of the designated code file is determined at step 6701.
Shape dimensions before surface treatment = (final finishing dimension)-(file data value) (22)
When this process ends, the process ends at step 6705, returns to step 670, and continues to step 680. Alternatively, if it is determined in step 6701 that there is no specified code file, a warning process is performed in step 6703 and the process is stopped. After the operator performs necessary measures in step 6704, the return of step 650 can be continued by resetting.

Next, in step 7, graphic processing before another process finish is performed. This processing procedure is shown in FIG. This means that the finishing allowance of each part is read from the finishing allowance file shown in FIGS. It is a process to add. Starting at step 700, the sequence counter is set to n (set to the sequence of finished shape step number 1, in this example, 16) at step 710. In step 720, it is determined whether or not there is a finish code other than L in the input data. If there is any other than L, in step 730, the shape dimension with finish allowance is calculated.
The equation is according to equation (23).
Shape dimension with finishing allowance = Final shape dimension before surface treatment + Finishing allowance (23)
Here, the input data is processed by replacing the shape dimensions with diameter, length, radius, width, depth, angle, and the like.
The processing results of this input example are shown in FIGS. 173 to 176.
When this processing is completed, the presence or absence of the next sequence is determined in step 740. If there is, the sequence is advanced by 1 in step 741 and the process returns to step 720 to repeat step 740.
Alternatively, if there is no next sequence in step 740, the process ends in step 750 and returns to step 7 of the main process to continue to step 8.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 720 that there is no finish symbol other than L, step 740 follows.
The processing after step 740 has already been described above.

In step 8, a graphic pattern is identified using information on each stage such as a start point and an end point.
Pattern identification here is to identify the outer diameter, inner diameter, end face, groove, etc. using the information of each stage such as the start point, end point, etc. Say to do. The result of pattern identification is used to create, select, determine tool shape and determine cutter location.
The pattern identification in this example is performed according to the procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10 based on the sequence number 3 in FIG. 143 and the step input information from the first step input in the line segment without using the graphic input format.
Begin at step 800. In step 801, the counter is set to 0. In step 802, 1 is added to the counter. In step 803, the input data of the counter n stage is read. In step 804, the input data is analyzed. In step 806, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the data stage. In the case of the last data stage determined as YES in step 806, pattern identification is performed in step 807. When this is completed, the process ends in step 808, returns to step 8 of the main process, and continues to step 9.

The detailed contents of the input data analysis in step 804 are as follows. Starting at step 8040, the direction of the input data is calculated at step 8040, and the sign of the input data is determined by comparing the magnitudes of the input data by (end point coordinate)-(start point coordinate). For example, when the start point and end point of the first stage in this example are compared. The figure is in the X + direction. In step 8042, a constituent line segment of the figure is calculated. The reference of the constituent line segment is expressed by taking the X + line segment as the reference line and taking the phase angle as + in the counterclockwise direction, and the formula (24) is used.
θ = tan −1 [{(end point coordinate; X) − (start point coordinate; X)} / {(end point coordinate; Z) − (start point coordinate; Z)}] − 90 ° (24)
For example, when calculating from the start point and end point of the first stage in this example, the phase angle is 0 degree.
In step 8043, this subroutine is terminated. After completion, the process returns to step 804.
In this example, the processing result of the first stage is X + direction, 0 degree, the second stage is Z + direction, -90 degrees, the third stage is X + direction, 0 degrees, the fourth stage is Z + direction, -90 degrees. , ...
The graphic space in this case is the right side as promised.

  Details of the pattern identification in step 807 are shown in FIG. 11 and are as follows. In step 80700, the analysis data in step 804 is read from the first stage to the third stage in step 80701. In step 80702, it is determined whether or not the Z end point coordinate of the Z + stage in the data string is the maximum value of the figure. If YES in step 80703, the area up to this stage is determined as the inner diameter.

  If NO in step 80702 is NO, which is not the maximum value of the graphic, it is determined in step 80704 whether the Z-start Z coordinate of the Z-stage is the maximum value of the graphic. If the maximum value of the graphic is YES, step 80705 is determined. Thus, the outer diameter is determined after this stage.

  If NO in step 80704 is NO, it is determined in step 80706 whether the data string is Z +, X +, Z ±, and the data string is Z +, X +, Z ±. In step 80707, it is determined in step 80707 whether the Z end point coordinate of the Z + step is the maximum value of the figure. If NO in step 80708, the X + step is determined as the end face in step 80708.

  If it is determined in step 80707 that the maximum value of the figure is YES, in step 80709, the X + level is determined as the end surface on the Z + side.

  If it is determined in step 80706 that the data string is not Z +, X +, Z ±, NO is determined in step 80710 whether the data string is Z−, X−, Z ±, and the data string is , Z-, X-, Z ±, if YES, in step 80711, it is determined whether the Z end point coordinate of the previous Z-stage is the minimum value of the figure. In step 80712, the X-stage is determined as the end face. If YES in step 80711, the X-stage is determined as the Z0 side end face in step 80713.

  If it is determined in step 80710 that the data string is not Z−, X−, Z ±, NO, it is determined in step 80714 whether or not the data string is X +, Z +, X−. , X +, Z +, X-, if YES, it is determined in step 80715 whether or not the preceding and following data strings are grooves, and in the multi-stage groove, the data is inverted except for the difference in the size of the X-inverted data. Is identified as a groove. Hereinafter, the same multi-step groove discrimination is performed by replacing the X data with the graphic data. If the data string is NO, which is not X +, Z +, X−, it is determined in step 80716 that the inner diameter is one-step groove.

  If it is determined in step 80715 that the preceding and succeeding data strings are “YES” in the groove, in step 80717, it is determined that the inner diameter multi-stage groove. If it is determined in step 80714 that the data string is not X +, Z +, X−, NO, it is determined in step 80718 whether the data string is X−, Z−, X +, and the data string is If YES in X−, Z−, X +, it is determined in step 80719 whether or not the preceding and succeeding data strings are grooves. If the preceding and following data strings are not grooves, the outer diameter is one step in step 80720. Determined as a groove.

  If it is determined in step 80719 that the preceding and succeeding data strings are “YES” in the groove, it is determined in step 80721 that it is an outer diameter multi-stage groove.

  If it is determined in step 80718 that the data string is not X−, Z−, X +, NO is determined in step 80722 whether the data string is Z−, X +, Z +, and the data string, Z−. , X +, Z +, if YES, it is determined in step 80723 whether or not the preceding and following data strings are grooves. And decide.

  If YES in step 80723, the data space of the data row is confirmed in step 80725 and identified as a multi-step groove on the Z + side end face. If it is determined in step 80722 that the data string is not Z-, X +, Z +, NO is determined in step 80726 whether the data string is Z +, X-, Z-, and the data string, Z +, X If YES in −, Z−, it is determined in step 80727 whether the preceding and succeeding data strings are grooves. If NO in the preceding and following data strings is not a groove, in step 80728, one step on the Z-side end face is determined. Determined as a groove.

  If it is determined in step 80727 that the preceding and succeeding data string is YES in the groove, in step 80729, it is determined as a multi-stage groove on the Z-side end face.

  The identification results in Step 80703, Step 80705, Step 80708, Step 80709, Step 80712, Step 80713, Step 80716, Step 80717, Step 80720, Step 80721, Step 80724, Step 80725, Step 80728, and Step 80729 are as follows. In step 80730, an identification label is added to each analysis data stage. When this process is finished, step 80731 follows.

If it is determined in step 80726 that the data string is not Z +, X−, Z−, NO, in step 80731, the presence / absence of remaining data is determined. If the remaining data is YES, step 80732 is determined. The first data in the analysis data string is erased, the next data is read and advanced by one stage, the process returns to step 80702, and the process up to step 80731 is repeated until there is no data. If there is no remaining data in step 80731 and NO is determined, the process ends in step 80733. After this processing, the process returns to Step 807, returns to Step 8 through Step 808, and continues to Step 9.
Here, the code of the figure is
Inner diameter; I
Internal arc; IR
ID gradient; IS
Inner diameter end face; IF
Internal groove: IG
Outer diameter; E
OD arc; ER
Outside diameter gradient; ES
OD end face; EF
Outside diameter groove; EG
End face; F
End surface arc; FR
End face groove; FG
And
The processing result of this example is as follows as shown in FIG.
The first level is the X + direction, 0 degrees, IF,
The second level is Z + direction, -90 degrees, I,
The third level is X + direction, 0 degree, IF,
The fourth level is the Z + direction, -90 degrees, I,
・
・ (Omitted)
・
The 38th stage is in the X-direction, +180 degrees, F.

  As a result of processing this example according to this processing procedure, the data inversion of the Z-th of the 12th stage of the data row of the 10th stage: Z + and the 11th stage: X + and the 12th stage: Z- and the 10th stage Since there is no Z value larger than the Z value in the input until the end, the eleventh stage is the Z + side end surface, the inner diameter is up to the 10th stage, the outer diameter is from the 12th stage to the 37th stage, and the final stage is 38. The steps are end faces on the Z0 side, and the steps 28 to 30 are 52.5 to 40. Width up to 10. Identify the grooves and shapes.

  As another graphic example, if the eleventh step is an input with a taper shape, that is, if the Z value of the end point coordinate is larger than the Z value of the start point coordinate, and there is no step other than this step that can be identified as the end face, It is called a side end face. Further, if the eleventh step is a taper shape input, that is, if the Z value of the end point coordinate is smaller than the Z value of the start point coordinate, and there is no step different from this step, the end surface is defined as the outer diameter side end surface. Called.

In addition, in order to make the X direction constituent line coincide with the machining direction by the phase angle and the inner diameter from the constituent line X + to Z + of the inner diameter up to the 10th stage in the case of this example by arranging the constituent lines of the figure. And the 11th step is the component line segment Z + of the end face, the 0 ° space diagram, and the outer diameter of the 12th to 27th steps. From component line Z- to X +, depending on the phase angle, a clockwise spatial figure from -90 degrees to 0 degrees, from the 28th to 37th outer diameter composition line segments Z- to X-, Depending on the phase angle, a clockwise space graphic from 0 degrees to 90 degrees, the 38th stage is a line segment Z- of the end face, and a graphic in the 0 degree space. If the Z0 side inner diameter space not present in the present example is assumed to be a graphic obtained by inverting the same figure as the Z + side inner diameter in the present example, it becomes a clockwise space graphic from 90 degrees to 180 degrees.
Simply organizing the pattern identification results for this example,
1st stage to 10th stage, inner diameter: I, clockwise space 11th stage up to -180 to -90 degrees End face: F, 0 degree space 12th stage to 27th stage, outer diameter: E, -90 to 0 degree clockwise space 28th to 37th stage, outer diameter: E, clockwise space 38th stage to 0 to 90 degree End face: F, 0 degree space plus groove 4th stage by judgment and input of groove Inner groove: IG
6th stage inner diameter groove: IG
18th stage outer diameter groove: EG
23rd stage outer diameter groove: EG
28th to 30th stages Outer diameter groove: EG
It is.
Step 8 is completed by the above processing.

  In step 9, machining process determination processing is performed. The keyword of the input data here is N (n), N is the sequence number of the input data, and n is the block number in each sequence. In sequence 1, 1 (1): machine identification, 1 (2): process identification, 1 (3): full length, 1 (4): material diameter, 1 (5): workpiece material, 1 (6): workpiece material Material, 1 (7): Heat treatment, 1 (8): Workpiece material size, 1 (9): Processed process, 1 (10): Number of machined, or 2 from sequence 2 (1): Center hole 2 (2): Tolerance symbol / upper and lower dimension difference, 2 (3): Finish symbol / finish surface roughness, 2 (4): Shape position accuracy, 2 (5): Screw accuracy / finish symbol / finish surface roughness 2 (6): Tempering symbol / hardness, 2 (7): Surface treatment specifications, 2 (8): Groove, 2 (9): Key groove, 2 (10): End face key groove, 2 (11 ): Internal keyway, 2 (12): Hole, 2 (13): Tapped hole, 2 (14): Inner cam, 2 (15): End face direction cam, 2 (16): Cylindrical groove cam, 2 ( 17): Outline cam, 2 (18): End face groove cam, 2 (19): Cylindrical Flat / cylindrical outside polygons, 2 (20): the internal gear 2 (21): external gear, determines designation processing last process by like, the machining process determination processing.

Examples of processing process determination processing procedures in step 9 are shown in FIGS. Beginning at step 900. In step 901, 1 (9): It is determined whether there is a processed process. If there is no processed process, in step 902, the presence or absence of heat treatment of the material is determined using the 1 (7): heat treatment data. If yes, in step 903, one piece or many pieces are picked up based on the information of the input (whether the material is a polishing material or a bar) or the machine master (the presence or absence of a bar feed machine).
If it is determined in step 903 that there is a single piece, the presence or absence of both centers is determined in step 904.
The ratio of material diameter: D / material length: L (can be specified by the user. The standard value is modal value: 1/3). Discriminate and sort
If cantilever chucking is possible, in step 906, 1 (8): workpiece material size> (1 (3): total length) + (2 × finishing allowance) is determined,
1 (8): Workpiece material dimension> (1 (3): Overall length) + (2 x Finishing allowance)
In step 907, each cutting process is set.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 906 that 1 (8): workpiece material dimension ≤ (1 (3): total length) + (2 x finishing allowance), the material length is shorter than or equal to the total processing length, so that machining is possible. There is no alarm processing.
On the other hand, if cantilever chucking is not possible in step 905, the process continues to step 909. (Step 909 and subsequent steps follow the description from step 908 below.)

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 903 that a large number of pieces are taken, step 908 compares the capacity of the material refining furnace with 1 (8): workpiece material dimensions. 1 (8): If no workpiece material dimensions are entered, alarm processing is performed.
If it is determined in step 908 that (material refining furnace capacity) ≧ (1 (8): workpiece material size), whether or not the machine is a bar feed machine is entered in the machine tool file in step 909. In the case of a bar feed machine, in step 910, 1 (3): the maximum value of self-weight deflection: δmax is calculated based on the total length.
In step 911, δmax ≦ k is determined. If δmax ≦ k, a multi-chip process is set in step 912. On the other hand, when δmax> k, since a special holding method and processing method are required for processing, alarm processing is performed.
Here, k is a set value: the maximum allowable value of the self-weight deflection. In the following, k represents the maximum allowable value of the self-weight deflection. It is a well-known fact that chatter during processing is related to natural vibration, and this can be generally calculated by δmax.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 909 that the machine is not a bar feed machine, the process continues to step 914. (The description after step 914 will be described after step 913.)

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 908 that (the capacity of the material refining furnace) <(1 (8): workpiece material size), whether or not the machine is a bar feed machine is input to the machine tool file in step 913. If it is not a bar feed machine, the process goes to step 914. If it is a bar feed machine, the process goes to step 916. In step 914, the cantilever chucking cutting length: Lc is calculated from δmax ≦ k using the equations (25) to (27).
Lc = (8 × E × I × δmax / w) 1/3 + grip allowance (25)
Lc ≧ (1 (3): full length + cutting allowance) × N + gripping allowance (26)
Lc <(Capacity of material tempering furnace) (27)
Lc satisfying these three expressions is determined.
Here, N is an integer, the number that can be processed with the cutting length.
Although the calculation formula here is developed based on δmax = w × L 3 / (8 × E × I), the load may be a concentrated load formula instead of an equal load. Moreover, you may expand | deploy from the formula by a finite element method.
When this process is finished, the process reaches step 915 to set a cantilever chucking multi-chip cutting process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 913 that the machine is a bar feed machine, in step 916, 1 (3): δmax is calculated based on the total length.
In the next step 917, δmax ≦ k is determined, and if δmax ≦ k, in step 918,
(Capacity of material tempering furnace) ≧ {1 (3): Total length + cutting allowance + (2 × finishing allowance)} × N + gripping allowance is calculated using equations (28) and (29).
Lb ≧ {1 (3): Total length + cutting allowance + (2 × finishing allowance)} × N + gripping allowance (28)
Lb <(Material refining furnace capacity) (29)
Here, Lb is a cutting length of a large number of bar feed machines. When this processing is completed, a bar feed machine multiple cutting process is set in step 919.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 917 that δmax> k, alarm processing is performed.
If the alarm process is determined by the determination in step 906, step 908, step 911, or step 917, a warning for correcting the input item is issued and the process returns to the input process step 3.
When this process is finished, the process continues to the material refining process in step 920. In step 920, a material refining process is set.

On the other hand, if there is an entry for the processed process in step 901, the process continues to step 957. In step 957, the processed process is stored and the process continues to step 902. The processing after this processing has already been described.
In step 902, if 1 (7): heat treatment data is used to determine the presence or absence of material heat treatment, if there is none, the flow continues to step 930 (FIG. 15).

In step 930, one piece or a plurality of pieces are picked up or discriminated based on information of the machine master. If it is determined in step 930 that one piece is taken, step 931 determines whether or not both centers are present. When the cantilever chucking is possible, it is determined in step 933 by 1 (8): workpiece material size ≧ {1 (3): total length + cutting allowance + (2 × Finishing cost)}
Determine
1 (8): Workpiece material size ≧ {1 (3): Total length + cutting allowance + (2 × finishing allowance)} In step 934, a cutting process for each piece is set.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 933 that 1 (8): workpiece material dimension <{1 (3): total length + cutting margin + (2 × finishing margin)}, the material length is shorter than or equal to the total processing length. Alarm processing because it cannot be processed.
On the other hand, if cantilever chucking is not possible in step 932, the process continues to step 935.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 930 that the machine is multi-piece picking, it is determined in step 935 whether or not the machine is a bar feed machine by reading an item input in the machine tool file. 1 (3): δmax is calculated based on the total length.
In step 937, δmax ≦ k is determined. If δmax ≦ k, a multi-chip process is set in step 938. On the other hand, when δmax> k, since a special holding method and processing method are required for processing, alarm processing is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 935 that the machine is not a bar feed machine, in step 940, the cantilever chucking cutting length: Lc is calculated from δmax ≦ k using the equations (25) and (26).
Lc = (8 × E × I × δmax / w) 1/3 + grip allowance (25)
Lc ≧ (1 (3): full length + cutting allowance) × N + gripping allowance (26)
Lc satisfying these two expressions is determined.
Here, N is an integer, the number of pieces that can be processed with the cutting length, and w is a uniformly distributed load.
The calculation formula here is developed based on δmax = w × L 3 / (8 × E × I). However, the load may be a formula of concentrated load instead of a uniform load, or by a finite element method. You may expand from the formula.
When this processing is completed, the process reaches step 941 to set a cantilever chucking multiple cutting process.

  When the alarm process is determined by the determination in step 933 and step 937, a warning for correcting the input item is issued and the process returns to the input process step 3. When this process is finished, the process continues to step 921.

The processing content of step 907 of the cutting process for each piece is shown in FIG. Starting at step 9070, selection of machines having a cutting process is selected at step 9071. All machines registered in the cutting process in the machine tool file are selected according to 1 (5): material and 1 (4): material diameter. In the next step 9072, the calculation of the temporary machining time and the temporary machining cost per piece is performed. 1 (10): The number of machining and the preparation time, the preparation cost, the machining cross-sectional area per hour corresponding to the material, from the selected machine file, The machining cost and the like are read out, and the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece are calculated.
Based on this result, the ranking and recording of the machines selected in step 9073 are sorted by cost priority and machining time priority, and the machines are ranked and recorded in the cutting process file. When this process ends, the process ends at step 9074, returns to step 907, and continues to step 920.

  The processing contents of step 915 of the cantilever chucking multi-piece cutting process and step 919 of the bar machine multi-piece cutting process are the same as the processing contents of step 907 and only the difference in cutting length is not described. To do.

  In step 921, it is determined by the number of center holes. In the case of a single center hole, the presence / absence of outer diameter grinding is determined in step 922. A warning is issued in step 928 so that the process can be processed. Based on the warning, the operator determines whether it is necessary or not in step 929, and if necessary, returns to step 3 to correct the figure input and repeat the process. If not necessary, the warning is canceled and the process proceeds to step 923. Alternatively, if the outer diameter grinding is not included, the single center hole machining process in step 923 is changed to the single center hole turning process in step 924. If there is no center hole in the both center hole supporting turning process in step 926, the process setting continues to the chucking turning process in step 927.

If it is determined in step 921 that the hole is a single center hole, the process continues from step 922 and step 923 to the processing after the single center hole machining process. FIG. 17 shows a single center hole machining process, and FIG. 18 shows a machine selection evaluation process of a single center hole support turning process.
The method for selecting the machine for the single center hole machining process determined in step 923 is as follows.
Starting at step 9230, at step 9231, it is determined whether or not the process is a one-center hole support processing process based on 1 (3): full length, 2 (3): finish symbol / finish surface roughness, and center position. In the case of the single center hole support machining process, the machine for processing the center hole in another process in step 9232 is represented by 1 (3): full length and 1 (4): single center hole machining process in the machine tool file according to the material diameter. All the registered machines are selected, and in step 9233 1 (10): Based on the number of machining and the removal volume of the center hole, the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, The machining cost and the like are read, and the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece are calculated.
In step 9234, the results are ranked according to cost priority and machining time priority per piece, and recorded in a single center hole machining process file.
When this process is finished in step 9235, the process returns to step 923 and continues to step 924.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 9231 that the process is not a single center hole support machining process, a process for machining the center hole simultaneously with other machining is set by chucking turning in step 927.

The contents of step 924 of the single center hole support turning process are shown in FIG.
Starting at step 9240, at step 9241, 1 (3): total length, 1 (4): material diameter, 1 (10): number of workpieces, 2 (2): tolerance symbol / vertical dimension difference, 2 (3): finish Machine registered with single center hole support turning process of machine tool file by symbol / finish surface roughness, 2 (4): shape position accuracy, 2 (5): screw accuracy / finishing symbol / finish surface roughness 1 (10): Read the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, machining cost, etc. from the selected machine file based on the number of machining and the removal volume of the turning process. Temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece are calculated.
In step 9243, the order of priority is given to the cost priority, the processing time priority per piece, and the result is recorded in the single center hole support turning process file. When this process is finished in step 9244, the process returns to step 924 and continues to step 950.

The method of selecting the machine of both center hole drilling processes determined in step 925 is processed as follows.
FIG. 19 shows the contents of both center hole machining processes in step 925. Starting at step 9250, at step 9251, it is determined whether or not both center hole support machining processes are performed based on 1 (3): full length, 2 (3): finish symbol / finish surface roughness, and center hole position. In the case of both center hole support machining processes, in step 9252, the presence / absence of the special specification of the center hole is checked against a file having the special specification. If it is not a special specification, the machine for processing both center holes in a separate process in step 9253 is 1 (3): Total length and 1 (4): Depending on the material diameter, the machine tool file will use the standard double center hole processing process. Select all registered machines, and in step 9254, 1 (10): Based on the number of machining and the removal volume of the center hole, preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, machining from the selected machine file The cost etc. are read out, and the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece are calculated.
In step 9255, the machine is ranked in order of cost priority and machining time priority per piece, and recorded in both center drilling process files.
When this process is finished in step 9256, the process returns to step 925 and continues to step 926.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 9251 that the center hole position is not a both-center-hole support processing process, in step 92511, the one-center hole processing process and the chucking process are determined, and in steps 923 and 927, respectively. Select the return machining process.

If it is determined in step 9252 that the center hole is special, in other words, if it cannot be processed by the standard double center hole processing machine, a machine for processing both the center holes in another process in step 9257 is 1 (3): Total length and 1 (4): Select all the machines registered in the special center hole drilling process in the machine tool file according to the material diameter. In step 9258, 1 (10): Based on the number of machining and the removal volume of the center hole. Then, the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capability per hour, processing cost, etc. are read from the selected machine file, and the temporary processing time and temporary processing cost per piece are calculated.
In step 9259, the results are recorded in a special both-center drilling process file by ranking the machines according to cost priority and machining time priority per piece.
When the process in step 9259 ends, the process ends in step 9256, returns to step 925, and continues to step 926.

The contents of both center hole support turning process in step 926 are shown in FIG.
Starting at step 9260, 1 (3): total length, 1 (4): material diameter, 1 (10): number of workpieces, 2 (2): tolerance symbol / vertical dimension difference, 2 (3): finishing Machine registered with both center hole support turning process of machine tool file by symbol / finish surface roughness, 2 (4): shape position accuracy, 2 (5): screw accuracy / finishing symbol / finish surface roughness In step 9262, 1 (10): Read the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, machining cost, etc. from the selected machine file based on the number of machining and the volume of turning removed. Temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece are calculated.
In step 9263, the machines are ranked in order of cost priority and machining time priority per piece, and recorded in both center hole support turning process file. When this process is finished in step 9264, the process returns to step 926 and continues to step 950.

  The calculation of the temporary machining time of the turning process is described in Max. A processing method giving priority to the processing time in anticipation of profit is adopted. Using this criterion, the machines in the turning process are ranked. Here, Max. The concept of “profit” is basically a discriminant standard for the purpose of maximizing the number of workpieces per unit time (volume).

The procedure of the chucking turning process in step 927 is shown in FIG.
Starting at step 9270, 1 (3): Overall length, 1 (4): Material diameter, 1 (10): Number of workpieces, 2 (2): Tolerance symbol / upper / lower dimension difference, 2 (3): Finishing Symbol / finishing surface roughness, 2 (4): shape position accuracy, 2 (5): screw accuracy / finishing symbol / finishing surface roughness, total number of machines registered chucking turning process in machine tool file. 1 in step 9272 (10): Read out the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, machining cost, etc. from the selected machine file based on the number of machining and the removal volume of turning. The temporary machining time and the temporary machining cost are calculated.

The calculation procedure of the chucking turning process temporary machining time and the temporary cost in step 9272 is shown in FIG.
In step 92720, the removal volume for determining the machining area and the product of the removal volume and the average radius are calculated.
The product of the removal volume and the average radius is a coefficient obtained by multiplying the removal volume of each step by the average radius of the raw material radius and the finishing radius of each step and taking into account the time factor during processing.
Removal volume: The turning removal volume by the workpiece of this example is shown in FIG.
Product of removal volume and average radius: The product of turning removal volume and average radius by the workpiece in this example is shown in FIG. In step 92722, the maximum outer diameter and the minimum inner diameter are separated, and the maximum outer diameter and the minimum inner diameter are distributed to the left and right so that they are equal to one half of the sum of the product of the removed volume and the average radius. The side with the larger sum of products is defined as the first processing side. In step 92723, the chucking allowance on the first machining side is determined. If there is a chucking allowance, the process proceeds to step 92724, and temporary machining is performed up to the coordinates on the chuck side with the maximum diameter and the coordinates on the chuck side with the minimum inner diameter. Time and provisional machining costs are calculated.
Here, the product of the removal volume of the maximum outer diameter or minimum inner diameter and the average radius is twice the product of the removal volume of the other outer diameter or inner diameter and the average radius (a parameter value that can be set to an arbitrary value). In the case of exceeding the above, in the rough machining, the first machining process and the second machining process are each divided by half. If finishing accuracy is not guaranteed from the result of the machine tool file value due to the specification of the finishing symbol and surface roughness, the finishing process can either be batch finished on the second machining step side, or if each can be guaranteed Or split it into processes.
As a special case, if there is no chucking allowance due to a steep taper or screw at the location following the end face processed in the first processing step, the second processing step side is processed first, regardless of the above processing procedure result. After that, the first machining process side is rearranged into a procedure for machining.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 92723 that there is no chucking allowance, the temporary machining time and the temporary machining cost are calculated in step 92725 up to the maximum diameter counter chuck side coordinate and the minimum inner diameter anti chuck side coordinate. To do. When these processes are completed, in step 92726, the remaining region is set as the second machining step, and the temporary machining time and the temporary machining cost are calculated. When this process ends, the process ends at step 92727, returns to step 9272, and continues to step 9273.
Here, when the region in FIG. 178 of this example is determined based on another discrimination criterion that limits the half of the sum of the product of the removed volume and the average radius and does not divide in the middle of the stage, In this case, it is divided at the boundary between 22 steps and 23 steps, and the 1st to 22nd steps are defined as the first region, the 23rd to 38th steps are defined as the second region. It is a more productive decision to set the first area up to 21st and the second area from 22nd to 38th.

  In step 9273, the results are recorded in the chucking turning process file by ranking the machines according to priority of cost and priority of machining time per piece. When this process is finished in step 9274, the process returns to step 927 and continues to step 950.

From step 950, it shows in FIG.
In step 950, the presence or absence of the remaining machining process is determined based on the input data, 2 (3) finish symbol / finish surface roughness, and if present, the presence or absence of the process file is determined in step 951. Step 952 is continued.
In step 952, the removal volume for each remaining machining location is calculated, and in order of increasing volume, and in the machining method, grinding: G, honing: GH, super finishing: GSP, various special machining: SP ... Arrange the processes in order of increasing finished surface roughness, combine these two elements, and arrange the processes so that the finished surface roughness becomes a priority.
The calculation result of the removal volume in this example is shown in FIG.
Adding the turning removal volume in the material graphic input of FIG. 178, and arranging the removal volume of FIG. 177 in the order of the removal volume
Turning location
(1) Cantilever turning 181.147 cm3
(2) Cantilever turning 126.136 cm3
Remaining machining location
(3) External cam processing 16.439 cm3
(4) End face groove cam processing 8.042cm3
(5) Cylindrical groove cam processing 6.626cm3
(6) End face cam processing 3.833cm3
(7) External gear machining 3.731 cm3
(8) Inner cam processing 3.267cm3
(9) Keyway processing 1.734cm3
(10) Internal gear machining 1.272cm3
(11) Polygon processing outside the cylinder 0.768 cm3
(12) End face keyway processing 0.576cm3
(13) Tap hole processing 0.330cm3
(14) Hole machining 0.098cm3
It is.

In this example, the material has no pilot hole. However, when the material has a pilot hole, the removal volume may change and the processing direction may change. In addition, a change in the order of the machining process occurs, and the machining order when the pilot hole is provided for the material input is end face roughing, inner diameter roughing, and so on. When there is no pilot hole, the procedure is the inner diameter pilot hole machining, end face rough machining,..., And in this example, the latter procedure is the standard processing method.
When this process is finished, step 953 follows. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 951 that there is a process file, the process input is determined in step 956. If there is a designation input for all processes, the process proceeds to step 953 and processing is continued according to the process file order. On the other hand, if the input is a part, the process continues to step 952 to calculate the removal volume of the remaining machining portion. When this process is finished, the process continues to step 953.
Here, the process file is a processing process name (FIG. 77, a process symbol from the process file, a registration symbol on the HELP screen, according to the process designation / tool designation / attachment number / finishing allowance input format shown in FIG. 109. Read the process symbol with *).
If necessary, information already filed on the HELP screen can be read and input for tool designation, fixture number, own process finishing allowance, and separate process finishing allowance. When tool designation is input here, tool designation / condition input is performed for each process according to the tool designation / cutting condition input format of FIG. As described above, input is performed with reference to the HELP screen.

FIG. 14 shows a process for selecting a machine to be used for each remaining machining process in step 953.
Starting at step 9530, n = 0 is set at step 9531, the presence / absence of a remaining process is determined at step 9532, and if there is a remaining process, the process count is advanced to n = n + 1 at step 9533, and the next step 9534 is reached. Then, the machine at the machining position of the n machining order is selected by the input data. Next, in step 9535, 1 (10): Read the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, processing cost, etc. from the selected machine file based on the number of machining and removal volume, and provisional machining time per piece The temporary processing cost is calculated.
In step 9536, the results are ranked in the order of cost priority and machining time priority per piece, and recorded in an n machining process file. When this process ends, the process returns to step 9532 and is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 9532 that there is no remaining process, the process ends in step 9537, returns to step 953, and continues to step 954.

The process determination processing procedure of step 954 is shown in FIG.
The method of selecting and determining the machine of the process determined in step 954 is processed as follows.

In the process decision,
Inputs to be used: input figures, specified processes,
Files to be used: process file, fixture file, tool file, cost file
The final machining process is determined by discriminating and quoting from the file and graphic file and the data developed from them.
Since the processing process and the processing machine have been selected so far, the processing for minimizing the number of selected processes and processing machines is performed here. Sort the set of processing machines,
* When the number of processing machines is minimized by selecting from the highest priority.
* With productivity as a priority, machining costs as a priority * Perform processing that can meet each condition using a specified group machine tool for uniform operation rate processing.
Next, the machine is checked for the presence of a tool for processing graphics.

  Starting at step 9540, the processing cost priority and the processing time priority are discriminated at step 9541. Read and organize machining cost processes. On the other hand, if the machining time has priority, in step 9547, the minimum temporary machining time processes from the first process to the n-th process in the machining time priority file of the machining process file are read out and arranged. When this processing is completed, in step 9543, it is determined whether or not the same machine is selected in the selected process. Only when they are discriminated and are included in the same chucking or the same machining process, the process is summarized in step 9545. On the other hand, if process summarization is not possible, step 9546 is followed. On the other hand, if the same machine is not selected in step 9543, the process continues to step 9546.

  Here, the process summarizing method of step 9545 is summarized when the same processing function tool, similar tool, and the finishing symbol and finishing surface roughness of each processing place are the same rank or less. In addition, if the tempering process, rough machining by another machine, measurement, etc. are included in the process sequence of the selected machine, it is considered as a separate process. If this processing standard is not met, and if it is ambiguous comprehensively, it is a separate process.

  In step 9546, the processes selected in the processes so far are listed, and the cost priority or processing time priority process and order are determined.

Cost priority and machining time priority are determined by the optimum cutting speed. The optimum cutting speed is given by the expansion of the known Taylor equation (ie the tool life equation): S = VTn. The cutting cost is given by equation (30).
C = Cw ti + Cw AV-1 + Cw ttcA (V ((1 / n) -1) / S1 / n) + CtA (V ((1 / n) -1) / S1 / n) (30)
C = Cutting cost Wo = Wedge Cm = Machine charge Cr = Running charge Cw = Wo + Cm + Cr = Charge wedge ti = Non-cutting time A = Travel distance converted cutting amount (m)
V = Cutting speed (m / min)
ttc = Wear tool change time (min / time)
S = Taylor constant n = exponential Ct = tool charge Here, the Taylor constant (S) and the index (n) are as shown in FIG. 141, and are obtained using a constant table file of the tool life equation. FIG. 141 is a constant table composed of a work material and a tool material. For example, when the work material is SCM440H and the tool material is P20, S = 284 and n = 0.25. The expression (30) is developed, and the cutting speed Vmin with the minimum cutting cost is obtained by the expression (31).
Vmin = S {Cw / ((1 / n) -1) (Cw.ttc + Ct)} n (31)
Further, the cutting speed Vpmax having the minimum machining time can be obtained from the equation (32) by developing the equation (31).
Vpmax = S / {((1 / n) -1) ttc} n (32)
When the cost priority is specified, the minimum cutting cost cutting speed obtained by the equation (31): Vmin is used. When the machining time priority is specified, the minimum cutting speed of the processing time of the equation (32): Vpmax is used. Ask and use.

  When these processes are completed, the process ends at step 9548, returns to step 954, and continues to step 955. In step 955, the process ends and returns to step 9 of the main process and continues to step 10.

If processing is performed according to the above processing procedure, the result of this graphic example is as follows.
The processing order and the processing process processing order are as follows when the order is determined by distinguishing the order of the removal amount, the order of the tolerance range, and the order of the finishing symbol.
Machining process Removal amount (volume) Tolerance width / symbol Finishing symbol (1) Cantilever turning-1 181.147 cm3
(2) Cantilever turning-2 126.136 cm3
(3) External cam processing 16.439 cm3
(4) End face groove cam machining 8.042 cm3 H8, 2M
(5) Cylindrical groove cam machining 6.626cm3 H8, 2M
(6) End cam processing 3.833cm3 2M
(7) Inner cam processing 3.267cm3 H8, 2M
(8) Keyway processing 1.734cm3 0.036, 2M
(9) Polygon processing outside the cylinder 0.768 cm3 0.1, 2M
(10) End face key groove processing 0.576cm3 H8, 2M
(11) Tap hole processing 0.330cm3
(12) Hole machining 0.098cm3
(13) External gear machining 3.731 cm3 0.015, 3M
(14) Internal gear machining 1.272cm3 0.020, SPED
(15) Outer diameter grinding 0.661cm3 h7, 3G
(16) External cam grinding 0.432cm3 h6 (radius) 3G
(17) Inner diameter grinding 0.070 cm3 H7, 3G
(18) Measurement

  In addition to the forging material of the input example of this example, when a process using a bar material is determined, a cutting process is added and set before the first cantilever turning process-1 described above.

The procedure for creating the machining program for each process in step 11 is shown in FIG.
Starting from step 1100, a step 1101 process counter is set to zero. In step 1102, the number of processes is counted up to n = n + 1. In step 1103, material drawings and processed figures in the n process are arranged.
Here, the arrangement method of the material drawing and the processed figure in step 1103 is as follows.
Based on the first material and the machining figure of the machining process, the material of the second machining process is the machining figure of the first machining, and the machining figure of the second machining process is the material figure of the third machining process. This is used to organize the machining figures of each process.
In this example, a method description is described in which materials and processed figures are arranged every time for each process, but these may be collectively processed.
The result of this arrangement is a material and a processed figure for each process. If this process ends, the process continues to step 1104.
In step 1104, it is determined whether or not a removal direction is designated.
The removal direction is specified by input items (examples of input formats are shown in FIGS. 107 and 108) in order to determine productivity with an emphasis.
If specified, follow the specified direction.
If not specified, a removal direction determination process is performed in step 1105. If so, step 1106 follows.
Here, the removal direction is input according to the specified input format related to the machining shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, with the cost / time priority, the process, the removal direction, the tool, the fixture, the cutting condition, and the finishing allowance being entered. Use.

In step 1105, removal direction determination processing is performed.
Determination of the removal direction of the turning process: Determination of the removal direction is processed in step 1105 of FIG.
A flowchart of this process is shown in FIG.
The removal direction in the case of turning is determined by determining the cross-sectional area of the machining allowance, the machining allowance, the ratio of the machining length based on the combination of the length in the Z (axis) direction to the X (end face) direction and the maximum cutting depth of the tool, machine rigidity, The productivity in the removal direction calculated from the tool rigidity and the like is evaluated by the machining time, and roughing is performed by selecting a feed direction with a short machining time.
This specific method calculates the product of the allowance and length of each step for each end region, outer diameter, and inner diameter for each processing region, and calculates the sum in each of the groove / end surface direction and the outer / inner diameter direction for each processing. Divide by the total (total length) of the X (end face) direction length and Z (axis) direction length of the area, divide this average machining allowance value by the maximum cutting depth of the tool, Calculate the number of loading.
This result is calculated in the X (end face) direction machining length (X (end face) direction length x number of cuts in the Z direction), Z (axis) direction machining length (Z (axis) direction length x X (end face) direction. Comparison of machine tool conditions (product of maximum radial cut and maximum axial feed and product of maximum axial cut and maximum radial feed), tool condition (maximum number of cuts) Using graphic processing tools, ratio of maximum radial infeed, maximum axial feed, maximum axial cut, maximum radial feed), work condition (radial stiffness, axial stiffness) ratio, the most Comparison is made using low conditions, and the feed removal direction in which the machining time is shortened is determined by the machining time ratio of the Z (axis) direction feed and the X (radius) direction feed.
Here, the X (radius) direction feed is a cut in the Z (axis) direction—feeding in the X (radius) direction, and the Z (axis) direction feed is a cut in the X (radius) direction—Z (axis). To feed in the direction.
However, the removal direction is determined for each individual machining stage in the final machining program, unlike the total removal direction depending on the machining allowance in each machining stage and the tool conditions.
Here, calculating for each machining area is preferable in terms of productivity evaluation. However, since both areas may be machined with the same machine, the entire machine should be used when machining both areas with the same machine. The removal direction may be determined.

  In step 1106, n-process tool selection processing is performed. The processing procedure of the n-process tool selection processing in step 1106 is shown in FIG. Tool selection starts at step 11060 and searches for tools at step 11061. The tool search is performed for each n-process machine tool by calculating the tool file processed in step 220 (as described in step 220, the tool cutting edge of the input tool, the figure that can be processed by the holder information, and the tool code (machining (Including the start point angle and the end point angle)) is searched by the graphic code (FIG. 12) obtained by processing the graphic input data in step 807, and all the tools having the same graphic processing function code are searched. Next, in step 11062, the tool searched in step 11061 is sorted and selected from a multi-function tool and a high-rigidity tool in a high order. When this processing is completed, in step 11063, an optimum tool for machining is selected and determined based on the minimum and maximum productivity of the number of tools. When this process ends, the process ends at step 11064, returns to step 1106, and continues to step 1107.

In step 1107, n-process fixture selection processing is performed.
The n-process fixture selection processing procedure in step 1107 is shown in FIG. The fixture selection starts at step 11070 and searches for a fixture at step 11071. The fixture search searches for fixtures of the machine tool file input for each n-process machine tool by using the chucking location as a key from the input figure. Next, in step 11072, the limit length and diameter for each processing side are selected as keys, the fixtures having a length less than the limit length are selected, and the chucking lengths are arranged in ascending order. When this processing is completed, in step 11073, the fittings selected and aligned in step 11072 are selected, and the fittings having the closest chucking diameter are selected for each machining side, and the fittings common to both processes are determined as the optimum. . If it is not a common fixture for both processes, select and determine the optimal fixture for each. When this process ends, the process ends at step 11074, returns to step 1107, and continues to step 1108.

In step 1108, n-process machining program processing is performed.
Here, the processing in step 1108 is as follows. Processing of creating a machining program for performing shape processing according to the finishing input example will be described with respect to two types of materials obtained by adding a rod material to the forging material according to this input example. In the finished figure of this input example, the process difference between the bar material and the forging material is the presence or absence of cutting, and the machining allowance is very large in the cantilever turning of the second and third processes of the bar material. The subsequent machining process and machining allowance are both the same.
Process number Process number Bar material Forging material 1 Cutting None
2 Cantilever turning Cantilever turning
3 Cantilever turning Cantilever turning
4 External cam machining External cam machining 5 End groove cam machining End groove cam machining 6 Cylindrical groove cam machining Cylindrical groove cam machining 7 End cam machining End cam machining 8 Inner cam machining Inner cam machining 9 Key groove machining Key cylinder machining 10 Cylinder External polygon machining Cylindrical outer polygon machining 11 End face key groove machining End face key groove machining 12 Tap hole machining Tap hole machining 13 Hole machining Hole machining 14 External gear machining External gear machining 15 Internal gear machining Internal gear machining 16 Outer diameter grinding machining Outside Diameter grinding process 17 External cam grinding process External cam grinding process 18 Internal diameter grinding process Internal diameter grinding process 19 Measurement
In the following, the procedure for determining the machining program and the results will be described while distinguishing between the rod material and the forging material.

  In step 1109, n = n? If there are remaining processes, the process returns to step 1102 and is repeated. On the other hand, if there is no remaining process, it is determined in step 1110 whether the last process processed in step 1108 is a rework program. If not, the process ends in step 1114, and step 11 Return to step 12 to continue.

  Here, when the region in FIG. 178 of this example is determined by another discrimination criterion that limits the half of the sum of the product of the removed volume and the average radius and does not divide in the middle of the stage, the material figure In this case, it is divided at the boundary between 22 steps and 23 steps, and the 1st to 22nd steps are defined as the first region, the 23rd to 38th steps are defined as the second region. It is a more productive decision to set the first area up to 21st and the second area from 22nd to 38th.

Cutting process This process does not exist in the forging material of the input material of this example.
Input data used to create a machining program in the cutting process is 1 (3): total length, 1 (4): material diameter, and 1 (8): workpiece material dimensions, which are general items for graphic input. When the material is a long material such as a polishing material or a bar (discrimination: when the ratio of the length input to the workpiece material to the total length is 2 or more), the bar feed machine processing is performed. When the bar feed machine is not registered, the cutting material processing is performed to cut the bar material into individual pieces.
Further, when the workpiece material exceeds the total length +10 mm (the 10 mm is a modal value that can be changed by the user), the cutting material processing is performed to cut the rod material into individual lengths.
The finishing allowance is 1 (4): material diameter, 1 (3): overall length as a variable from the end face finishing allowance file (Fig. 123) for the finishing of bar turning. In this example, the material diameter is 115 mm. : Read and use 1.5 mm from 210 mm.
These 1 (3): total length, 1 (4): material diameter, 1 (8): machine is read out from the machine tool file (FIGS. 58 to 76) based on the workpiece material dimension data, and a finishing allowance file (FIG. 120) is obtained. To FIG. 123), tool files (FIGS. 78 to 85), and machine tool file data, the results of creating a machining program for selecting, carrying out, and cutting a material are shown below. This machining program can be a machining program that can be repeatedly cut by using a combination of block delete (/) as shown below. Note that the description of the procedure and procedure for creating the machining program using the machine tool file in the cutting machine of this example will be omitted.
Machining program Contents
N001 G90; Specification of absolute value command
/ N002 D115 .; Material selection (Diameter: 115 mm)
/ N003 M56; Feeds the material to the reference position
/ N004 G00 Y115 .; Clamp diameter designation (Set claw position to clamp diameter)
/ N005 M01; Optional stop
N006 G00 Z218 .; Material feed; Tool width: Including 5mm
(210 + 1.5 × 2 + 5 = 218mm)
N007 M68; Material clamp
N008 G00 X-1.ZO; Cutting tool approach (margin: 1mm),
Sending home position return
N009 G01 X118.F120M03M08; (115 + margin: 3 = 118) Spindle rotation, coolant O
N, cutting feed 120mm / min (tool file
The feed speed is obtained from (FIGS. 78 to 85).
F = 0.15 × 20 / (3.14 × 0.315) × 40 = 121 [mm])
N010 G00 X-10.M05M09; Cutting tool retraction, spindle stop, coolant off,
Margin: 10mm
N011 M69; Material unclamp N012 M02; Program end (machining
End)
/ N013 GOOX-50.Y150 .; Tool, clamp jaw return to origin.
/ N014 M00; Program stop

(Description of machining program contents)
In N001, the coordinate system is set to an absolute value command using G90. A material of 115 mm is selected at N002. In N003, the material is sent to the reference position. In N004, a material diameter of 115 mm is designated, and the nail clamp position is set. In N005, the end of the preparation work is designated. N006 to N012 is a normal cycle of cutting, and N006 sends out a length obtained by adding the finishing allowance and the width of the cutting tool to the specified total length of the material. (As a result, the cutting length is 213 mm.) N007 clamps the material so that it can cope with the processing force. In N008, the tool is fast-forwarded to 1 mm before the material and the material feed control axis is returned to the origin. In N009, the tool spindle and coolant are activated to perform machining. Feeding speed: 120 mm / min, 3 mm penetrated from the material to finish the processing. In N010, the cutting tool is separated from the material by 10 mm, and the tool spindle and the coolant are stopped. Unclamping the material with N011. Processing is completed at N012. In N013, the cutting tool and the clamping claw are returned to the mechanical capacity to cope with the next material diameter. The program ends at N014. Here, when the cutting operation of the same length is repeated, the block delete switch is turned on, and N006 to N012 are repeated except for the block with the block delete symbol; /. The escape from the repetition is finished by continuing to N014 by turning off the block delete switch at N012.

Turning process The data used in creating the machining program in the turning process is the figure before finishing another process (intermediate finishing shape file; figure) calculated by the processing before the finishing process in step 7 described above based on the material and finishing input data. 173 to 176) and various files.

Determination of Machining Order of Turning Process For the lathe machining order, the result of determining the machining area in step 92722 is used as it is. In the case of this example, as described above, finishing input 1st to 25th with a large removal amount is set as the first processing (front processing), and then from 27th to the final processing is set as the second processing (back processing).

Determination of the removal direction of the turning process The determination of the removal direction is processed in step 1105 in FIG. 23 as described above. A detailed flowchart of this process is shown in FIG.
In FIG. 23, starting at step 110500,
In step 110501, a temporary tool search and tool conditions are read from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85).
The tool file is searched for the rough all-purpose tool with the maximum tool rigidity, the maximum maximum depth of cut, the maximum depth of tool cut, and the minimum protrusion of the tool from the tool holder. In this example, the tool identification number is 1 from FIG. 78, the tool rigidity (this example is δmax = 0.003 mm for both radial and axial), the maximum depth of cut (this example is 12.43 mm), the maximum feed (this In the example, 0.4 mm) and the protrusion amount of the tool holder (in this example, 25 mm) are read out.
(This reading process is specified according to the selection conditions, and the tool having the maximum productivity is selected from among the tools that are filed. The specific description of this tool selection is omitted because it is a known method.)
Also, from the general input (FIG. 142), 1 (5): Workpiece material (in this example, SCM440H) is read, and the specific cutting force (1,960 N / in this example) is read from the material file (FIG. 124) using this as a keyword. mm2). When this process ends, the process continues to step 110502.
Since the data of all conditions is not registered in the file, an interpolation method based on fuzzy theory is adopted. Specifically, based on the tool diameter and tool shank specifications, three or more data of the tool diameter and tool shank specifications adjacent to the tool to be used are obtained, and this data group is used with the tool diameter and tool shank specifications as variables. Analyze to obtain an approximate formula and automatically input the tool diameter and tool shank specifications of the tool to be used to calculate the cutting conditions. A description of a specific method example will be described later with an example of this work.

Next, in step 110502, the radial and axial rigidity of the temporary tool are calculated.
The maximum cutting load of the tool is calculated using the equation (33) based on the tool conditions read in step 110501 and the specific cutting resistance corresponding to the workpiece material: 1,960 N / mm 2 obtained previously.
Maximum cutting load = maximum depth of cut × maximum feed × specific cutting resistance = 12.43 × 0.4 × 1,960 = 9,745.12N (33)
The ratio of tool stiffness is 1 because the radial and axial tool stiffness is the same (FIG. 79).
Also, the size of the tool shank obtained from the tool file (Fig. 79) (width: 25 mm, height: 25 mm in this example) and the amount of protrusion from the tool holder (25 mm in this example) Using the given numerical values, the maximum load is obtained by developing equation (34).
δmax = Pr × L 3 / (3 × E × I) (34)
Pr = 3 * E * I * [delta] max / L3 = 3 * 2.14 * 10 <5> * 254 * 0.003 / (12 * 253) = 4,012.5N
Where Pr: Theoretical radial load [N]
L: Projection amount of the tool from the tool holder = 25 [mm]
E: Elastic modulus = 2.14 × 10 5 [N / mm 2]
I = b · h3 / 12: Moment of inertia [mm4]
b: Width of tool shank = 25 [mm]
h: Tool shank height = 25 [mm]
δmax: allowable maximum deflection = 0.003 [mm]
Indicates.
As a result, the allowable maximum load obtained from the tool rigidity is smaller than the maximum cutting load 9,745.1N obtained from the product of the cutting, feed and specific cutting resistance, so the theoretical radial load 4,012.5N is used. The allowable maximum cutting load is 4,012.5 N for both radial and axial, and the ratio is 1: 1 as described above.
If this process ends, the process continues to step 110503.

In step 110503, the rigidity of the machine tool is read from the machine tool file (FIGS. 58 to 76), and the rigidity ratio between the radial direction and the axial direction is calculated.
This is an operation for comparing the X (radius) direction feed capability of the machine with the Z (axis) direction feed capability.
From the machine tool file, the spindle rigidity (maximum allowable load) (in this example, from machine tool XLD001, radial: 6,000 N, axial: 30,000 N), maximum infeed and maximum feed (in this example, maximum (Importance: 7 mm, Maximum feed: 0.7 mm / rev.) Further, the maximum cutting load is calculated from the specific cutting resistance corresponding to the workpiece material obtained previously: 1,960 N / mm @ 2.
Here, the maximum cutting load is given by substituting into the equation (33). Simplify by omitting actual machining conditions, and calculate with the file data as it is,
Maximum cutting load = maximum depth of cut × maximum feed × specific cutting resistance = 7 × 0.7 × 1, 960 = 9,604N (33)
Since this example has the same maximum depth of cut and maximum feed for both radial and axial, compared to the maximum allowable value obtained from the machine tool file, the radial load is lower than the calculated value, so the maximum allowable load is A machine tool file is used, and the axial load is set to 9,604 N using a calculated value because the file value is high.
As a result, the condition ratio of the machine is 1: 1.6 from radial: 6,000N and axial: 9,604N.
When this process ends, step 110504 follows.

Next, in step 110504, the workpiece rigidity is calculated, and the ratio between the workpiece radial direction and the axial rigidity is calculated.
In this example,
The radial (deflection) stiffness is expressed by the amount of deflection in equation (34). It can be said that the smaller this value is, the higher the rigidity is.
δmax = Pr × L 3 / (3 × E × I) (34)
Here is an example of material input:
Pr = 4,012.5 [N]
L1 = 210 [mm]
L2 = 185 [mm]
E = 2.14 × 10 5 [N / mm 2]
I = πd4 / 64 [mm4]
d1 = 58 [mm] (first machining side)
d2 = 53 [mm] (second machining side)
And δ1 max = 64 × 4, 012.5 × 210 3 /(3×2.14×10 5 × π × 58 4) = 0.001042 [mm]
δ2 max = 64 × 4, 012.5 × 185 3 /(3×2.14×10 5 × π × 53 4) = 0.001022 [mm]
In the case of a rod material with a diameter of 115 mm,
Pr = 4,012.5 [N]
L1 = 210 [mm] (first processing side)
L2 = 185 [mm] (second machining side)
E = 2.14 × 10 5 [N / mm 2]
I = πd4 / 64 [mm4]
d1 = 115 [mm] (first machining side)
d2 = 53 [mm] (second machining side)
Δ1 max = 64 × 4, 012.5 × 210 3 /(3×2.14×10 5 × π × 115 4) = 0.000067 [mm]
δ2 max = 64 × 4, 012.5 × 185 3 /(3×2.14×10 5 × π × 53 4) = 0.001022 [mm]

The axial (twist) stiffness is given by equation (35).
δmax = 32 × Pr × L × r 2 / πd 4 G (35)
Here is an example of material input:
Pr = 4,012.5 [N]
L1 = 210 [mm] (first processing side)
L2 = 185 [mm] (second machining side)
G = 8.9 × 10 4 [N / mm 2]
d1 = 58 [mm] is used as an approximate value on the first machining side.
d2 = 53 [mm] is used as an approximate value on the second machining side.
r1 = 29 [mm] (first machining side)
r2 = 265 [mm] (second machining side)
Δ1 max = 32 × 4, 012.5 × 210 × 292 /(π×584×8.9×10 4) = 0.00717 [mm]
.delta.2 max = 32.times.4, 012.5.times.185.times.292 / (. pi..times.534.times.8.9.times.10 @ 4) = 0.00906 [mm]
In the case of a rod material with a diameter of 115 mm,
Pr = 4,012.5 [N]
L1 = 210 [mm] (first processing side)
L2 = 185 [mm] (second machining side)
G = 8.9 × 10 4 [N / mm 2]
d1 = 115 [mm] (first machining side)
d2 = 53 [mm] (second machining side)
r1 = 57.5 [mm] (first machining side)
r2 = 57.5 [mm] (second machining side)
Δ1 max = 32 × 4, 012.5 × 210 × 57.52 / (π × 1154 × 8.9 × 10 4) = 0.01823 [mm]
δ2 max = 32 × 4, 012.5 × 185 × 57.52 / (π × 534 × 8.9 × 10 4) = 0.0356 [mm]

As a result, in the material input example, the rigidity against the load in the radial direction is higher than the torsional rigidity in the axial direction, and the ratio of the deflection amount is
On the first processing side, 0.001042: 0.00717 = 0.145: 1
On the second machining side, 0.001022: 0.00906 = 0.113: 1
It is.
Further, in the case of a rod material having a diameter of 115 mm, the rigidity against the load in the radial direction is higher than the torsional rigidity in the axial direction.
On the first processing side, 0.000067: 0.00182 = 0.037: 1
On the second machining side, 0.00102: 0.0356 = 0.029: 1
It is.
When this process is finished, the routine continues to step 110505.

Next, in step 110505, the processing results from step 110501 to step 110504 are compared, and the X-direction cutting-Z direction feeding, the Z-direction cutting-X-direction feeding capability, and the maximum machining load are determined and determined.
The maximum cutting load ratio of the tool obtained in step 110502 is
Radial: 4,012.5N
Axial: The maximum cutting load ratio is 1: 1 from 4,012.5N.
The rigidity ratio of the machine obtained in step 110503 is
Radial: 6,000N,
Axial: The rigidity ratio of the machine is 1: 1.6 from 9,604N.
The work rigidity ratio obtained in step 110504 is
In the material input example,
On the first processing side, the ratio is 0.001042: 0.00717 = 0.145: 1
On the second machining side, the ratio is 0.001022: 0.00906 = 0.113: 1
It is.
In the case of a rod material with a diameter of 115 mm,
On the first processing side, the ratio is 0.000067: 0.00182 = 0.037: 1
On the second machining side, the ratio is 0.001022: 0.0356 = 0.0287: 1
It is.

Since the ratio of the maximum load obtained from the tool rigidity obtained in step 110502 is 1: 1, either the Z (axis) direction or the X (half) radial direction may be used. Since the machine condition ratio obtained in step 110503 is 1: 1.6, it can be determined that the Z (axis) direction feed rigidity is high. From the workpiece rigidity ratio obtained in step 110504, the material input example is 0.145: 1 on the first processing side and 0.113: 1 on the second processing side, so the flexural rigidity is higher than the torsional rigidity. . That is, the rigidity of the X (axis) (radius) direction feed (Z-axis direction cut) is high. Further, in the case of a rod material having a diameter of 115 mm, it is 0.037: 1 on the first processing side and 0.0287: 1 on the second processing side, so that the bending rigidity is higher than the torsional rigidity as in the material input example. That is, the rigidity of the X (axis) (radius) direction feed (Z-axis direction cut) is high. From this result, the material input example is
The maximum machining load condition is the tool condition radial: 4,012.5 N,
Tool condition, axial: 4,012.5N,
Cutting is dominant in the Z (axis) direction, and feeding is dominant in the X (radius) direction.
An example of a stick material is
The maximum machining load condition is the tool condition radial: 4,012.5 N,
Tool condition, axial: 4,012.5N,
Cutting is dominant in the Z (axis) direction, and feeding is dominant in the X (radius) direction.
And
The provisional maximum depth of cut used for machining is determined according to the stiffness limit limit value by determining the cutting speed and feed rate from the specific cutting force and the cutting condition file (FIGS. 128 to 136) according to the tool material and the input workpiece material. Calculate the infeed value.
In the case of this example, from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85), the tool material: P20 and the input workpiece material: SCM440H, the conditions of the cutting condition file (FIG. 128), cutting speed 102 m / min, feed 0 Read 4 mm / rev. Further, the maximum machining load condition: 4,012.5 N of the tool condition, the maximum feed: 0.4 mm / rev, the specific cutting resistance: 1,960 N / mm 2, and the provisional maximum infeed value = 4,012.5 / (0.4 × 1,960) = 5.118 [mm]
And
When this process ends, the process continues to the next step 110506.

Next, in step 110506, the process determination procedure starting from the material determination is entered. In step 110506, material discrimination is performed.
1 (8): It is determined whether or not the workpiece is a rod material by inputting the workpiece material dimensions. On the other hand, if NO, continue to step 110513.

In step 110507, the machining allowance for each stage is calculated, and the sum and total of machining allowances for each processing side are calculated.
A calculation result when the case of this example is a bar material is a result as shown in FIG.
In the case of the rod material of this example from FIG. 179,
Sectional area
First processing side: S1 = 35.965 [cm2]
Second processing side: S2 = 25.088 [cm2]
Total: S = 61.0525 [cm2]
It is. When this process ends, the process continues to step 110508.

In step 110508, the Z-direction feed frequency and the Z-direction machining length are calculated.
In the case of the bar material of this example, the average allowance value from FIG.
Outer diameter average machining allowance on the first processing side: S1 / L1 = 35.965 / 17.15 = 2.097 [cm]
Outer diameter average machining allowance on the second machining side: S2 / L2 = 25.088 / 6.65 = 3.773 [cm]
Total: S / L = 61.0525 / 23.8 = 2.565 [cm]
It becomes.
The provisional maximum cutting value of the temporary tool obtained in step 110505 described above; 5.118 mm is used to divide the average machining allowance, and the macroscopic cutting number is obtained.
Number of macro cuts: Number of cuts in X (radius) direction First machining side: 5 (20.97 / 5.118)
Second processing side: 8 (37.73 / 5.118)
(Total: 13)
Z (axis) direction length First processing side: L1 = 171.5 [mm]
Second processing side: L2 = 66.5 [mm]
Total: L = 238. [Mm]
Machining length when machining in the Z (axis) direction = (Z (axis) direction length x X (radius) direction cut count)
First processing side: 171.5 × 5 = 857.5 [mm]
Second processing side: 66.5 × 8 = 532. [Mm]
Total: 857.5 + 532. = 1,389.5 [mm]
To summarize the results, the number of cuts when machining in the Z (axis) direction is 13, and the machining length is 1,389.5 mm.
After this process ends, the process continues to step 110509.

In step 110509, the number of X-direction feeds in the Z direction and the machining length in the X direction are calculated.
In the case of the bar material of this example, the average allowance value from FIG.
Z direction average machining allowance on the first machining side: S1 / R1 = 35.965 / 5.75 = 6.255 [cm]
Z direction average machining allowance on the second machining side: S2 / R2 = 25.088 / 5.75 = 4.363 [cm]
Total: S / R = 61.053 / 5.75 = 10.618 [cm]
The provisional maximum cutting value of the temporary tool obtained in step 110505 described above; 5.118 mm is used to divide the average machining allowance, and the macroscopic cutting number is obtained.
Number of macro cuts: Number of cuts in the Z direction First machining side: 13 (62.55 / 5.118)
Second processing side: 9 (43.36 / 5.118)
(Total: 22)
Length in X (radius) direction First processing side: R1 = 57.5 [mm]
Second machining side: R2 = 57.5 [mm]
Total: R = 57.5 [mm]
Machining length when machining in X (radius) direction =
(X (radius) direction length x Z (axis) direction cut count)
First processing side: 57.5 × 13 = 747.5 [mm]
Second processing side: 57.5 × 9 = 517.5 [mm]
Total: 747.5 + 517.5 = 1,265. [Mm]
In summary, when the Z (axis) direction machining is performed, the number of cuts is 22 and the machining length is 1,265 mm.
After this process is completed, the process continues to step 110510.

In step 110510, the feed direction is determined as X or Z based on the feed direction length and the number of cuts.
If both conditions are superior, such as simply having a short feed direction length and a small number of cuts, select a superior feed direction. If the machining length and the number of cuts are both small in the X direction, go to step 110511. If the machining length and the number of cuts are both small in the Z direction, go to step 110512. Since it is ambiguous and cannot be determined, step 110519 follows.
In this example,
Ratio of machining length when machining with X (radius) direction feed and machining length when machining with Z (axis) direction feed X: Z
First processing side; 1: 1.147
747.5 [mm]: 857.5 [mm]
Second processing side; 1: 1.028
517.5 [mm]: 532. [Mm]
Total; 1: 1.098
1,265 [mm]: 1,389.5 [mm]
Ratio of cutting frequency X: Z
First processing side; 1: 0.385
13: 5
Second processing side; 1: 0.8
10: 8
Total; 1: 0.591
22:13
It became.
As a result, the machining length is the X-direction feed, and the number of cuts is superior in the Z-direction feed, but is ambiguous and cannot be determined. In this example, the process continues to step 110519.
As a result, if the machining length and the number of cuttings are superior in both the Z-direction feed, step 110512 is continued.

On the other hand, in the material discrimination in step 110506, if NO, as a material input, in step 110513, machining allowances in the X direction and the Z direction are calculated from the material and finish shape data for each step. The result in the case of material input in this example is shown in FIG.
In FIG. 180, the end surfaces and end surface grooves displayed in the shape column of each step are Z direction allowances, inner diameters, inner diameter grooves, outer diameters, and outer diameter grooves are X direction allowances. When this process ends, step 110514 follows.

In step 110514, the number of cuts and the machining length are calculated for each stage for each of the X direction feed, the Z direction feed, and the combination feed method.
Here, the X direction feed refers to cutting in the Z (axis) direction—feeding in the X (radius) direction, and the Z direction feed refers to cutting in the X (radius) direction—feeding in the Z (axis) direction.
The combination feed method is a process in which the end face and groove are cut in the Z (axis) direction-feed in the X (radius) direction, and the outer diameter and the inner diameter are cut in the X (radius) direction-sent in the Z (axis) direction. Processing is divided into methods.
As in this example, if there is no pilot hole in the inner diameter, both the X direction and Z direction feeds cannot actually be processed, but assuming that the position of the tool edge can be inserted to the center line, the inner diameter and inner diameter groove processing I do. If the groove has a shape perpendicular to the feeding direction, the groove is processed with a lid, and the number of additional cuttings and the processing length are added again as the groove.
Using the provisional maximum cutting value of the temporary tool obtained earlier; 5.118 mm, the number of cuttings and the machining length of each stage are calculated.
Since this calculation method has already been described in steps 110508 and 110509 in a similar method in which the whole is one stage of the bar material, a description thereof will be omitted.
The calculation result in this example is
X direction feed: Number of cuts: 55 + 6 (groove)
Processing length: 497.94 + 24.5 = 522.44 [mm]
Z direction feed: Number of cuts: 59 + 4 (groove)
Processing length: 549. +24.5 (groove) = 573.5 [mm]
Combination feed method: Number of cuts: 46
Processing length: 515. +82. +24.5 (groove) = 621.5 [mm]
It became.
When this process is finished, step 110515 follows.

In step 110515, the ranking of the number of cuts and the feed length for each cut-feed direction is compared.
In this example,
Number of cuts;
First place: combination feeding method (46),
2nd: X direction feed (55 + 6 (groove))
3rd place: Z direction feed (59 + 4 (groove)),
Processing length;
1st place: X direction feed (497.94 + 24.5 (groove) = 522.44 [mm])
2nd: Z direction feed (549. + 24.5 (groove) = 573.5 [mm])
3rd place: Combination feeding method (515. + 82. + 24.5 (groove) = 621.5 [mm])
It became.
When this process ends, step 110516 follows.

In step 110516, it is determined whether or not the combination feeding method having a short machining time qualitatively is the best method for both the number of cuttings and the machining length.
If yes, continue to step 110517. On the other hand, if it cannot be determined, the process continues to step 110518.
In the case of this example, since the number of cuttings and the processing length are not in the same rank and cannot be simply determined based on the data of step 110515, the process continues to step 110517.

In step 110518, the superiority or inferiority of the X direction feed and the Z direction feed is determined.
As in the case of step 110510, if both are superior, such as simply having a short feed direction length and a small number of cuts, the discrimination criterion is to select a superior feed direction. If the machining length and the number of cuts are both in the X direction, go to step 110511, if the machining length and the number of cuts are both in the Z direction, go to step 110512. Since there is, it continues to step 110519.

In step 110519, a temporary machining time is calculated.
Read machine tool operation time: X rapid feed positioning time, Z rapid feed positioning time, X rapid feed speed, Z rapid feed speed, and calculate temporary positioning time, fast feed time, and cutting feed time for each feed direction. To do.
In this example,
From machine tool file (FIGS. 58 to 76) by machine identification number XLD001, machining function: L,
Machine tool operating time; X fast feed positioning time: 0.00006Hr,
Z rapid traverse positioning time: 0.00006Hr
Rapid feed speed; X rapid feed speed: 15,000 mm / min,
Z rapid feed speed: 15,000 mm / min,
Was requested.
Each time is calculated in the following manner using equations (36) to (38).
Total positioning time = (Positioning time) x 2 x (Number of cuttings) ... (36)
The rapid traverse time is a sum obtained by dividing the average movement distance obtained by dividing the machining length by the number of cuts by the rapid feed speed and multiplying this by the positioning time and the number of cuts.
Rapid feed time = {Machining length / (Number of cuts x Rapid feed speed)} + (Positioning time) x Number of cuts (37)
For the cutting feed time, the cutting speed and feed are calculated from the cutting condition file according to the tool material and input workpiece material, the cutting feed speed is calculated for one minute from the average machining diameter of the workpiece, and the machining length is cut for one minute. Divide by the speed of feeding.
Cutting feed time = machining length / feeding speed per minute of machining (38)
The calculation of time in the bar material of this example following step 110510 is as follows:
X direction feed;
Total positioning time = 0.00264Hr
In this example, total positioning time = positioning time x 2 x number of cuttings
= 0.00006 × 2 × 22
= 0.00264 [Hr]
Fast forward time = 0.00273Hr
In the case of this example, average rapid traverse distance = 1,265 / 22 = 57.5
Fast forward time = {57.5 × 22 / (15,000 × 60)} + 6 ×
10-5 × 22
= 0.00273 [Hr]
Cutting feed time = 0.10958Hr
In this example, the average machining diameter = (110 + 25) /2=67.5 [mm]
From the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85), the tool material: P20 and the input workpiece material: SCM440H are used to obtain the conditions of the cutting condition file (FIG. 128), the cutting speed of 102 m / min, and the feed of 0.4 mm / rev. .
Using this condition, the feed speed per minute is calculated.
Feeding speed per minute = 0.4 × 102,000 / (3.14 × 67.5) = 192.4 [mm / min]
Seeking
The cutting feed time is obtained from equation (38).
Cutting feed time = machining length / feeding speed per minute of machining (38)
= 1265 / 192.4 = 6.57484 [min]
= 0.10958 [Hr]
The operation result was obtained.
As a result, the X-direction feed temporary processing time was 0.11495 Hr.
Breakdown; Total positioning time = 0.00264Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00273Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.1095Hr

Z direction feed;
Total positioning time = 0.00156Hr
In this example, total positioning time = positioning time x 2 x number of cuttings
= 0.00006 x 2 x 13
= 0.00156 [Hr]
Fast forward time = 0.00232Hr
In the case of this example, from average rapid traverse distance = 1389.5 / 13 = 106.885
Fast forward time = {106.885 × 13 / (15,000 × 60)} + 6 ×
10-5 × 24
= 0.00232 [Hr]
Cutting feed time = 0.12037Hr
The cutting feed time is obtained from equation (38).
Cutting feed time = machining length / feeding speed per minute of machining (38)
Cutting feed time = 1389.5 / 192.4
= 7.2219 [min]
= 0.12037 [Hr]
The operation result was obtained.
As a result, the Z-direction feed temporary processing time was 0.12425 Hr.
Breakdown; Total positioning time = 0.00156Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00232Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.12037Hr
When this process ends, step 110520 follows.

The calculation in this example of the material figure input subsequent to step 110518, assuming that it becomes impossible to discriminate in steps 110516 and 110518,
X direction feed;
Total positioning time = 0.00732Hr
In this example, total positioning time = positioning time x 2 x number of cuttings
= 0.00006 x 2 x 61
= 0.00732Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00424Hr
In the case of this example, average rapid traverse distance = 522.44 / 61 = 8.565
Fast forward time = {8.565 × 61 / (15,000 × 60)}
+ 6 × 10-5 × 61
= 0.00424Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.04526Hr
In this example, the average machining diameter = (110 + 25) /2=67.5
From the tool file, the tool material: P20 and the input workpiece material: SCM440H obtain the conditions of the cutting condition file, the cutting speed 102 m / min, and the feed 0.4 mm / rev.
Using this condition, the feed speed per minute is calculated.
Feeding speed per minute = 0.4 × 102,000 / (3.14 × 67.5)
= 192.4 mm is obtained, and the cutting feed time is obtained from the equation (38).
Cutting feed time = machining length / feeding speed per minute of machining (38)
= 522.44 / 192.4 = 2.715538min
= 0.04526Hr
The operation result was obtained.
As a result, the X-direction feed temporary processing time was 0.05682 Hr.
Breakdown; Total positioning time = 0.00732Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00424Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.04526Hr

Z direction feed;
Total positioning time = 0.00756Hr
In this example, total positioning time = positioning time x 2 x number of cuttings
= 0.00006 x 2 x 63 = 0.00756Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00442Hr
In the case of this example, average fast-forward distance = 573.5 / 63 = 9.103
Fast forward time = {9.103 × 63 / (15,000 × 60)}
+ 6 × 10-5 × 63
= 0.00442Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.04968Hr
The cutting feed time is obtained from equation (38).
Cutting feed time = machining length / feeding speed per minute of machining (38)
= 573.54 / 192.4 = 2.98077 min
= 0.04968Hr
The operation result was obtained.
As a result, the Z-direction feed provisional machining time was 0.06184Hr.
Breakdown; Total positioning time = 0.00756Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00442Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.04968Hr

Combination feeding method;
Total positioning time = 0.00552Hr
In this example, total positioning time = positioning time x 2 x number of cuttings
= 0.00006 × 2 × 46
= 0.00552Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00345Hr
In the case of this example, average fast-forward distance = 621.5 / 46 = 13.511 Fast-forward time = {13.511 × 46 / (15,000 × 60)}
+ 6 × 10-5 × 46
= 0.00345Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.05384Hr
The cutting feed time is obtained from equation (38).
Cutting feed time = machining length / feeding speed per minute of machining (38)
= 612.5 / 192.4 = 3.23025min
= 0.05384Hr
The operation result was obtained.
As a result, the temporary processing time of the combination feeding method was 0.06281Hr.
Breakdown; Total positioning time = 0.00552Hr
Fast forward time = 0.00345Hr
Cutting feed time = 0.05384Hr
It is.
When this calculation is finished, step 110520 follows.

In step 110520, the best method is determined.
The three preliminary machining times are compared, and if the X direction feed is the best, step 110511 is followed, if the Z direction feed is the best, step 110512 is followed, and if the combination feed method is the best, step 110517 is followed.
In the case of this example of the bar material, the X-direction feed temporary machining time is 0.11495Hr, and the Z-direction feed temporary machining time is 0.12425Hr. The X-direction feed temporary processing time is 0.11495Hr, which is the best method.
In this case, continue to step 110512.

  In the case of the material figure input of this example that has been considered as being indistinguishable in steps 110516 and 110518, the X-direction feed temporary machining time is 0.05682Hr, the Z-direction feed temporary machining time is 0.06184Hr, and the combination feed method The temporary machining time was 0.06281 Hr, and the X-direction temporary machining time was 0.05682 Hr, which was the best method.

  If it is determined that Step 110511: X-direction feed removal, Step 110512; Z-direction feed removal, Step 110517: Combination feed method, the removal direction is recorded in a predetermined storage unit of the numerical controller in each step.

  When these processes are completed, the determination process of the maximum machining load and the determination of the cutting feed removal direction are completed in step 110521, and the process returns to step 1105 and continues to step 1106.

Tool Selection for Turning Process FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of Step 1106.
Since the removal direction is determined in step 11050, the procedure for selecting a tool in step 1106 will be described.
Beginning at step 11060, at step 11061 a tool is searched.
The tool search is performed as a tool file (including the processing start point angle and end point angle) by calculating a tool file processed in step 220 (a tool edge of the tool input as described in step 220, a figure that can be processed by holder information) And the code of the input data figure (including the start and end angles of the graphic processing processed in step 8; the same applies hereinafter) (FIG. 12). Search and collate into end face, outer diameter, inner diameter groove, outer diameter groove, end face groove, etc.
Also, a pilot hole machining tool is added and searched depending on the presence or absence of the pilot hole for the inner diameter.

The turning tool is used including the maximum graphic processing tool used for determining the removal direction.
In this case, in order to obtain the minimum number of tools, it is necessary to search for tools having many tool functions. This is as follows when tools having all functions are reduced in order in the first order and the tools are ranked.
Order of least tool method Equipment function 1 Inner diameter: I, End face: F, Outer diameter: E, Groove: G,
2 Inner diameter: I, end face: F, outer diameter: E
3 Inner diameter: I, end face: F,
3 Outer diameter: E, end face: F
4 Inner diameter: I only 4 Outer diameter: E only 4 End face: F only 4 Groove: G only

The graphic information in this example is based on the result of pattern identification of the graphic of this example (FIG. 12) and material graphic data arranged in step 8 as follows:
1st to 10th steps, inner diameter: I, clockwise space from -180 to -90 degrees
/ No pilot hole 11th step End face: F, 0 degree space 12th to 27th step, outer diameter: E, clockwise space from -90 to 0 degree 28th to 37th step, outside Diameter: E, clockwise space from 0 to 90 degrees 38th stage End face: F, 0 degree space In addition to groove determination and groove input, 4th stage Inner diameter groove: IG
6th stage inner diameter groove: IG
18th stage outer diameter groove: EG
23rd stage outer diameter groove: EG
28th to 30th stages Outer diameter groove: EG
It is.
The tool search result comparing the data with the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85) and the pilot hole tool search result are
From the 1st stage to the 10th stage, pilot hole inner diameter: I, tool identification number: 9, 12, 17,
1st stage to 10th stage, inner diameter: I, tool identification number: 7, 8,
11th stage End face: F, Tool identification number: 1, 2, 3,
12th to 27th stages, outer diameter: E, tool identification number: 1, 2, 3, 4,
28th to 37th stages, outer diameter: E, tool identification number: 1, 2, 3, 4,
38th stage End face: F, Tool identification number: 1, 2, 3,
Fourth stage inner diameter groove: IG, tool identification number: 8,
6th stage inner diameter groove: IG, tool identification number: 8,
18th stage outer diameter groove: EG, tool identification number: 4,
23rd stage outer diameter groove: EG, tool identification number: 4,
28th to 30th stages Outer diameter groove: EG, Tool identification number: 4,
Results were obtained.
If there is no roughing tool that matches the input figure, the finishing tool is used for roughing after the warning.
Further, if the tool required for the input figure is not in the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85), a warning is given.
The operator selects whether to re-enter the tool in the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85) or ignore it according to the warning. If neglected, it is natural that machining according to the figure cannot be performed at the figure code portion using the insufficient tool corresponding to the input figure.
When this search process ends, the process continues to the next step 11062.

Tool selection method for turning process (Fig. 24)
The tool selection order in step 11062 is to select a tool having a sufficient ability to process the shape dimensions of the figure such as the hole diameter and hole depth of the figure, the groove width and the groove depth, which are already known facts. At the same time, considering productivity as the highest priority, the one with the highest rigidity is selected as the first rank, and the multi-function is selected as the second rank.
Multi-function sorting is performed in the order of 1 to 4 of the above-mentioned minimum tool method, and if there is a matching tool in the ranking, the subsequent sorting is sorted in the order of the same tool and the excluded same area tool. .

Tool selection method for turning process (Fig. 24)
The determination conditions for tool selection in step 11063 consider the following.
・ In principle, the minimum number of tools should be selected.
・ Select one workpiece lot number, necessary conditions, and absolute conditions.
-Select the maximum cutting force tool for each region and add ATC time to the processing time to A. B is obtained by adding the ATC time to the machining time using the minimum tool number method.
Acceptance is determined by the size of A and B. Select a tool group with a small total machining time.
If this processing is performed, the tool selection processing ends in step 11064, and the processing returns to step 1106 and continues to step 1107.

Tool Determination The determination of the tool obtained the following result in this example by the processing in step 1106 described above.
Roughing 1st to 10th stages, Inner diameter: I, Tool identification number: 7,
11th stage End face: F, Tool identification number: 1,
12th to 27th stages, outer diameter: E, tool identification number: 1,
28th to 37th stages, outer diameter: E, tool identification number: 1,
38th stage End face: F, Tool identification number: 1,
Finishing 1st to 10th stages, Inner diameter: I, Tool identification number: 7,
11th stage End face: F, Tool identification number: 3,
12th to 27th stages, outer diameter: E, tool identification number: 3,
28th to 37th stages, outer diameter: E, tool identification number: 3,
38th stage End face: F, Tool identification number: 3,
Fourth stage inner diameter groove: IG, tool identification number: 8,
6th stage inner diameter groove: IG, tool identification number: 8,
18th stage outer diameter groove: EG, tool identification number: 4,
23rd stage outer diameter groove: EG, tool identification number: 4,
28th to 30th stages Outer diameter groove: EG, Tool identification number: 4,

In the case of this example, since there is no pilot hole at the inner diameter machining portion, the shape dimension of the pilot hole figure is limited.
Since the inner diameter tool is determined in the above-mentioned step 1106, the inner diameter machining specifications are determined to be used as they are, so that the tool nose radius: 0.4 mm from the tool file of FIG. 7 (FIGS. 78 to 85). As a finishing charge, the dimensions of roughing were arranged as follows.
Step number Finishing length Length 2 (Start point coordinates) 20.011 0. [159.975]
2 20.011-0.8 = 19.211 15.025 [175.]
4 22.-0.8 = 21.2 15. [190.]
6 24.125-0.8 = 23.325 15. [205.]
8 31.013-0.8 = 30.213 5. [210.]
SUM 50.025
It is.
As a result of the search for the limit dimension, the minimum finished dimension is a roughing diameter of 19.011 mm of 20.011 mm in the first stage.

As a result of searching for a drilling tool from a rotary tool file (FIGS. 82 to 85) and obtaining a drill with a minimum dimension of 19.211 mm or less, a 19 mm drill with a tool identification number: 9 and a 19 mm space drill with a tool identification number: 12 A 16 mm end mill with a tool identification number of 17 was obtained. This result is the same as the search result based on the graphic size.
When a tool satisfying the input machining depth of 50 mm was determined from these, the tool identification number: 9 was 145 mm, and the tool identification number: 12 was 140 mm.
Although this tool does not satisfy the minimum machining inner diameter of 19.211 mm, it can be machined by additional machining. Therefore, these tools are used, and a pilot hole is machined by drilling and space drilling.

Next, in this example, a tool having an inner diameter groove function is searched.
As a result of searching for a tool having an inner diameter groove function from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85), in this example, the tool identification number 8 is searched.
Next, the suitability of the tool is determined.
The tool reads the specifications of each groove from the final finished shape file (FIGS. 161 to 172), and determines whether or not machining is possible by comparing with the specifications of the tool.
The collation items are the groove width, the diameter of the groove bottom and the groove step, the position of the groove from the end face and the length under the neck of the tool, the radius of the corner of the groove, the suitability of the finishing symbol, and the like.
As a result of collation using the above collation items, it was determined that a tool having an ability sufficient to process the shape of the figure was possible with the tool identification number: 8.

The presence or absence of designation of the tool is clarified by the tool designation in FIG. 107, and it can be designated in the format shown in FIG. 110 for each process, or automatic determination can be selected.
For these, all designations and partial designations may be mixed. In the case of partial specification, processes with insufficient input or order are automatically supplemented. An example of an input format to be specified for each process of the tool is shown in FIG. 110 as an example of turning. This is paired with the pattern of the figure to clearly indicate the tool limit size, and the tool is designated by the tool number registered in the tool file.

The tool can be specified by the operator identifying and inputting the characteristics of the graphic at the stage of inputting the graphic, or the operator calling the result of pattern processing and pattern identification of the graphic input data on the HELP screen and determining the tool Depending on what you enter. The tool designation in this case is designated by a tool registered in the tool file. If the tool is specified at the figure input stage, the processing is impossible due to the consistency as a result of the arithmetic processing.
Needless to say, the tool must match the machine identification number used. For this reason, when a tool is designated, it is inevitably input while looking at a tool file (in this example, FIGS. 78 to 85). As a matter of course, the tool file is called on the HELP screen and input while viewing the tool file.
The roughing tool is not used for finishing, but the finishing tool may be used for roughing depending on the situation.

Selection and determination of fixtures The fixtures are searched for the fixtures of the machine tool file input for each machine tool by the parameter that matches the diameter and length of the part that can be chucked by the input material graphic and finish graphic. Then, it is discriminated, selected, and determined by “fixing the immediate vicinity of the part to be processed”, which is the main principle of chucking.

Generation determination processing of n-process machining path for each machining order The cutting amount is a method that can cope with fluctuations in machining allowance, for example, a statistical processing method is adopted for the following material fluctuations.

Correction Method for Material Shape Input in Turning Process This correction estimates the shape variation of the material using a statistical processing method. The processing procedure is shown in FIGS.
In general, casting materials, forging materials, and the like are not constant in shape and vary from one piece to another due to variations in various conditions in the manufacturing process. In order to stably and quickly process this variable workpiece,
Cast material, forging material, etc. are measured, actual material shape data is collected, input material shape data is corrected, and the processing cycle and cutting are determined based on the difference from the finished shape.
This specific method is:
The material shape is measured, n (for example, the minimum value is 7 to ensure statistical reliability), statistical processing of the data collected repeatedly is performed to obtain the average value and variation, and the processing is performed each time. Alternatively, a method of high productivity is adopted by comparing and discriminating the sum of the measurement time and the machining time and the machining time by the statistical method to determine whether the machining is based on statistical data.
The processing procedure while measuring the material is based on the processing from step 27.

The n-process material measurement and processing program creation procedure in step 27 is shown in FIG.
Starting from step 2700, it is determined whether or not the same figure is a repetitive work in step 2701. If it is not the same figure, the material drawing and the processed figure in the n process are arranged in step 2702.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2701 that the workpiece is a repetitive workpiece having the same figure, step 2706 follows.
Here, the arrangement method of the material drawing and the processed figure in step 2702 is as follows. Based on the first material and the machining figure in the machining process, the material of the second machining process is the machining figure of the first machining process, and the machining figure of the second machining process is the material figure of the third machining process. . This is used to organize the machining figures of each process.
In this example, a method description is described in which materials and processed figures are arranged every time for each process, but these may be collectively processed.
The result of this arrangement is a material and a processed figure for each process.
Further, from step 2810 in FIG. 31, (12) and from step 2832 in FIG. 33 to (13) return to (12) and (13) in FIG. 29 and flow into step 2702, determination processing is performed in step 2702, If it has flowed in, it continues to step 2707, and if it has not flowed in, it continues to step 2703.
In Step 2707 when the flow has entered Step 2702 from Step 2810 and Step 2832, it is determined whether or not it is a next processing process. In the case of the next processing, Step 2706 is followed. Returning to step 23 from (14) of FIG.
In step 2703, it is determined whether or not the removal direction is designated. Since the removal direction is determined with emphasis on productivity, an input item example is specified by the input format shown in FIG. If specified, follow the specified direction.
If there is no designation, a removal direction determination process is performed in step 2708. If this process is completed, the process continues to step 2704.
Since the processing content of this step 2708 is the same as the processing content of step 1105 shown in FIG. 26, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.
If so, step 2704 follows.

In step 2704, n-process tool selection processing is performed.
The processing procedure of the n-process tool selection processing in step 2704 is shown in FIG.
This processing content is the same as in step 1106.
Tool selection starts at step 27040 and searches for tools at step 27041. The tool search is performed for each n-process machine tool by calculating the tool file processed in step 220 (as described in step 220, the tool cutting edge of the input tool, the figure that can be processed by the holder information, and the tool code (machining (Including the start point angle and the end point angle)) is searched by the graphic code (FIG. 1212) obtained by processing the graphic input data in step 807, and all the tools having the same graphic processing function code are searched. Next, in step 27042, the multi-function tool and the high-rigidity tool are aligned and selected from the tools found in step 27041. When this processing is completed, in step 27043, the optimum tool for machining is selected and determined based on the minimum and maximum productivity of the number of tools. When this process ends, the process ends at step 27044, returns to step 2704, and continues to step 2705.

In step 2705, n-process fixture selection processing is performed.
The n-process fixture selection processing procedure of step 2705 is shown in FIG.
The contents of this process are the same as in step 1107. The fixture selection starts at step 27050, and a fixture is searched for at step 277051. In the fixture search, a fixture of a machine tool file inputted for each n-process machine tool is searched from the inputted figure by using a parameter key as a parameter key. Next, in step 27052, the limit length and diameter for each processing side are selected as parameter keys, the fixtures having a length less than the limit length are selected, and the chucking lengths are arranged in ascending order. When this process is completed, in step 27053, the fixtures selected and aligned in step 27052 are selected, and the fixtures with the closest chucking diameter are selected for each machining side, and the fixtures common to both machining operations are determined as the optimum. . If it is not a common fixture for both processes, select and determine the optimal fixture for each.
If determined according to this processing standard, in the case of this example, in the case of a round material, the first processing: REXLD001, the second processing: REXLD001, the gripping first processing: REXLD001, and in the case of an input material, REXLD001 is used. It was.
When this process ends, the process ends at step 27704, returns to step 2705, and continues to step 2706.
In step 2706, n-process material measurement and processing program generation processing are performed.

The processing procedure of the n-process material measurement and processing program generation processing in step 2706 is shown in FIG.
Starting in step 270600, in step 270601, the n process determines whether or not material measurement is necessary. If necessary, it is determined in step 270602 whether or not the same figure work is to be repeated. If the same work is to be repeated, the process proceeds to step 270605. A scanning method or a moving path for measurement with an equal pitch interval is generated based on the data. In the next step 270604, the processing number repetition count counter is initialized to n1 = 0 and the group repetition count counter is initialized to n2 = 0.
In step 270605, the repetitive counter of the number n1 = n1 + 1 is advanced, and in step 270606, the material is measured by the copying method or at equal pitch intervals and the measurement time is measured. In step 270607, the measurement dimension data and the measurement time are filed in the data area.
In step 270608, the material dimension is replaced with the measurement dimension.
In step 270609, a machining allowance is calculated using this result, and a machining path is generated and determined. When this process ends, the process ends at step 270610, returns to step 2709, ends, returns to step 27, and continues to step.
On the other hand, if the result of determining whether or not n-process material measurement is necessary in step 270601 is not necessary, it is determined whether or not measurement has already been performed in step 270611. The counter is initialized as n1 = 0 and the group repeat count counter is initialized as n2 = 0.
In step 270613, the repetition counter of the number of processings is incremented as n1 = n1 +1, and step 270607 is continued. Steps 270607 and after have already been described. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the measurement has already been performed in Step 270611. If not, the process continues to Step 270609.

Next, in step 28, n-process workpiece machining, measurement, correction, and re-machining are performed.
The procedure of the processing content of step 28 is shown in FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG.
In step 2800, the workpiece is machined by the n-process machining program generated in step 2801 in step 2801, the machining time is measured, and machining time data is filed in the file area.
Here, the adaptive process for the cutting power during the machining is as follows.
For roughing,
When the cutting power exceeds the allowable value, the spindle rotational speed is adapted to be reduced to 80% in order as a first step, and is set within the allowable value limit. If the limit value is exceeded even after this processing is performed, the feed is reduced to 50% in order as a second stage to adapt.
If the limit is further exceeded in spite of these series of processes, a warning is issued and a process of stopping at a break of the machining block, for example, between the cutting process block and the rapid feed block, is performed.
If the cutting power is less than the permissible value, conversely, in the first stage, the feed is gradually increased to 200% and adapted, and if not, the second stage is adapted by increasing the cutting speed to 150%. Let However, the processing includes keeping the machine, tool, and material within the rigidity and allowable capacity.
For finishing,
Since the feed speed is determined by the roughness of the finished surface, the processing is adapted only by the spindle speed. The limit rotational speed in this case is determined by processing that includes the tool life in the processing content.

In the next step 2802, workpiece measurement and correction are performed on the n-process machine.
The contents of measurement and correction processing after workpiece machining are as follows. After machining the workpiece, all the locations where the dimension difference and tolerance symbol are specified are measured, and the tool position and machine position are expected to be corrected so that they are within the allowable values during the next machining.
For example, in the case of diameter measurement, at least two points in the diameter direction and two points in the length direction are measured.
The number of measurement points is increased using the tolerance width and length as parameters. For example, when the tolerance width is 10 μm, it is 6 points, when it is 20 μm, it is 4 points, when it exceeds 20 μm, it is 2 points, and the length is 25 mm as one division unit. 5mm or less shall be one place. The measured result is calculated as an average value and a difference between the maximum and minimum values.
When machining with the same cutting edge of the same tool, the deviation between the average value of the calculation results and the specified tolerance center point is corrected by a combination of tool position correction and machine position correction.
If the measured difference between the maximum and minimum exceeds 2/3 of the tolerance width at each specified location, a warning is required as an error in process selection. This is an input error in the machine tool file.
Whether the result of step 2802 is good or bad is determined in step 2803, and in the case of a non-defective product (15), the process continues from step (15) in FIG.
Alternatively, if it is determined as a defective product, it is determined in step 2804 whether or not there is a finishing allowance, and if there is a finishing allowance, it is determined in step 2805 whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the process returns to step 2801 and is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2805 that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, in step 2806, the presence / absence of the remaining finish allowance removing capability is compared with the minimum removal capability value of the machine tool file, and determined. If it is determined that there is a machine tool with the ability to remove the remaining work allowance, the process continues to step 2809, and if not, a warning process is performed in step 2807. When this process ends (15), the process continues from step (15) in FIG. 32 to step 2812.
In step 2806, it is determined whether or not there is a machine allowance for removing the remaining work allowance, and in step 2809 when it is determined that there is a machine tool for removing the remaining work allowance, the determination process for selecting the machine tool for removing the remaining work allowance is not processed. It is determined whether or not it is a process, and if it is an unprocessed process, it is determined in step 2810 whether or not it is a new process, and if it is not a new process, the process returns to step 2702.
Alternatively, if it is determined in step 2810 that it is a new machining process, one n process storage number is added in step 2811 and process data is additionally stored. When this process is completed (17), the process continues from step (17) in FIG.
On the other hand, if the determination process has already been processed in step 2809, the process continues to step 2811. The processing content of step 2811 has been described above.

The processing procedure after step 2812 is shown in FIG.
In step 2812, the processing number repetition count n1 = n1? If n1 ≠ n1 (16), the process returns to step 34 from (16) of FIG.
On the other hand, if n1 = n1, step 2813 is followed by step 2813 to add the group repetition counter and advance to n2 = n2 + 1.
In the next step 2814, the processing number repetition counter n1 is initialized so that n1 = 0.
In step 2815, n1 × n2 material measurement data files repeated n1 × n2 times are read, and the average value, maximum value, and minimum value of the material shape are calculated by a statistical processing method such as the least square method, the 3σ method, or the like. .
In step 2816, the machining path and the machining time at the material dimension maximum value calculated in step 2815 are calculated. The method for substantially calculating the machining path and machining time has already been described in step 1105.
In step 2817, the time obtained by adding the material measurement time and the average processing time when the material is measured and processed each time is compared with the processing time of the material shape dimension by the statistical processing method, and processing with less processing time is performed. Is adopted.
If the processing time of the statistical method is long, the group repetition counter n2 = n2? In the case of NO (16), there is no subsequent statistical processing, and the process returns to step 34 from (16) of FIG.
On the other hand, if YES is determined, the material is measured every time in step 2819, the input material dimension is changed to measurement data in step 2820, the machining path is generated and determined in step 2821, and the next step 2822 is performed. Machining the workpiece.
When step 2822 is completed, mechanical workpiece measurement and correction are performed in step 2823 (19), and the process continues from step (19) to step 2826 in FIG.

The contents of measurement and correction processing after workpiece machining are as follows.
After machining the workpiece, all the locations where the dimension difference and tolerance symbol are specified are measured, and the tool position and machine position are expected to be corrected so that they are within the allowable values during the next machining.
As described above, for example, in the case of diameter measurement, the measurement is performed at least two points in the diameter direction and two points in the length direction. The number of measurement points is increased using the tolerance width and length as parameters. For example, when the tolerance width is 10 μm, it is 6 points, when it is 20 μm, it is 4 points, when it exceeds 20 μm, it is 2 points, and the length is 25 mm as one division unit. 5mm or less shall be one place. The measured result is calculated as an average value and a difference between the maximum and minimum values.
When machining with the same cutting edge of the same tool, the deviation between the average value of the calculation results and the specified tolerance center point is corrected by a combination of tool position correction and machine position correction.
If the measured difference between the maximum and minimum exceeds 2/3 of the tolerance width at each specified location, a warning is required as an error in process selection. This is an input error in the machine tool file.
On the other hand, if statistical processing is selected in step 2817, the determination data to be statistical processing is filed in the storage unit in step 2824, the processing ends in the next step 2825, returns to step 28, and continues to step 34.

The processing procedure after step 2826 is shown in FIG.
In step 2826, the quality determination is performed using the measurement result. If the product is good, the process ends in step 2834, returns to step 28, and continues to step 34.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2826 that the product is defective, it is determined in step 2827 whether or not there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, in step 2828 the finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool is determined. It is determined whether or not there is a remaining finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool (18), and the process returns to step 2822 from (18) of FIG.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2828 that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, in step 2829, the presence / absence of the remaining finish allowance removing capability is compared with the minimum removal capability value of the machine tool file, and determined. If it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, the process continues to step 2831. If not, the warning process is performed in step 2830 and the process continues to step 2834. In step 2834, the process ends, the process returns to step 28 and continues to step 34.
In step 2829, it is determined whether or not there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool. If it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, in step 2831, the determination process for selecting the remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool is not processed. It is determined whether or not it is a process, and in the case of an unprocessed process, it is determined in step 2832 whether or not it is a new process. If not (13), the process returns to step 2702 from (13) in FIG.
Alternatively, when it is determined in step 2832 that the process is a new machining process, one n process storage number is added in step 2833 and process data is additionally stored. When this process is completed (20), the process continues from step (20) in FIG. On the other hand, if the determination process has already been processed in step 2831, the process continues to step 2833.

Generation of Machining Path The generation of the machining path in Step 1108, Step 2706, Step 2821, Step 2907, Step 2933, Step 3805, and Step 4105 is as follows.

  A combination of a method of equally dividing the roughing cut for each stage (referred to as an equally divided cutting method or a variable cutting method) and a constant finishing allowance method, and a method of making the roughing cut constant. Selection of the combination of the constant cutting method and the variable finishing allowance method is input items related to machining (an example of an input format is shown in FIG. 107), or productivity, chip removal, tools It is automatically determined using the life and tool material.

  The evaluation of productivity here is determined by simulating the machining time based on the number of positioning times and the moving path distance for fixed cuts or equally divided cuts.

The machining path in the constant cutting method is a simple path method in which machining is performed up to a point where continuous machining can be performed without changing the cutting and leaving a finishing allowance.
The copying method is a known fact that the machining time is qualitatively increased, the number of times of positioning is large, and the tool life is shortened by this, so the machining by the copying method is not adopted in this example.

Variable cutting method that equally divides the roughing cut into each step:
In order to increase machining productivity, a variable cutting method is adopted in which the rough cutting is divided equally for each stage.
The cutting by repeating the rough cutting at each stage with the maximum cutting depth with a constant finishing allowance varies from the maximum cutting value to the minimum rounding value of the cutting. When mechanically processed by this process, it includes everything from cutting chips to workpieces without being automatically cut to cutting them into pieces, and in addition, cutting below a certain amount significantly increases tool life. shorten. In order to prevent this, the machining allowance subtracted from the finishing allowance is divided by the maximum depth of cut, and the fraction is rounded up.The number of rounded up cuts is used to remove the remaining allowance after subtracting the finishing allowance for each stage. Then, equal division processing is performed. This is the allowance for each stage of each cycle. As a result, the cut varies between a little less than half of the maximum cut and the maximum cut. As a result, it is possible to obtain a cut capable of automatic processing that can ensure chip disposal and tool life.

Variable finishing allowance method with constant cutting method with constant cutting as rough cutting In order to increase machining productivity, variable finishing allowance method with constant cutting method with constant cutting as rough cutting is adopted. .
When the constant cutting method is used to reduce the number of roughing cycles, the finishing allowance varies from stage to stage. When finishing with different finishing allowances, there are many machine tools that cannot fit within specified dimensions due to fluctuations in the combined deflection of tools and machines. Therefore, displacement correction corresponding to the finishing allowance is performed, and processing is performed so that the specified dimensions are obtained.
In displacement correction, an approximate calculation formula is obtained from actually measured data, and a correction amount is calculated using cutting, feed, material strength and workpiece total length as variables.
Alternatively, the missing portion is approximated by adjacent data using raw measured data, and the correction amount is interpolated using the material strength and the total length of the workpiece as variables.
For example, as shown in the outer diameter machining displacement diagrams (FIGS. 86 to 88), the actual measurement data is obtained by subtracting 0.5 mm from the maximum incision and reducing the minimum incision to 0.5 mm. FIG. 86 shows a machining schematic diagram in the case of the above, and FIG. 88 shows a graph of the amount of radius changed in FIG. 87 as an example of the difference between the actually measured data and the reference diameter.

Alternatively, the correction amount is calculated and corrected by using the calculation numbers (39) to (41) with variables such as cutting load, material, workpiece total length, support method, and load point.
By support method,
Cantilever chucking δr11 (k1 × W × L3 / E × I) −k2 × W + k3 × W + C (39)
Holding both centers δr11 (k4 × W × l12 × l22 / E × I × L) −k2 × W + k3 × W + C (40)
Both ends chucking δr11 (k5 × W × l13 × l23 / E × I × L3) −k2 × W + k3 × W + C (41)
Here, δr11: one point of workpiece, change radius amount at load point k1: cantilever chucking workpiece support coefficient k4: dual center support workpiece support coefficient k5: double-end chucking workpiece support coefficient W: radial machining combined load L: workpiece Length l1: Length from the load point to the workpiece support point on the spindle side L2: Length from the load point to the workpiece support point on the opposite spindle side E: Workpiece longitudinal elastic modulus I: Moment of inertia of the workpiece cross section k2: Stiffness coefficient k3: Tool rigidity coefficient C: Constant.
It depends on the arithmetic expression.

  The processing order of the rod material with a diameter of 115 mm is based on the product of the machine tool of this example, the removal volume and the average radius, and then roughing on the first processing side and then roughing on the second processing side. To 27th stage outer diameter cam, outer diameter groove machining on the first machining side, outer diameter finishing, inner diameter groove machining, inner diameter finishing machining, 20th stage cylindrical outer diameter groove cam machining, 15th stage end face cam machining. 4th step inner diameter cam processing, 11th to 2nd step cylindrical outer polygon processing, 8 to 10 end face keyway processing, 9th step hole processing, 9th step tap processing, second The processing side is an outer diameter finishing process, a groove process, a 28th stage end face cam process, and a 35th to 38th stage key groove process. Thereafter, the sixth-stage inner diameter gear electric discharge machining, the 31-th outer diameter gear hobbing process, the outer diameter grinding process, and the inner diameter grinding process are performed in order of each using a separate process machine tool.

Turning path for bar material When the turning path for the bar material is calculated according to the above promise, it is as follows.
First machining side rough machining program Contents and conditions for determination and calculation formula
N001 G90; Specification of absolute value command
“Machine position is absolutely determined by specified items in machine tool file (Fig. 72)
Choose between value and increment. This example uses absolute values. "
N002 G28G95; Machine origin check, point feed every time
N003 T000001; Tool identification number; select 1
Machining is in the first order according to the principle from the Z maximum point, and end face machining is in the X direction.
In step 110520, the process is determined.
The tool selection result is used as it is.
N004 G96S102M03; Peripheral speed constant on, 102 m / min,
“Workpiece material: SCM440H and tool file (FIGS. 78-8)
5) From tool identification number: 1 Tool material: P20, turning
Calculate 102m / min from the cutting condition file (Fig. 128)
Use. "
M03: Rotate clockwise from the tool identification number: 1.
N005 G00X118.Z211.6; End face roughing, Material diameter: 115 + 3 = 118, Material length: 213m
m, end surface finishing cost: 0.1 mm.
N006 G01X0F0.39; Cutting limit from tool file (Figs. 78 to 85); Maximum value: 12.
43 mm, minimum value: 0.4 mm, feed; maximum value: 0.39 mm / r
ev, minimum value: 0.01 mm / rev, and above (section ...)
Machine tool limit, workpiece limit, and cutting condition file (Fig. 128)
Feed, cutting: 4; feed: 0.4 mm / rev
Is 0.39 mm / rev.
N007 G00Z212.6;
Since the processing paths of the equally divided cutting method and the constant cutting method are different, this specific example is shown below.

Calculation method of equal division cut method:
The calculation method of the equal division cutting method is calculated using the equations (42) to (44).
Roughing allowance for each step = {material diameter-(specified diameter + finishing allowance)} (42)
The designated diameter here is calculated using the final finished shape file. The finishing allowance in this example is 0.8 mm. This is added to the stage where a separate process finishing cost is required.
Allowable maximum depth of cut for each stage = maximum machining load / feed × specific cutting resistance (43)
Cutting frequency: N is an integer part of N ′ + 1.
Theoretical cutting frequency: N ′ = (Roughing allowance for each stage) / (2 × Maximum allowable cutting for each stage) (44)
As described above, the allowable maximum depth of cut is determined by the lowest value among the workpiece, machine tool, and tool.
In the rod material example, as described above, the maximum machining load condition is the tool condition, radial: 4,012.5N,
Tool condition, axial: 4,012.5N,
Cutting is dominant in the Z (axis) direction, and feeding is dominant in the X (radius) direction.
In addition, the maximum cutting value used for machining is calculated by calculating the cutting speed and feed rate from the specific cutting resistance and cutting condition file according to the tool material and the input workpiece material, and calculating the cutting value based on the stiffness limit value.
In the case of this example, from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85), the tool material: P20 and the input workpiece material: SCM440H, the conditions of the cutting condition file (FIG. 128); cutting speed 102 m / min, feed 0 Read 4 mm / rev. Also, the maximum machining load condition: tool condition 4,012.5N, the maximum feed is 0.49mm / rev compared with 0.4mm / rev in the cutting condition file (Fig. 128) and the tool maximum feed 0.39mm / rev. rev, specific cutting resistance: 1,960 N / mm @ 2
Maximum cutting value = 4,012.5 / (0.39 × 1,960) = 5.249 [mm]
And
When each stage shape is read from the final finished shape file (FIGS. 161 to 172) and the finishing allowance is added, the size before finishing is obtained, and the number of incisions obtained by dividing the length by the maximum incision is rounded up to an integer to obtain an equal division incision amount, The results are as follows: cutting is in the Z (axis) direction and feed is in the X (radius) direction.
Step number Finishing dimensions Length Cutting depth
Number of times: Cutting 10 (Start point coordinates) 49.675 0. [211.9]
10 48.875 + 0.8 = 49.675 5. [206.9] 1: 5.
12 52.57 + 0.8 = 53.37 10. [196.9] 2: 5.
14 53. + 0.8 = 53.8 10. [186.9] 2: 5.
16 69. + 0.8 = 69.8 5. [181.9] 1: 5.
18 71.850 + 0.8 = 72.650 15. [166.9] 3: 5.
20 72.985 + 0.8 + 0.2 = 73.985G 30. [136.9] 6: 5.
21 72.985 + 0.8 = 73.785 to 79.989 + 0.8 = 80.789 20. [116.9] 4: 5.
22 79.990 + 0.8 = 80.790 to 83.989 + 0.8 = 84.789 20. [96.9] 3: 5.227
23 83.989 + 0.8 + 0.2 = 84.989G 20. [76.9] 4: 5.192
25 90. + 0.8 = 90.8 4.96 [71.94] 1: 5.145
SUM 139.96 27
A machining program is generated using this data. When an increase in the Z-direction cut occurs in the middle of machining, processing is performed using the Z-direction value at the previous cutting stage so as not to cause an increase in the cut.

An example of generating a machining program is as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N008 G00X118 .; positioning to the outer diameter of the cut
N009 G00Z207.233; Z: 5.227mm from the 10th step edge
N010 G01X80.789F0.39; Send to F0.39mm up to specified diameter X: 80.789.
N011 G01Z206.9; Round up to the 21st step.
N012 G01X49.675;
N013 G01Z212.9;
N014 G00X118.Z211.9; 1st infeed cycle ended
N015 G00Z201.446;
N016 G01X80.789;
N017 G01Z201.9;
N018 G01X53.37;
N019 G01Z207.9;
N020 G00X118.Z206.9; end of the second cutting cycle
N021 G00Z196.219;
N022 G01X80.789;
N023 G01Z196.9;
N024 G01X53.37;
N025 G01Z202.9;
N026 G01X53.37;
N027 G00X118.Z201.9; 3rd infeed cycle ended
N028 G00Z190.992;
N029 G01X80.789;
N030 G01Z191.9;
N031 G01X53.8;
N032 G01Z192.9;
N033 G00X118.Z191.9; end of the 4th cutting cycle
・ This is omitted (from the 5th cutting cycle to the 18th cutting cycle)
・
N117 G00Z112.587;
N118 G01X80.789;
N119 G01Z116.9;
N120 G01X73.985;
N121 G01Z117.9;
N122 G00X118.Z117.9; 19th infeed cycle ended
N123 G00Z107.36;
N124 G01X80.789;
N125 G01Z113.587;
N126 G00X118.Z112.587; 20th infeed cycle end
N127 G00Z102.133;
N128 G01X80.789;
N129 G01Z108.36;
N130 G0X118.Z107.36; 21st infeed cycle ended
N131 G00Z96.9;
N132 G01X80.789;
N133 G01Z103.133;
N134 G00X118.Z102.133; 22nd infeed cycle ended
N135 G00Z91.708;
N136 G01X84.789;
N137 G01Z97.9;
N138 G00X118.Z96.9; 23rd infeed cycle end
・ This is omitted (from the 24th cutting cycle to the 25th cutting cycle)
・
N147 G00Z76.132;
N148 G01X90.8;
N149 G01Z76.9;
N150 G01X84.989;
N151 G01Z83.092;
N152 G00X118.Z82.092; 26th infeed cycle ended
N153 G0071.94;
N154 G01X90.8;
N155 G01Z77.9;
N156 G00Z211.9X118 .; 27th infeed cycle ended
N157 M05;

Fixed cutting method program The fixed cutting method program is as follows.
As described above, the allowable maximum depth of cut is determined by the lowest value among the workpiece, machine tool, and tool.
In the rod material example, as described above, the maximum machining load condition is the tool condition, radial: 4,012.5N,
Tool condition, axial: 4,012.5N,
Cutting is dominant in the Z (axis) direction, and feeding is dominant in the X (radius) direction.
In addition, the maximum cutting value used for machining is calculated by calculating the cutting speed and feed rate from the specific cutting resistance and cutting condition file according to the tool material and the input workpiece material, and calculating the cutting value based on the stiffness limit value.
In the case of this example, from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 8585), the tool material: P20 and the input workpiece material: SCM440H, the conditions of the cutting condition file (FIG. 128); cutting speed 102 m / min, feed 0 Read 4 mm / rev. Also, the maximum machining load condition: tool condition 4,012.5N, the maximum feed is 0.4mm / rev in the cutting condition file (Fig. 12828) and the tool maximum feed 0.39mm / rev is compared to the limit value Low 0.39 mm / rev and specific cutting resistance: 1,960 N / mm @ 2
Maximum cutting value = 4,012.5 / (0.39 × 1,960) = 5.249 [mm]
And
Since the machining direction of the outer diameter portion in this example is the Z-direction cutting and the X-direction feeding as described above, the machining path is cut every 5.249 mm into the final finishing shape file (FIGS. 161 to 172), Feed to the point to which the process finishing allowance is added, and the remaining part of the process becomes a path to be sent in the Z + and X− directions.

Reading each step shape from the final finished shape file (FIGS. 161 to 172) and adding the finishing allowance, the pre-finishing dimensions were obtained, and the number of cuts and the remainder obtained by dividing the length by the maximum cut were as follows. is there.
Dimensions before finishing = (Specified diameter + Finishing allowance)
The designated diameter here is calculated using the final finished shape file. The finishing allowance in this example is 0.8 mm. This is added to the stage where a separate process finishing cost is required.
Step number Finishing dimensions Length Cutting depth
Number of times: remainder 10 (starting point coordinate) 49.675 0. [211.9]
10 48.875 + 0.8 = 49.675 5. [206.9] 1: -0.249
12 52.57 + 0.8 = 53.37 10. [196.9] 2: -0.747
14 53. + 0.8 = 53.8 10. [186.9] 2: -1.245
16 69. + 0.8 = 69.8 5. [181.9] 1: -1.494
18 71.850 + 0.8 = 72.650 15. [166.9] 3: -2.241
20 72.985 + 0.8 + 0.2 = 73.985G 30. [136.9] 6: -3.735
21 72.985 + 0.8 = 73.785-79.989 + 0.8 = 80.789 20. [116.9] 4: -4.731
22 79.990 + 0.8 = 80.790 to 83.989 + 0.8 = 84.789 20. [96.9] 4: -0.478
23 83.989 + 0.8 + 0.2 = 84.989G 20. [76.9] 4: -1.474
25 90. + 0.8 = 90.8 4.96 [71.94] 1: -1.683
SUM 139.96 28
Based on this data and the maximum cutting depth of 5.249 mm, a machining path for rough outer diameter machining is calculated and programmed as follows.

Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N008 G00X118 .; positioning to the outer diameter of the cut
N009 G00Z206.651; Z: 5.249mm from the 10th step edge
N010 G01X53.37F0.39; Send to the 12th specified diameter X: 53.37 at F0.39mm / rev.
N011 G01Z206.9; Round up to the end of specified diameter X: 49.675.
N012 G01X49.675F0.39; Sends to specified diameter X: 49.675 at F0.39mm.
N013 G01Z212.9; Round up to the end face.
N014 G00X118 .; Return to the outer diameter of the cut.
Thereafter, the cutting Z is fed every 5.249 mm up to the specified cutting diameter, then sent to the previous cutting point, and the operation of returning to the cutting outer diameter is repeated to calculate the machining path and generate a machining program.
In the case of a shape such as an arc or a taper, the calculation of the specified diameter uses a known general formula for obtaining the intersection of an arc and a straight line, or a straight line and a straight line.
N015 G00Z201.402; 12th stage
N016 G01X53.37;
N017 G01Z207.651;
N018 G00X118 .;
N019 G00Z196.153 14th stage
N020 G01X53.8;
N021 G01Z196.9;
N022 G01X53.37;
N023 G01Z202.402;
N024 G00X118 .;
N025 G00Z190.904;
N026 G01X53.8;
N027 G01Z197.153;
N028 G00X118 .;
N029 G00Z185.655;
N030 G01X53.8;
N031 G01Z187.9;
N032 G00X118 .;
N033 G00Z180.406; 16th / 18th stage
N034 G01X72.650;
N035 G01Z181.9;
N036 G01X69.8;
N037 G01Z186.655;
N038 G00X118 .;
N039 G00Z175.157 .; 18th stage
N040 G01X72.650;
N041 G01Z181.406;
N042 G00X118 .;
N043 G00Z169.908;
N044 G01X72.650;
N045 G01Z176.157;
N046 G00X118 .;
N047 G00Z164.659; 20th stage
N048 G01X73.985;
N049 G01Z166.9;
N050 G01X72.650;
N051 G01Z170.908;
N052 G00X118 .;
N053 G00Z159.41;
N054 G01X73.985;
N055 G01Z165.659;
N056 G00X118 .;
N057 G00Z154.161;
N058 G01X73.985;
N059 G01Z159.14;
N060 G00X118 .;
N061 G00Z148.912;
N062 G01X73.985;
N063 G01Z155.161;
N064 G00X118 .;
N065 G00Z143.663;
N066 G01X73.985;
N067 G01Z149.912;
N068 G00X118 .;
N069 G00Z138.414;
N070 G01X73.985;
N071 G01Z144.663;
N072 G00X118 .;
N073 G00Z133.165; 21st step
N074 G01X74.218;
N075 G03X73.985Z136.9R59.985;
N076 G01Z139.414;
N077 G00X118 .;
N078 G01Z127.916;
N079 G01X75.338;
N080 G03X74.111Z134.165R59.985;
N081 G00X118 .; N082
G00Z122.667;
N083 G01X77.411;
N084 G03X75.053Z128.916R59.985;
N085 G00X118; N086 G00Z117.418;
N087 G01X80.446;
N088 G03X776.941Z123.667R59.985;
N089 G00X118 .;
N090 G00Z112.169; 22nd stage
N091 G01X81.735;
N092 G01X80.789Z116.9;
N093 G03X79.821Z118.418R59.985;
N094 G00X118 .;
N095 G00Z106.92;
N096 G01X82.785;
N097 G01X81.535Z113.169;
N098 G00X118 .;
N099 G00Z101.671;
N100 G01X83.835;
N101 G01X82.585Z107.92;
N102 G00X118 .;
N103 G00Z96.442; 23rd stage
N104 G01X84.989;
N105 G01Z96.9;
N106 G01X84.789;
N107 G01X84.589Z97.9;
N108 G00X118 .;
N109 G00Z91.193;
N110 G01X84.989;
N111 G01Z97.422;
N112 G00X118 .;
N113 G00Z85.944;
N114 G01X84.989;
N115 G01Z92.193;
N116 G00X118 .;
N117 G00Z80.695;
N118 G01X84.989;
N119 G01Z85.944;
N120 G00X118 .;
N121 G00Z75.446; 25th stage
N122 G01X90.8;
N123 G01Z76.9;
N124 G01X84.989;
N125 G01Z81.695;
N126 G00X118 .;
N127 G00Z71.94;
N128 G01X90.8;
N129 G01Z76.446;
N130 G00X118 .; Return to the starting point of outer diameter cutting.
N131 G00Z211.9; End face incision start point return.
N132 G28; Return to origin.
N133 M05;
The generation of the machining program for the rough machining of the outer diameter on the first machining side by the constant cutting method is completed when the spindle has stopped.

Next, the inner diameter machining path is calculated in accordance with the above-described machining procedure determination.
Since there is no inner diameter pilot hole in the tool selection material input, the minimum finishing dimension from the first stage to the eighth stage of the final finished shape file (FIG. 161) is searched.
As a result of the search, the minimum finishing dimension is 20.011 mm in the first stage.
Since the inner diameter tool has been determined in the previous step 1106, it is assumed that it will be used as it is. The processing dimensions were organized as follows.
Step number Finishing length Length 2 (Start point coordinates) 20.011 0. [159.975]
2 20.011-1.0 = 19.011 (19.811G) 15.025 [175.]
4 22.-0.8 = 21.2 15. [190.]
6 24.125-0.8 = 23.325 15. [205.]
8 31.013-0.8 = 30 213 5. [210.]
SUM 50.025

From this result, the minimum dimension is 19.011 mm of the roughing of 20.01 mm in the first stage.
As a result of searching a prepared tool for drilling the minimum dimension from the rotary tool file (FIGS. 8282 to 85) and obtaining a drill having a minimum dimension of 19.011 mm or less, a 19 mm drill with a tool identification number: 9 and a tool identification number: Twelve 19 mm space drills and 16 mm end mill with tool identification number 17 were obtained.
Further, when a tool satisfying the processing depth of 50 mm under the following conditions was determined from these, the tool identification number: 9 was 145 mm, and the tool identification number: 12 was 140 mm.
Although this tool does not satisfy the minimum machining inner diameter of 19.011 mm, additional machining with an inner diameter tool is possible, so these are employed and the pilot hole is machined by drilling and space drilling.

Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N200 G28; Origin check
N201 T09; 19mm drill selection
N202 G97; Constant peripheral speed control off
N203 S235M03;; Material of tool file (Figs. 82 to 85):
Cutting conditions are determined by SKH-51 and workpiece material: SCM440H.
Since SKH-51 is a material that does not exist in the cutting condition file (FIG. 131), searching for a conversion material using the tool material conversion table file (FIGS. 125 to 127) corresponds to S4. Therefore, the machining conditions corresponding to the workpiece material: SCM440H, the tool material: S4, and the tool diameter: 19 mm are searched from the drill cutting condition file (FIG. 131).
As a result, cutting speed: 14 m / min, feed: 0.2 mm / rev was obtained.
Accordingly, the rotational speed of the main shaft is S = 14000 / (19 × π) = 235 [rpm]. The feed is F = 0.2 × 235 = 47 [mm / min].
N204 G00X0Z211.9;
N205 G01Z191.9F47 .;
N206 G00Z220;
N207 G00Z191.9;
N208 G01Z171.9;
N209 G00Z220;
N210 G00Z171.9;
N211 G01Z160.375;
N212 G00Z220 .;
N213 G28M05;
Since the tip of the drilled pilot hole has a conical shape of 118 degrees, in order to remove this, the tip can be removed with a horizontal tool, a space drill.
N250 T12; Tool change, 19mm space drill selection.
N251 S235M03; Cutting conditions are the same as 19mm drill.
N252 G00X0Z211.9;
N253 G01Z160.375F47 .;
N254 G01F0.1;
N255 G00Z220;
N256 G28M05; Return to origin, Stop spindle Stops the pilot hole drilling program.
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Next, generation of a program for inner diameter machining will be described.
Tool selection The tool generates a program for roughing using the above-described tool identification number;
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N300
N301 G28; Origin check
N302 G96; Constant peripheral speed control ON
N303 T000007; Tool selection; Tool identification number: 7
N304 G00X19.748Z211.6; Cutting start point Cutting limit from tool file (Figs. 78-81); maximum value: 0.53 mm, minimum value: 0.1 mm, feed; maximum value: 0.15 mm / rev, minimum value : 0.01 mm / rev, and from the above (section ...) machine tool limit and workpiece limit and cutting condition file (Fig. 128) [cutting: 1, feed: 0.18 mm / rev, the feed is , 0.15 mm / rev.
The maximum machining load condition is the tool condition, radial: 110 N,
Tool condition, axial: 110N,
As a result of the removal direction discrimination (content omitted), the notch is dominant in the X (radius) direction, and the feed is dominant in the Z (axis) direction.
In addition, the maximum cutting value used for machining is calculated by calculating the cutting speed and feed rate from the specific cutting resistance and cutting condition file according to the tool material and the input workpiece material, and calculating the cutting value based on the stiffness limit value.
In the case of this example, from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81), the tool material: P10 and the input workpiece material: SCM440H, the conditions of the cutting condition file (FIG. 12828), the cutting speed 135 m / min, the feed 0 Read 18mm / rev.
Also, the maximum machining load condition: tool condition: 110 N, the maximum feed is 0.18 mm / rev of the cutting condition file and the maximum feed of tool 0.15 mm / rev, and the lower side 0.15 mm / rev is adopted, Specific cutting resistance: 1,960 N / mm @ 2
Maximum cutting value = 110 / (0.15 × 1,960) = 0.374 [mm]
And
Moreover, since the maximum cutting value of the tool is 0.374 mm, the finishing allowance of the inner diameter is about 0.1 mm of 1/3 of the cutting value (a parameter value that can be changed arbitrarily), and the finishing allowance of the end face is the finishing allowance of the diameter. 1/2 (parameter value that can be changed arbitrarily) of 0.05 mm.
Furthermore, 50 (0, +0.05) of the input over the length of the sequence 54 is averaged to 50.025 ± 0.025, and is added to the absolute value length of the levels 1 to 9 for processing. As a result, when the dimensions of the roughing process were rearranged in addition to the final shape as a finishing allowance, it was as follows.
Column number Finishing dimension Length 2 (Start point coordinates) 20.011 0. [159.975] 161.525
2 20.011-0.4 = 19.611G (19.811G) 15.025 [175.] 176.55
4 22.-0.2 = 21.8 15. [190.] 191.55
6 24.125-0.2 = 23.925 15. [205.] 206.55
8 31.013-0.2 = 30.813 5. [210.] 211.9
SUM 50.025
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N305 G01Z176.55S135.F0.15M03;
N306 G01X19.611; Cutting depth 0.137mm Rough dimension of the second stage
N307 G01Z161.525;
N308 G00Z211.9;
N309 G00X20.496; notch 0.374mm
N310 G01Z176.55;
N311 G00Z211.9;
N312 G00X21.244; notch 0.374mm
N313 G01Z176.55;
N314 G00Z211.9;
N315 G00X21.992; depth of cut 0.374mm
N316 G01Z191.55;
N317 G01X21.8; 4th step rough dimension
N318 G01Z176.55;
N319 G00Z211.9;
N320 G00X22.74; depth of cut 0.374mm
N321 G01Z191.55;
N322 G00Z211.9;
N323 G00X23.488; depth of cut 0.374mm
N324 G01Z191.55;
N325 G00Z211.9;
N326 G00X24.236; depth of cut 0.374mm
N327 G01Z206.55;
N328 G10X23.925; Rough dimension of the 6th step
N329 G01Z191.55;
N330 G00Z211.9;
N331 G00X24.984; depth of cut 0.374mm
N332 G01Z206.55;
N333 G00Z211.9;
N334 G00X25.732; notch 0.374mm
N335 G01Z206.55;
N336 G00Z211.9;
N337 G00X26.48; notch 0.374mm
N338 G01Z206.55;
N339 G00Z211.9;
N340 G00X27.228; notch 0.374mm
N341 G01Z206.55;
N342 G00Z211.9;
M343 G00X27.976; notch 0.374mm
N344 G01Z206.55;
N345 G00Z211.9;
N346 G00X28.724; notch 0.374mm
N347 G01Z206.55;
N348 G00Z211.9;
N349 G00X29.472; notch 0.374mm
N350 G01Z206.55;
N351 G00Z211.9;
N352 G00X30.22; depth of cut 0.374mm
N353 G01Z206.55;
N354 G00Z211.9;
N355 G00X30.968; 0.374mm depth of cut
N356 G01Z211.078
; N357 G01X30.813Z211 .; Chamfering, 8th step rough dimension
N358 G01Z206.55;
N359 G00Z211.9;
N360 G00X31.716;
N361 G01Z211.452;
N362 G01X30.813Z211 .;
N363 G00Z211.9;
N364 G00X32.413;
N365 G01X31.413Z211.3;
N366 G00Z211.9;
N367 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

(Round material 115mm)
Next, rough machining on the second machining side is performed. The second processing side will grip and process the first processing side.
161 to 164: Final finishing shape file, FIG. 120: Finishing allowance file, the rough machining specifications of the second machining are obtained, and -150 (−0.010) of the length across the sequence 55 is input. , +0.090) is averaged to −149.95 ± 0.040, and is added to the absolute value length from steps 9 to 29, and this is processed as an increase in the difference on the second machining side, thereby obtaining the final shape. In addition to the finishing allowance, the roughing dimensions were reorganized as follows.
Step number Finishing dimensions Length Cutting depth
Number of times: Diameter cut remainder 37 (starting point coordinate) 24.850 0. [210.8]
37 24.850 + 0.8 = 25.650 15. [195.8] 8 10.498 8.366
35 30.013 + 0.8 + 0.2 = 31.013G 20. [175.8] 8 10.498 3.003
33 40. + 0.8 = 40.8 5. [170.8] 7 10.498 3.714
31 52.475 + 0.8 = 53.275 10. [160.8] 6 10.498 51.173
29 40. + 0.8 = 40.8 10.015 [150.785]--Groove treatment 27 110. + 0.8 + 0.2 = 111.0G 9.975 [140.815] 0 7.000
(25 90. + 0.8 = 90.8 5. [135.815])
SUM 74.99
Using these numerical values, the machining program for the second machining side is generated in the same manner as for the first machining side. The overall machining direction is determined by Z-cut X feed. Since this example of Z-cut X-feed was described on the first machining side, this example is based on the constant-cut method of X-cut Z-feed for reference. The result of generation is shown below.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N400;
N401 G90;
N402 G28G95;
N403 T000001; Tool identification number; select 1
N404 G96S102M03; Constant peripheral speed on, 102 m / min: M03: Tool identification
Number: Turn right from No. 1.
N405 G00X118.Z210.8; Rough end face, Material diameter: 115 + 3 = 118, Material length: 211.9,
Edge finishing cost: 0.4
N406 G01X0F0.39;
N407 G00Z211.8;
N408 G00X118 .;
N409 G00X107.502; 1st machining cycle cutting (diameter: 10,498mm)
N410 G01Z150.785F0.39;
N411 G01X111 .;
N412 G01Z139.6;
N413 G00X118 .;
N414 G00Z211.8;
N415 G00X97.004; 2nd machining cycle cutting
N416 G01Z150.785F0.39;
N417 G01X107.502;
N418 G00Z211.8;
N419 G00X86.506; 3rd machining cycle cutting
N420 G01Z150.785F0.39;
N421 G01X97.004;
N422 G00Z211.8;
N423 G00X76.008; 4th machining cycle cutting
N424 G01Z150.785F0.39;
N425 G01X86.506;
N426 G00Z211.8;
N427 G00X65.51; 5th machining cycle cutting
N428 G01Z150.785F0.39;
N429 G01X76.008;
N430 G00Z211.8;
N431 G00X55.012; 6th machining cycle cutting
N432 G01Z150.785F0.39;
N433 G01X65.51;
N434 G00Z211.8;
N435 G00X44.514; 7th machining cycle cutting
N436 G01Z170.8F0.39;
N437 G01X55.012;
N438 G00Z211.8;
N439 G00X34.016; 8th machining cycle cutting
N440 G01Z175.8F0.39;
N441 G01X44.514;
N442 G00Z211.8;

The rough cutting remainder of each step in the constant cutting is step 37; 8.366 mm in diameter, step 35; 3.003 mm, step 33; 3.714 mm, step 31; 1.737 mm. A program for machining the workpiece by correcting the machining deflection using FIGS. 86 to 88 is generated.
Each radius cut is 4.183, 1.5015, 1.857, 0.8685. An approximate value is obtained by regarding the incision 0.5 mm to 5 mm in FIGS. 86 to 88 as the proportionality in the primary expression for each section,
ΔX0.8685 = 0.024-{(0.024-0) /0.5} × 0.1315 = 0.017688
ΔX1.857 = 0.050-{(0.050-0.040) /0.5} × 0.143 = 0.04714
ΔX1.5015 = 0.050-{(0.050-0.040) /0.5} × 0.4985 = 0.04003
ΔX4.183 = 0.111-{(0.111-0.1) /0.5} × 0.317 = 0.10403
Got. This result is used as correction of each cutting value.

Deflection correction program
N445 G00X25.668; 25.650 + 0.018 = 25.668
N446 G01Z195.8F0.39;
N447 G01X31.06; 31.013 + 0.047 = 31.060
N448 G01Z175.8;
N449 G01X40.84; 40.8 + 0.040 = 40.840
N450 G01Z170.8;
N451 G01X53.379; 53.275 + 0.104 = 53.379
N452 G01Z150.785;
N453 G01X112 .;
N454 G00X115.Z211.8;
N455 G28M05;

Roughing of groove judgment part
N460 T000004; Selection of groove tool; Width 10 mm, Depth: 3.119 mm (53.275-40.8) /4=3.1875 tool file, tools 78 from FIGS. Search for and select.
N461 S135M03;
N462 G00X115.Z211.8;
N463 G00X54.275Z152.693; {(150.785 + 159.6) / 2}-(5/2) = 152.6925
N464 G01X40.8F0.145; Size of shank from tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81): 19 × 25, protrusion amount of tool: 30 mm, tool rigidity; X: 0.007 μm / N, Z: 0.28 μm / N, limit of feed; maximum: 0.18 mm / rev, minimum: 0.01 mm / rev, maximum cutting strength: 714.3 N, work material; specific cutting resistance from material file (Fig. 124) from SCM440H; 1,960 N / Mm2, etc.
Allowable bending limit: Tool rigidity using 5 μm; X: Dividing by 0.007 μm / N and calculating the allowable load W = 0.005 / 0.000007 = 714.285N = 714.3N
This result is consistent with the maximum cutting strength.
Formula (45) is transformed into a formula for calculating the feed amount in the radial direction, and various numerical values are input to feed; F = maximum allowable load / (specific cutting resistance × groove width) [mm / rev] (45)
Feed: F = 2 × 714.3 / (1,960 × 5) = 0.457 [mm / rev]
N465 G04F0.085; The dwell takes about 1.5 rotations of the workpiece.
The dwell time is substituted into the equation (46) from the dwell speed (in this example, 1.5 revolutions), the cutting speed (in this example, 135 m / min), and the groove bottom diameter (in this example, 69.45 mm). do it,
t = dwell rotational speed / (cutting speed / (60 × π × bottom diameter)) [sec] (46)
= 1.5 / (135,000 / (60 × π × 40.8)) = 0.085545 [sec]
In this example, 0.0854 [sec] was obtained.
N466 G00X54.275;
N467 G00Z151.8;
N468 G01Z150.785F0.145;
N469 G01X40.8;
N470 G04F0.085;
N471 G00X54.275;
N472 G00Z155.6; 159.6-4 = 155.6
N473 G01X40.8F0.145;
N474 G04F0.085;
N475 G00X115 .;
N476 G00Z211.8;
N477 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1107 and continues to step 1109.

27th stage outer diameter cam Since the rough machining on the second machining side has been completed, the machining from the first machining side is performed again by gripping.
The specifications of the cam are shown in FIG. 55; illustration, FIG. 156; input, FIG. 170;
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N500; N501 G90;
N502 G28G95;
N503 T000017; Tool identification number; Select 17; Tool diameter; 16mm Number of blades; 2
N504 G97S1154M03; The tool material of the tool file is searched, and the peripheral speed, 58 m / min (spindle speed: 1154 rev / min: from the search result of the cutting condition file (FIG. 130) using the tool material: M20 and the workpiece material SCM440H. Calculation result), feed 0.075 mm / tooth, (173 mm / min; calculation result) were obtained.
N505 G00Z145.X115.CO .; (150 + 140) / 2 = 145
N506 G01X110.8F70;
N507 G01C180.X105.8F173;
N508 G01CO.X110.8;
N509 G01C180.X100.8;
N510 G01CO.X110.8;
N511 G01C180.X95.8;
N512 G01C0.X110.8;
N513 G01C180.X90.8;
N514 G01C0.X110.8;
N515 G28M05;
N516 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N517 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization
N518 # 102 = 0;
N519 # 103 = 0;
N520 # 104 = 0;
N521 # 5061 = 0;
N522 # 1 = 0;
N523 # 2 = 0;
N524 # 3 = 0;
N525 # 4 = 0;
N526 # 5 = 0;
N527 # 6 = 0;
N528 # 7 = 0;
N529 G00A-90 .; Turn head minus 90 degrees, orient the measurement axis in the axial direction
N530 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N531 G00X115.Z215.1; Move to machining reference point
N532 G00Z152.1X112.8; Move to first measurement point
N533 G31X109.F150; Measurement (1) 110.8mm
N534 # 101 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 101
N535 G00Z158.X112.8; Move to second measurement point
N536 G31X109.F150; Measurement (2) 110.8mm
N537 # 102 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 102
N538 # 1 = # 101 + # 102; First and second measurement point cam surface height calculation
N539 # 2 = # 1/2;
N540 G00C180.X82.8; Move to third measurement point
N541 G31X79.F150; Measurement (3) 80.8mm
N542 # 103 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 103
N543 G00Z152.X82.8; Move to fourth measurement point
N544 G31X79.F150; Measurement (4) 80.8mm
N545 # 104 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 104
N546 # 3 = # 103 = # 104; 3rd and 4th measurement point cam surface height calculation
N547 # 4 = # 3/2;
N548 # 5 = # 2 + # 4; Calculation of total cam surface height
N549 # 6 = 55.4 + 45.4; Calculation of specified value
N550 # 7 = # 6- # 5; Error calculation with specified value
N551 G00X115 .; Move to machining reference point
N552 G00Z215.1; Move to machining reference point
N553 G28; Return to origin
N554 G00A0 .; Turn head to 0 degrees and return to origin
N555 # 4107 = # 4107- # 7; Rewriting tool radius compensation value
N556 T000017; Tool offset re-entry
N557 G97S1154M03;
N558 G00X110.8Z145.C0 .;
N559 G01X110.2F70;
N560 G01C180.X90.2F173;
N561 G01C0.X110.2;
N562 G01C2.X109.998; two overlaps
N563 G00X115 .;
N564 G00Z210.C0 .;
N565 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Outer diameter grooving on the first machining side Sequence 59 Groove number 3 Reference stage / machining stage: 18th stage, reference position: 165.1 mm, groove width: 5 mm Groove bottom corner radius: R 0.4 mm
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N570 G90;
N571 G28;
N572 T000004; Tool selection
N573 G96S135M03;
N574 G00X115.Z165.4;
N575 G00X74.8; 0.5mm machining allowance
N576 G01X69.45F0.145;
From the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81), the size of the shank; 19 × 25, the protruding amount of the tool; 30 mm, the tool rigidity; X: 0.007 μm / N, Z: 0.28 μm / N, feed limit; 0.18 mm / rev, minimum: 0.01 mm / rev, maximum cutting strength: 714.3 N, work material; specific cutting resistance from material file (FIG. 124) from SCM440H; .
Allowable bending limit: Tool rigidity using 5 μm; X: Dividing by 0.007 μm / N and calculating the allowable load W = 0.005 / 0.000007 = 714.285N = 714.3N
This result is consistent with the maximum cutting strength.
Formula (45) is transformed into a formula for calculating the feed amount in the radial direction, and various numerical values are input to feed; F = maximum allowable load / (specific cutting resistance × groove width) [mm / rev] (45)
Feed: F = 2 × 714.3 / (1,960 × 5) = 0.457 [mm / rev]
N577 G04F0.145; The dwell takes about 1.5 rotations of the workpiece.
For the dwell time, the dwell speed (1.5 rotations in this example), the cutting speed (135 m / min in this example), and the groove bottom diameter (69.45 mm in this example) are substituted into equation (46). do it,
t = dwell rotational speed / (cutting speed / (60 × π × bottom diameter)) [sec] (46)
= 1.5 / (135,000 / (60 × π × 69.45)) = 0.14546 [sec]
In this example, 0.145 [sec] was obtained.
N578 G01X73.8F0.145; Feeding speed is the same as when cutting
N579 G00X115 .;

Outer diameter grooving on the first machining side Sequence 60 Groove number 4 Reference stage / machining stage: 23rd stage, reference position: 75.1 mm, groove width: 5 mm Groove bottom corner radius: R 0.4 mm
N580 G00Z75.4;
N581 G00X91.8; 0.5mm machining allowance
N582 G01X83.85F0.145; the same processing conditions as groove number 3
N583 G04F0.176; The dwell takes about 1.5 rotations of the workpiece.
For the dwell time, the dwell speed (1.5 rotations in this example), the cutting speed (135 m / min in this example), and the diameter of the groove bottom (83.85 mm in this example) are substituted into equation (46). do it,
t = dwell rotational speed / (cutting speed / (60 × π × bottom diameter)) [sec] (46)
= 1.5 / (135,000 / (60 × π × 83.85)) = 0.1756 [sec]
This example was rounded up to obtain 0.176 [sec].
N584 G01X90.8F0.145; Feeding speed is the same as when cutting. Tool tip radius value: 0.4 mm The return position dimension is set to the outer diameter without adding a margin. As a result, the machining time can be shortened compared to the return position to the cutting point.
The rapid rewinding position of the grooving is “switched to fast feed if the workpiece outer diameter is reached from the point when contact with the workpiece at the cutting edge is lost due to the radius of the tool cutting edge”.
N585 G00X115.Z210.4;
N586 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Specifications for the outer diameter finishing on the first machining side are as follows.
Stage number Finishing dimension Finishing dimension Length 10 (Start point coordinates) 49.675 48.875 0. [210.4]
10 49.675 48.875 5. [205.4]
12 53.37 52.57 10. [195.4]
14 53.8 53. 10. [185.4]
16 69.8 69. 5. [180.4]
18 72.65 71.85 15. [165.4]
20 73.985G 72.985 + 0.2 = 73.185G 30. [135.4]
21 73.785-80.789 72.985-79.989 20. [115.4]
22 80.790 to 84.789 79.990 to 83.989 20. [95.4]
23 84.989G 83.989 + 0.2 = 84.189 20. [75.4]
25 90.8 90. 4.96 [70.36]
The program generation result of the outer diameter finishing machining on the first machining side is as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N600 G90;
N601 G28;
N602 T000003;
N603 G96S135M03;
N604 G41G00X31.013Z210.8;
N605 G01Z210.4F0.09; Feed F is determined by the finishing method symbol.
Since the 9th stage finish symbol is 2L, it is sufficient to satisfy 25S or less. Substituting the relational expression between roughness and feed and the tool blade radius (nose radius) 0.4 mm from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81) into the expression (48) developed from the expression (47),
Hmax = f2 / 8R (47)
f2 = 8R × H (48)
= 8 x 0.4 x 0.025 = 0.08
fmax = 0.080.5 = 0.28284
f = 0.28284 × 0.8 = 0.226272
Get. (0.8 here can be arbitrarily changed by the safety factor.) For finishing of the end face, the feed in the X direction by the Z direction tool of the tool condition is 1/25. (This 2.5 is a parameter value that can be arbitrarily changed as necessary.)
f = 0.226 / 2.5 = 0.09 [mm / rev]
N606 G01X47.875F0.09;
N607 G01X48.875Z209.9; 0.5C chamfer
N608 G01Z205.4F0.226;
N609 G01X52.57F0.09;
N610 G01Z195.4F0.226
N611 G01X53.F0.09;
N612 G01Z185.4F0.226;
N613 G01X68.F0.09;
N614 G01X69Z184.9;
N615 G01Z180.4F0.226;
N616 G01X71.85F0.09;
N617 G01Z165.4F0.226;
N618 G01X73.185F0.09; 0.2mm finishing allowance added
N619 G01Z135.4F0.226;
N620 G01X72.985F0.09; 0.2mm grinding thinning
N621 G02X79.989Z115.4R59.985F0.226; Circular machining
N622 G01X83.989Z95.4;
N623 G01X84.189F0.09;
N624 G01Z75.4F0.226;
N625 G01X83.989F0.09; 0.2mm grinding thinning
N626 G01X89.F0.09;
N627 G01X90.Z74.9F0.226;
N628 G01Z70.36;
N629 G01X109.F0.09;
N630 G01X110.Z69.9F0.09; 26th chamfer
N631 G01X115F0.09;
N632 G40; N633 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

There are a plurality of methods of threading depending on how to give the cut (cutting method) and how to give the cut amount.
The method of giving the cut includes the follow-up method, the escape second method, and the combined follow-up method, and the method of giving the cut amount includes an equal cross-sectional area cut and an equidistant cut.
These are properly used according to the workpiece material, workpiece hardness, machine stiffness, tool material, tool stiffness, and tool characteristics.
Data relating to the tool and incision relating to machining is calculated from the specifications of the screw using equations (49) to (59).
Width of flat portion of valley bottom = 2 {(P / 4) − (1/2) × average effective diameter−maximum valley diameter}
X tan (half-width of thread)} (49)
Where P = screw pitch: mm
Tool edge radius satisfying the flat width of the valley bottom = (flat width of the valley bottom / 2)
× cos (half angle of thread)… (50)
Trough Triangular Valley Diameter = Average Effective Diameter-2 x (P / 4) x cot (half angle of thread) ... (51)
The search and determination of the tool edge radius is based on equations (52) and (53).
Machining valley diameter = valley diameter + 2 [(flat width of valley bottom / 2) − {determined tool edge radius / cos (thread)
Half-width)}] × cot (half-width thread) (52)
Machining trough diameter = trough triangle trough diameter + 2 x {determined tool cutting edge radius / sin (half angle of thread)}
-(Determined tool edge radius) (53)
Depth of cut = {(average outer diameter) − (valley diameter)} / 2 (54)
Blade width when the determined tool edge radius is a trapezoidal blade edge = 2 × determined tool edge radius × [{(1 / sin (half angle of thread)) − 1} × tan (half angle of thread) (55)
Screw opening width = (P / 2) + (average outer diameter− (average effective diameter)
X tan (half-width of thread) (56)
Thread cutting cross-sectional area = (cutting depth) × (screw opening width + blade width) / 2 (57)
Here, the cutting depth is given by equation (54), the screw opening width is given by equation (56), and the cutting edge width is given by equation (55).

The incision division is processed as follows in the case of the equal cross section method.
Determining the number of cuts The number of cuts is determined by the allowable cutting load due to machine rigidity and tool rigidity. decide. The safety factor can be changed depending on the machine tool and tool conditions. The safety factor here is: (This 1. is a parameter value that can be arbitrarily changed as necessary.)
The cut division depth is obtained by developing the following equation (58).
Thread cutting cross-sectional area / number of divisions (n) = blade width × (hn−h (n−1)) + 2 × (1/2) × {(hn) 2 × tan (half angle of thread) − (h (n− 1)) 2 × tan (half-width of thread)}
= Blade width × (hn−h (n−1)) + tan (half angle of thread) × {(hn) 2− (h (n−1)) 2} (58)
The calculation formulas for the left and right movement amounts of the escape second method and the combination follow-up method are based on the equation (59).
Left / right travel (ΔZn) = (hn−h (n−1)) × tan (half angle of thread) (59)
Calculate various numerical values.

Threading,
Various values of the 18th stage M72P1.5R, JIS6g, and external thread are read from the file (FIG. 116).
External diameter of screw; upper dimension: 71.968, lower dimension: 71.732, average diameter: 71.85
Effective diameter of screw; upper dimension: 70.994, lower dimension: 70.833, average diameter: 70.914
Minimum roundness of valley: 0.188
Got.

Thus, the numerical values of the machining path are calculated by substituting them into the equations (49) to (59).
Width of flat portion of valley bottom = 2 {(P / 4) − (1/2) × average effective diameter−maximum valley diameter}
X tan (half-width of thread)} (49)
Where P = screw pitch: mm
Here, because P: 1.5, half angle of screw thread: 30 degrees, average effective diameter: 70.914, maximum valley diameter: unspecified, equation (49) cannot be used.
Tool edge radius satisfying flat width of valley bottom = (flat width of valley bottom / 2)
× cos (half angle of thread)… (50)
In this example, since the flat part width of the valley bottom cannot be obtained from the equation (49), the equation (50) cannot be used.
Search and determination of tool edge radius The specified value of the specified tool edge radius in the file (FIG. 116) is 0.188 mm.
A tool satisfying this condition is determined by searching tool identification number 00005, nose radius: 0.2 mm from FIG. 78 and collating it with the specified tool edge radius minimum: 0.188 mm, so it is determined that tool identification number: 000005 is used. .
Here, P = 1.5, half angle of the thread = 30 degrees, and average effective diameter = 70.914 are substituted into the formulas (51) to (54), and the valley diameter, the machining valley diameter, and the cut depth of the pointed triangle Find the depth.
Trough Triangular Valley Diameter = Average Effective Diameter-2 x (P / 4) x cot (half angle of thread) ... (51)
Valley diameter of point triangle = 70.914-2 × (1.5 / 4) × cot30 = 69.615
Machining valley diameter = valley diameter + 2 [(flat width of valley bottom / 2) − {determined tool edge radius / cos (thread)
Half-width)}] × cot (half-width thread) (52)
Machining trough diameter = trough triangle trough diameter + 2 x {determined tool cutting edge radius / sin (half angle of thread)}
-(Determined tool edge radius) (53)
In this equation (53), the root diameter of the pointed triangle is 69.615 mm, the determined tool edge radius is 0.2 mm, and the half angle of the thread is 30 degrees.
Processing valley diameter = 69.615 + 2 × {0.2 / sin30} − (0.2) = 70.215
Here, the average outer diameter: 71.85 and the machining valley diameter: 70.215 are substituted into the equation (54) for calculation.
Depth of cut = {(average outer diameter) − (valley diameter)} / 2 (54)
Depth of cut = (71.85-70.215) /2=0.8175
Here, the determined tool edge radius: 0.2 mm and the half angle of the screw thread: 30 degrees are substituted into the equation (55) to calculate the edge width when the determined tool edge radius is a trapezoidal edge.
Blade width = 2 x determined tool edge radius x [{(1 / sin (half angle of thread))]
−1] × tan (half angle of thread) (55)
Cutting edge width when the determined tool cutting edge radius is a trapezoidal cutting edge = 2 x 0.2
X {(1 / sin30) -1} * tan30 = 0.231
Here, P: 1.5, average outer diameter: 71.85, average effective diameter: 70.914, and half angle of screw thread: 30 degrees are substituted into the equation (56) to calculate the screw opening width.
Screw opening width = (P / 2) + (average outer diameter− (average effective diameter)
X tan (half-width of thread) (56)
Screw opening width = (1.5 / 2) + (71.85-70.914)
X tan30 = 1.2904
Here, the cutting depth: 0.8175, the cutting edge width when the determined tool cutting edge radius is a trapezoidal cutting edge: 0.231, the screw opening width: 1.2904, are substituted into the equation (57), and the thread cutting cross-sectional area is calculated. Is calculated.
Thread cutting cross-sectional area = (cutting depth) × (screw opening width + blade width) / 2 (57)
Thread cross-sectional area = 0.8175 × (1.2904 + 0.231) /2=0.6219 mm 2
Determining the number of cuts The number of cuts is determined by the allowable cutting load depending on the machine rigidity and tool rigidity, dividing the total cutting load due to the product of the thread cross-sectional area and the resistance to be cut, and calculating the approximate number of cuttings and multiplying by the safety factor decide. The safety factor can be changed depending on the machine tool and tool conditions. The safety factor here is: (Parameter values that can be set arbitrarily) are used.
Based on the material SCM440H, the specific cutting resistance 1,960 N / mm 2 is obtained from the material file (FIG. 124).
Total cutting load = 1,960 × 0.6219 = 1,218.96 [N]
Tool identification number from tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81); from data of 000005 Tool stiffness, X: 0.004 μm / N, Z: 0.016 μm / N,
Cutting limit: Maximum: 1 mm, Minimum: 0.01 mm,
Maximum cutting strength; 1,125N
The tool rigidity limit is set to 2.5 μm, which is one half of the roughing 5 μm (a parameter value that can be arbitrarily set) according to the condition of threading.
Allowable cutting load = 2.5 / 0.016 = 156.25 (N)
Number of cuttings = total cutting load: 1,218.92 / allowable cutting load: 156.25 = 7.8≈8
As a result, the number of cuts can be determined 8 times, and the number of finishes can be determined arbitrarily.
The threading cross-sectional area: 0.6219 mm @ 2, the number of divisions: 8, the cutting edge width: 0.231 mm, and the half angle of the screw: 30 degrees are substituted into the equation (58) to calculate the cutting depth for each time.
Thread cutting cross-sectional area / number of divisions (n) = blade width × (hn−h (n−1)) + 2 × (1/2) × {(hn) 2 × tan (half angle of thread) − (h (n− 1)) 2 x tan (half-width of thread)} ... (58)
= Cutting edge width x (hn-h (n-1)) + tan (half angle of thread) x {(hn) 2-(h (n-1)) 2)
0.6219 / (8) = 0.231 * (hn-h (n-1)) + tan30 {(hn) 2-(h (n-1)) 2}
Calculate the numerical value,
0.077738 = 0.231 × (hn-h (n-1)) + 0.577367 {(hn) 2-(h (n-1)) 2}
Deformed,
0.577367 (hn) 2 + 0.231.times.hn- {0.077738 + 0.231.times.h (n-1) + 0.577367h (n-1)} 2 = 0
If S ′ (n−1) = 0.231 × h (n−1) + 0.577367h (n−1) 2, 0.577367 (hn) 2 + 0.231 × hn− {0.077738 + S '(n-1)} = 0
Therefore, hn = [− 0.231 ± {0.231 2 + 4 × 0.577367 (0.077738 + S ′ (n−1))} 1/2] /1.15473
Thus, the cut value is calculated by calculating n = 1 to 8.
The program value including finishing allowance is also shown below.
Calculated cutting value Cutting (rounding value; diameter) Program value hn -h (n-1)
Roughing
h1 = 0.2178788 0.436 71.85 + 0.04 = 71.454 0.436
S '(2-1) = 0.0777382
h2 = 0.3561055 0.712 = 71.178 0.138
S '(3-1) = 0.1554768
h3 = 0.4662486 0.932 = 70.985 0.1105
S '(4-1) = 0.2332158
h4 = 0.5606072 1.121 = 70.769 0.0965
S '(5-1) = 0.3109553
h5 = 0.6444887 1.289 = 70.601 0.084
S '(6-1) = 0.3886951
h6 = 0.7207608 1.442 = 70.448 0.0765
S '(7-1) = 0.4664356
h7 = 0.7911818 1.582 = 70.308 0.0700
S '(8-1) = 0.5441765
h8 = 0.8175 1.635 = 70.255 0.0265
Finishing (finishing cost is set to 0.01mm twice)
h9 = 0.8275 1.655 = 70.235 0.01
h10 = 0.8375 1.675 = 70.215 0.01
Further, the left and right movement amounts in the escape second method and the combination follow-up method are obtained by substituting hn−h (n−1) and tan30 into the equation (59).
Left / right travel (Δzn) = (hn−h (n−1)) × tan (half angle of thread) (59)
In order to prevent the escape side blade according to the escape second method from theoretically coming into contact with the workpiece, it is rounded up by the minimum movement unit of the control device (in this example, 0.001 mm). The escape second incision point is calculated and calculated in reverse of the processing with the final position 185.4 as a reference. These results including errors (cumulative value−calculated cumulative value) are shown below.
Calculated value Rounded value Accumulated value Recessed second cut point Calculated accumulated value Error
-Δz1 = 0.2517246 -0.252 -0.252 185.979 -0.2517246 -0.0002754
-Δz2 = 0.0796743 -0.080 -0.332 185.745 -0.3313989 -0.0006011
-Δz3 = 0.0637971 -0.064 -0.396 185.665 -0.3951962 -0.0000804
-Δz4 = 0.0557142 -0.056 -0.452 185.601 -0.4509102 -0.0010898
-Δz5 = 0.0484974 -0.049 -0.501 185.545 -0.4994976 -0.0015924
-Δz6 = 0.0441672 -0.045 -0.546 185.496 -0.5435748 -0.0024252
-Δz7 = 0.0404145 -0.041 -0.587 185.451 -0.5839893 -0.0030107
-Δz8 = 0.0152997 -0.016 -0.603 185.410 -0.599289 -0.003711
-Δz9 = 0.0057735 -0.006 -0.609 185.394 -0.6050625 -0.0039375
Δz10 = 0.0057735 -0.006 -0.603 185.4 -0.599289 -0.003711
In order to prevent the flank blade by the combined follow-up method from theoretically coming into contact with the workpiece, it is rounded up by the minimum movement unit of the control device (in this example, 0.001 mm).
The incision point of the combination follow-up method is obtained by calculating in the reverse of processing with the final position 185.4 as a reference.
These results are shown below including the error {(cumulative value) − (0.043) − (calculated cumulative value)}.
Calculated value Rounded value Accumulated value Recessed second cut point Calculated accumulated value Error
Δz1 = 0 0.043 0.043 185.443
-Δz2 = 0.0796743 -0.080 -0.037 185.363 -0.0796743 -0.0003257
Δz3 = 0.0637971 0.064 0.027 185.427 -0.0158772 -0.0001228
-Δz4 = 0.0557142 -0.056 -0.029 185.371 -0.0715914 -0.0004086
Δz5 = 0.0484974 0.049 0.020 185.420 -0.0230940 -0.0000944
-Δz6 = 0.0441672 -0.045 -0.025 185.375 -0.0672612 -0.0007388
Δz7 = 0.0404145 0.041 0.016 185.416 -0.0268467 -0.0001533
-Δz8 = 0.0152997 -0.016 0.0 185.4 -0.0421464 -0.0005360
Δz9 = 0.0057735 0.006 0.006 185.406 -0.0363729 -0.0006271
-Δz10 = 0.0057735 -0.006 0.0 185.4 -0.0421464 -0.0008536
A machining program is generated using these results.

The machining program by follow-up method is as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N700 G28; N701 G96;
N702 T000005; Threading tool, tool identification number: 5
N703 S102.M03; A cutting condition file (FIG. 128) is read by the tool material: P20 and the workpiece material: SCM440H, and the cutting speed: 102 m / min is obtained.
N704 G00X74.Z185.4; Thread cutting start position, Z: 180.4, Acceleration margin: 5 mm is added and programmed as the thread cutting start point Z: 185.1.
N705 G00X71.454; 1st incision, calculated value is used. The same applies hereinafter.
N706 G33Z165.4F1.5; threading P; 1.5, and so on.
N707 G00X74 .; Round up, add 2mm to nominal diameter. The same applies hereinafter.
2 mm can be an arbitrary set value.
N708 G00Z185.4; Return to cutting point and so on.
N709 G00X71.178; 2nd infeed
N710 G33Z165.4;
N711 G00X74 .;
N712 G00Z185.4;
N713 G00X70.985; 3rd infeed
N714 G33Z165.4;
N715 G00X74 .;
N716 G00Z185.4;
N717 G00X70.769; 4th cut
N718 G33Z165.4;
N719 G00X74 .;
N720 G00Z185.4;
N721 G00X70.601; 5th cut
N722 G33Z165.4;
N723 G00X74 .;
N724 G00Z185.4;
N725 G00X70.448; 6th cut
N726 G33Z165.4;
N727 G00X74 .;
N728 G00Z185.4;
N729 G00X70.308; 7th cut
N730 G33Z165.4;
N731 G00X74 .;
N732 G00Z185.4;
N733 G00X70.255; 8th cut
N734 G33Z165.4;
N735 G00X74 .;
N736 G00Z185.4;
N737 G00X70.235; 9th incision (finish)
N738 G33Z165.4;
N739 G00X74 .;
N740 G00Z185.4;
N741 G00X70.215; 10th incision (finish)
N742 G33Z165.4;
N743 G00X74 .;
N744 G00Z185.4;
N745 G28M05;

The machining program by the escape second method is as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N700 G28;
N701 G96;
N702 T000005; Threading tool, tool identification number: 5
N703 S102.M03; A cutting condition file (FIG. 128) is read by the tool material: P20 and the workpiece material: SCM440H, and the cutting speed: 102 m / min is obtained.
N704 G00X74.Z185.4; Thread cutting start position, Z: 180.4 (end surface finishing allowance: 0.4 mm), acceleration margin: 5 mm, escape second position shift: 0.579 mm and threading start point Z: 185 .979.
N705 G00X71.454; 1st incision, calculated value is used. The same applies hereinafter.
N706 G33Z165.4F1.5; threading P; 1.5, and so on.
N707 G00X74 .; Round up, add 2mm to nominal diameter. The same applies hereinafter.
2 mm can be an arbitrary set value.
N708 G00Z185.652; Return to cutting point, and so on.
N709 G00X71.178; 2nd infeed
N710 G33Z165.4;
N711 G00X74 .;
N712 G00Z185.652;
N713 G00X70.985Z185.665; 3rd infeed
N714 G33Z165.4;
N715 G00X74 .;
N716 G00Z185.652;
N717 G00X70.769Z185.601; 4th cut
N718 G33Z165.4;
N719 G00X74 .;
N720 G00Z185.652;
N721 G00X70.601Z185.545; 5th cut
N722 G33Z165.4;
N723 G00X74 .;
N724 G00Z185.652;
N725 G00X70.448Z185.496; 6th incision
N726 G33Z165.4;
N727 G00X74 .;
N728 G00Z185.652;
N729 G00X70.308Z185.451; 7th cut
N730 G33Z165.4;
N731 G00X74 .;
N732 G00Z185.652;
N733 G00X70.255Z185.410; 8th cut
N734 G33Z165.4;
N735 G00X74 .;
N736 G00Z185.652;
N737 G00X70.235Z185.394; 9th incision (finish)
N738 G33Z165.4;
N739 G00X74 .;
N740 G00Z185.652;
N741 G00X70.215Z185.4; 10th incision (finish)
N742 G33Z165.4;
N743 G00X74 .;
N744 G00Z185.652;
N745 G28M05;

The machining program by the combination follow-up method (stagger cutting) is as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N700 G28;
N701 G96;
N702 T000005; Threading tool, tool identification number: 5
N703 S102.M03; A cutting condition file (FIG. 128) is read by the tool material: P20 and the workpiece material: SCM440H, and the cutting speed: 102 m / min is obtained.
N704 G00X74.Z185.4; Thread cutting start position, Z: 180.4 (end surface finishing allowance: 0.4 mm), acceleration margin: 5 mm, combination follow-up method position shift: 0.043 mm and threading start point Z: 185 .443.
N705 G00X71.454; 1st incision, calculated value is used. The same applies hereinafter.
N706 G33Z165.4F1.5; threading P; 1.5, and so on.
N707 G00X74 .; Round up, add 2mm to nominal diameter. The same applies hereinafter.
2 mm can be an arbitrary set value.
N708 G00Z185.652; Return to cutting point, and so on.
N709 G00X71.178Z185.363; 2nd infeed
N710 G33Z165.4;
N711 G00X74 .;
N712 G00Z185.652;
N713 G00X70.985Z185.427; 3rd infeed
N714 G33Z165.4;
N715 G00X74 .;
N716 G00Z185.652;
N717 G00X70.769; Z185.601; 4th cut
N718 G33Z165.4;
N719 G00X74 .;
N720 G00Z185.652;
N721 G00X70.601Z185.420; 5th cut
N722 G33Z165.4;
N723 G00X74 .;
N724 G00Z185.652;
N725 G00X70.448Z185.375; 6th incision
N726 G33Z165.4;
N727 G00X74 .;
N728 G00Z185.652;
N729 G00X70.308Z185.416; 7th cut
N730 G33Z165.4;
N731 G00X74 .;
N732 G00Z185.652;
N733 G00X70.255Z185.4; 8th cut
N734 G33Z165.4;
N735 G00X74 .;
N736 G00Z185.352;
N737 G00X70.235Z185.406; 9th incision (finish)
N738 G33Z165.4;
N739 G00X74 .;
N740 G00Z185.652;
N741 G00X70.215Z185.4; 10th incision (finish)
N742 G33Z165.4;
N743 G00X74 .;
N744 G00Z185.652;
N745 G28M05;
This completes the process of generating the thread machining program.
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Next, generation of a machining program for performing inner diameter groove machining will be described.
The workpiece of this example shows the generation of the machining program for machining the inner diameter groove using the previously determined tool identification number: 8 and the result thereof.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N800 G28;
N801 G96;
N802 T000008;
N803 S135.M03; Cutting conditions are based on the work material (SCM440H in this example) and the tool material (P10 in this example). Since the peripheral speed is constant control, 135. Enter.
N804 G00X19.Z211.4;
N805 G00Z176.4;
N806 G01X31.F0.046; The cutting conditions are determined from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81), the maximum cutting strength (227N in this example), and the specific cutting resistance (in this example, SCM440H) , 1,960 N) by the expression (45).
Feed: F = maximum cutting strength / (specific cutting resistance × groove width) [mm / rev] (45)
= 227 / (1,960 × 5) = 0.023 [mm / rev]
Since the present example is a radial feed groove machining, the feed is doubled to 0.046 [mm / rev]. This is because the feed limit of the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 85): 0.01-0.15 mm / rev, the minimum cutting feed speed of the machine tool file (FIGS. 58 to 76): 0 or more. Use it as it is.
N807 G04F0.065; The dwell is about 1.5 turns.
The dwell time is calculated by substituting the dwell speed (1.5 in this example), the cutting speed (135 m / min in this example), and the diameter of the groove bottom (31 mm in this example) into the equation (46). Ask.
t = dwell rotational speed / (cutting speed / (60 × π × bottom diameter)) [sec] (46)
= 1.5 / (135,000 / (60 × π × 31)) = 0.0649 [sec]
This example was rounded up to obtain 0.065 [sec].
N808 G01X20 .; Return feed to workpiece inner diameter
N809 G00Z191.4;
N810 G00X21 .;
N811 G01X34.F0.046;
N812 G04F0.065; Dwell time is according to the above equation.
N813 G01X22 .;
N814 G00X19.Z211.4;
N815 G28M05;
This completes the program generation of the inner diameter groove machining.
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Next, generation of a machining program for performing inner diameter finishing will be described.
The workpiece of this example shows the generation of the machining program for machining the inner diameter using the previously determined tool identification number: 7 and the result thereof.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N850 G28; Origin check
N851 G96; Constant peripheral speed control ON
N852 T000007; Tool selection; Tool identification number: 7
N853 G41; Tool radius compensation ON
N854 G00Z214.X19 .;
N855 G00Z210.4X32.213;
N856 G01X31.013Z209.9F0.226; Feed F is determined by the finishing method symbol.
Since the finish symbol of the eighth stage is 2L, it is sufficient to satisfy 25S or less. The relational expression between the roughness and the feed and the tool edge radius (nose radius) 0.4 mm from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81) are obtained by substituting the equation (47) into the equation (48).
Hmax = f2 / 8R (47)
f2 = 8R × H (48)
= 8 × 0.4 × 0.025 = 0.08 fmax = 0.28284
f = 0.28284 × 0.8 = 0.226272 [mm / rev] (0.8 here is a safety factor and can be arbitrarily changed.)

The following shows the contents of the program when there is no tool correction function in the case of C chamfering, which is not necessary in this example. Is necessary.
N857 G00Z210.9X32.682; 0.5C DIA (diameter position)
here
0.5C DIA = XD + 2r−2ΔX + ΔD = 32.013 + 2 × 0.4−2 × 0.16568 + 0.2 = 32.68163
ΔX = r × tan 22.5 = 0.4 × tan 22.5 = 0.16568
N858 G01X31.013Z210.634F226; 0.5C Z (Z direction position)
here
0.5C Z = Z + r−ΔZ = 210.4 + 0.4−0.16568 = 210.6343 ΔZ = r × tan 22.5 = 0.4 × tan 22.5 = 0.16568

N859 G01Z205.4; 8th stage, 31H7 inner diameter machining
N860 G01X23.825F0.09; 7th stage, end finishing. For finishing the end face, feed is 1/2.
FX = FZ / 2.5 = 0.226 / 2.5 = 0.0904
N861 G02X24.125Z205.R0.4F0.226; 0.4R chamfer
N862 G01Z190.4; 6th stage, 24 inner diameter machining
N863 G01X22.F0.09; 5th stage, end finishing
N864 G01Z175.4F0.226; 4th stage, 22 inner diameter machining
N865 G01X18.011F0.09; Third stage, end finishing
N866 G01X19.811Z174.5F0.226; 1C chamfer
N867 G01Z160.4; 2nd stage, diameter 18.811 inner diameter machining (dimension before grinding finish 20H7 inner diameter finishing)
N868 G01X0.F0.09; First stage, end finishing
N869 G00Z210.4
N870 G40;
N871 G28M05;
This completes the machining program generation for finishing the inner diameter.
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

20th stage cylindrical groove cam,
Details of the groove cam are shown in FIGS. 44, 53, 54, 155, and 169. FIG.
Groove width: 6 mmH8, depth: 5 mm,
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N900 G28;
N901 G94; Asynchronous feed
N902 T000021; Tool selection is performed by searching the groove width of 6 mm as a key code from FIGS. 82 to 85, and selecting the tool identification number: 21 by matching F, tool diameter; 6h10.
N903 S796M03; Cutting conditions are the work material (in this example, SCM440H)
The cutting speed (15 m / min in this example) is searched from the cutting condition file (FIG. 130) based on the tool material (SKH51 = S4 in this example), and the rotation speed is calculated.
S = 15 × 1000 / (3.1416 × 6) = 795.8 [rpm]
N904 G00Z160.4X74.985C0 .; Positioned to finish dimension 72.985 + 2mm
N905 G01X71.985F21; 0.013 mm / tooth is obtained from the cutting condition file (FIG. 130) and calculated.
F = 0.013 × 2 × 796 = 20.696 [mm / min]
The cutting value is determined by the tool rigidity, the number of cuttings is calculated, and machining is performed to a predetermined depth by repeated cycles. The specific cutting resistance 1,960N is obtained from the material file (FIG. 124) by SCM440H, and the cutting value is calculated by a known cutting resistance equation.
N906 G01X70.985F21;
N907 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N908 G01C180 .;
N909 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N910 G01CO .;
N911 G01X69.985F21;
N912 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N913 G01C180 .;
N914 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N915 G01C0 .;
N916 G01X68.985F21;
N917 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N918 G01C180 .;
N919 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N920 G01C0 .;
N921 G01X67.985F21;
N922 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N923 G01C180 .;
N924 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N925 G01C0 .;
N926 G01X66.985F21;
N927 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N928 G01C180 .;
N929 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N930 G01C0 .;
N931 G01X65.985F21;
N932 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N933 G01C180 .;
N934 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N935 G01C0 .;
N936 G01X64.985F21;
N937 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N938 G01C180 .;
N939 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N940 G01C0 .;
N941 G01X63.985F21;
N942 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N943 G01C180 .;
N944 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N945 G01C0 .;
N946 G01X62.985F21;
N947 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N948 G01C180 .;
N949 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N950 G01C0.
N951 G01Z160.396;
N952 G01X62.985F21;
N953 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N954 G01C180 .;
N955 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N956 G01C0 .;
N957 G01Z160.404;
N958 G01X62.985F21;
N959 G01C90.Z140.4F21;
N960 G01C180 .;
N961 G01Z160.4C270 .;
N962 G01C0 .;
N963 G01Z160.4;
N964 G00X74.985;
N965 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

15th stage end face direction cam Various numerical values are obtained from the end face direction cam input (FIG. 154) shown in FIGS. 44, 50 and 51, and a machining program is generated.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1000 G28;
N1001 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1002 T000017; The tool selection is searched from FIG. 82 to FIG. 85 using the end face width: (69-53) / 2 = 8 mm and the figure radius as a key code. With warning, maximum machining capacity, F, maximum tool diameter;
Tool identification number 17 of 16h10 is selected.
N1003 S1154M03; From tool file, tool material: M20, workpiece material: SCM440H, 58m / min from cutting condition file (Fig. 130), feed: 0.025 / 10mm. 0.038 / 12 mm. 0.075 / 18 mm. In addition, the feeding speed corresponding to 16 mm is calculated.
The rotation speed of the spindle is S = 58 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 16) = 11153.87 [rpm]
It is.
N1004 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1005 G41D1; with tool radius compensation
N1006 G00Z185.6X53.4;
N1007 G01Z185.5X53.F154; The feed is calculated. Complementing the assumption that the feed speed is proportional to the square of the diameter.
0.025 × 16 2/10 2 = 0.064 0.038 × 16 2/12 2 = 0.0676 Therefore, 0.067 mm / tooth is adopted.
F = 0.067 × 2 × 1154 = 154.636 [mm / min]
N1008 G01C90.F154;
N1009 G01C180.Z180.5F154; The feed is calculated.
N1010 G01C270F154;
N1011 G01C360.Z185.5F154;
N1012 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1013 G28M05;
N1015 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N1016 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization
N1017 # 102 = 0;
N1018 # 103 = 0;
N1019 # 104 = 0;
N1020 # 5063 = 0;
N1021 # 1 = 0;
N1022 # 2 = 0;
N1023 # 3 = 0;
N1024 # 4 = 0;
N1025 # 5 = 0;
N1026 # 6 = 0;
N1027 # 7 = 0;
N1028 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N1029 G00X115.Z215.4C10 .; Move to machining reference point
N1030 G00Z186.4X55.4; Move to first measurement point
N1031 G31Z184.4F150; Measurement (1) 185.2mm
N1032 # 101 = # 5063; Measurement result is stored in 101
N1033 G00Z186.4X67 .; Move to second measuring point
N1034 G31Z184.4F150; Measurement (2) 185.2mm
N1035 # 102 = # 5063; Store the measurement result in 102
N1036 # 1 = # 101 + # 102; Cam surface, 10 degree height calculation
N1037 # 2 = # 1/2;
N1038 G00Z186.4; Move to third measurement point
N1039 G00C80 .; Move to machining reference point
N1040 G31Z184.4F150; Measurement (3) 185.2mm
N1041 # 103 = # 5063; Measurement result is stored in 103
N1042 G00Z186.4X55.4; Move to second measurement point
N1043 G31Z184.4F150; Measurement (4) 185.2mm
N1044 # 104 = # 5063; Measurement result is stored in 104
N1045 # 3 = # 103 + # 104; Cam surface, 80 degree height calculation
N1046 # 4 = # 3/2;
N1047 # 5 = # 2 + # 4; Calculation of total cam height
N1048 # 6 = # 5/2; Calculation of cam average height
N1049 # 7 = 185.2- # 6; Error calculation with specified value
N1050 G00X115.Z215.4; Move to machining reference point
N1051 G28; Return to origin
N1052 # 4107 = # 4107- # 7; Rewriting tool radius compensation value
N1055 T000017; finishing cycle
N1056 S1154M03;
N1057 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1058 G41D1; with tool radius compensation
N1059 G00Z185.6X53.4;
N1060 G01Z185.4X53.F154;
N1061 G01C90.F154;
N1062 G01C180.Z180.4F154;
N1063 G01C270F154;
N1064 G01C360.Z185.4F154;
N1065 G40D1; Tool radius compensation cut
N1066 G00X115.Z210.4;
N1067 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

4th stage inner diameter cam Various numerical values are obtained from the input of the inner diameter cam shown in FIGS. 44 and 48 (FIG. 153) and the final finished shape (FIG. 168), and a machining program is generated.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1100 G28;
N1101 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1102 T000017; Tool selection is based on Fig. 82 to Fig. 85. Inside diameter = Maximum tool diameter: 20mm, Cam width = Cutting edge width: Over 10mm, Maximum depth from end face = Length under neck: 30mm Search as a code and select F, tool diameter maximum: 16h10, length under head: 35, tool identification number: 17
N1103 G00A-90 .;
N1104 S1154M03; From tool file, tool material: M20, workpiece material: SCM440H, 58m / min from cutting condition file (Fig. 130), feed: 0.025 / 10mm. 0.038 / 12 mm. 0.075 / 18 mm. In addition, the feeding speed corresponding to 16 mm is calculated. The rotational speed of the main shaft is S = 58 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 16) = 11153.87 [rpm].
N1105 G00Z210.4X0 .;
N1106 G41D1; with tool radius compensation
N1107 G00Z190.4X10.9;
N1108 G01Z178.4F154; Feed is calculated. Complementing the assumption that the feed speed is proportional to the square of the diameter.
0.025 × 16 2/10 2 = 0.064 0.038 × 16 2/12 2 = 0.0676 Therefore, 0.067 mm / tooth is adopted.
F = 0.067 × 2 × 1154 = 154.636 [mm / min]
N1109 G01X18.9C180.F154;
N1110 G01X10.9C0 .;
N1111 G01X11.122C5 .; 5 degree overlap processing
N1112 G40D1;
N1113 G00X0.C0 .;
N1114 G00Z210.4;
N1115 G28M05;
N1116 G00A0 .;
N1120 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N1121 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization
N1122 # 102 = 0;
N1123 # 103 = 0;
N1124 # 104 = 0;
N1125 # 5061 = 0;
N1126 # 1 = 0;
N1127 # 2 = 0;
N1128 # 3 = 0;
N1129 # 4 = 0;
N1130 # 5 = 0;
N1131 # 6 = 0;
N1132 # 7 = 0;
N1133 G00A-90 .; Turn head minus 90 degrees, orient the measurement axis in the axial direction
N1134 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N1135 G00X0.Z215.4; Move to machining reference point
N1136 G00Z182.4X20.8; Move to first measurement point
N1137 G31X19.8F150; Measurement (1) 21.8mm
N1138 # 101 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 101
N1139 G00Z188.4X20.8; Move to second measurement point
N1140 G31X19.8F150; Measurement (2) 21.8mm
N1141 # 102 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 102
N1142 # 1 = # 101 + # 102; First cam surface height calculation
N1143 # 2 = # 1/2;
N1144 G00X-28.8; Move to third measurement point
N1145 G31X-31.8F150; Measurement (3) -29.8mm
N1146 # 103 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 103
N1147 G00Z182.4X-28.8; Move to 4th measurement point
N1148 G31X-31.8F150; Measurement (4) -29.8mm
N1149 # 104 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 104
N1150 # 3 = # 103 + # 104; Height calculation of second cam surface
N1151 # 4 = # 3/2;
N1152 # 5 = # 2 + # 4; Calculation of total cam height
N1153 # 6 = 10.9 + 18.9; Calculation of specified value
N1154 # 7 = # 6- # 5; Error calculation with specified value
N1155 G00X0; Move to machining reference point
N1156 G00Z215.4; Move to machining reference point
N1157 G28; Return to origin
N1158 G00A0 .; Turn head to 0 degrees and return to origin
N1159 # 4107 = # 4107- # 7; Rewriting tool radius compensation value
N1160 T000017; Finishing
N1161 G00A-90 .;
N1162 S1154M03;
N1163 G00Z210.4X0.0;
N1164 G41D1; with tool radius compensation
N1165 G00Z190.4X10.9C-5 .; 5 degree overlap
N1166 G01Z178.4F154;
N1167 G01X11.006C0.F154;
N1168 G01X19.007C180.F154;
N1169 G01X11.006C0 .;
N1170 G01X11.228C5 .; 5 degree overlap processing
N1171 G40D1;
N1172 G00X0.C0 .;
N1173 G00Z210.4;
N1174 G28M05;
N1175 G00A0 .;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

11th to 12th stage cylinder outer diameter polygons Various numerical values are obtained by inputting the cylindrical outer shape polygons shown in FIGS. 44, 45, 46, and 47 (FIG. 158) and the final finished shape (FIG. 171). A machining program is generated.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1200 G28;
N1201 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1202 T000017; Tool selection is based on FIGS. 82 to 85. The maximum end mill tool is searched by using the plane width: 10 mm as a key code, F, the tool diameter is the maximum; Identification number: 17 is selected.
N1203 S1154M03; From tool file, tool material: M20, workpiece material: SCM440H, 58 m / min from cutting condition file (FIG. 130), feed: 0.025 / 10 mm. 0.038 / 12 mm. 0.075 / 18 mm. In addition, the feeding speed corresponding to 16 mm is calculated. The rotation speed of the spindle is S = 58 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 16) = 11153.87 [rpm]
It is.
N1204 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1205 G41D1; with tool radius compensation
N1206 G00Z195.4X50.15Y9.123; Y = (52.57 / 2) × tan18 + 1 = 8.123 + 1 = 9.123
N1207 G01Y-25.123F154; The feed is calculated. The speed of feeding is supplemented on the assumption that it is proportional to the square of the diameter. Surface roughness designation: 2M 0.025 × 162/102 = 0.064 0.038 × 162/122 = 0.0676 and 0.067 mm / tooth is adopted.
F = 0.067 x 2 x 1154 = 154.636 [mm / min]
N1208 G00Z206.4; second side
N1209 G00Y9.123C36 .;
N1210 G00Z195.4;
N1211 G01Y-25.1237F154;
N1212 G00Z206.4; Third side
N1213 G00Y9.123C72 .;
N1214 G00Z195.4;
N1215 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1216 G00Z206.4; 4th surface
N1217 G00Y9.123C106 .;
N1218 G00Z195.4;
N1219 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1220 G00Z206.4; 5th surface
N1221 G00Y9.123C144 .;
N1222 G00Z195.4;
N1223 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1224 G00Z206.4; 6th surface
N1225 G00Y9.123C180 .;
N1226 G00Z195.4;
N1227 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1228 G00Z206.4; surface 7
N1229 G00Y9.123C216 .;
N1230 G00Z195.4;
N1231 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1232 G00Z206.4; 8th page
N1233 G00Y9.123C252 .;
N1234 G00Z195.4;
N1235 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1236 G00Z206.4; Ninth surface
N1237 G00Y9.123C288 .;
N1238 G00Z195.4;
N1239 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1240 G00Z206.4; 10th page
N1241 G00Y9.123C324 .;
N1242 G00Z195.4;
N1243 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1244 G00Z206.4;
N1245 G00C360 .;
N1246 G00Y0 .;
N1247 G40D1; Tool radius compensation cut
N1248 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1249 G28M05;
N1250 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N1251 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization
N1252 # 102 = 0;
N1253 # 103 = 0;
N1254 # 104 = 0;
N1255 # 105 = 0;
N1256 # 106 = 0;
N1257 # 107 = 0;
N1258 # 108 = 0;
N1259 # 5061 = 0;
N1260 # 1 = 0;
N1261 # 2 = 0;
N1262 # 3 = 0;
N1263 # 4 = 0;
N1264 # 5 = 0;
N1265 # 6 = 0;
N1266 # 7 = 0;
N1267 # 8 = 0;
N1268 # 9 = 0;
N1269 # 10 = 0;
N1270 # 11 = 0;
N1271 G00A-90 .; Turn head minus 90 degrees, orient the measurement axis in the axial direction
N1272 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N1273 G00X115.Z210.4; Move to machining reference point
N1274 G00Z197.4X51.2Y7 .; Move to the first measurement point on the first plane
N1275 G31X49.F150; Measurement (1)
N1276 # 101 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 101
N1277 G00X51.2Y-7 .; Move to the 1st plane 2nd measurement point
N1278 G31X49.F150; Measurement (2)
N1279 # 102 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 102
N1280 G00Z203.4X51.2; Move to the 3rd measurement point on the 1st plane
N1281 G31X49.F150; Measurement (3)
N1282 # 103 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 103
N1283 G00X51.2Y7 .; Move to 4th measurement point on 1st plane
N1284 G31X49.F150; Measurement (4)
N1285 # 104 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 104
N1286 # 1 = # 101 + # 102; First plane height calculation
N1287 # 2 = # 103 + # 104;
N1289 # 3 = # 1 + # 2;
N1290 # 4 = # 3/4;
N1291 G00X51.2Z215.4; Move to measurement reference point
N1292 G00X-51.2Y7 .; Move to the first measurement point on the second plane
N1293 G00Z197.4;
N1294 G31X-49.F150; Measurement (5)
N1295 # 105 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 105
N1296 G00X-51.2Y-7 .; Move to 2nd measurement point on 2nd plane
N1297 G31X-49.F150; Measurement (6)
N1298 # 106 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 106
N1299 G00Z203.4X-51.2; Move to the 3rd measurement point on the 2nd plane
N1300 G31X-49.F150; Measurement (7)
N1301 # 107 = # 5061; Measurement result is stored in 107
N1302 G00X-51.2Y7 .; Move to the 4th measurement point on the 1st plane
N1303 G31X-49.F150; Measurement (8)
N1304 # 108- # 5061; Measurement result is stored in 108
N1305 # 5 = # 105 + # 106; Height calculation of second plane
N1306 # 6 = # 107 + # 108;
N1307 # 7 = # 5 + # 6;
N1308 # 8 = # 7/4;
N1309 # 9 = # 7- # 8; Calculate the width with the measurement result
N1310 # 10 = 24.975 * 2; Calculation of specified value
N1311 # 11 = # 10- # 9; Error calculation with specified value
N1312 G00X-51.2Z215.4; Move to measurement reference point
N1313 G00X115 .; Move to machining reference point
N1314 G00Z210.4; Move to machining reference point
N1315 G28; Return to origin
N1316 G00A0 .; Turn head to 0 degrees and return to origin
N1317 # 4107 = # 4107- # 11; Rewriting tool radius compensation value
N1320 T000017; Finishing
N1321 S1154M03;
N1322 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1323 G41D1; with tool radius compensation
N1324 G00Z195.4X24.975Y9.123; First side
N1325 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1326 G00Z206.4; second side
N1327 G00Y9.123C36 .;
N1328 G00Z195.4;
N1329 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1330 G00Z206.4; Third side
N1331 G00Y9.123C72 .;
N1332 G00Z195.4;
N1333 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1334 G00Z206.4; 4th surface
N1335 G00Y9.123C106 .;
N1336 G00Z195.4;
N1337 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1338 G00Z206.4; Fifth surface
N1339 G00Y9.123C144 .;
N1340 G00Z195.4;
N1341 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1342 G00Z206.4; 6th surface
N1343 G00Y9.123C180 .;
N1344 G00Z195.4;
N1345 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1346 G00Z206.4; surface 7
N1347 G00Y9.123C216 .;
N1348 G00Z195.4;
N1349 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1350 G00Z206.4; 8th page
N1351 G00Y9.123C252 .;
N1352 G00Z195.4;
N1353 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1354 G00Z206.4; Ninth surface
N1355 G00Y9.123C288 .;
N1356 G00Z195.4;
N1357 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1358 G00Z206.4; 10th page
N1359 G00Y9.123C324 .;
N1360 G00Z195.4;
N1361 G01Y-25.123F154;
N1362 G00Z206.4;
N1363 G00C0 .;
N1364 G00Y0 .;
N1375 G40D1; Tool radius compensation cut
N1376 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1377 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

8th to 10th stage end face key groove Various values depending on the end face key groove input shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 (FIG. 150) and the final finished shape (FIG. 166); key groove width: 8.011 mm, finishing symbol : 2M, depth: 4.05 mm, cutter diameter: 7.5 mm, and a machining program is generated.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1400 G28;
N1401 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1402 T000021; Tool selection is based on FIGS. 82 to 85. The end mill tool is searched using the cutter diameter: 7.5 mm and depth: 4.05 mm as key codes, F, tool diameter: 6h10, length under the neck. A tool identification number of 21 mm is selected.
N1403 G00A-90 .; The tool head is rotated 90 degrees to prepare for end face grooving.
N1404 S796M03; From tool file, tool material: SKH51, workpiece material: SCM440H, cutting condition file (Fig. 130), 15m / min, feed: 0.013 / 10mm. 0.025 / 12 mm. In addition, the feeding speed corresponding to 6 mm is calculated more complementarily. The rotation speed of the main shaft is S = 15 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 6) = 795.775 [rpm].
N1405 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1406 G00Z206.35X62.Y0 .;
N1407 G01X18.F3.7; The feed is calculated. It is supplemented on the assumption that the feed speed is proportional to the fourth power of the diameter. Surface roughness designation: 2M 0.013 × 64/104 = 0.0016 0.038 × 64/124 = 0.0023 and 0.0023 mm / blade is adopted.
F = 0.0023 x 2 x 796 = 3.7 [mm / min]
N1408 G00X-18 .;
N1409 G01X-62 .;
N1410 G01Y0.9; Groove width shortage expansion {(8-6) / 2} -0.1 = 0.9
N1411 G01X-18 .;
N1412 G00X18 .;
N1413 G01X62 .;
N1414 G01Y-0.9; Groove width shortage expansion {(8-6) / 2} -0.1 = 0.9
N1415 G01X18 .;
N1416 G00X-18 .;
N1417 G01X-62 .;
N1418 G00Z210.4;
N1419 G00X115 .;
N1420 G00A0 .;
N1421 G28M05;
N1430 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N1431 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization
N1432 # 102 = 0;
N1433 # 103 = 0;
N1434 # 104 = 0;
N1435 # 5062 = 0;
N1436 # 1 = 0;
N1437 # 2 = 0;
N1438 # 3 = 0;
N1439 # 4 = 0;
N1440 # 5 = 0;
N1441 G00A-90 .; Turn head minus 90 degrees, orient the measurement axis in the axial direction
N1442 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N1443 G00X115.Z210.4; Move to machining reference point
N1444 G00Z208.35X47.Y0 .; Move to first measurement point
N1445 G31Y6.F150; Measurement (3.9mm)
N1446 # 101 = # 5062; Store the measurement result in 101
N1448 # 102 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 102
N1449 # 1 = # 101- # 102; Calculate the groove width from the measurement result
N1450 G00X33.Y0 .; Move to second measurement point
N1451 G31Y6.F150; Measurement (3.9mm)
N1452 # 103 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 103
N1453 G31Y-6.F150; Measurement (-3.9mm)
N1454 # 104 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 104
N1455 # 2 = # 103- # 104; Calculate groove width from measurement result
N1456 # 3 = # 1 + # 2; First and second average calculation
N1457 # 4 = # 3/2;
N1458 # 5 = 7.811- # 4; Error calculation with specified value
N1459 G00Z210.4X115 .; Move to machining reference point
N1460 G28; Return to origin
N1461 G00A0 .; Turn head to 0 degrees and return to origin
N1462 # 4107 = # 4107- # 5; Rewriting tool radius compensation value
N1463 G28;
N1464 T000021;
N1465 G00A-90 .;
N1466 S796M03;
N1467 G00Z210.4X115 .;
N1468 G00Z206.35X62.Y1.005;
N1469 G01X18.F15;
N1470 G00X-18 .;
N1471 G01X-62 .;
N1472 G01Y-1.005;
N1473 G01X-18 .;
N1474 G00X18 .;
N1475 G01X62 .;
N1476 G00Z210.4;
N1477 G00X115 .;
N1478 G28M05;
N1479 G00A0 .;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

From the ninth stage tap diagram 45, 152 and final finished dimension diagram 167, type: M, rotation angle from reference position: -45. Hole step: 5, pitch 0.8, number of holes: 4, position: 40. PCD, hole division: C, reference hole: 1, division angle: -90. , Tap shape: S, settling / dish pan: S, diameter: 5.2, pan angle: 90. , Depth: 7. -S, pilot hole diameter: 4.2, depth: 10.5, type M, rotation angle from reference position: 0, hole diameter: 5. , Pitch: 0.8, number of holes: 2, position: 40. PCD, hole division: C, reference hole: 1, division angle: -180. , Tap shape: S, settling / dish pan: S, diameter: 5.2, pan angle: 90. , Depth: 7. -S, pilot hole diameter: 4.2, depth: 10.5 are read and a machining program is generated.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1500 G28;
N1501 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1502 T000015; Tool selection is based on FIG. 82 to FIG. 85, searching for a pilot hole drill using a pilot hole diameter: 4.2 mm and a depth: 10.5 mm as key codes, D, tool diameter; 4.2 mm, Select the tool identification number: 15 with the length under the neck: 54 mm.
N1503 G00A-90; Rotate the tool head 90 degrees to prepare for end face drilling.
N1504 S1061M03; From tool file: Tool material: SKH51, Workpiece material: SCM440H, Cutting condition file (Fig. 131) 14m / min, Feed: 0.05 / 3mm. 0.10 / 6 mm. In addition, the feeding speed corresponding to 4.8 mm is calculated. The rotation speed of the main shaft is S = 14 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 4.2) = 1061.034 [rpm].
N1505 G00X40.Z215.4;
N1506 G00Z207.4;
N1507 G73Z194.688R211.4Q2.F74.3P150; Depth calculation; 10.5+ (4.2 / 2) × tan30 = 11.712 210.4-11.712-4 = 194.688 Feed is calculated. Complementing the assumption that the feed speed is proportional to the diameter.
0.05 × 4.2 / 3 = 0.07 0.07 mm / rev is adopted from 0.10 × 4.2 / 6 = 0.07.
F = 0.07 × 1061 = 74.27 [mm / min]
N1508 G00Z215.4C45 .;
N1509 G00Z211.4
N1510 G73Z198.688R211.4Q2F74.3P150; Depth calculation; 10.5 + (4.2 / 2) x tan30 = 11.712 210.4 -11.712 = 198.688
N1511 G00Z215.4C135 .;
N1512 G00Z211.4
N1513 G73Z198.688R211.4Q2F74.3P150;
N1514 G00Z215.4C180 .;
N1515 G00Z207.4;
N1516 G73Z194.688R211.4Q2F74.3P150; Depth calculation; 10.5 + (4.2 / 2) x tan30 = 11.712 210.4 -11.712-4 = 194.688
N1517 G00Z215.4C225 .;
N1518 G00Z211.4
N1519 G73Z198.688R211.4Q2F74.3P150; Depth calculation; 10.5 + (4.2 / 2) x tan30 = 11.712 210.4 -11.712-4 = 198.688
N1520 G00Z215.4C135 .;
N1521 G00Z211.4;
N1522 G73Z198.688R211.4Q2F74.3P150;
N1523 G00Z215.4;
N1524 G28M05;
N1525 T000016; Tool selection from FIGS. 82 to 85, tap: M5, depth: 7. A pilot hole drill is searched using mm, and as a key code, and a tool identification number: 16 of T, tool diameter: 5 mm, cutting edge length: 18 mm is selected.
N1526 G00A-90 .; Rotate the tool head 90 degrees to prepare for end face drilling.
N1527 S509M03; From the tool file, the rotational speed of the spindle is calculated from 8 m / min from the cutting condition file (FIG. 132) by using the tool material: SKH51 and the workpiece material: SCM440H. The rotation speed of the main shaft is S = 8 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 5) = 509.296 [rpm].
N1528 G00X40.Z215.4;
N1529 G00Z207.4;
N1530 G84Z199.4R211.4F0.8P150; Depth calculation; 210.4-7-4 = 199.4 Feed uses the pitch as it is.
N1531 G00Z215.4C45 .;
N1532 G00Z211.4
N1533 G84Z203.4R211.4F0.8P150; Depth calculation; 210.4-7 = 203.4
N1534 G00Z215.4C135 .;
N1535 G00Z211.4
N1536 G84Z203.4R211.4F0.8P150; Depth calculation; 210.4-7 = 203.4
N1537 G00Z215.4C180 .;
N1538 G00Z207.4;
N1539 G84Z199.4R211.4F0.8P150; Depth calculation; 210.4-7-4 = 199.4
N1540 G00Z215.4C225 .;
N1541 G00Z211.4;
N1542 G84Z203.4R211.4F0.8P150; Depth calculation; 210.4-7 = 203.4
N1543 G00Z215.4C315 .;
N1544 G00Z211.4;
N1545 G84Z203.4R211.4F0.8P150; Depth calculation; 210.4-7 = 203.4
N1546 G00Z215.4;
N1547 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

9th stage reamer hole From FIG. 45, FIG. 151 and final finished dimensions 167, type: DR, rotation angle from reference position: −90. , Hole step: 1, diameter: 5.009, finish symbol: 3DR, countersink / dish pan: S, diameter: 6. , Panning angle: 90. , Depth: D-5. Number of holes / position: 1-40. PCD is read and a machining program is generated.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1548; N1549 G28;
N1550 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1551 T000013; Tool selection is based on FIGS. 82 to 85. Reamer diameter: 5.009 mm and depth: 5. A pilot hole drill is searched using mm, and as a key code, and a tool identification number: 13 of D, tool diameter: 4.8 mm, length under neck: 59 mm is selected.
N1552 G00A-90 .; Rotate the tool head 90 degrees to prepare for end face drilling.
N1553 S928M03; From tool file, tool material: SKH51, workpiece material: SCM440H, cutting condition file (Fig. 131), 14m / min, feed: 0.05 / 3mm. 0.10 / 6 mm. In addition, the feeding speed corresponding to 4.8 mm is calculated. The rotation speed of the main shaft is S = 14 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 4.8) = 928.404 [rpm].
N1554 G00X40.Z215.4C90 .;
N1555 G73Z203.014R212.4Q2.F74.2P150; Depth calculation; 5+ (4.8 / 2) × tan30 + 1 = 7.38564 210.4−7.386 = 203.014 Feed is calculated. Complementing the assumption that the feed speed is proportional to the diameter.
0.05 × 4.8 / 3 = 0.0799 0.08 mm / rev is adopted from 0.10 × 4.8 / 6 = 0.08.
F = 0.08 × 928 = 74.24 [mm / min]
N1556 G00Z215.4;
N1557 G28M05;
N1558 G00A0 .;
N1560 T000014; Tool selection is based on FIGS. 82 to 85. Reamer diameter: 5.009 mm and depth: 5. 4. Reamer is searched using mm, and as a key code, R, tool diameter; mm, length of cutting edge: 23. Tool identification number 14 of mm is selected.
N1561 G00A-90 .; Rotate the tool head 90 degrees to prepare for end face reamer drilling.
N1562 S509M03; From tool file, tool material: SKH51, workpiece material: SCM440H, cutting condition file (Fig. 133), 8m / min, feed: 0.075 / 3mm. , 0.15 / 6 mm, more complementarily, to calculate the feeding speed corresponding to 5 mm. The rotation speed of the main shaft is S = 8 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 5) = 509.296 [rpm].
N1563 G00X40.Z215.4C90 .;
N1564 G01Z204.4F63.6; Depth calculation; 5 + 1 = 6 210.4-6 = 204.4 Feed is calculated. Complementing the assumption that the feed speed is proportional to the diameter. 0.075 × 5/3 = 0.125 From 0.15 × 5/6 = 0.125, 0.125 mm / rev is adopted.
F = 0.125 × 509 = 63.625 [mm / min]
N1565 G01Z212.4;
N1566 G00Z215.4;
N1567 G28M05;
N1568 G00A0 .;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

  The second processing side is processed by changing the grip.

The specifications of the 28th stage end face groove cam and end face groove cam are given from FIG. 55, input; FIG. 157, final finished shape;
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1600 G28;
N1601 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1602 T000021; Tool selection is based on FIGS. 82 to 85. Cam groove width: 8 mm, cam depth = cutting blade length: exceeding 4.05 mm, searched as a key code, F, tool diameter: 6h10, A tool identification number of 21 with a cutting edge length of 8 mm is selected.
N1603 G00A-90 .;
N1604 S796M03; From tool file, tool material: SKH51, workpiece material: SCM440H, cutting condition file (Fig. 130), 15m / min, feed: 0.013 / 10mm. 0.025 / 12 mm. 0.05 / 18 mm. In addition, the feeding speed corresponding to 6 mm is calculated more complementarily. The rotation speed of the main shaft is S = 15 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 6) = 795.775 [rpm].
N1605 G00Z210.X115 .;
N1606 G00Z151.X89.982; The start point coordinates are corrected by the specified radius.
X = (43.991-4) × 2 + 10 = 89.982
N1607 G01Z145.95F50; The feed is calculated. Complementing the assumption that the feed speed is proportional to the square of the diameter. 0.013 x 62/102 = 0.0047 0.025 x 62/122 = 0.0063 From 0.063 mm / tooth is adopted. F = 0.063 x 2 x 796 = 50.148 [mm / min]
N1608 G01X69.982C180.F50; X = (43.991-4-5) × 2 = 69.982
N1609 G01X89.982C0 .;
N1610 G01X89.426C5 .; 5 degree overlap processing Widening width; 6mm to 8mm
N1611 G00Z151 .;
N1612 G00C-5 .;
N1613 G01Z145.95F50;
N1614 G41D1;
N1615 G01X97.582C0 .; X = (43.991-0.2) × 2 + 10 = 97.582
N1616 G01X77.582C180 .;
N1617 G01X97.582C0 .;
N1618 G01X97.026C5 .; 5 degree overlap processing
N1619 G00Z151 .;
N1620 G00C-5 .;
N1621 G01Z145.95F50;
N1622 G42D1;
N1623 G01X82.382C0 .; X = (43.991-8 + 0.2) × 2 + 10 = 82.382
N1624 G01X62.382C180 .;
N1625 G01X82.382C0 .;
N1626 G01X81.826C5 .; 5 degree overlap processing
N1627 G00Z151 .;
N1628 G40D1;
N1629 G00Z210.X115 .;
N1630 G28M05;
N1631 G00A0 .;
N1640 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N1641 # 101 = 0; Macro conversion initialization
N1642 # 102 = 0;
N1643 # 103 = 0;
N1644 # 104 = 0;
N1645 # 105 = 0;
N1646 # 106 = 0;
N1647 # 107 = 0;
N1648 # 108 = 0;
N1649 # 5061 = 0;
N1650 # 1 = 0;
N1651 # 2 = 0;
N1652 # 3 = 0;
N1653 # 4 = 0;
N1654 # 5 = 0;
N1655 # 6 = 0;
N1656 # 7 = 0;
N1657 # 8 = 0;
N1658 # 9 = 0;
N1659 # 10 = 0;
N1660 G00A-90 .; Turn head minus 90 degrees, orient the measurement axis in the axial direction
N1661 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N1662 G00X115.Z215 .; Move to measurement reference point
N1663 G00X93.582; X = (43.991-0.2) × 2 + 10−4 = 93.582
N1664 G00Z148.95; 147.45 + 1.5 = 148.95
N1665 G31X100.F150;
N1666 # 101 = # 5061;
N1667 G00X93.582Z147.45; 145.95 + 1.5 = 147.45
N1668 G31X100.F150;
N1669 # 102 = # 5061;
N1670 # 1 = # 101 + # 102;
N1671 G00X86.382Z148.95; X = (43.991-8. + 0.2) × 2 + 10 + 4 = 86.382 147.45 + 1.5 = 148.95
N1672 G31X70.F150;
N1673 # 103 = # 5061;
N1674 G00X86.382Z147.45; 145.95 + 1.5 = 147.45
N1675 G31X70.F150;
N1676 # 104 = # 5061;
N1677 # 2 = # 103 + # 104;
N1678 # 3 = # 1- # 2;
N1679 # 4 = # 3/2;
N1680 G01X73.582C180 .; X = (43.991-0.2) × 2-10-4 = 73.582
N1681 G00Z148.95; 147.45 + 1.5 = 148.95
N1682 G31X78.F150;
N1683 # 105 = # 5061;
N1684 G00X73.582Z147.45; 145.95 + 1.5 = 147.45
N1685 G31X78.F150;
N1686 # 106 = # 5061;
N1687 # 5 = # 105 + # 106;
N1688 G00X66.382Z148.95; X = (43.991-8. + 0.2) × 2-10 + 4 = 66.382 147.45 + 1.5 = 148.95
N1689 G31X61.F150;
N1690 # 107 = # 5061;
N1691 G00X66.382Z147.45; 145.95 + 1.5 = 147.45
N1692 G31X61.F150;
N1693 # 108 = # 5061;
N1694 # 6 = # 107 + # 108;
N1695 # 7 = # 5- # 6;
N1696 # 8 = # 7/2;
N1697 # 9 = # 4 + # 8;
N1698 # 10 = # 9/2;
N1699 G00Z215 .; Move to measurement reference point
N1700 G00X115 .; Move to measurement reference point
N1701 G28; Return to origin
N1703 G00A0 .; Turn head to 0 degrees and return to origin
N1704 # 4107 = # 4107- # 10; Rewriting tool radius compensation value
N1710 T000021; Finishing
N1711 G00A-90 .;
N1712 S796M03;
N1713 G00Z210.X115 .;
N1714 G00Z151.X89.982C-5 .; Correct the start point coordinates by the specified radius.
N1715 G01Z145.95F50;
N1716 G41D1; with tool radius compensation
N1717 G01X97.982C0 .; X = 43.991 × 2 + 10 = 97.982
N1718 G01X77.982C180 .;
N1719 G01X97.982C0 .;
N1720 G01X97.426C5 .; 5 degree overlap processing
N1721 G00Z151 .;
N1722 G00C-5 .;
N1723 G01Z145.95F50;
N1724 G42D1;
N1725 G01X81.982C0 .; X = (43.991-8) × 2 + 10 = 81.982
N1726 G01X61.982C180 .;
N1727 G01X81.982C0 .;
N1728 G01X81.426C5 .; 5 degree overlap processing
N1729 G00Z151 .;
N1730 G40D1;
N1731 G00Z210.X115 .;
N1732 G28M05;
N1733 G00A0 .;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

The specifications from the second machining side, the outer diameter finishing, and the final finishing shapes of FIGS. 161 to 164 are as follows.
Step number Finishing dimension Length 37 (Start point coordinates) 24.850 0. [210.]
37 24.850 15. [195.]
35 30.013 + 0.2 = 30.213G 20. [175.]
33 40. 5. [170.]
31 52.475 10. [160.]
29 40. 10.05 [149.95]
27 110. + 0.2 = 111.2G 9.975 [139.915]
(25 90. 4.96 [134.955])
74.985
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1800 G90;
N1801 G28;
N1802 T000003;
N1803 G96S135M03;
N1804 G41G00X0Z211.4;
N1805 G01Z210.F0.226;
N1806 G01X24.850F0.09; Feed F is determined by the finishing method symbol.
Since the finish symbol of the 37th stage is 2L, it is sufficient to satisfy 25S or less. Substituting the relational expression between roughness and feed and the tool edge radius (nose radius) 0.4 mm from the tool file (FIGS. 78 to 81) into the expression (48) developed from the expression (47),
Hmax = f2 / 8R (47)
f2 = 8R × H (48)
= 8 × 0.4 × 0.025 = 0.08 fmax = 0.080.5 = 0.28284 f = 0.28284 × 0.8 = 0.226272 [mm / rev]
Get. (0.8 here can be arbitrarily changed by the safety factor.)
For finishing of the end face, the feed in the X direction by the Z direction tool of the tool condition is 1/2. Since 2.5 is a temporary constant, it can be arbitrarily changed as necessary.
f = 0.226 / 2.5 = 0.09 [mm / rev]
N1807 G01Z195.F0.226;
N1808 G01X28.013;
N1809 G01X30.213Z193.9; 1C chamfer
N1810 G01Z173.013;
N1811 G02X30.Z175.R1 .; 1R corner removal
N1812 G01X38 .;
N1813 G01X40.Z174 .; 1C chamfer
N1814 G01Z169 .;
N1815 G01X42.Z170.R1 .; 1R corner
N1816 G01X50.475;
N1817 G01X52.475Z169 .; 1C chamfer
N1818 G01Z158.6; Groove passage margin = 1 + 0.4 (Nose R)
N1819 G00X115.G00Z210 .;
N1820 G40; N1821 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Groove Finishing The specifications of the groove are as follows from the final finished shape of FIGS. 161 to 164.
Step number Finishing dimension Length 31 52.475 50. [160.]
29 40. 10.05 [149.95]
27 110. + 0.2 = 110.2G 9.975 [139.915]
The selection of the groove tool and the feed speed are selected and calculated according to the above-described method.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1830 T000004; Selection of groove tool
N1831 G96S135M03;
N1832 G00X115.Z210 .;
N1833 G00Z153 .;
N1834 G00X42.8;
N1835 G01X40.F0.145; Finishing of groove center
N1836 G04F0.084; The dwell time is about 1.5 revolutions of the workpiece.
For the dwell time, the dwell speed (in this example, 1.5 revolutions), the cutting speed (in this example, 135 m / min), and the groove bottom diameter (in this example, 40 mm) are substituted into equation (46). And ask.
t = dwell rotational speed / (cutting speed / (60 × π × bottom diameter)) [sec] (46)
= 1.5 / (135,000 / (60 × π × 40.)) = 0.0837 [sec]
In this example, 0.084 [sec] was obtained.
N1837 G00X115 .;
N1838 G00Z149.95X110 .; 110 mm diameter end face finishing start point
N1839 G01X41.2F0.145; 1R processing start point
N1840 G03X40.Z150.55R0.6; 1R machining
N1841 G01Z151.35; Finishing groove bottom
N1842 G00X54.475;
N1843 G00Z161.234; Diameter 52.475mm end face finishing start point
N1844 G01X52.475F0.145;
N1845 G01X50.475Z160 .;
N1846 G01X41.2; 1R processing start point
N1847 G02X40.Z159.4R0.6F0.145; 1R machining
N1848 G01Z158.6; Finishing groove bottom
N1849 G00X115 .;
N1850 G00Z210 .;
N1851 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

35 to 38-th key groove The specifications are as follows from FIGS. 44 and 50, the input diagram 150, and the final finished shape diagram 166.
Key groove number: 1, front stage: 38, rear stage: 36, key groove width: 8 mm, dimensional difference 0 / −0.036 (average width: 7.985 mm), finish symbol: 2M, key groove total length: 30 .82 mm, processing designation step: 37, depth; H: 8.495 mm, finish symbol: 2M, groove type: 1, cutter diameter; S: 45 mm, reference shoulder step: 38, dimension from shoulder; E: 0mm, angle from the reference position: 0 degree,
A machining program is generated from these specifications as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N1900 G28;
N1901 G94; Asynchronous feed
N1902 T000019; Tool selection is based on FIGS. 82 to 85. The side cutter is searched using the cutter diameter: 45 mm and the width: 8 mm (average width: 7.985 mm) as a key code. S, tool diameter: 45 mm 0 / − Tool identification number 19 of 0.050 is selected.
N1903 S141M03; From tool file, tool material: SKH51, workpiece material: SCM440H, cutting condition file (FIG. 129), 20 m / min, feed: 0.015 mm / rev. Calculate the number of rotations and the number of blades from the blade. The rotation speed of the main shaft is S = 20 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 45) = 1141.471 [rpm]
It is.
N1904 G00Z237.5X0.C90 .; Positioning point = 215. + 22.5 = 237.5
N1905 G00Y8.495;
N1906 G00Z223.806; Incision point = 210. + {22.52- (22.5-4) 2} 1/2 + 1 = 223.806
N1907 G01Z194.9F38; End point = 210.-30.82 + [22.52- (22.5-6.5) 2] 1/2)
-0.1 = 194.9 The feed speed is calculated. The feed speed is the number of revolutions: 141 rev / min, feed: 0.015 mm / rev. Number of blades: From 18 sheets, F = 0.015 × 141 × 18 = 38.07 [mm / min] 38 mm / min.
N1908 G0Y16 .;
N1909 G00Z237.6;
N1910 G00C0 .;
N1911 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

  Thereafter, a machining program is generated using each of the separate process machine tools. First, the process proceeds from the sixth stage inner diameter gear electric discharge machining.

In the sixth stage inner diameter gear electric discharge machining electric discharge machining, if a machining electrode is prepared, a screen for inputting machining conditions separately is configured, and the machining program can be given as a general method. The specifications in the processing are as follows: the processing position: Z210 mm, X0, Y0, the specified depth; 195 mm, the margin depth; These machining programs were generated as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N2000 G28; Origin check
N2001 G90; Absolute value command
N2002 T000200; Roughing tool
N2003 G00X0.Y0.Z210.M03; Move to the machining point and turn on the power
N2004 G01Z191.F0.06; Roughing
N2005 M05; Power OFF
N2007 G00Z210 .; Return to machining start point
N2006 G28; Return to origin
N2007 T000201; Finishing tool change
N2008 G00X0.Y0.Z210.M03; Move to machining start point and power on
N2009 G01Z191.F0.06; Finishing
N2010 M05; Power off
N2011 G00Z210 .; Return to machining start point
N2012 G28; Return to origin
N2013 M30;
Program end tape rewind When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

The specifications of the outer gear hobbing of the 31st stage are as follows from FIG. 44, FIG. 47, the input diagram 160, and the final finished shape diagram 172.
External gear number: 1, reference position; front stage: 30, rear stage: 32, specified stage: 31, dimension from shoulder: S: 0 mm, angle: 0 degrees, gear specifications: ST, tooth profile: JISB1701, module (M ): 2.5, pressure angle (PA): 20 degrees, number of teeth: 19, twist angle: 0 degrees, tooth width: 10 mm, straddle tooth thickness: 18.433 / 3 sheets, finishing method: H, finishing symbol: 3H
Tool selection is performed by selecting the gear specifications; ST, tooth profile: JISB1701M: 2.5, PA: 20, and tool identification number: 22 from FIGS. Further, a tool diameter: 65 mm and a tooth end length: 3.125 mm are obtained from the tool file, and whether or not machining is possible is determined.
Under this condition, the machining allowance is impossible because the escape margin of 65 mm of the tool diameter is a relief groove of 10 mm.
It warns that there is no file of the process and machine tool that processes this.
If it is assumed that the machining margin (tool diameter + 5 mm) / 2 is satisfied, the machining program of this example is generated as follows.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N2100 G28;
N2101 G90; Asynchronous feed
N2102 T000022; The tool selection selects the specifications of the gear from FIG. 82 to FIG. 85; ST, tooth profile: JISB1701M: 2.5, PA: 20, and tool identification number: 22.
Further, from the tool file, the tool diameter: 65 mm, the tooth end length: 3.125 mm, and the twist angle is calculated.
LA = tan −1 {2.5 / π (65−3.125 × 2)} = 0.776026 deg.
N2103 G00Y0.A0.776Z210.X115 .;
N2104 SB133.MB03SC7.MC03; From tool file, find tool material: SKH55, workpiece material: SCM440H, 29m / min from cutting condition file (Fig. 134), feed: 1.15rev / work Spindle speed: SB = 29 × 1000 / (3.14159 × 65) = 142.015 [rpm]
Since the work speed is 19 teeth, the spindle speed is divided by 19.
Work speed: SC = 142/19 = 7.473842 [rpm]
For simplification, the work rotation speed (SC) is 7 rpm, and the spindle rotation speed (SB) is 7 × 19 = 133 [rpm].
X2105 G00X51.5Z189.127M08; z = 210-35 + {32.52- (32.5-5.525) 2} 1/2 + 1
X2106 G01X41.45F8.05; Roughing, Designated diameter = 52.5-2 × (3.125 + 2.5) = 41.25 Leave the finishing allowance of 0.2 mm.
X = 41.25 + 0.2 = 41.45
F = 1.15 × 7 = 8.05 [mm / min]
N2107 G01Z164.F8.05;
N2108 G00X115 .;
N2109 G00Z189.127;
N2110 G00X41.45;
N2111 G01X41.25;
N2112 G01Z164.F8.05;
N2113 G00Z115.M09;
N2114 G28M05;
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Outer Diameter Grinding The processing points of the outer diameter grinding are as follows: FIG. 44, FIG. 49, etc., Input Figures 143 to 148, Final Finishing Shapes 161 to 164 It is as follows.
First processing side
Stage number Finishing dimensions Finishing dimensions Length
20 73.185G 72.985 30. [135.]
23 84.189G 83.989 20. [75.]
27 110.2G 110. (Cam) 10. [60.]
Second processing side
Stage number Finishing dimensions Finishing dimensions Length
35 30.213G 30.013 20. [175.]
Using these conditions, a machining program for outer diameter grinding is generated as follows.
Note that the measurement device: Y-axis control, forward movement, and backward movement are incorporated into the program for in-process measurement during grinding. However, cam in-process measurement is excluded from this description because it requires special equipment and control.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N2200 G28;
N2201 G90; Asynchronous feed
N2202 T000024; Tool selection; Search by grinding and outer diameter.
N2203 SA1259SB109M03; Wheel spindle: A, Work spindle: B
Material: SCM440H, according to FIG. 124, hardness: HB285-352, converted hardness: Rc30-38, according to FIG. Determine machining and obtain cutting conditions.
Grinding wheel circumferential speed: 30 m / sec, workpiece circumferential speed: 25 m / min, plunge cutting: (roughing) 0.015 / (finishing) 0.005 mm / rev,
SA = 30 × 60 × 1000 / π × 455 = 1259 [rev / min]
SB = 25 × 1000 / π × 73 = 109.01 [rev / min]
SB = 25 × 1000 / π × 84 = 94.735 [rev / min]
SB = 25 × 1000 / π × 110 = 72.343 [rev / min]
SB = 25 × 1000 / π × 30 = 265.258 [rev / min]
N2204 G00Z210 .; Move to Z machining origin
N2205 G00X115 .; Move to X machining origin
N2206 G00Z136 .; Move to first machining point
N2207 G00X73.285M08; Grinding gap (diameter); 0.1, coolant ON
N2208 G01X73.005Y72.985M98F1.63; Roughing, fine grinding (diameter); 0.02 is left. Setting and advancement of measuring device.
F = 0.015 × 109 = 1.635 [mm / min]
N2209 G01X72.985F0.54; Finishing F = 0.005 × 109 = 0.545 [mm / min]
N2210 G04F0.826M86; Dwell, setback of measuring device F = 1.5 / (109/60) = 0.8257 [sec]
N2211 G00X115.SB95; Move to X machining origin
N2212 G00Z76 .; Move to second machining point
N2213 G00X84.289; Grinding gap (diameter); 0.1
N2214 G01X84.009Y83.989M89F1.42; Roughing, fine grinding allowance (diameter); 0.02 is left. Setting and advancement of measuring device.
F = 0.015 × 95 = 1.425 [mm / min]
N2215 G01X83.989F0.47; Finishing F = 0.005 × 95 = 0.475 [mm / min]
N2216 G04F0.95M86; Dwell, setback of measuring device F = 1.5 / (95/60) = 0.9474 [sec]
N2217 G00X115 .; Move to X machining origin
N2218 G00Z59.MB05; Move to 3rd machining point and stop workpiece spindle
N2219 G00C0 .; Work spindle home position return
N2220 G00X110.3; Grinding gap (diameter); 0.1
N2221 G01X110.004F0.36; Processing, fine grinding allowance (diameter); 0.02 is left.
F = 0.005 × 72 = 0.36 [mm / min]
N2222 G01X90.004C180.FX14.4; FX = (2 × 20) / (π × 110) / {(0.005 × 72 × π × 110) / (0.1 × 10)} = 14.3999 [mm / min]
N2223 G01X110.004C360 .;
N2224 G01X109.984F0.36; Finishing
N2225 G01X89.984C180.FX7.2; FX = (2 × 20) / (π × 110) / {(0.005 × 72 × π × 110) / (0.1 × 20)} = 7.1999 [mm / min]
N2226 G01X109.984C360FX7.2;
N2227 G01X109.428C5.FX7.2; Overlap 5 degrees
N2228 G00X115. Move to X machining origin
N2229 G00Z210.C0 .; Move to Z machining origin
N2230 G28M05M09; Return to origin, Spindle stop, Coolant OFF
N2231 M00; Program stop, workpiece reversal
N2232 SA1259SB265M03; Grinding wheel spindle, workpiece spindle start
N2233 G00Z210 .; Move to Z machining origin
N2234 G00X115 .; Move to X machining origin
N2235 G00Z175 .; Move to 4th machining point
N2236 G00X31.313M08; Grinding gap (diameter); 0.1, coolant ON
N2237 G01X30.033Y30.013M89F3.97; Roughing, fine grinding (diameter); 0.02 is left. Setting and advancement of measuring device.
F = 0.015 × 265 = 3.975 [mm / min]
N2238 G01X30.013F1.32; Finishing F = 0.005 × 265 = 1.325 [mm / min]
N2239 G04F0.34M86; Dwell, setback of measuring device F = 1.5 / (265/60) = 0.3396 [sec]
N2240 G00X115 .; Move to X machining origin
N2241 G00Z210 .; Move to Z machining origin
N2242 G28M05M09; Return to origin, Spindle stop, Coolant OFF
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Inner Diameter Grinding Process The inner diameter grinding process is a finishing process for a 20 mm diameter H7 hole designated in the second stage.
Stage number Finishing dimensions Finishing dimensions Length
2 (Start point coordinates) 20.011 0. [160.] 161.55
2 19.811G 20.011 15. [175.] 176.55
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N2300 G28;
N2301 G90; Asynchronous feed
N2302 T000023; Tool selection; Search by grinding and inner diameter. Wheel diameter: 10mm
N2303 SA180000SB637M03; Wheel spindle: A, Work spindle: B
With material: SCM440H, according to FIG. 124, hardness: HB285-352, converted hardness: Rc30-38, according to FIG. Determine machining and obtain cutting conditions.
Grinding wheel circumferential speed: 30 m / sec, workpiece circumferential speed: 45 m / min, traverse infeed: (roughing) 0.013 / (finishing machining) 0.005 mm / rev, traverse amount: (roughing), 1 / of grinding wheel width 2, (finishing), 1/6 of the wheel width
SA = 30 × 60 × 1000 / π × 10 = 180000 [rev / min]
SB = 40 × 1000 / π × 20 = 636.619 [rev / min]
N2304 G00X0 .; Move to X machining origin
N2305 G00Z215 .; Move to Z machining origin
N2306 G00X19.811M08; Grinding gap (diameter); 0.1, coolant ON
N2307 G00Z176 .; To machining point
N2308 G01Z160.2F2756; To machining end point
The chopping speed in the Z direction is calculated by assuming that one-third of the grindstone width is sent by one rotation of the workpiece in rough machining.
F = (13/3) × 636 = 2755.9999 [mm / min]
N2309 G01Z176 .; Return to machining point
N2310 G01X19.824; incision, diameter 0.013 mm
N2311 G01Z160.2; To machining end point
N2312 G01Z176 .; Return to machining point
N2313 G01X19.837; (Repeat below)
N2314 G01Z160.2;
N2315 G01Z176 .;
N2316 G01X19.85;
N2317 G01Z160.2;
N2318 G01Z176 .;
N2319 G01X19.863;
N2320 G01Z160.2;
N2321 G01Z176 .;
N2322 G01X19.876;
N2323 G01Z160.2;
N2324 G01Z176 .;
N2325 G01X19.889;
N2326 G01Z160.2;
N2327 G01Z176 .;
N2328 G01X19.902;
N2329 G01Z160.2;
N2330 G01Z176 .;
N2331 G01X19.915;
N2332 G01Z160.2;
N2333 G01Z176 .;
N2334 G01X19.928;
N2335 G01Z160.2;
N2336 G01Z176 .;
N2337 G01X19.941;
N2338 G01Z160.2;
N2339 G01Z176 .;
N2340 G01X19.954;
N2341 G01Z160.2;
N2342 G01Z176 .;
N2343 G01X19.967;
N2344 G01Z160.2;
N2345 G01Z176 .;
N2346 G01X19.98;
N2347 G01Z160.2;
N2348 G01Z176 .;
N2349 G01X19.991;
N2350 G01Z160.2;
N2351 G01Z176 .;
N2352 G01Z160.2; Spark out
N2353 G01Z176 .;
N2354 G01Z160.2;
N2355 G01Z176 .;
N2356 G01Z160.2;
N2357 G01Z176 .;
N2358 G01Z160.2;
N2359 G01Z176 .;
N2360 G01Z160.2;
N2361 G01Z176 .;
N2362 G01Z160.2;
N2363 G01Z176 .;
N2364 G00Z215.X0.M09;
N2365 G28M05;

Measurement of 20mm bore
N2370 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N2371 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization
N2372 # 102 = 0;
N2373 # 103 = 0;
N2374 # 104 = 0;
N2375 # 23061 = 0;
N2376 # 1 = 0;
N2377 # 2 = 0;
N2378 # 3 = 0;
N2379 # 4 = 0;
N2380 # 23 = 0;
N2381 # 6 = 0;
N2382 # 7 = 0;
N2383 G00A-90 .; Turn head minus 90 degrees, orient the measurement axis in the axial direction
N2384 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N2385 G00X115.Z215 .; Move to machining reference point
N2386 G00X0 .;
N2387 G00Z173; Move to first measurement point
N2388 G31X21.011F150; Measurement (1) 20.011mm
N2389 # 101 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 101
N2390 G00Z162.X0 .; Move to second measurement point
N2391 G31X20.011F150; Measurement (2) 20.011mm
N2392 # 102 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 102
N2393 # 1 = # 101 + # 102; Diameter calculation for first and second measurement points
N2394 # 2 = # 1/2;
N2395 G00X0 .; Move to third measurement point
N2396 G31X-21.011F150; Measurement (3) -20.111 mm
N2397 # 103 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 103
N2398 G00Z173X0 .; Move to 4th measurement point
N2399 G31X-20.011F150; Measurement (4) -20.111 mm
N2400 # 104 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 104
N2401 # 3 = # 103 + # 104; Diameter calculation of 3rd and 4th measurement point
N2402 # 4 = # 3/2;
N2403 # 5 = # 2- # 4; Average diameter calculation
N2404 # 6 = # 5/2;
N2405 # 7 = 20.011- # 6; Error calculation with specified value
N2406 G00X0 .;
N2407 G00X115.Z215 .; Move to machining reference point
N2408 G28; Return to origin
N2409 G00A0 .; Turn head to 0 degrees and return to origin
N2410 # 4107 = # 4107- # 7; Rewriting tool radius compensation value

Finishing of 20mm ID hole
N2420 G28;
N2421 G90;
N2422 T000023; Tool offset re-input
N2423 SA180000SB637M03;
N2424 G00X115.Z215 .; Move to machining origin
N2425 G00X0 .;
N2426 G00X19.811M08; Grinding gap (diameter); 0.005, coolant ON
N2427 G00Z176 .; To machining point
N2428 G01Z160.2F1378; To machining end point
The chopping speed in the Z direction is calculated assuming that the finishing process feeds 1/6 of the grindstone width by one rotation of the workpiece.
F = (13/6) × 636 = 1377.9999 [mm / min]
N2429 G01Z176 .; Return to machining point
N2430 G01X19.996;
N2431 G01Z160.2;
N2432 G01Z176 .;
N2433 G01X20.001;
N2434 G01Z160.2;
N2435 G01Z176 .;
N2436 G01X20.006;
N2437 G01Z160.2;
N2438 G01Z176 .;
N2439 G01X20.011;
N2440 G01Z160.2;
N2441 G01Z176 .;
N2442 G01Z160.2; Spark out
N2443 G01Z176 .;
N2444 G01Z160.2;
N2445 G01Z176 .;
N2446 G01Z160.2;
N2447 G01Z176 .;
N2448 G01Z160.2;
N2449 G01Z176 .;
N2450 G00Z215.X0.M09;
N2451 G28M05;

Final measurement Inner diameter 20mm hole measurement
N2460 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N2461 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization
N2462 # 102 = 0;
N2463 # 103 = 0;
N2464 # 104 = 0;
N2465 # 23061 = 0;
N2466 # 1 = 0;
N2467 # 2 = 0;
N2468 # 3 = 0;
N2469 # 4 = 0;
N2470 # 23 = 0;
N2471 # 6 = 0;
N2472 # 7 = 0;
N2473 # 8 = 0;
N2474 # 9 = 0;
N2475 # 10 = 0.022;
N2476 G00A-90 .; Turn head minus 90 degrees, orient the measurement axis in the axial direction
N2477 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N2478 G00X115.Z215 .; Move to machining reference point
N2479 G00X0 .;
N2480 G00Z173; Move to first measuring point
N2481 G31X21.011F150; Measurement (1) 20.011mm
N2482 # 101 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 101
N2483 G00Z162.X0 .; Move to second measurement point
N2484 G31X20.011F150; Measurement (2) 20.011mm
N2485 # 102 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 102
N2486 # 1 = # 101 + # 102; Diameter calculation of first and second measurement points
N2487 # 2 = # 1/2;
N2488 G00X0 .; Move to third measurement point
N2489 G31X-21.011F150; Measurement (3) -20.111 mm
N2490 # 103 = # 5061; Store the measurement result in 103
N2491 G00Z173X0 .; Move to 4th measurement point
N2492 G31X-20.011F150; Measurement (4) -20.111 mm
N2493 # 104 = # 5061; memorize measurement result in 104
N2494 # 3 = # 103 + # 104; Diameter calculation of 3rd and 4th measurement point
N2495 # 4 = # 3/2;
N2496 # 5 = # 2- # 4; Average diameter calculation
N2497 # 6 = # 5/2;
N2498 # 7 = 20.011- # 6; Error calculation with specified value
N2499 G00X0 .;
N2500 G00X115.Z215 .; Move to machining reference point
N2501 G28; Return to origin
N2502 G00A0 .; Turn head to 0 degrees and return to origin
N2503 # 4107 = # 4107- # 7; Rewriting tool radius compensation value
N2504 # 8 = 20.022- # 6; Calculation of difference between specified dimension and measured value
N2505 IF # 8GT # 10G0T02420; When specified dimension is less than 20.0
N2506 IF # 8GE # 9G0T02510; When equal to the specified dimension 20.02
N2507 IF # 8LE # 10G0T02510; When specified dimension is larger than 20.0
N2508 IF # 8LT # 9G0T02509; When specified dimension is larger than 20.02
N2509 PRINT: N0G0; Display: Defective product
N2510 PRINT: G0; Display: Non-defective
N2511 M02;

Measurement In this example, a measurement program is created by limiting the measurement locations to locations where tolerance symbols or dimensional differences are input.
The measurement location is
First processing side
Step number Measurement dimension Length from the reference point
10 49.-0.1 / -0.15 210./205.
18 69.5 0 / -0.1 170./165.
20 73.h7 165./135.
22-23 80.h6 / 84.h6 115./95.
24 84. h6 95./ 80.
24 84.-0.1 / -0.2 80./ 75.
Second processing side
Step number Measurement dimension Length from the reference point
31 52.5 0 / 0.05 50./ 40.
35 30.m5 35./ 15.
Is the outer diameter measurement.
Machining program Contents and determination conditions and formulas
N2600 T000100; Measuring tool selection exchange
N2601 # 101 = 0; Macro variable initialization (same below)
N2602 # 102 = 0;
N2603 # 103 = 0;
N2604 # 104 = 0;
N2605 # 105 = 0;
N2606 # 106 = 0;
N2607 # 107 = 0;
N2608 # 108 = 0;
N2609 # 109 = 0;
N2610 # 110 = 0;
N2611 # 111 = 0;
N2612 # 112 = 0;
N2613 # 113 = 0;
N2614 # 114 = 0;
N2615 # 115 = 0;
N2616 # 116 = 0;
N2617 # 117 = 0;
N2618 # 118 = 0;
N2619 # 119 = 0;
N2620 # 120 = 0;
N2621 # 121 = 0;
N2622 # 122 = 0;
N2623 # 123 = 0;
N2624 # 124 = 0;
N2625 # 125 = 0;
N2626 # 126 = 0;
N2627 # 5061 = 0; X: Counter initialization
N2628 # 5062 = 0; Y: Counter initialization
N2629 # 5063 = 0; Z: Counter initialization
N2630 # 1; Macro variable initialization (same below)
N2631 # 2;
N2632 # 3;
N2633 # 4;
N2634 # 5;
N2635 # 6;
N2636 # 7;
N2637 # 8;
N2638 # 9;
N2639 # 10;
N2640 # 11;
N2641 # 12;
N2642 # 13;
N2643 # 14;
N2644 # 15;
N2645 # 16;
N2646 # 17;
N2647 # 18;
N2648 # 19;
N2649 # 20;
N2650 # 21;
N2651 # 22;
N2652 # 23;
N2653 # 24;
N2654 # 25;
N2655 # 26;
N2656 G28 $ G100 *; Measuring head calibration
N2657 G00X115.Z215 .; Move to machining reference point
N2658 G00Y-25.Z207.5; Move to first measurement point (Y, Z)
N2659 G00X0 .; Move to first measurement point (X)
N2660 G31Y-24.F150; Measurement (1)-24.4375mm
N2661 # 101 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 101
N2662 G00Y-25 .; Return to the first measuring point (Y)
N2663 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2664 G00Y25 .; Move to second measuring point (Y)
N2665 G00X0 .; Move to second measuring point (X)
N2666 G31Y24.F150; Measurement (2) 24.4375mm
N2667 # 102 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 102
N2668 # 1 = # 102- # 101; mm -0.1 / -0.15 diameter calculation
N2669 # 2 = # 1/2;
N2670 G00Y25 .; Return to second measuring point (Y)
N2671 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point
N2672 G00Z167.5; Move to third measurement point (Z)
N2673 G00Y-35 .; Move to third measurement point (Y)
N2674 G00X0 .; Move to third measurement point (X)
N2675 G31Y-34.F150; Measurement (3)-34.725mm
N2676 # 103 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 103
N2677 G00Y-35 .; Return to 3rd measurement point (Y)
N2678 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2679 G00Y35 .; Move to fourth measurement point (Y)
N2680 G00X0 .; Move to 4th measurement point (X)
N2681 G31Y34.F150; Measurement (4) 34.725mm
N2682 # 104 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 104
N2683 # 3 = # 104- # 103; 69.5mm 0 / -0.1 diameter calculation
N2684 # 4 = # 3/2;
N2585 G00Y35 .; Return to 4th measurement point (Y)
N2686 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2687 G00Z162.5; Move to fifth measurement point (Z)
N2688 G00Y-37 .; Move to fifth measurement point (Y)
N2689 G00X0 .; Move to fifth measurement point (X)
N2690 G31Y-36.F150; Measurement (5) -36.4975mm
N2691 # 105 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 105
N2692 G00Y-37 .; Return to 5th measurement point (Y)
N2693 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2694 G00Y37 .; Move to sixth measurement point (Y)
N2695 G00X0 .; Move to sixth measurement point (X)
N2696 G31Y36.F150; Measurement (6) 36.4975mm
N2697 # 106 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 105
N2698 # 5 = # 106- # 105; h7 Diameter calculation
N2699 # 6 = # 5/2;
N2700 G00Y37 .; Return to 6th measurement point (Y)
N2701 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2702 G00Z137.5;
N2703 G00Y-37 .; Move to 7th measurement point (Y)
N2704 G00X0 .; Move to 7th measurement point (X)
N2705 G31Y-36.F150; Measurement (7) -36.4975mm
N2706 # 107 = # 5062; Store the measurement result in 107
N2707 G00Y-37 .; Return to 7th measurement point (Y)
N2708 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2709 G00Y37 .; Move to 8th measurement point (Y)
N2710 G00X0 .; Move to 8th measurement point (X)
N2711 G31Y36.F150; Measurement (8) 36.4975mm
N2712 # 107 = # 5062; Store the measurement result in 107
N2713 # 5 = # 108- # 107; h7 Diameter calculation
N2714 # 8 = # 7/2;
N2715 G00Y37 .; Return to 8th measurement point (Y)
N2716 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2717 G00Z112.5; Move to 9th measurement point (Z)
N2718 G00Y-40.5; Move to 9th measurement point (Y)
N2719 G00X0 .; Move to 9th measurement point (X)
N2720 G31Y-39.5F150; Measurement (9)-40.24525mm
N2721 # 109 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 109
N2722 G00Y-40.5; Return to 9th measurement point (Y)
N2723 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2724 G00Y40.5; Move to the 10th measurement point (Y)
N2725 G00X0 .; Move to the 10th measurement point (X)
N2726 G31Y39.5F150; Measurement (10) 40.24525mm
N2727 # 110 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 110
N2728 # 9 = # 110- # 109; 80.5h6 Diameter calculation
N2729 # 10 = # 9/2;
N2730 G00Y40.5; Return to the 10th measurement point (Y)
N2731 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2732 G00Z97.5; N2733 G00Y-42 .; Move to eleventh measurement point (Y)
N2734 G00X0 .; Move to eleventh measurement point (X)
N2735 G31Y-41.5F150; Measurement (11) -41.774545mm
N2736 # 111 = # 5062; Measurement result is stored in 111
N2737 G00Y-42 .; Return to 11th measurement point (Y)
N2738 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2739 G00Y42 .; Move to the 12th measurement point (Y)
N2740 G00X0 .; Move to the 12th measurement point (X)
N2741 G31Y41.5F150; Measurement (12) 41.774545mm
N2742 # 112 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 112
N2743 # 11 = # 112- # 111; 83.5h6 Diameter calculation
N2744 # 12 = # 11/2;
N2745 G00Y42 .; Return to 12th measurement point (Y)
N2746 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2747 G00Z92.5;
N2748 G00Y-42.5; Move to 13th measurement point (Y)
N2749 G00X0 .; Move to 13th measurement point (X)
N2750 G31Y-41.5F150; Measurement (13) -41.9945mm
N2751 # 113 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 113
N2752 G00Y-42.5; Return to 13th measurement point (Y)
N2753 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2754 G00Y42.5; Move to 14th measurement point (Y)
N2755 G00X0 .; Move to the 14th measurement point (X)
N2756 G31Y41.5F150; Measurement (14) 41.9945mm
N2757 # 114 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 114
N2758 # 13 = # 114- # 113; h6 Diameter calculation
N2759 # 14 = # 13/2;
N2760 G00Y42.5; Return to 14th measurement point (Y)
N2761 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2762 G00Z82.5;
N2763 G00Y-42.5; Move to 15th measurement point (Y)
N2764 G00X0 .; Move to 15th measurement point (X)
N2765 G31Y-41.5F150; Measurement (15) -41.9945mm
N2766 # 115 = # 5062; Store the measurement result in 115
N2767 G00Y-42.5; Return to 15th measurement point (Y)
N2768 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2769 G00Y42.5; Move to the 16th measurement point (Y)
N2770 G00X0 .; Move to the 16th measurement point (X)
N2771 G31Y41.5F150; Measurement (16) 41.9945mm
N2772 # 116 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 116
N2773 # 15 = # 116- # 115; h6 Diameter calculation
N2774 # 16 = # 15/2;
N2775 G00Y42.5; Return to 16th measurement point (Y)
N2776 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2777 G00Z77.5;
N2778 G00Y-42.5; Move to 17th measurement point (Y)
N2779 G00X0 .; Move to the 17th measurement point (X)
N2780 G31Y-41.5F150; Measurement (17)-41.925mm
N2781 # 117 = # 5062; Measurement result is stored in 117
N2782 G00Y-42.5; Return to 17th measurement point (Y)
N2783 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2784 G00Y42.5; Move to 18th measurement point (Y)
N2785 G00X0 .; Move to 18th measurement point (X)
N2786 G31Y41.5F150; Measurement (18) 41.925mm
N2787 # 118 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 118
N2788 # 17 = # 118- # 117; -0.10 / -0.20 Diameter calculation
N2789 # 18 = # 17/2;
N2790 G00Y42.5; Return to 18th measurement point (Y)
N2791 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2792 G00Z47.5;
N2793 G00Y-26.75; Move to 19th measurement point (Y)
N2794 G00X0 .; Move to 19th measurement point (X)
N2795 G31Y-26.F150; Measurement (19) -26.2375mm
N2796 # 119 = # 5062; Measurement result is stored in 119
N2797 G00Y-26.75; Return to 19th measurement point (Y)
N2798 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2799 G00Y26.75; Move to measurement point 20 (Y)
N2800 G00X0 .; Move to 20th measurement point (X)
N2801 G31Y26.F150; Measurement (20) 26.2375mm
N2802 # 120 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 120
N2803 # 19 = # 120- # 119; 52.5 0 / -0.05 Calculation of diameter
N2804 # 20 = # 19/2;
N2805 G00Y26.75; Return to the 20th measurement point (Y)
N2806 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2807 G00Z42.5;
N2808 G00Y-26.75; Move to 21st measurement point (Y)
N2809 G00X0 .; Move to 21st measurement point (X)
N2810 G31Y-26.F150; Measurement (21) -26.2375mm
N2811 # 121 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 121
N2812 G00Y-26.75; Return to 21st measurement point (Y)
N2813 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2814 G00Y26.75; Move to measurement point 22 (Y)
N2815 G00X0 .; Move to measurement point 22 (X)
N2816 G31Y26.F150; Measurement (22) 26.2375mm
N2817 # 122 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 122
N2818 # 21 = # 122- # 121; 52.5 0 / -0.05 Calculation of diameter
N2819 # 22 = # 21/2;
N2820 G00Y26.75; Return to measurement point 22 (Y)
N2821 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2822 G00Z32.5;
N2823 G00Y-15.5; Move to 21st measurement point (Y)
N2824 G00X0 .; Move to 21st measurement point (X)
N2825 G31Y-14.5F150; Measurement (21) -15.00625mm
N2826 # 123 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 123
N2827 G00Y-15.5; Return to 21st measurement point (Y)
N2828 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2829 G00Y15.5; Move to measurement point 22 (Y)
N2830 G00X0 .; Move to measurement point 22 (X)
N2831 G31Y14.5F150; Measurement (22) 15.00625mm
N2833 # 23 = # 124- # 123; Calculation of m5 diameter
N2834 # 24 = # 23/2;
N2835 G00Y15.5; Return to measurement point 22 (Y)
N2836 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2837 G00Z17.5;
N2838 G00Y-15.5; Move to 21st measurement point (Y)
N2839 G00X0 .; Move to 21st measurement point (X)
N2840 G31Y-14.5F150; Measurement (21) -15.00625mm
N2841 # 125 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 125
N2842 G00Y-15.5; Return to 21st measurement point (Y)
N2843 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2844 G00Y15.5; Move to measurement point 22 (Y)
N2845 G00X0 .; Move to measurement point 22 (X)
N2846 G31Y14.5F150; Measurement (22) 15.00625mm
N2847 # 126 = # 5062; memorize measurement result in 126
N2848 # 25 = # 126- # 125; Calculation of m5 diameter
N2849 # 26 = # 25/2;
N2850 G00Y15.5; Return to measurement point 22 (Y)
N2851 G00X115 .; Return to measurement reference point (X)
N2852 G00Z215 .; Return to measurement reference point (Z)
N2853 G28; Machine home position return order.
When this process ends, the process ends at step 1108 and continues to step 1109.

Example 2
Detailed descriptions of the steps other than the structure of the material figure, the rod material, and the machine tool file described in this example, and the steps omitted for convenience of explanation are as follows.

  FIG. 27 shows the detailed procedure of the n-process workpiece machining, measurement, correction, and re-machining process in step 15. In step 1500, n-process workpiece machining is performed using the machining program generated in step 1108.

Here, the adaptive process for the cutting power during the machining is as follows.
For roughing,
If the cutting power exceeds the permissible value, as the first step, the spindle rotational speed is successively reduced to 80% and adapted to reach the permissible value limit. If the limit value is exceeded even after this processing is performed, the feed is reduced to 50% in order as a second stage to adapt.
If the limit is further exceeded in spite of these series of processes, a warning is issued and a process of stopping at a break of the machining block, for example, between the cutting process block and the rapid feed block, is performed.
If the cutting power is less than the permissible value, conversely, in the first stage, the feed is gradually increased to 200% and adapted, and if not, the second stage is adapted by increasing the cutting speed to 150%. Let However, processing to keep the rigidity and allowable capacity of machines, tools, and materials within the allowable values is included in the adaptive processing content.

For finishing,
Since the feed speed is determined by the roughness of the finished surface, the processing is adapted only by the spindle speed. In this case, the tool life is included in the processing content.
When machining is completed, in step 1502, workpiece measurement and correction are performed on the n-process machine. Correction is performed by machine position or tool correction.
The contents of measurement and correction processing after workpiece machining are as follows.
After machining the workpiece, all the locations where the dimension difference and tolerance symbol are specified are measured, and the tool position and machine position are expected and corrected so that they are within the allowable values at the next machining. For example, in the case of diameter measurement, at least two points in the diameter direction and two points in the length direction are measured.
The number of measurement points is increased using the tolerance range as a parameter. For example, when the tolerance width is 10 μm, it is 6 points, when it is 20 μm, it is 4 points, when it exceeds 20 μm, it is 2 points, and the length is 25 mm as one division unit. 5mm or less shall be one place.
The measured result is calculated as an average value and a difference between the maximum and minimum values.
When machining with the same cutting edge of the same tool, the deviation between the average value of the calculation results and the specified tolerance center point is corrected by a combination of tool position correction and machine position correction.
If the measured difference between the maximum and minimum exceeds two-thirds of the tolerance width at each specified location, a warning is output as an error in process selection. Since this is an input error of the machine tool file, the file needs to be corrected.
Based on the measurement result in step 1502, the quality of the processed workpiece is determined in step 1503. If it is a non-defective product, the process continues to step 1508, ends, returns to step 15 and continues to step 17.
Alternatively, if it is determined as a defective product, it is determined in step 1504 whether or not there is a remaining finishing allowance. If there is a remaining finishing allowance, it is determined in step 1505 whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the process returns to step 1501 and repeats from the finishing process in the processing contents.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1505 that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, in step 1506, the presence / absence of the remaining finish allowance removing capability is compared with the minimum removal capability value of the machine tool file, and determined. If it is determined that there is a machine tool with the ability to remove the remaining work allowance, the process continues to step 1111.
When this process ends, the process returns to step 15 and continues to step 17. In step 1111, it is determined whether or not the decision process that has selected the remaining machining allowance removal capability machine is an unprocessed process, and in the case of an unprocessed process, it is determined whether or not it is a new process in step 1112. If not, continue to step 1103. Alternatively, if it is determined in step 1112 that the process is a new machining process, one n process storage number is added in step 1113 and process data as a new machining process is additionally stored. When this process ends, the process continues to step 1102. On the other hand, if the determination process has already been processed in step 1111, the process continues to step 1113.

FIG. 28 shows the detailed procedure of the processing of the n-process workpiece in step 16, measurement outside the machine, correction, and rework.
Starting at Step 1600, workpiece machining of n processes is performed at Step 1601 using the machining program generated at Step 1108.
Here, the adaptive process for the cutting power during the machining is performed in the same manner as the process in step 1501 described above.
When the machining is completed, the workpiece is removed in step 1602, and the n-process outside machine workpiece measurement and correction are performed in step 1603. Correction is performed by machine position or tool correction. The contents of the measurement and correction processing after the workpiece machining are performed in the same manner as the processing in step 1502 described above.
Based on the measurement result in step 1603, the quality of the processed workpiece is determined in step 1604.
Alternatively, if it is determined as a defective product, it is determined in step 1605 whether or not there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, it is determined in step 1606 whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the work is attached at step 1607, and the process returns to step 1601 to repeat the processing from the inner finishing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1605 that there is no remaining finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the process continues to step 1609, performs warning processing in step 1609, and ends in step 1610. We have already described after this step.
On the other hand, in step 1606, it is determined whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n process machine tool. If it is determined that there is no finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n process machine tool, the remaining finish allowance is removed in step 1608. When the presence / absence of the capability machine tool is compared with the minimum removal capability value of the machine tool file and determined, and when it is determined that there is a remaining machining allowance removal capability machine tool (11), the process continues from step (11) of FIG. If there is no remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, a warning process is performed in step 1609, and the process continues to step 1610.
When this process ends, the process returns to step 16 and continues to step 17.
Steps 1111 and after have already been described in the processing procedure of FIG.

The n-process material measurement and processing program creation procedure in step 29 is shown in FIG.
Starting from step 2900, it is determined in step 2901 whether or not the same figure is a repetitive workpiece.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2901 that the workpiece is a repetitive workpiece having the same figure, step 2906 follows.
Here, the arrangement method of the material drawing and the processed figure in step 2902 is as follows. Based on the first material and the machining figure of the machining process, the material of the second machining process is the machining figure of the first machining, and the machining figure of the second machining process is the material figure of the third machining process. This is used to organize the machining figures of each process.
In this example, a method description is described in which materials and processed figures are arranged every time for each process, but these may be collectively processed.
The result of this arrangement is a material and a processed figure for each process.
If the flow from Step 2922 and Step 2947 to (2) and (29) in FIG. 34 flows into Step 2902, the determination processing is performed within Step 2902. To step 2903.
When the flow from Step 2922 and Step 2947 to Step 2902 follows (21) and (29) in FIG. Subsequently, the work is reattached, and the process continues to step 2907. Or when it is not the process of the next process at step 2908 ((23) of FIG. 34), it returns to step 23 from (23) of FIG. 2, and repeats.

In step 2903, it is determined whether or not the removal direction is designated.
Since the removal direction is determined with emphasis on productivity as already described, it can be specified by an input item.
If specified, follow the specified direction.
If not specified, a removal direction determination process is performed in step 2909, and if this process is completed, the process continues to step 2904.
Since the processing content of this step 2909 is the same as the processing content of step 1105 shown in FIG. 26, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. If so, step 2904 follows.

In step 2904, n-process tool selection processing is performed.
The process procedure of the n-process tool selection process in step 2904 is shown in FIG. This processing content is the same as in step 1106.
Tool selection starts at step 29040, and a tool is searched for at step 29041. The tool search is performed for each n-process machine tool by calculating the tool file processed in step 220 (as described in step 220, the tool cutting edge of the input tool, the figure that can be processed by the holder information, and the tool code (machining (Including the start point angle and the end point angle))) is searched by the removal direction together with the graphic code (FIG. 1212) processed in FIG. Search out. Next, in step 29042, the tool searched in step 29041 is sorted and sorted in the order of high-function tools and high-rigidity tools. When this processing is completed, in step 29043, the optimum tool for machining is selected and determined based on the minimum and maximum productivity of the number of tools. When this process ends, the process ends at step 29044, returns to step 2904, and continues to step 2905.

In step 2905, n-process fixture selection processing is performed.
The n-process fixture selection processing procedure in step 2905 is shown in FIG. The contents of this process are the same as in step 1107.
The fixture selection starts at step 29050, and a fixture is searched for at step 29905. The fixture search searches for fixtures of the machine tool file input for each n-process machine tool by using the chucking location as a key from the input figure. Next, in step 29052, the limit length and diameter for each processing side are selected as keys, the fixtures that are less than the limit length are selected, and the chucking lengths are arranged in ascending order. When this processing is completed, in step 29053, the fitting selected and arranged in step 29052 is selected as the fitting with the closest chucking diameter for each machining side, and the fitting common to both processes is determined as the optimum. . If it is not a common fixture for both processes, select and determine the optimal fixture for each. When this process ends, the process ends at step 29054, returns to step 2905, and continues to step 2906.

In step 2906, measurement outside the n-process material machine is performed.
This processing procedure is shown in FIG. FIG. 38 shows the n-process material measurement processing procedure in step 2906.
Starting at step 290600, at step 290601, the n process determines whether or not material measurement is necessary. If necessary, it is determined in step 290602 whether or not the same graphic work is repeated. If the same work is repeated, the process proceeds to step 290604. , And the group repetition count counter is initialized to n2 = 0.
In the next step 290604, the counter of the number of processings is incremented as n1 = n1 + 1, and the material is measured outside the machine in step 290605. In step 290606, the measurement dimension data is filed in the data area.
In step 290607, the material dimension is replaced with the measurement dimension.
The process ends at step 290608, returns to step 2906, and continues to step 2907.
In step 2907, a machining allowance is calculated using this result, and a machining path is generated and determined.
The processing path generation processing procedure is the same as step 1108 already described.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 290601 that the n process is not necessary as a result of determination of whether or not material measurement is necessary, it is determined whether or not measurement has already been performed in step 290609. Is initialized with n1 = 0 and the group repeat count counter with n2 = 0.
In step 290611, the counter of the number of processings is incremented as n 1 = n 1 +1, and step 290606 is continued. Steps 290606 and after have already been described. Alternatively, if it is determined whether or not measurement has already been performed in step 290609 and the measurement has not been performed, step 290608 follows.

In step 2911 and subsequent steps, n-process workpiece machining, out-of-machine measurement, correction, and rework are performed.
The procedure of the processing contents after step 9211 is shown in FIG. 35, FIG. 36, and FIG. In step 2911, the workpiece is machined with the n-process machining program generated in step 2907, the machining time is measured, and machining time data is filed in the file area.
Here, the adaptive process for the cutting power during the machining is performed in the same manner as the process in step 1501 described above.

In the next step 2912, the workpiece is removed from the machine. In step 2913, the work outside the n-process machine is measured and corrected.
The contents of the measurement and correction processing after the workpiece machining are performed in the same manner as the processing in step 1502 described above.
Whether the result is good or bad is determined in step 2914. If the result is good, the process continues to step 2919.
Alternatively, if it is determined as a defective product, it is determined in step 2915 whether or not there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, in step 2916 whether or not the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the work is reattached in step 2920, and the process returns to step 2911 to repeat.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2916 that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, in step 2917, the presence / absence of the remaining finish allowance removal capability machine tool is compared with the minimum removal capability value of the machine tool file and determined. If it is determined that there is a machine tool with the ability to remove the remaining work allowance, the process continues to step 2921. If not, the warning process is performed in step 2918 and the process continues to step 2919.
In step 2919, the work is reattached to rework the work. In step 2917, it is determined whether or not there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, and if it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, in step 2921, the determination process for selecting the remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool is not processed. It is determined whether or not it is a process, and if it is an unprocessed process, it is determined whether or not it is a new machining process in step 2922. If it is not a new machining process (21), the process returns to step 2902 from (21) in FIG.
Alternatively, if it is determined in step 2922 that the process is a new machining process, one n process storage number is added in step 2923 and process data is additionally stored. When this process ends, the process continues from step (25) in FIG. On the other hand, if the determination process has already been processed in step 2921, the process continues to step 2923.

The processing procedure after step 2924 is shown in FIG.
In step 2924, the number-of-repetitions counter n1 = n1? If n1 ≠ n1 (26), the process returns to step 34 from (26) of FIG.
On the other hand, if n1 = n1, step 2925 follows step 2925. In step 2925, the group repetition counter is added, and n2 = n2 + 1 is advanced.
In the next step 2926, the processing number repetition counter n1 is initialized so that n1 = 0. In the next step 2927, the material shape dimensions are calculated by a statistical processing method. In this, n1 × n2 material measurement data files repeated n1 × n2 times are read, and the average value, maximum value, minimum value, etc. of the material shape are calculated by a statistical processing method such as the least square method, 3σ method, and the like.
In the next step 2928, the machining path and the machining time at the material dimension maximum value calculated in step 2927 are calculated. The approximate calculation method of the machining path and machining time has already been described in step 110519.
Using this result, in step 2929, the time obtained by adding the material measurement time and the average processing time when the material is measured and processed each time is compared with the processing time of the material shape dimension by the statistical processing method. Use processing with less processing time.
Here, if the statistical processing time is long, in step 2930, the group repetition counter n2 = n2? In the case of NO, statistical processing is not performed thereafter, and the processing continues from (26), and returns to step 34 from (26) of FIG.
On the other hand, if YES is determined in step 2930, the material is measured outside the machine each time in step 2931, the input material dimension is changed to measurement data in the next step 2932, and a machining path is generated and determined in step 2933. In step 2934, the workpiece is processed. When step 2934 is completed, the workpiece is removed in step 2935, and the workpiece outside the machine is measured and corrected in step 2936. From (28), the procedure continues to (28) in FIG.
The contents of the measurement and correction processing after the workpiece machining are performed in the same manner as the processing in step 1502 described above.
On the other hand, if statistical processing is selected in step 2929, the statistical processing discrimination data is filed in the storage unit in step 2937, and the processing ends in the next step 2938, and returns to step 29 in FIG.

The processing procedure after step 2939 is shown in FIG.
In step 2939, pass / fail determination is performed using the measurement result. If it is determined that the product is a non-defective product, the work is reattached in step 2944, the process ends in step 2950, the process returns to step 29 and continues to step 34.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2939 that the product is defective, it is determined in step 2940 whether or not there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, in step 2941 a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool is determined. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool, it is determined whether or not it remains, and the work is reattached in step 2945 (27), and the process returns to step 2934 from (27) in FIG. Repeat from the inner finishing process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2941 that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, in step 2942, the presence or absence of the remaining finish allowance removal capability is compared with the minimum removal capability value in the machine tool file. If it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, the process continues to step 2946. If not, the warning process is performed in step 2943, and the process continues to step 2944.
In step 2944, the workpiece is reattached to process the workpiece in the next process.
When this process ends, the process ends at step 2950, returns to step 29, and continues to step 34.
In step 2942, it is determined whether or not there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, and if it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, in step 2946, the determination process for selecting the remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool is not processed. In the case of unprocessed processing, it is determined in step 2947 whether or not it is a new processing process. If it is not a new processing process (29), the processing returns to step 2902 from (29) in FIG. .
Alternatively, if it is determined in step 2946 that the process is a new machining process, one n process storage number is added in step 2948 and process data is additionally stored. When this process ends, the process continues to step 23.
On the other hand, if the determination process has already been processed in step 2946, the process continues to step 2948. When the process of step 2948 is completed, the process continues from (30) to (30) of FIG.

  The procedure for creating a machining program with n-process material statistical processing and with on-machine measurement in step 38 is shown in FIG. Starting from step 3800, in step 3801, the material statistical processing diagram and the machining figure in the n process are arranged. Here, the method of organizing the material statistical processing diagram and the processed figure in step 3801 is as follows. Based on the material statistical processing diagram and machining figure in the first machining process, the material of the second machining process is the machining figure of the first machining process, and the machining figure of the second machining process is the material figure of the third machining process. is there. This is used to organize the machining figures of each process. In this example, a method description is described in which materials and processed figures are organized every process, but these may be processed at once. The result of this arrangement is a material and a processed figure for each process. If the flow from step 3909 continues to (31) in FIG. 39 and flows into step 3801, the determination processing is performed in step 3801. If flown in, the flow continues to step 3807. Step 3909 continues to (31) in FIG. 39 and then flows into step 3801. In step 3807, it is determined whether or not it is a next machining process. (32) returns to step 23 from (32) of FIG. 2 and repeats. In step 3802, it is determined whether or not a removal direction is designated. Since the removal direction is determined with emphasis on productivity as already described, it can be specified by an input item. If specified, follow the specified direction. If the removal direction is not specified, a removal direction determination process is performed in step 3808. If this process ends, the process continues to step 3803. Since the processing content of this step 3808 is the same as the processing content of step 1105 shown in FIG. 26, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. If the removal direction is designated, step 3803 follows.

  In step 3803, n-process tool selection processing is performed. The process procedure of the n-process tool selection process in step 3803 is shown in FIG. This processing content is the same as in step 1106. Tool selection begins at step 38030 and searches for tools at step 38031. The tool search is performed for each n-process machine tool by calculating the tool file processed in step 220 (as described in step 220, the tool cutting edge of the input tool, the figure that can be processed by the holder information, and the tool code (machining (Including the start point angle and the end point angle))) is searched by the removal direction together with the graphic code (FIG. 1212) processed in FIG. Search out. Next, in step 38032, the multi-function tool and the high-rigidity tool are sorted and sorted in a high order from the tools found in step 38031. When this processing is completed, in step 38033, the optimum tool for machining is selected and determined based on the minimum and maximum productivity of the number of tools. When this process ends, the process ends at step 38034, returns to step 3803, and continues to step 3804.

  In step 3804, n-process fixture selection processing is performed. The n-process fixture selection processing procedure of step 3804 is shown in FIG. The contents of this process are the same as in step 1107. The fixture selection starts at step 38040 and the fixture is searched for at step 38041. The fixture search searches for fixtures of the machine tool file input for each n-process machine tool by using the chucking location as a key from the input figure. Next, in step 38042, the limit length and diameter for each processing side are selected as keys, the fixtures having a length less than the limit length are selected, and the chucking lengths are arranged in ascending order. When this processing is finished, the fitting selected and arranged in step 38042 in step 38043 is selected for each machining side, and the fitting with the closest chucking diameter is selected for each machining side, and the fitting common to both machining is determined as the optimum. . If it is not a common fixture for both processes, select and determine the optimal fixture for each. When this process ends, the process ends at step 38044, returns to step 3804, and continues to step 3805. In step 3805, a machining program generating process including n-machine measurement is performed. When this process ends, the process ends at step 3806, returns to step 38, and continues to step 39.

  Next, at step 39, n-process workpiece machining, measurement, correction, and rework are performed. The procedure of the processing content of step 39 is shown in FIG. In step 3900, the workpiece is machined with the n-process machining program generated in step 270609 in step 3901, and the workpiece measurement and correction on the machine are performed. Here, the adaptive process for the cutting power during the machining is performed in the same manner as the process in step 1501 described above. The contents of the measurement and correction processing after the workpiece machining are performed in the same manner as the processing in step 1502 described above. The result is judged as good or bad in step 3902. If the result is good, the process continues to step 3907. Alternatively, if it is determined as a defective product, it is determined in step 3903 whether or not there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, it is determined in step 3904 whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the process returns to step 3901 and is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 3904 that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, in step 3905, the presence / absence of the remaining finish allowance removal capability machine tool is compared with the minimum removal capability value of the machine tool file and determined. If it is determined that there is a machine allowance for removing the remaining work allowance, the process continues to step 3908. In step 3907, the process ends, and the process returns to step 39 in FIG. 3, continues from (4) in FIG. 3 to (4) in FIG. In step 3905, it is determined whether or not there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, and if it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, in step 3908, the decision process for selecting the remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool is not processed. In the case of unprocessed processing, it is determined in step 3909 whether or not it is a new processing process. If it is not a new processing process (31), the processing returns to step 3801 from (31) in FIG. . Alternatively, if it is determined in step 3909 that it is a new machining process, one n process storage number is added in step 3910 and process data is additionally stored as a new machining process. When this process ends, the process continues from (33) to (33) in FIG. On the other hand, if the determination process has already been processed in step 3908, the process continues to step 3910.

  The creation procedure of the machining program with n-process material statistical processing and with measurement outside the machine in step 41 is shown in FIG. Starting from step 4100, in step 4101 the material statistical processing diagrams and processed figures in the n process are arranged. Here, the material statistical processing diagram and the processing figure arrangement method in step 4101 are as follows. Based on the material statistical processing diagram and machining figure in the first machining process, the material of the second machining process is the machining figure of the first machining process, and the machining figure of the second machining process is the material figure of the third machining process. is there. This is used to organize the machining figures of each process. In this example, a method description is described in which materials and processed figures are organized every process, but these may be processed at once. The result of this arrangement is a material and a processed figure for each process. 42 (34) from FIG. 42 to (34) in FIG. 41, if it flows into step 4101, it is determined in step 4101. If it flows, it continues to step 4107. In step 4107, it is determined whether or not it is a next machining process. In the case of the next machining, the work is reattached following step 4108. When this process ends, the process continues to step 4105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 4107 that the process is not the next process (35), the process returns to step 23 from (35) in FIG. If not, the process continues to step 4102. In step 4102, it is determined whether or not a removal direction is designated. Since the removal direction is determined with emphasis on productivity as described above, it can be specified by an input item. If specified, follow the specified direction. If the removal direction is not designated, a removal direction determination process is performed in step 4109. When this process is completed, the process continues to step 4103. Since the processing content of this step 4109 is the same as the processing content of step 1105 shown in FIG. 26, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. If the removal direction is designated, the process continues to step 4103.

  In step 4103, n-process tool selection processing is performed. The processing procedure of the n-process tool selection processing in step 4103 is shown in FIG. This processing content is the same as in step 1106. Tool selection starts at step 41030 and searches for tools at step 41031. The tool search is performed for each n-process machine tool by calculating the tool file processed in step 220 (as described in step 220, the tool cutting edge of the input tool, the figure that can be processed by the holder information, and the tool code (machining (Including the start point angle and the end point angle))) is searched by the removal direction together with the graphic code (FIG. 1212) processed in FIG. Search out. Next, in step 41032, the tool searched in step 41031 is sorted and selected from a multi-function tool and a high-rigidity tool in high order. When this processing is completed, in step 41033, the optimum tool for machining is selected and determined based on the minimum and maximum productivity of the number of tools. When this process ends, the process ends at step 41034, returns to step 4103, and continues to step 4104.

  In step 4104, n-process fixture selection processing is performed. The n-process fixture selection processing procedure in step 4104 is shown in FIG. The contents of this process are the same as in step 1107. The fixture selection starts at step 41040 and searches for fixtures at step 41041. The fixture search searches for fixtures of the machine tool file input for each n-process machine tool by using the chucking location as a key from the input figure. Next, in step 41042, the limit length and diameter for each processing side are selected as keys, the fixtures having a length less than the limit length are selected, and the chucking lengths are arranged in ascending order. When this processing is finished, in step 41043, the fittings selected and arranged in step 41042 are selected, and the fittings having the closest chucking diameter are selected for each machining side, and the fittings common to both processes are determined as the optimum. . If it is not a common fixture for both processes, select and determine the optimal fixture for each. When this process ends, the process ends at step 41044, returns to step 4104, and continues to step 4105. In step 4105, processing for generating a machining program including n-process measurement outside the machine is performed. When this process ends, the process ends at step 4106, returns to step 41, and continues to step 42.

  FIG. 4242 shows the details of the detailed procedure of the n-process workpiece machining, the measurement outside the machine, the correction, and the reworking process in step 42. In step 4200 and subsequent steps, n-process workpiece machining, out-of-machine measurement, correction, and rework are performed. The procedure of the processing contents after step 4200 is shown in FIG. In step 4200, the workpiece is machined by the n-process machining program generated in step 4105 in step 4201. Here, the adaptive process for the cutting power during the machining is performed in the same manner as the process in step 1501 described above. In the next step 4202, the workpiece is removed from the machine. In step 4203, the work outside the n-process machine is measured and corrected. The contents of the measurement and correction processing after the workpiece machining are performed in the same manner as the processing in step 1502 described above. Whether the result is good or bad is determined in step 4204, and in the case of a non-defective product, the process continues to step 4209. Alternatively, if it is determined as a defective product, it is determined in step 4205 whether or not there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, it is determined in step 4206 whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the work is reattached in step 4211 and the process returns to step 4201 to repeat the process from the internal finishing process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 4206 that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, in step 4207, the presence / absence of the remaining finish allowance removal capability machine tool is compared with the minimum removal capability value of the machine tool file, and determined. If it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, the process continues to step 4212. In step 4209, the work is reattached to rework the work. When this process ends, the process ends at step 4210, returns to step 42 in FIG. 3, continues from (4) to (4) in FIG. 2, and continues to step 34. In step 4207, it is determined whether or not there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, and in step 4212 when it is determined that there is a remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, the determination process in which the remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool is selected is not processed. In the case of unprocessed processing, it is determined in step 4213 whether or not it is a new processing process. If it is not a new processing process (34), the processing returns to step 4101 from (34) in FIG. . Alternatively, if it is determined in step 4213 that the process is a new machining process, one n process storage number is added in step 4214 and process data is additionally stored. When this process ends, the process continues from (36) to (36) of FIG. On the other hand, if the determination process has already been processed in step 4212, the process continues to step 4214.

  Example 3 FIG. The first and second embodiments have been described with the input of turning a rotating figure as an initial process. However, in the case of using a solid figure as a slice process as an initial process, input of a tabular form is performed in material input and figure input, for example, To show a surface, reference points: X, Y, Z, start point coordinates of the outer and inner sides constituting the surface: X, Y, Z, end point coordinates: point group of X, Y, Z, finish of the surface This machining method can be expanded by adding the necessary machine tools, tools, fixtures, costs, and other files using finishing specifications such as surface symbols, accuracy, shape, and position specifications. . Furthermore, although this example demonstrated by cutting, it can expand | deploy to an assembly, welding, conveyance, woodwork machining, a robot, etc.

  Since the embodiment of the present invention is configured as described above, the following effects can be obtained.

  Using a numerical control device, FA system, computer and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processing figure data, processing of finishing figures, processing before finishing of different processes Figure processing, pattern identification, processing process decision processing, material measurement necessity determination is performed, and in the case of material measurement failure, processing program generation processing for each process, whether or not measurement on machine is possible, and measurement on machine is possible In this case, workpiece processing for each process, measurement on the machine, correction, rework in case of a defect, measurement after rework, and processing after rework are performed, so measurement on the machine is possible even if material dimension measurement is not required In this case, there is an effect that processing with high accuracy can be efficiently performed.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process decision processing, material measurement necessity / non-necessity determination is performed. In the case of material measurement failure, process-specific machining program generation processing, machine measurement availability determination, In the case of measurement failure, workpiece processing for each process, measurement outside the machine, correction, re-processing in case of defects, measurement after re-processing, and processing after re-processing are performed. Therefore, there is an effect that processing with high accuracy can be performed efficiently.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, material measurement necessity determination is performed. If material measurement is necessary, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not material statistical processing is necessary, and if material statistical processing is not necessary, it is determined whether or not measurement on the machine is possible. Each workpiece processing, on-machine measurement, correction, re-processing in case of defects, measurement after re-processing, and processing after re-processing are performed. In case the statistical processing is not required, will be performing processing in a case that can be on-machine measurement, there is an effect that can be performed efficiently with high precision machining.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, material measurement necessity determination is performed. If the material statistical processing is not necessary, it is determined whether or not measurement on the machine is possible. Process, workpiece processing for each process, measurement outside the machine, correction, rework in case of a defect, and measurement after rework. There, when the material the statistical processing is not required, will be performing processing in a case that can not be machine on the measurement, there is an effect that can be performed efficiently with high precision machining.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In the case of material statistics processing, it is determined whether or not material statistics processing is necessary, and in the case of material statistics processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. Determine whether the material variation is within the allowable value. If it is outside the allowable value, determine whether the measurement on the machine is possible. If the measurement is possible on the machine, measure the material for each process, generate the machining program every Work processing, on-machine measurement, correction, re-processing in case of defects, measurement after re-processing, measurement of material dimensions is necessary, material measurement of the process is necessary, and material statistical processing is required In some cases, when the number of statistical processing revisions is reached and the material variation is outside the allowable value, processing is performed when measurement on the machine is possible, and high-precision processing can be performed efficiently. effective.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In the case of material statistics processing, it is determined whether or not material statistics processing is necessary, and in the case of material statistics processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. It is determined whether the material variation is within the allowable value. If it is out of the allowable value, it is determined whether the measurement on the machine is possible. ,Professional Process processing for each process, measurement outside the machine, correction, re-processing in case of defects, measurement after re-processing, so if material measurement is required, process material measurement is performed and material statistical processing is required In this case, when the number of statistical processing revisions is reached and the material variation is outside the allowable value, processing will be performed when measurement on the machine is possible, and highly accurate processing will be performed efficiently. There is an effect that can be done.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement of the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity of the process is determined. In the case of material statistics processing, it is determined whether or not material statistics processing is necessary, and in the case of material statistics processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. Determine whether the material variation is within the allowable value. If it is within the allowable value, determine whether measurement on the machine is possible. If measurement on the machine is possible, determine whether the workpiece is of the same shape. , The same shape word If the process is not repeated, the process of generating a machining program with material statistical processing for each process and measurement on machine, workpiece machining for each process, measurement on machine, correction, rework in case of failure, measurement after reworking When material measurement is required, material measurement of the process is performed, and when material statistics processing is necessary, when the number of statistical processing reviews is reached, the material variation is outside the allowable value and measurement on the machine When possible, machining processing that is not a repetition of the same-shaped workpiece is performed, and there is an effect that machining with high accuracy can be efficiently performed.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement of the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity of the process is determined. In the case of material statistics processing, it is determined whether or not material statistics processing is necessary, and in the case of material statistics processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. Determine whether the material variation is within the allowable value. If it is within the allowable value, determine whether measurement on the machine is possible. If measurement on the machine is possible, determine whether the workpiece is of the same shape. , The same shape word In the case of repetition of processing, workpiece processing for each process, measurement on machine, correction, reprocessing in case of failure, measurement after reprocessing, and processing after reprocessing are performed. When measurement is performed and material statistical processing is necessary, when the number of statistical processing reviews is reached and the material variation is within the allowable value and measurement on the machine is possible, the same shape workpiece is repeatedly processed. Thus, there is an effect that high-precision processing can be performed efficiently.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In the case of material statistics processing, it is determined whether or not material statistics processing is necessary, and in the case of material statistics processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. It is determined whether the material variation is within the allowable value. If the material variation is within the allowable value, it is determined whether the measurement on the machine is possible. If the measurement is not on the machine, it is determined whether the workpiece of the same shape is repeated. , The same shape word If it is not a repetition of the process, generation of processing program with material statistical processing for each process and measurement with machine outside measurement, workpiece machining for each process, measurement outside machine, correction, rework in case of failure, measurement after rework, Therefore, if material dimension measurement, process material measurement, and material statistical processing are required, the number of statistical processing reviews will be reached, and if the material variation is within the allowable value, measurement on the machine is impossible. In such a case, machining that is not a repetition of the same shape workpiece is performed, and there is an effect that highly accurate machining can be performed efficiently.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In the case of material statistics processing, it is determined whether or not material statistics processing is necessary, and in the case of material statistics processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. It is determined whether the material variation is within the allowable value. If the material variation is within the allowable value, it is determined whether the measurement on the machine is possible. If the measurement is not on the machine, it is determined whether the workpiece of the same shape is repeated. , The same shape word In the case of repetition, processing of workpieces for each process, measurement outside the machine, correction, reworking in case of defects, measurement after reworking, processing of material dimensions, process material measurement, material statistics processing When the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached and the material variation is within the allowable value, if the measurement on the machine is impossible, the workpiece with the same shape will be repeatedly processed. There is an effect that high processing can be efficiently performed.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement of the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity of the process is determined. In the case of material statistical processing, it is determined whether or not material statistical processing is necessary.In the case of material statistical processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. If it can be measured on the machine, it is determined whether or not the workpiece of the same shape is repeated. If the workpiece of the same shape is not repeated, a machining program with material statistical processing for each process and measurement on the machine is performed. Generation process, workpiece processing for each process, on-machine measurement, correction, re-processing in case of defects, measurement after re-processing, material dimension measurement, process material measurement, material statistical processing is required In this case, if the number of statistical processing reviews has not been reached and measurement on the machine is possible, processing that is not a repetition of the same shape workpiece will be performed, and highly accurate processing can be performed efficiently. effective.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In the case of material statistical processing, it is determined whether or not material statistical processing is required.In the case of material statistical processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. If it is possible to measure on the machine, it is determined whether or not the same shape workpiece is repeated.If the same shape workpiece is repeated, the workpiece machining for each process, measurement on the machine, correction, and failure If processing of material dimensions, process material measurement, and material statistical processing is required, and if the number of statistical processing reviews is not reached, measurement on the machine is possible. Since the same shape workpiece is repeatedly processed, there is an effect that highly accurate processing can be efficiently performed.

Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In the case of material statistical processing, it is determined whether or not material statistical processing is required.In the case of material statistical processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. If it is not measured on the machine, it is determined whether the workpiece is the same shape or not. Generation processing, workpiece processing for each process, measurement outside the machine, correction, reworking in case of defects, measurement after reworking, material dimension measurement, process material measurement, material statistics processing is required In this case, when the number of statistical processing review is not reached and measurement on the machine is impossible, processing that is not repeated for the same shape workpiece will be performed, so that highly accurate processing can be performed efficiently There is.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. In the case of material measurement necessity, the necessity of material measurement for the process is determined, and the material measurement necessity for the process is determined. In the case of material statistical processing, it is determined whether or not material statistical processing is required.In the case of material statistical processing required, it is determined whether or not the number of statistical processing reviews has been reached. In the case of measurement failure on the machine, it is determined whether or not the same shape workpiece is repeated, and in the case of repetition of the same shape workpiece, workpiece processing for each process, measurement outside the machine, correction, failure When measurement of material dimensions, process material measurement, and material statistical processing are required, the number of statistical processing reviews is not reached, and measurement on the machine is not possible. In addition, since the same shape workpiece is repeatedly processed, there is an effect that highly accurate processing can be performed efficiently.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. When material measurement is necessary, the necessity of material measurement of the process is determined, and the material measurement failure of the process is determined. If it is possible to measure on the machine, if it is possible to measure on the machine, it is determined whether or not the same shape work is repeated. Processing of processing programs with processing and on-machine measurement, processing of workpieces for each process, on-machine measurement, correction, reworking in case of defects, measurement after reworking, and processing after reworking. When dimension measurement is required and process material measurement is not required, when machining on the machine is possible, machining that is not repeated is performed on the same shape workpiece, so that highly accurate machining can be performed efficiently. There is.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. When material measurement is necessary, the necessity of material measurement of the process is determined, and the material measurement failure of the process is determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not measurement on the machine is possible. In the case where measurement on the machine is possible, it is determined whether or not the same-shaped workpiece is repeated. , Measurement on machine, correction, rework in case of failure, measurement after rework, and material dimension measurement is required. To, will be repeatedly performed processing of the same shape the work, there is an effect that can be performed efficiently with high precision machining.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, material measurement necessity / non-necessity determination is performed, and in the case of material measurement necessity, the material measurement of the process is determined. In the case, it is determined whether or not measurement on the machine is possible. In the case of measurement on the machine, it is determined whether or not the same shape work is repeated. The processing of generating machining programs with attachments and measurement outside the machine, workpiece machining for each process, measurement outside the machine, correction, reworking in case of failure, measurement after reworking, and so on. If dimension measurement is required and process material measurement is not required, or if measurement on the machine is not possible, non-repetitive machining of the same shape workpiece will be performed, and highly accurate machining can be performed efficiently. effective.

  Also, using a numerical controller, FA system, electronic computer including a personal computer, and other series of data processing devices and machine tools, registration of various information files, input of processed graphic data, finishing graphic processing, separate process finishing Pre-processed figure processing, pattern identification, processing process determination processing, and material measurement necessity determination are performed. When material measurement is necessary, the necessity of material measurement of the process is determined, and the material measurement failure of the process is determined. In the case of the above, it is determined whether or not the measurement on the machine is possible, and in the case of the measurement on the machine, it is determined whether or not the same shape workpiece is repeated. , Measurement outside the machine, correction, re-processing in case of failure, measurement after re-processing, measurement of material dimensions is necessary, and measurement on machine is impossible when material measurement of process is unnecessary The case, will be repeatedly performed processing of the same shape the work, there is an effect that can be performed efficiently with high precision machining.

  Also, if at least various files are registered and the machining figure data is input, the registered file and machining figure data are collated and discriminated. If the machining figure input data and the registration file do not match, data processing is not possible. Since various file addition warnings are given and re-registration instructions are given to the operator, the operator is informed that the machining figure input data is inconsistent with the contents of the registered file, and machining defects can be reduced. effective.

  Also, when there is no other same graphic work and there is another different graphic work, the similarity of the graphic is determined and processing is performed, so the data of the graphic work with no similarity is added to the file and enriched. However, there is an effect that processing can be continued while enhancing the database.

  Also, the registration of the tool information file has at least the procedure of inputting tool data, processing of the tool data, and registration of the tool information file. In the processing of the tool data, the determination of the stationary / rotating tool, the classification of the rotating tool, and the tool Alignment of diameter sequence, reading of tool angle / reference edge point / shank dimensions of input data, determination of main / sub cutting edge machining location, calculation of main / sub cutting edge machining angle, roughing / finishing tool Since the classification is determined or entered, the tool capacity is calculated, and the processing results are recorded in the storage unit, the registration of the data in the tool file is automatically detected and registered based on the tool data. There is an effect that can be prevented.

  When inputting tool data, the stationary tool is at least a sequence number, a tool identification number, a shank identification number, a chip identification number, brake specifications (breaker width (blade edge), breaker width (blade edge), breaker Height (blade edge), breaker height (blade edge), breaker angle), cutting edge hand (L / R), main cutting edge specifications (flank angle αo, side rake angle γf, back rake γp, Nose radius), specifications of secondary cutting edge (1) (sub cutting edge angle κ'1, clearance angle ακ'1), specifications of secondary cutting edge (2) (sub cutting edge angle κ'2, clearance angle ακ) '2), specifications of the secondary cutting edge (3) (distance from the reference cutting edge point: X, Z, secondary cutting edge angle κ'3, clearance angle ακ'3), size of shank (□ / ○ Shank identification, diameter / width, height), XT / ZT classification (tools mounted in X direction, tools mounted in Z direction), base Cutting point, protrusion amount from tool holder, protrusion angle from tool holder, mounting angle of tool holder, tool rigidity (for X direction load, for Z direction load), tip clamping method, cutting limit (automatic input and Manual input), feed limit, maximum cutting strength, interrupted cutting allowance limit (cutting strength, limit frequency, maximum cutting depth, maximum feed), side rake angle of secondary cutting edge (γf κ′1, γf κ′2, γf κ ′ 3), back rake of secondary cutting edge (γp κ'1, γp κ'2, γp κ'3), tool material, roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F), groove tool specifications (R / F) Since the groove tool width and tool machining depth) are input items, the input of stationary tool data is standardized, and there is an effect that the data input efficiency and the machining efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, a stationary tool is registered by linking at least a tool identification number and a machine identification number. Therefore, the tool and the machine are associated with each other, so that the matching between the tool and the machine is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, a stationary tool must have at least the cutting edge angle κ counterclockwise with the direction of the shank side from the blade edge as 0 degree centered on the intersection of the extension line of the shank extension direction and the blade edge reference position. Since the process of inputting the rotation as-is performed, the input direction of the figure and the input direction of the tool are made to coincide with each other, and the number of data conversion processes is reduced, so that the data input efficiency and the data processing efficiency can be improved. There is an effect that can be done.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, the stationary tool is divided and input into at least the main cutting edge and the sub cutting edge, and the function definition and machining figure are created using this input value. Therefore, there is an effect that the tool selection reliability can be improved.

  In addition, when inputting the tool data, the tool capability when the stationary tool is the throw-away type corresponds to the division of the main cutting edge, sub cutting edge, and machining location, and the cutting limit of the tool capacity (maximum cutting depth, minimum cutting depth) )), Feed limit (maximum feed amount, minimum feed amount), using at least the cutting angle, reference inscribed circle, apex angle, nose radius, maximum feeding coefficient, clearance angle, cutting angle, clearance angle margin Since the input is performed, the tool capability is calculated by internal processing using the input tool data, and there is an effect that machining efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, in the tool data input, the intermittent cutting allowable limit of a stationary tool specifies at least the cutting strength, limit frequency, maximum cutting depth, and minimum cutting depth. Thus, the processing reliability can be improved.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, the tool has a tool material conversion table, and is provided with means for converting from ISO code to manufacturer code, and from manufacturer code to ISO code. The tool material code that has not been standardized is converted to a standard value, and there is an effect that the machining quality can be made uniform without changing the data input method.

  In addition, at least the machining direction of the main cutting edge of the input tool data, at least the X direction or Z direction, whether or not the shank diameter is input, the cutting angle of the cutting edge, the reference cutting edge point, the relief of the shank width Discriminated by the presence or absence of a radius, inner diameter machining tool, inner diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool, outer diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool or end face machining tool, outer diameter groove machining tool, inner diameter groove machining tool, Cutting edge angle, rake angle, clearance angle, reference edge point, shank shape dimensions, with the end face grooving tool section and the machining start angle (entrance angle) and end point angle (escape angle). Therefore, it is possible to improve the machining reliability by discriminating the machining point classification of the main cutting edge of the tool data based on the input data and calculating the tool classification and machining angle. .

  In addition, the machining location of the sub cutting edge of the input tool data is divided into at least the X or Z mounting direction, whether or not the shank diameter is input, the cutting edge cutting angle, the reference cutting edge point, and the shank width relief radius. The inner diameter machining tool, inner diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool, outer diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool or end face machining tool, outer diameter groove machining tool, inner diameter groove machining tool, end face Calculate the machining angle of the machining start angle (entrance angle) and machining end point angle (escape angle) from the cutting tool cutting angle, rake angle, clearance angle, reference cutting edge point, and shank shape dimensions by attaching the groove tool classification. Therefore, the classification of the machining location of the secondary cutting edge is determined from the input data, and the tool classification and machining angle for each secondary cutting edge are calculated, which has the effect of improving machining reliability. .

  In addition, the classification of the processing location of the main cutting edge and the secondary cutting edge of the input tool data is based on at least the dimensional conditions excluding the shank shape conditions, the cutting edge angle of the cutting edge, the reference edge point, and the presence or absence of the shank width relief radius. Distinguishing, inner diameter machining tool, inner diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool, outer diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool or end face machining tool, outer diameter groove machining tool, inner diameter groove machining tool, end face groove machining tool The machining angle of the machining start angle (entrance angle) and machining end angle (escape angle) is calculated from the cutting angle, rake angle, clearance angle, reference edge point, and shank shape dimensions of the cutting edge. The processing point classification and processing angle of the main cutting edge and sub cutting edge are calculated from the cutting angle, rake angle, clearance angle, reference edge point, and shank shape dimensions of the cutting edge, improving the processing reliability. There is an effect that can be made

  In addition, the classification of the processing location of the main cutting edge and the secondary cutting edge of the input tool data, at least the mounting direction of the X direction or Z direction, whether or not the shank diameter is input, the cutting angle of the cutting edge, the reference cutting edge point , Discriminate by the presence or absence of shank width relief radius, inner diameter machining tool, inner diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool, outer diameter and end face machining tool, outer diameter machining tool or end face machining tool, outer diameter grooving tool, Attaching the inner and outer face grooving tools and end face grooving tool classifications, the tool's processing part classification code, I for inner diameter machining tools, I & IF for inner and end face machining tools, IG for inner diameter groove tools, IH for inner diameter thread tools, The outer diameter machining tool is E, the outer diameter and end face machining tool is E & EF, the outer diameter groove tool is EG, the outer diameter thread tool is EH, the end face machining tool is F, the end face groove tool is FG, and the end face thread tool is FH. , Tool machining location and tool symbol The will be associated, there is an effect capable of improving the efficiency of data in a compatible tool selection from the input graphic.

  In addition, since the calculation results of the machining start angle and end point angle corresponding to the machining location category of the tool are stored in the data processing device, the machining start angle and end angle corresponding to the machining location category can be stored as data. Thus, the tool search process can be speeded up.

  Also, when it is determined that it is a throw-away tip according to the classification of the machining location and the tip code, when a rough-cutting tool and a finishing tool are classified according to the throw-away tip designation symbol, and when it is determined that it is not a throw-away tip Since the tool function is completed by classifying the tool for roughing and finishing according to the input data, the tool is classified by distinguishing between the throw-away tip and the non-throw-away tip. This has the effect of preventing erroneous input.

  If the input tool data is a rotary tool, tools with the symbol F as the first symbol of the tool identification number are further classified into face mills and end mills based on the ratio of the tool diameter to the cutting edge length. Since the ascending order is arranged according to the tool diameter for each classification and registered in the tool file, the tool identified as a rotating tool is registered according to the ascending order alignment of the tool diameter for each classification. And there is an effect that can improve the reliability.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, drill data of a rotary tool includes at least a sequence number, a tool identification number, a shank identification number, a chip identification number, a tool diameter specification, a cutting edge specification, a number of cutting edges, a rotation direction, X Direction Tool / Z Direction Tool Classification (XT / ZT), Cutting Edge Reference Point, Tool Rigidity, Tip Clamp Method, Feed Limit, Maximum Cutting Strength, Interrupted Cutting Allowance Limit, Tool Material, Roughing / Finishing Tool Classification ( R / F) and machine identification number, the drill data of the rotary tool is composed of the tool identification number, drill specifications, and machine identification number, so that highly reliable machining can be performed. There is an effect that can be done.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, the reamer data of the rotating tool includes at least the sequence number, tool identification number, shank identification number, chip identification number, tool diameter specifications, tool cutting edge length, and neck length. , Cutting edge specifications, number of cutting edges, rotation direction, X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT), cutting edge reference point, tool rigidity, tip clamping method, feed limit, maximum cutting strength, interrupted cutting tolerance limit , Tool material, roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F), machine identification number, reamer data of rotating tool is composed of tool identification number, reamer specification, machine identification number As a result, it is possible to perform highly reliable processing.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, the tap data of the rotating tool includes at least a sequence number, a tool identification number, a shank identification number, a chip identification number, a tool diameter specification, a tool cutting edge length, and a neck length. , Cutting edge specifications, number of blades, rotation direction, X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT), cutting edge reference point, tip clamping method, feed limit, maximum cutting strength, interrupted cutting tolerance limit, tool material , Screw tool specification, roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F), and machine identification number, the rotary tool tap data includes tool identification number, tap specification, machine Since it is configured with an identification number, there is an effect that processing with high reliability can be performed.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, end mill data of rotating tools includes at least sequence number, tool identification number, shank identification number, chip identification number, tool diameter specifications, tool cutting edge length, and neck length. , Cutting edge specifications, number of cutting edges, rotation direction, X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT), cutting edge reference point, tool rigidity, tip clamping method, cutting limit, feed limit, maximum cutting strength, intermittent Since it consists of cutting tolerance, tool material, roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F), and machine identification number, the end mill data of the rotary tool includes the tool identification number, end mill specifications, and machine identification. It is composed of numbers, and there is an effect that highly reliable processing can be performed.

  In addition, when inputting tool data, the side cutter data of the rotating tool includes at least a sequence number, a tool identification number, a shank identification number, a chip identification number, a tool diameter specification, a tool width specification, the number of teeth, and the rotation direction. , X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT), cutting edge reference point, tool rigidity, insert clamping method, cutting limit, feed limit, maximum cutting strength, interrupted cutting tolerance limit, tool material, roughing / finishing Since it is composed of the processing tool classification (R / F) and machine identification number, the data of the side cutter of the rotary tool is composed of the tool identification number, the specifications of the side cutter, and the machine identification number. There is an effect that processing with high reliability can be performed.

  Further, in the input of the tool data, the hob data of the rotating tool includes at least a sequence number, a tool identification number, a shank identification number, a chip identification number, a tool diameter specification, a tool width specification, the number of blades, a rotation direction, X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT), cutting edge reference point, tool rigidity, insert clamping method, cutting limit, feed limit, maximum cutting strength, interrupted cutting allowable limit, tool material, gear cutting tool Original, rough machining / finishing tool classification (R / F) and machine identification number, so the rotating tool hob data consists of tool identification number, hob specifications and machine identification number As a result, there is an effect capable of performing highly reliable processing.

  In addition, when inputting the tool data, at least the sequence number, the tool identification number, the shank identification number, the chip identification number, the tool diameter specification, the tool cutting edge length, the neck Lower length, cutting edge specifications, rotation direction, X-direction tool / Z-direction tool classification (XT / ZT), cutting edge reference point, tool rigidity, tip clamping method, cutting limit, feed limit, maximum cutting strength, Since it is composed of interrupted cutting allowance limit, tool material, roughing / finishing tool classification (R / F), machine identification number, the grinding wheel data for internal grinding of rotary tools is tool identification number, internal grinding It is composed of the specifications of the grinding wheel and the machine identification number, and has the effect of performing highly reliable processing.

  In addition, in the input of tool data, the data of the outer diameter grinding wheel of the rotary tool includes at least the sequence number, tool identification number, shank identification number, chip identification number, tool diameter specification, tool diameter, tool cutting edge Length, rotation direction, X direction tool / Z direction tool classification (XT / ZT), cutting edge reference point, tool rigidity, tip clamping method, cutting limit, feed limit, maximum cutting strength, interrupted cutting tolerance limit, tool material , Rough machining / finishing tool classification (R / F) and machine identification number, the data of the grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding of rotary tools is the tool identification number, the specifications of the grinding wheel for outer diameter grinding The machine identification number is used, and there is an effect that processing with high reliability can be performed.

  Registered data of machine tool information file includes at least machine tool sequence number, machining function, machine identification number, machining method symbol, bar machine machining process, center hole support machining process, chucking turning process, grinding process, absolute value・ Increment value classification, Machinable dimensions, center distance, hole tilt machining specifications, allowable machining weight, spindle output / speed specifications, workpiece spindle / tool spindle classification, machine efficiency, spindle rigidity and allowable load , Tailstock rigidity and allowable load, Gear shift specifications, Tool change specifications, Machine accuracy specifications, Finishing capacity classification, Machine operation reference time, Fixture replacement time, Tool preparation time, Workpiece replacement time, Tool change Master about time, grinding process machine, master about drill and tapping process machine, master about milling process machine, Master regarding allowable dimensions with tools, and because it has a data relating to the operation time of the machine tool, will be to standardize the input items of the machine tool information file, there is an effect capable of performing a highly reliable machining efficiency.

  In addition, the data of the fixture file in the machine tool information file is classified into a turning system, a milling system, a grinding system, etc., and at least the sequence number, chucking capacity, machine identification number, and maximum / minimum of chucking dimensions. Specify the number of chucking claws, equal / inhomogeneous nail spacing, nail stroke (one side), nail synchronous / asynchronous movement, nail position shift, and nail movement direction Claw direction, distance from machine reference position to claw reference position, claw width, claw height, specifications of through holes, claw shape dimensions and capacity classification, claw position / pressing direction of presser foot method, mounting Since it is composed of tool identification numbers, the fixture file data is classified and standardized by turning, milling, grinding, etc., and there is an effect that highly reliable machining can be performed efficiently. .

  In addition, the turning fixture file data includes at least sequence number, chucking capability, machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimensions, number of chucking claws, equal / inequal division of nail spacing, Claw stroke, claw synchronous / asynchronous motion classification, claw position shift amount, claw direction, distance from machine reference position to claw reference position, claw width, claw height, through hole specifications , Nail shape dimensions and capacity classification, nail position / pressing direction of presser foot method, and fixture identification number, the data of turning fixture file is the chuck capacity specification, machine identification number, fixture identification The number is configured as an input item, and there is an effect that processing with high reliability can be performed efficiently.

  The data of the milling fixture file is at least sequence number, chucking capacity, machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimensions, number of chucking claws, equal / inequal division of nail interval, Claw stroke, claw synchronous / asynchronous motion classification, claw position shift amount, claw direction, distance from machine reference position to claw reference position, claw width, claw height, through hole specifications , Nail shape dimensions and capacity classification, claw position / pressing direction of presser foot method, fixture identification number, milling fixture file data is chuck capability specification, machine identification number, fixture identification The number is configured as an input item, and there is an effect that processing with high reliability can be performed.

  Also, the data of the grinding fixture file is composed of sequence number, chuck capability, machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimension, fixture identification number at least for cylindrical grinding supported by both centers. For inner diameter or outer diameter grinding of king support, sequence number, chucking capacity, machine identification number, maximum / minimum of chucking dimension, number of chucking claws, equally divided / unequalized nail spacing, nail Stroke, claw synchronous / asynchronous motion classification, claw position shift amount, claw direction, distance from machine reference position to claw reference position, claw width, claw height, through hole specifications, Since it consists of claw shape dimensions and capacity classification, claw position and presser direction of the presser foot method, and fixture identification number, the data of the fixture file of the grinding system is also chucked even in the case of cylindrical grinding supported by both centers. In the case of an inner diameter or outer diameter grinding of the support, the chuck capacity specifications, will be constructed machine identification number, a fixture identification number as the input item, there is an effect capable of performing a highly reliable machining.

  In addition, since the data related to the cost information file is composed of at least a machine identification number, an operator cost, a machine tool cost, an operation cost, and a tool cost, the input items of the cost information file will be standardized. There is an effect that the machining conditions can be efficiently calculated in consideration of the cost.

  In addition, the cost information file data should include at least the purchase cost of the machine tool, initial cost, annual expenses, and usage conditions (annual operating hours, presence / absence of shift work, shift work hours pattern, holiday pattern, etc.) Since the cost is calculated by adding an hourly cost calculation formula based on this data file as the added data, the cost per hour is calculated in consideration of various costs, and the processing considering the processing cost There is an effect that the reliability of calculation of conditions can be improved.

  The finishing allowance information file data is classified as not including at least the outer diameter, inner diameter, and tempering allowance, and the finishing allowance is assigned to the section provided by the combination of diameter and length. In addition, there is a format that can read the grinding finishing allowance per diameter, and the rod stock finishing allowance determines the end face and outer diameter finishing allowance according to the finished length and finished diameter of the product, so the finishing allowance data It is classified and standardized according to the length and diameter of the object, and there is an effect that the finishing allowance necessary for processing can be optimally determined.

  In addition, the file data related to the machining method by automatic determination of the cutting path takes into account at least the input material shape, finish shape, and material, and based on the removal direction decision data, the diameter and length of the machining method with a proven track record. Since it is created with reference to the thickness ratio, the X direction machining allowance, the Z direction machining allowance, the removal direction, the material shape data, and the finish shape data, the machining method of the previous example that has already been proven based on the removal direction determination data Therefore, there is an effect that a highly reliable and efficient processing method can be determined.

  The file data related to cutting condition information is filed with data on cutting speed, depth of cut and feed using at least the workpiece material and tool material as keywords, and the workpiece material, tool material and tool diameter are used as data. It is configured so that the machining conditions can be read out, the tool material is displayed based on ISO, the tool material using a manufacturer or user specific symbol is also replaced with ISO display, and the cutting condition is determined by fuzzy theory from specific condition numerical values, The numerical value of the given point sequence is obtained by substituting into the interpolation formula and tool life calculation formula, and the material material symbol and tool material symbol are converted from manufacturer or user specific symbols to standard symbols by the conversion table. Read the input tool material as a standard value, and create data on cutting conditions by interpolating the discontinuity of the input data. Becomes DOO, there is an effect capable of performing a highly reliable machining on the basis of the standard data regardless of the kind of input data.

  The data of the surface treatment information file is composed of at least the JIS symbol and increasing / decreasing dimensions, and the JIS processing procedure and the increasing / decreasing dimension are obtained by the input surface processing symbol, and the finishing dimension processing and process setting processing are performed. Therefore, the surface treatment symbol input by the graphic input is converted into a standardized procedure and dimensions of JIS, and there is an effect that highly reliable processing can be performed only by inputting the symbol used in the drawing.

  In addition, the data of the tempering information file should be at least the heat treatment symbol as a keyword, select the heat treatment content, whether or not hardness is specified, and select the applicable material. Therefore, various conditions of the heat treatment are determined based on the heat treatment symbol, and there is an effect that the processing necessary for each heat treatment can be performed with high reliability only by inputting the heat treatment symbol.

  The graphic information file data is classified into at least dimensional tolerance, screw shape, and shape. The dimensional tolerance is the basic dimensional difference (upper dimensional difference or lower dimensional difference) data, IT basic tolerance. Using data and IT tolerance grade difference data, basic values corresponding to tolerance symbols, dimensions, tolerance grades, etc. are created as file data, and the standard for the entered tolerance code, dimensions, tolerance grade of the processed part Since the dimensional difference is calculated from the basic numerical value using the tolerance calculation formula, the dimensional difference data is determined based on the input tolerance symbol, dimension, and tolerance grade, and the symbol used in the drawing is input. Only by this, there is an effect that can perform highly reliable processing.

  The graphic information file data is classified into at least dimensional tolerance, screw shape, and shape, and the screw shape file data includes at least screw nominal classification / nominal diameter, pitch, grade, and outer diameter. Since it is composed of the lower dimension, the upper dimension of the effective diameter, the lower dimension, and the minimum roundness of the valley, the specifications for threading are determined based on the input data of the screw shape, and used in the drawing. There is an effect that highly reliable machining can be performed only by inputting a symbol.

  The graphic information file data is classified into at least dimensional tolerance, screw shape, and shape, and the screw hole file data is at least the nominal diameter, pitch, pilot hole diameter, and chamfer diameter of the screw. Because it is configured, the specifications for the drilling of the pilot hole are determined based on the input data of the pilot hole of the screw, and the effect that highly reliable machining can be performed simply by inputting the symbol used in the drawing. There is.

  Further, the data of the graphic information file is classified into at least dimensional tolerance, screw shape, and shape, and various items of the data of the shape file are configured according to at least the data input format. The input format of each data is It has a standardized form and shape identification code, and the data in the groove shape file contains at least the groove type, groove bottom specifications, groove width specifications, groove end surface finish, groove cornering specifications, and groove corners. The center hole shape file data includes at least the center hole angle, nominal diameter, center hole large diameter, chamfered diameter, counterbore diameter, nominal diameter depth, counterbore depth, and chamfer depth. The radius data of the key groove shape file includes at least key groove classification, key groove width specifications, key groove length, key groove depth specifications, groove type, cutter specifications, etc. Original, keyway Quasi-position specifications, key type shape file data, groove type, cutter specifications, end face key groove shape file data, at least key groove classification, key groove width specifications, Includes key groove length, key groove depth specifications, groove type, cutter specifications, key groove reference position specifications, and hole shape file data includes at least hole specifications and reference position specifications. Source, hole specifications, countersink and countersink specifications, hole depth specifications, number of holes, and hole position specifications. The data of the tapped hole shape file is at least the tapped hole type and reference position. Data of internal cam shape file, specifications of tapped holes, number of tapped holes, tapped hole position specifications, counterbore / counterpiece specifications, tapped hole depth specifications, pilot hole specifications, etc. Is at least the cam type, point number, start point coordinates, end point coordinates, arc radius , Cam surface finish, cam corner chamfer specifications, end face direction cam shape file data, at least cam type, point number, start point coordinates, end point coordinates, arc radius specifications, It has cam surface finish, cam chamfering specifications, and cylindrical groove cam shape file data includes at least cam type, point number, start point coordinates, end point coordinates, arc radius size, groove Type, groove width specifications, groove depth specifications, groove shape file data for cylindrical groove cams, groove type, groove width specifications, groove depth specifications, outer cam Shape file data includes at least cam type, point number, specification of start point coordinates, specification of end point coordinates, specification of arc radius, cam surface finish, cam chamfering specifications, and end face groove cam shape File data includes at least cam type, point number, start point coordinates, end point Coordinate specifications, arc specifications, arc center position, groove type, cam groove specifications, groove surface finish, cam groove depth specifications, groove bottom cornering specifications, groove angle chamfering The data of the groove shape file of the end face groove cam is at least the groove type, cam groove type, groove surface finish, cam groove depth specifications, groove bottom cornering specifications, groove angle The data of the cylindrical outer plane / cylindrical polygon shape file includes the type of plane, the specifications of the plane, the specifications of the cylindrical outer plane depth, and the data of the internal gear shape file includes at least the gears. Type of gear, specifications of gear, specifications of straddle tooth thickness / overpin specifications, finish specifications, data of external gear shape file at least of gear type, gear specifications, straddle tooth thickness Specifications for specifications / overpins and specifications for finishing are provided, so the data format of various shape files is standard. It will be of an effect capable of improving the reliability of the processing with less method of data entry errors.

  In addition, since the data of the machining method symbol information file includes at least a machining method symbol, a machining method and a range of finishing roughness, and a machining method, the machining method and its specifications are determined based on the machining method symbol. Thus, there is an effect that highly reliable machining can be performed only by inputting symbols used in the drawing.

  In addition, since the data of the finish symbol information file is composed of at least the finish symbol, the symbol on the drawing, and the roughness, the processing method and its specifications are determined based on the finish symbol, and the symbol used in the drawing is determined. There is an effect that a highly reliable process can be performed only by inputting.

  In addition, since the material information file data is composed of at least JIS symbols, heat treatment symbols, tensile strength, hardness, specific cutting resistance, the processing method and its specifications are determined based on the JIS symbols, heat treatment symbols, etc. Thus, there is an effect that highly reliable machining can be performed only by inputting symbols used in the drawing.

  In addition, the data of the shape and position accuracy information file is composed of the shape and position accuracy symbol, the necessity of the reference surface, and the accuracy name. The specifications are determined, and there is an effect that highly reliable machining can be performed only by inputting symbols used in the drawing.

  In addition, the constant data of the tool life equation is determined for each category classified at least by the work material and the tool material, so it is determined for the work material and the tool material, and the accuracy is high. There is an effect that the life can be estimated.

  Workpiece shape data with metric display is at least a data input format sequence 1 with a table format for inputting workpiece specifications and a workpiece identification number and workpiece material that can use the variable block input method The material number is read from the file using the ID number as a keyword. The workpiece material identification number, data is automatically supplemented to the material shape, workpiece name, total length, full width when milled shape is entered, and bar material Material diameter, workpiece material, workpiece material hardness, workpiece heat treatment, workpiece material weight (per piece), workpiece material dimensions, processed process, unfinished finish specifications (finishing symbol, finished surface roughness ), The necessity of measurement data for each process, the number of specified machining, the number of completed machining, change the data once entered The revision, creator, date, and comment used in the case can be entered, and the same characters entered in the drawing are used as input data as they are, so the input of the finished shape data of the metric display work is tabular Thus, there is an effect that highly reliable processing can be performed only by inputting symbols used in the drawing.

  In addition, the initial value of the sequence number is 1, and when the input of one input line is completed, the next sequence number is automatically filled in. Therefore, data input is performed interactively, and even an amateur can input data. There is an effect that processing can be performed easily and with high reliability.

  The input format of the material shape data is at least the sequence number, step number, previous C / R chamfer (C / R, size), start point coordinates (diameter, length), end point coordinates (diameter). , Length), C / R chamfer after arc radius (C / R, size), taper / angle / gradient specifications (section, type, size) in table format. The input will be simplified in the form of a table, and there is an effect that the data input can be formatted and highly reliable processing can be performed by a data input method with few mistakes.

  In addition, material shape data is input using the shape input origin as the left end face and center line, and starting from this, the upper half of the figure is input counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the center line. Therefore, it is possible to input data with few mistakes.

  In addition, the input of finishing shape data takes the origin of shape input as the left end face and the center line, and uses this as the starting point to input the upper half of the figure counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the center line. Therefore, it is possible to input data with few mistakes.

  In addition, at least the column number is automatically counted up to input the material shape data, and it is not necessary to input it. If the end point coordinate matches the next start point coordinate, the next start point coordinate input is omitted. Is also automatically input, so if the end point coordinate matches the next start point coordinate, the input is automatically completed, which has the effect of simplifying data input and improving reliability. .

  In addition, at the time of material shape data input, at least automatic count-up, item data that has been automatically input is black and white inversion and black shading, blue inversion and blue shading, blue inversion and black inversion, etc. Because it is displayed on the display device in a identifiable combination of colors and text decorations, it will be displayed so that the auto-complemented input data can be distinguished from other data. Has the effect of facilitating

  In addition, at the time of finishing shape data input, at least automatic count-up, item data that has been automatically complemented input, black and white inversion and black shading, blue inversion and blue shading, blue inversion and black inversion, etc. Because it is displayed in a display device with a combination of colors and text decorations so that it can be identified, automatically complemented data is displayed so that it can be distinguished from other data. Has the effect of facilitating

  In addition, when inputting data, automatic input, automatic count-up, input of the end point coordinates of the current stage, the start point coordinates of the current stage automatically quote the end point coordinates of the previous stage, and comparison with the end point coordinates of the previous stage when the start point coordinates are input. If there is no match, the stage is automatically added to automatically complete the diameter and length, and in the length input, the increment value (in the case of input) is input with ± sign, ± sign When there is no input, the absolute value (input) is determined and processed. In the input of the arc radius, + is counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the start point coordinate to the end point coordinate, and-is the start point coordinate. It is distinguished from clockwise to the end point coordinates (clockwise), and is divided into T for taper, A for angle, and S for gradient, respectively. Use numbers, the first two letters indicate the type of taper and the last two letters Indicates the size of the taper, and the taper and gradient are entered by entering the numerator above (left) the decimal point and the denominator below (right) the decimal point. The data acquisition rule is standardized, and there is an effect that data input mistakes can be reduced.

  The format of the data for inputting the finishing shape is at least the sequence, column number, previous C / R chamfer (C / R, size), start point coordinates (diameter, length), end point coordinates (Diameter, length), arc radius, subsequent C / R chamfer (C / R, size), taper / angle / gradient specifications (section, type, size), tolerance symbol, vertical dimension difference, finish Symbols, surface roughness, shape position accuracy, screw specifications, tempering specifications, surface treatment specifications are entered in a tabular format, so data entry will be standardized and data entry errors will occur. There is an effect that processing with high reliability can be performed.

  In data entry, skipping when no data is entered includes providing a dedicated key or setting to a soft menu key, and cursor return provides a dedicated key or assigning this to a soft menu key. If the above citation is made in the same case as the upper data, the above citation is provided with a dedicated key or set to a soft menu key and processed. The method symbol is added to the finishing symbol and entered, and the machining method symbol and the machining symbol can be judged based on the finishing symbol and machining method symbol in the machining method symbol file. The data is input with at least the three elements of symbol, reference plane, and accuracy. Confirming whether or not, heat treatment symbol and hardness designation, applicable material is checked against the tempering file data to determine the appropriateness of input, and an alarm is issued for improper input, the length across steps Input the specifications of at least the reference stage, the classification of the start / end shoulder of the reference position, the processing specification stage, the length dimension from the reference position, the tolerance symbol, the upper dimension difference, and the lower dimension difference. The grooving data is input at least from the groove number, the reference step, the section from the start / end shoulder (S / E), the machining specification step, the specified position reference groove end face classification (S / E), and from the shoulder Input dimensions, groove type, groove bottom, groove width, start point groove end surface finish, end point groove end surface finish, groove cornering specification, groove cornering specification, Key groove data can be input at least of the key groove number, the previous stage, the rear stage, the key groove classification, and the key groove width. Input key length, key groove depth, key groove depth, key groove type, cutter specifications, key groove reference position data, Key groove number, front stage, rear stage, key groove classification, key groove width specifications, key groove length, key groove depth specifications, key groove type, cutter specifications, key groove reference position The input of the reamer hole data includes at least machining order, hole number, machining designation step, hole type, reference position specifications, hole specifications, countersink / dish pan specifications, It is possible to input the specifications of the hole depth, the number of holes, and the specifications of the hole position. The input of the screw hole data is at least the processing order, tap hole number, processing designation stage, tap hole type, reference position Specifications, Tap Hole Specifications, Number of Tap Holes, Hole Location Specifications, Tap Hole Number, Dividing Angle, Counterbore, Countersink Input specifications, tap hole depth specifications, tap pilot hole specifications, and internal cam data can be input with at least the cam number, machining specification stage, and internal cam standard specifications. Enter the cam type, point number, start point coordinate specification, end point coordinate specification, arc radius specification, cam surface finish specification, cam corner chamfer specification, or the arc radius It has an input to specify the arc center coordinates by the angle of the arc center instead and the distance to the arc center. Enter the type, point number, specification of the start point coordinate, specification of the end point coordinate, specification of the arc radius, finish specification of the cam surface, specification of the cam chamfering, or the arc radius and center of the arc. It is necessary to input the arc curved surface according to the angle and the dimension from the shoulder of the arc center. The cylindrical groove cam data is input with at least the cam number, machining specification stage, cylindrical cam reference specifications, cam type, point number, start point coordinates, end point coordinates, arc radius specifications, Enter the groove type, groove width specification, groove depth specification, chamfering specification, chamfering specification, or the arc radius, arc center angle and arc center shoulder dimension It is possible to input curved surface specification, and external cam data can be input with at least the cam number, machining specification stage, external cam reference specifications, cam type, point number, start point coordinates, end point coordinates. Enter the specifications of the arc radius, the finishing specifications of the cam surface, the specifications of the chamfering of the cam at the start point of the width, the specifications of the chamfering of the cam at the end of the width, or the arc radius and the center of the arc An optional circular curved surface can be specified and input according to the angle and dimension from the shoulder of the arc center. Data input is at least cam number, machining specification stage, cam type, cam classification, point number, start point coordinates, end point coordinates, arc radius specifications, arc center position, groove type Enter the specifications of the cam groove, the finish of the small groove surface, the finish of the large groove surface, the depth specification of the cam groove, the corner bottom corner specification, the groove corner chamfer specification, or the center of the arc The designation of the position includes the designation of an arbitrary circular curved surface by the distance from the center of the radius center, the center angle from the reference point, or the X coordinate and the Y coordinate, and the input of regular polygon data is at least a plane number , Specifications of the reference position, type of plane, number of planes, specifications of the plane, specifications of the depth of the outer cylindrical plane, and input of the internal gear data includes at least the internal gear number and the reference position. Enter the specifications, gear type, gear specifications, overpin specifications and finishing specifications. Alternatively, it is possible to input the specifications of the straddle tooth thickness, the tolerance symbol, the upper dimensional difference, and the lower dimensional difference in the specified method for measuring the gear tooth thickness. Enter the gear number, specification of the reference position, type of gear, specification of the gear, specification of the straddle tooth thickness, specification of the finish, or specification of the overpin of the specified method for measuring the tooth thickness of the gear Therefore, there is an effect that standardization of various data input is performed, data input errors are reduced, and highly reliable processing can be performed.

  In addition, the finish graphic processing is based on at least the input diameter, length, radius, width, depth, angle, nominal screw size and tolerance symbol, or tolerance (upper dimensional difference, lower dimensional difference) data. Calculates and determines the final shape dimensions to be machined, and if surface treatment is specified, reads the data from the surface treatment data file and calculates the shape dimensions before the surface treatment treatment, so determine the final shape dimensions from the input data Therefore, there is an effect that highly reliable processing can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, the screw finish graphic processing reads out the upper and lower dimensions of the outer diameter or inner diameter, and the upper and lower dimensions of the effective diameter of the male screw or female screw from the screw shape data file, and performs an averaging calculation process. Since the finished shape dimensions are set, the finished shape dimensions are determined by averaging calculation processing based on the screw shape data, and highly reliable machining is efficiently performed based on simplified data input. There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, graphic processing before finishing another process reads the finishing allowance of each part based on at least the finishing symbol of each part, the finished surface roughness, and the tempering data, and reads the diameter and length from the finishing allowance data file as keywords, and surface treatment processing. Since it is added to the previous final shape dimensions, the finishing allowance of each part is automatically added to the final shape dimensions before surface treatment processing, and highly reliable processing can be performed based on simplified data input. There is an effect that can be done.

  In addition, the outer diameter, inner diameter, end face, and groove are identified using at least the start point and end point information, and the sign of the input data is determined by calculating the direction of the input data and comparing the size of the input data from the end point coordinates and the start point coordinates. The reference of the constituent line segment is expressed by taking the X + line segment as the reference line and taking the phase angle as + in the counterclockwise direction, and the phase angle θ of the constituent line segment of the figure is obtained by the following equation: θ = tan −1 [{(End point coordinate; X)-(start point coordinate; X)} / {(end point coordinate; Z)-(start point coordinate; Z)}]-90 ° combination of line segments and graphic space identification Since the identification is performed, the input data is analyzed to identify the graphic pattern and the graphic space, and there is an effect that the input data can be analyzed to process a complicated shape with high reliability.

  In the pattern identification, at least whether the Z end point coordinate of the Z + stage in the data string is the maximum value of the figure, and if it is the maximum value of the figure, the data up to this stage is determined as the inner diameter. If the figure is not the maximum value of the figure, it is determined whether the Z start point coordinate of the Z-stage is the figure maximum value. If the figure is the maximum value, the data after this stage is set as the outer diameter. If it is determined that the Z start point coordinate of the Z-stage is not the maximum value of the figure, it is determined whether the data string is Z +, X +, Z ±, and the data string is Z +, X +, Z In the case of ±, it is determined whether or not the Z end point coordinate of the Z + step is the maximum value of the figure. If it is not the maximum value of the figure, the step of determining the X + step data as the end face and the Z end point coordinate of the Z + step Is determined to be the maximum value of the figure, the data on the X + level is determined as the end surface on the Z + side. If it is determined that the data string is not Z +, X +, Z ±, it is determined whether the data string is Z-, X-, Z ±, and the data string is Z-, X-, Z ±. In the case of ±, it is determined whether or not the Z end point coordinate of the previous Z-stage is the minimum value of the figure. If it is not the minimum value of the figure, the step of determining the X-stage data as the end face, -When the Z end point coordinate of the step is the minimum value of the figure, the X-step data is the data when the step of determining the ZO side end surface and the data string is not Z-, X-, Z ± It is determined whether the column is X +, Z +, or X-. If the data column is X +, Z +, or X-, it is determined whether or not the previous data column is a groove. Excluding the difference in the size of the X data, the inversion range of the data is identified as a groove, and the following multistage groove determination is performed by placing the X data in the graphic data. If the data sequence is not X +, Z +, or X−, the step of determining the inner diameter is a single-step groove, and if the preceding and subsequent data sequences determine the groove, the step is identified as an inner-diameter multi-step groove. If it is determined that the step and the data string are not X +, Z +, X-, it is determined whether the data string is X-, Z-, X +, and the data string is X-, Z-, X +. In this case, it is determined whether or not the preceding and succeeding data strings are grooves. If the preceding and following data strings are not grooves, the step of determining the outer diameter one-step groove, and the preceding and following data strings when determining the groove, When determining that the outer diameter multi-stage groove and the data string are not X-, Z-, X +, it is determined whether the data string is Z-, X +, Z +, and the data string is Z-, In the case of X +, Z +, it is determined whether or not the preceding and following data strings are grooves. If the preceding and following data strings are not grooves, , A step of determining a stepped groove on the Z + side end surface, and a step of identifying a multi-step groove on the Z + side end surface by checking the graphic space of the data row when the preceding and following data sequences determine a groove, and a data sequence Is determined not to be Z−, X +, or Z +, it is determined whether or not the data string is Z +, X−, or Z−. If the data string is Z +, X−, or Z−, the preceding and succeeding data strings are It is determined whether or not the groove is a groove. If the preceding and following data strings are not grooves, a step of determining a single-step groove on the Z-side end surface, and if the preceding and following data strings determine a groove, If it is determined that there is a multi-step groove, an identification label is added to each analysis data step, and the data string is not Z +, X-, Z-, the remaining data is determined to be present and the remaining If there is any data, delete the first data in the analysis data column and read the next data. It consists of a step that repeats for one step and repeats until there is no remaining data, so it compares and analyzes data across multiple steps, gives each line segment a figure name and figure code, and based on the pattern identification results Tool shape creation, selection, determination, and position determination are performed, and there is an effect that machining can be performed with high reliability even in a complicated shape by analyzing input data.

  In the machining process determination process, at least machine identification in one sequence, process identification, total length, material diameter, workpiece material, workpiece material material, heat treatment, workpiece material dimension, machined process, machining number data, or Center hole, tolerance symbol / upper / lower dimension difference, finishing symbol / finish surface roughness, shape position accuracy, screw accuracy / finishing symbol / finish surface roughness, tempering symbol / hardness, surface in other sequences without material input Specification of processing, groove, key groove, end face key groove, inner diameter key groove, hole, tapped hole, inner cam, end face direction cam, cylindrical groove cam, outer shape cam, end face groove cam, cylindrical outer flat surface / cylindrical outer polygon Since the final machining process is determined based on the data of the internal gear and the external gear and the machining process is determined, the machining process is automatically determined based on the input data. At the operator has the effect capable of performing a highly reliable machining efficiency.

  In addition, the determination of the processing process processing is at least a step of determining the presence / absence of a processed process, and if there is no processed process, the heat processing data is used to determine the presence / absence of material heat treatment. A step of determining whether to pick or pick multiple pieces based on input or information from the machine master, and if it is determined to be a single piece, the presence or absence of both centers is determined. Step to determine whether or not king is possible based on the ratio of material diameter to material length, and if cantilever chucking is possible, determine whether workpiece material dimension> (total length + 2 x finishing allowance), workpiece material dimension> In the case of (total length + 2 x finishing allowance), if it is determined that the cutting process for each piece is set, and the workpiece material dimension ≤ (total length + 2 x finishing allowance), alarm processing is performed. If it is determined that there are multiple steps, the capacity of the material tempering furnace and the workpiece material dimensions are compared. If the workpiece material dimensions are not entered, an alarm processing step is performed. If it is determined that the machine is a bar feed machine, it is determined whether or not the machine is a bar feed machine. If the machine is a bar feed machine, a step of calculating a maximum value (δmax) of its own weight deflection based on the total length Δmax ≦ k is determined. If δmax ≦ k, a step for setting a multi-piece process is set. If δmax> k, an alarm process is performed. If it is smaller, it is determined whether or not the machine is a bar feed machine. If it is not a bar feed machine, Lc = (8 × E × I × δmax / w) 1/3 + grip allowance, Lc ≧ (full length + cut) (Cutting allowance) × N + grip allowance, Lc <(capacity of the material refining furnace), where N is an integer, δmax is the maximum value of self-weight deflection, and a step of determining Lc satisfying the above three formulas and cantilever chucking If it is determined that a multi-chip cutting process is a bar feed machine, a step of calculating δmax based on the total length, and whether δmax ≦ k are determined. If δmax ≦ k, (Capacity of material refining furnace) ≧ {total length + cutting allowance + (2 × finishing allowance)} × N + grip allowance, Lb ≧ {full length + cutting allowance + (2 × finish allowance)} × N + gripping allowance, Lb <( The capacity of the material tempering furnace), where Lb sets the bar feed machine multiple cutting length, the step of calculating the raw material cutting length using the above three formulas, and the bar feed machine multiple cutting process When step and δmax> k A step of setting an alarm process, a step of setting a material refining process, a step of storing a processed process, a step of determining the presence / absence of material heat treatment using heat treatment data, and taking a single piece or multiple pieces. If it is determined that it is a single pick, it is determined whether or not both centers are present. If both centers are not present, whether or not cantilever chucking is possible is determined by the input graphic data. Judging by the length of the nail height and grasping diameter data, if cantilever chucking is possible, it is determined whether the workpiece material size ≥ {total length + cutting allowance + (2 x finishing allowance)}. When dimension ≧ {total length + cutting allowance + (2 × finishing allowance)}, it is determined that the step of setting a cutting process for each piece and the workpiece material dimension <{full length + cutting allowance + (2 × finishing allowance)}. If it is determined that the machine is a bar feed machine, it is determined whether or not the machine is a bar feed machine. In the case of a bar feed machine, a step of calculating δmax based on the total length; ≦ k is determined. If δmax ≦ k, a multi-chip process is set. On the other hand, if δmax> k, a step of alarm processing is performed, and if it is determined that the machine is not a bar feed machine, δmax ≦ From k, the cantilever chucking cutting length (Lc) is Lc = (8 × E × I × δmax / w) 1/3 + grip margin Lc ≧ (full length + cut margin) × N + grip margin, where N is an integer , W is composed of the step of determining using the above-mentioned two equal distribution loads, so that the machining process is selected and determined based on the input data to be machined, and even an amateur operator is reliable. High processing There is an effect that can be carried out efficiently.

  In addition, the cutting process processing for each piece includes at least selecting a machine having a cutting process, selecting all machines whose cutting processes are registered in the machine tool file according to material and material diameter, and provisional machining time per piece. To calculate the temporary machining cost, read the preparation time, preparation cost, processing cross-sectional area per time corresponding to the material, processing cost, etc. from the number of pieces of machine and the file data of the selected machine, temporary processing time per piece, A step of calculating a provisional machining cost, a step of prioritizing the selected machine ranking cost, a step of prioritizing the machining time per piece, ranking the machine, and recording the cutting process file. Because it is configured, the optimum machine for each cutting process will be determined, and even an amateur operator can perform the optimum machining A.

  In addition, the machining process determination process includes at least a step of determining the number of center holes, and in the case of a single center hole, the presence / absence of an outer diameter grinding process is determined. A warning is given so that both center hole machining processes can be processed by input, and if outer diameter grinding is not included, a step of determining from a single center hole machining process to a single center hole turning process, In the case of center support, the step of determining from both center hole machining processes to the both center hole support turning process, and in the case of no center hole, the step of determining to the chucking turning process, and the total length, finish symbol / finishing surface roughness The center position is used to determine whether it is a single center hole support machining process. Machines to be machined are selected based on the total length and material diameter, and all machines registered in the single center hole drilling process are selected in the machine tool file. Read the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, machining cost, etc. from the file and calculate the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece. It is composed of a step of recording in the center hole machining process file and a step of setting a process for machining the center hole simultaneously with other machining by chucking turning when it is determined that it is not a single center hole support machining process. Therefore, select the machining process from the conditions of center hole machining and outer diameter grinding, and decide the machining process considering the cost or machining time conditions. In it, there is an effect that can be performed with high reliability with high productivity machining in amateur operator.

  Also, single center hole support turning process processing is at least total length, material diameter, number of workpieces, tolerance symbol / upper / lower dimensional difference, finishing symbol / finishing surface roughness, shape position accuracy, screw accuracy / finishing symbol / finishing surface roughness Now, the step of selecting all the machines registered with the single center hole support turning process of the machine tool file and the preparation time from the selected machine file based on the number of machining and the removal volume of the turning process, Read the preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, machining cost, etc., calculate the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece, and prioritize the cost according to the cost priority and priority per machining time. The process is recorded in the process file, so the most suitable machine for the single center hole support turning process is determined based on the input data and machining cost or time. It will be an effect which can be done by increasing the productive and reliable machining even amateur operator.

  The selection of both center hole machining process machines is based on at least the total length, finish symbol / finish surface roughness, center hole position, and whether or not the center hole support machining process is selected. If there is no special specification for the center hole, it is determined by comparing it with the file that holds the special specification. Steps for selecting all the machines registered in the standard both center drilling process, and the preparation time, preparation cost, and removal capacity per hour from the selected machine file based on the number of machining and the removal volume of the center hole Read machining costs, calculate temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece, prioritize the machine according to cost priority and prioritize machining time, and drill both centers. If it is determined that the center hole position is not a two-center hole support machining process based on the file recording step and the center hole position, the step of determining the one-center hole machining process and the chucking process is determined, and the center hole is determined to be special. In this case, machines for processing both center holes in different processes are selected based on the total length and material diameter, and all the machines registered in the special center hole drilling process in the machine tool file are selected, and the number of machining and center hole removal volume are selected. Based on the above, read the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, machining cost, etc. from the selected machine file, calculate the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece, and give priority to cost and machining per piece It consists of the steps of prioritizing each machine in time priority and recording it in a special double center drilling process file. Will be determined based on the best machine scan the input data processing costs or time, there is an effect that can be performed by increasing the productive and reliable machining even amateur operator.

  Both center hole support turning process processing is at least total length, material diameter, number of machining, tolerance symbol / upper / lower dimensional difference, finish symbol / finish surface roughness, shape position accuracy, screw accuracy / finish symbol / finish surface roughness, Steps to select all the machines registered for both center hole support turning process of machine tool file, and the preparation time and preparation cost from the selected machine file based on the number of machining and the removal volume of turning Read the removal capacity per hour, machining cost, etc., calculate the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece, and rank the machines according to cost priority and machining time priority per piece, and support both center holes It is composed of the steps to record in the turning process file, so the best machine for both center hole support turning process is based on the input data and machining cost or time Will be constant, there is an effect that can be performed by increasing the productive and reliable machining even amateur operator.

  The chucking turning process includes at least the overall length, material diameter, number of workpieces, tolerance symbol / upper / lower dimensional difference, finish symbol / finish surface roughness, shape position accuracy, screw accuracy / finish symbol / finish surface roughness, Steps to select all the machines registered in the chucking turning process in the machine tool file, and the preparation time, preparation cost, and time from the selected machine file based on the number of processed parts and the removal volume of the turning process Reads the contact removal capability, machining cost, etc., calculates the temporary machining time and temporary machining cost per piece, calculates the removal volume to determine the machining area, and calculates the product of the removal volume and average diameter, and removal The product of volume and average diameter is a factor that takes into account the time factor during processing by multiplying the removal volume of each step by the average radius of the material radius and finishing radius of each step, and the maximum outer diameter and minimum Divide by diameter, distribute the maximum outer diameter and the minimum inner diameter to the left and right so that it is equal to one half of the sum of the product of the removed volume and the average diameter, the larger side of the product of the sorted removed volume and the average diameter, The first machining side is determined to determine the chucking allowance on the first process side. If there is a chucking allowance, the provisional machining time to the coordinates on the chuck side with the largest diameter and the coordinates on the chuck side with the smallest inner diameter , The step of calculating the temporary machining cost and the product of the removal volume and average diameter of the maximum outer diameter or minimum inner diameter is twice the product of the removal volume of the other outer diameter or inner diameter and the average diameter (arbitrary In the case of rough machining, the first machining process and the second machining process are each assigned half of the machining, and the finishing machining is performed with the finishing symbol and the finished surface roughness. As specified, the machining accuracy in the split finish is machine tool fidelity. If it cannot be guaranteed from the result of the value, it can be finished in a lump on the second machining process side, or if it can be guaranteed, it is divided into each process, and the part following the end face machined by the first machining process has a steep taper or screw. If there is no chucking allowance or the like, regardless of the result of the above processing procedure, the second processing step side is processed first, and then the first processing step side is changed to the processing procedure, and chucking. When it is determined that there is no allowance, a step of calculating the temporary machining time and the temporary machining cost up to the coordinate on the counter-chuck side with the maximum diameter and the coordinate on the counter-chuck side with the minimum inner diameter, cost priority, and per piece It is composed of the steps of ranking the machines with priority on machining time and recording them in the chucking turning process file, so that the best machine for the chucking turning process is input data, This is determined based on the removal volume of processing, the cost and time of processing, and the processing procedure, and there is an effect that even an amateur operator can perform highly reliable processing with high productivity.

  In addition, the processing after the presence / absence of the remaining machining process is determined based on at least the presence / absence of the remaining machining process based on the input data, the finish symbol / finishing surface roughness. If there is no, calculate the removal volume for each remaining machining area, arrange in the order of large volume, grinding, honing, superfinishing, various special finishings in the order of the roughness of the finished surface, these two elements When combined, the step of arranging the processes so that the finished surface roughness becomes the priority order and the presence of the process file are determined, the degree of input of the process is determined, and all processes are specified input In this case, the process is continued according to the process file order. Since the process of the removal volume remaining machining process, will be determined based on the finishing surface roughness, there is an effect capable of performing processing based on the efficient processing methods.

  In addition, the selection process of the machine to be used for each process of the remaining machining process includes at least a step of determining whether or not there is a remaining process, and, if there is a remaining process, a machine at a machining location having a predetermined machining order according to input data. Read the preparation time, preparation cost, removal capacity per hour, processing cost, etc. from the selected machine file based on the selected step, the number of processing and the removal volume, and calculate the temporary processing time and temporary processing cost per piece. It comprises a step of calculating, and a step of ranking the machines according to each of cost priority and machining time priority and recording them in the n machining process file, so that the machine used for processing the remaining machining process is removed. Therefore, it is determined based on the processing cost and time, and there is an effect that efficient processing can be performed in consideration of productivity.

  In addition, the machining process decision is made by determining and quoting at least the input figure, specified process, process file, fixture file, tool file, cost file, figure file, and data developed from these, and determining the final machining process Therefore, the final machining process is determined based on the standardized data, and there is an effect that highly reliable machining can be performed.

  In addition, the machining process determination process for selecting and determining the machine of the machining process includes at least one of a condition for minimizing the number of machining machines, a condition for giving priority to machining costs, and a condition for equalizing the operation rate. Considering the conditions and adding the conditions of the machine's graphic processing capacity tool, the processing machine is selected, so the machine in the machining process is determined to be highly productive, and the machine that optimizes productivity Therefore, there is an effect that processing with high reliability can be performed.

  In addition, the process determination processing procedure determines at least processing cost priority and processing time priority. If the processing cost priority, the minimum processing cost process from the first process to the n-th process in the processing cost priority file of the processing process file. If the machining time priority is on the other hand, it is the same as the selected process and the step of reading and organizing the minimum temporary machining time processes from the first process to the nth process in the machining time priority file of the machining process file If it is determined whether or not the machine is selected and the same machine is selected, whether or not the process can be combined is determined by chucking and the processing direction, and included in the same chucking or the same processing process. As long as the process summarizing step and the process summarizing method are the same machining function tool, similar If the finishing symbol and finish surface roughness of the tool, each processing location are below the same rank, roughing processing is performed between the step to be combined and the process sequence of the selected machine, and roughing by another machine , Measurement, etc., a step of making it a separate process, a step of enumerating the processes selected in the previous processing and determining a cost priority or processing time priority process and order, and Vmin = S {Cw / ((1 / n) -1) (Cw.ttc + Ct)} nVpmax = S / {((1 / n) -1) ttc} n In the case where the cost priority is specified, the cutting with the minimum cutting cost obtained by the above formula is performed. When the speed (Vmin) is used and the processing time priority is specified, the steps used to obtain the cutting speed (Vpmax) with the minimum processing time in the above formula, and the processing order are the order of the removal amount and the tolerance width. For distinguishing in descending order of finishing symbols Therefore, the machining process is determined so as to optimize the machining time or machining cost, so that highly reliable machining can be performed with high productivity. There is an effect that can be done.

  In addition, the machining program for each process determines whether the machining figure of the previous machining process is the material figure of the current machining process, the step of determining whether or not the removal direction is specified, and the removal direction in the case of turning. Productivity in the removal direction calculated from the ratio of machining length, machine stiffness, tool stiffness, etc. by combining the cross-sectional area, machining allowance, length in the Z (axis) direction vs. X (end face) direction and the maximum cutting depth of the tool Is determined by evaluating the machining time, the tool file is searched by the figure code that has processed the figure input data, and all the tools that match the figure processing function code are searched. The step of selecting and determining the minimum and maximum productivity of the machine, and the chuck of the machine tool file fixture input for each n-process machine tool from the input figure And a step of selecting a fitting with the closest chucking diameter for each machining side and determining a fitting common to both machining as an optimum. Since it is comprised, the process for every process will be determined based on the conditions of a removal direction, a tool, and a fixture, and there exists an effect which can perform highly reliable process efficiently.

  The cutting process machining program uses at least the overall length, material diameter, and workpiece material dimensions. If the material is a long material such as polished material or bar material, the bar feed machine processing step and the bar feed machine are registered. If not, cutting the bar material into individual lengths; if the workpiece material dimension exceeds a predetermined value, cutting the bar material into a length less than the predetermined value; The material is read from the end face finishing allowance file for bar turning, and the material diameter and length are used as variables. Therefore, the processing machine for the cutting process is determined based on the dimensions of the workpiece material and the presence or absence of the bar feed machine. There is an effect capable of performing a highly reliable machining Te.

  In addition, the machining program in the turning process includes at least the material, the figure before finishing another process (intermediate finishing shape file), machine tool information, tool information, and cutting condition information calculated by the figure processing before finishing another process based on the input data for finishing. , Material information, processing method symbol information, finishing symbol information, finishing allowance information, surface treatment information, tempering information, cost information, and so on, will be processed based on standardized data There is an effect that highly reliable processing can be performed efficiently.

In addition, the method of determining the removal direction of the turning process includes at least a step of retrieving a temporary tool from the tool file and reading out the tool conditions, a universal tool for rough machining from the tool file, the tool with the maximum tool rigidity, and the maximum cutting depth. Search for the tool identification number, tool rigidity, maximum cutting depth, maximum feed, tool holder protrusion amount, The step of reading the specific cutting force from the material file using the material as a keyword, the step of adopting a complementary method based on fuzzy theory, the step of calculating the radial and axial stiffness of the temporary tool, the read tool conditions, and the previously obtained The step of calculating the maximum cutting load of the tool based on the specific cutting force corresponding to the workpiece material, radial and axial The tool rigidity ratio of the tool, the step of obtaining the maximum cutting load by the following formula, the maximum cutting load = maximum cutting × maximum feed × specific cutting resistance The tool shank size obtained from the tool file and the tool holder The step of obtaining the maximum load from the following equation using the protrusion amount and various numerical values that have already been given, and Pr = 3 × E × I × δmax / L3, where δmax is the maximum allowable deflection of the tool, tool stiffness Comparing the maximum allowable load obtained from the product of the maximum cutting load obtained from the product of the depth of cut, feed, and specific cutting resistance, the step of setting the smaller side load as the allowable cutting load and the allowable maximum cutting load for both radial and axial In order to compare the machine's ability to feed in the X (radius) direction and the ability to feed in the Z (axis) direction, to read the machine tool stiffness from the machine tool file , The step of calculating the rigidity ratio between the radial direction and the axial direction, the step of reading out the spindle rigidity (maximum allowable load), maximum cutting depth and maximum feed from the machine tool file, and the specific cutting corresponding to the workpiece material obtained earlier The step of calculating the maximum cutting load by the following formula and the maximum cutting load = maximum cutting x maximum feed x specific cutting resistance Both the radial maximum cutting load and the axial maximum cutting load are calculated by each maximum cutting and maximum feed. Compare the maximum permissible value obtained from the machine tool file, use the lower value as the maximum permissible load, calculate the condition ratio of the machine, calculate the ratio of the radial maximum permissible load and the axial maximum permissible load, Stiffness calculation, a step of calculating the ratio of the workpiece radial direction to the axial stiffness by the following formula, and radial direction (flexure) stiffness = Pr × L3 / (3 × E × I)
Axial direction (twist) stiffness = 32 × Pr × L × r 2 / πd 4 G Finding the ratio of the magnitude of the stiffness against the load in the radial direction and the torsional stiffness in the axial direction and the amount of deflection, and the X direction cut-Z direction The maximum machining load condition and feed allowed by combining the feed, Z-direction cutting-X-direction feed capability, the maximum machining load step, the maximum cutting load ratio of the tool, the rigidity ratio of the machine, and the rigidity ratio of the workpiece The step of determining the direction and the provisional maximum infeed value used for machining are determined by the specific cutting resistance, cutting speed file, and cutting speed and feed according to the tool material and input material to be processed. The step of calculating the margin value, the step of determining the processing direction starting from the discrimination of the material, and determining whether or not the material is a rod material by inputting the workpiece material dimensions, in the case of a rod material, calculating the allowance for each step Also, the machining allowance for each processing side The step of calculating the sum and sum and the sum of the machining allowance cross-sectional area for each machining side divided by the length in each direction for each machining side is divided using the provisional maximum cutting value of the temporary tool. The step of calculating the Z-direction machining length by the product of the Z-direction and the X-direction length infeed count, and the machining allowance for each machining side are obtained. The average machining allowance obtained by dividing the total cross-sectional area by the length in each direction for each machining side is divided by the provisional maximum infeed value of the temporary tool to obtain the number of macro cuts. A step of calculating the Z direction machining length by the product of the X direction length and the Z direction cutting number as the number of cutting times, and a step of determining the feeding direction to X or Z based on the feeding direction length and the cutting number of times. If the material is not a bar material, the machining allowance in the X direction and Z direction will be entered as material input for each stage according to the material and finish shape data. Cutting step in the Z (axis) direction-X direction feed that feeds in the X (radius) direction, cut in the X (radius) direction-Z feed that feeds in the Z (axis) direction, end face , Grooves are cut in the Z (axis) direction-sent in the X (radius) direction, and the outer diameter and inner diameter are cut in the X (radius) direction-sent in the Z (axis) direction. The step of calculating the number of cuts and machining length for each step for each feed method, and if there is no pilot hole in the inner diameter, assuming that the position of the tool edge can be inserted to the center line, the inner diameter and inner diameter groove processing If the groove has a shape that is perpendicular to the feed direction, the groove is processed with a lid, and the step of adding the number of additional machining cuts and the machining length is added again as a groove, and each cut-feed Qualitative machining time with steps to compare and rank the number of cuts and feed lengths in each direction A step of determining whether the short combination feed method is the best method in terms of the number of cuttings and a processing length, a step of determining superiority or inferiority of the X-direction feed and the Z-direction feed, and a temporary machining time are calculated. Reads the machine tool operation time (X rapid feed positioning time, Z rapid feed positioning time, X rapid feed speed, Z rapid feed speed) from the step and machine tool file, and provisional positioning time, rapid feed time, cutting for each feed direction. Calculate the feed time using the following formula, total positioning time = (positioning time) x 2 x (number of cuts)
Rapid feed time = {Machining length / (Number of cuts x Rapid feed speed)} + (Positioning time) x Number of cuts Cut feed time = Machining length / Speed of feed per minute Compare three temporary machining times, It consists of the steps to determine the best method, and the determination will determine the optimal turning direction of the turning process taking into account the tool conditions and cutting load and the time required for machining High-efficiency machining can be efficiently performed with increased productivity.

The tool selection method of the turning process is at least using the tool file and the graphic code of the input data, and the machining area is divided into inner diameter, end face, outer diameter, inner diameter groove, outer diameter groove, end face groove, etc. A step of searching and collating, a step of searching by adding a pilot hole machining tool depending on the presence or absence of an inner diameter pilot hole, a step of using a turning tool including a maximum graphic processing tool used for determining a removal direction, and a minimum of steps To find the number of tools, there are a step to search for tools with many tool functions, and if there is no roughing tool that matches the input figure, a step to use the finishing tool for roughing after the warning and If the tool is not in the tool file, a warning step is performed, and a tool that has sufficient ability to process the shape dimensions of the figure, such as the hole depth of the figure hole diameter, groove width and groove depth, etc. is selected and , Maximize productivity Considering the points, the step of selecting the one with high rigidity in the first order, then the multifunction in the second order, and the groove tool reads the specifications of each groove from the final finished shape file and collates with the specifications of the tool Steps for determining and determining whether or not machining is possible, steps for adopting the following (1) to (3) as selection conditions for tool selection, and (1) tool selection is based on the minimum number of tools in principle. And
(2) Select in consideration of the number of one lot of workpieces, necessary conditions, and absolute conditions.
(3) Select the maximum cutting force tool for each region and add ATC time to the machining time to A, add ATC time to the machining time using the minimum tool number method to B, A and B The acceptance or rejection is determined.
The tool is selected and determined in consideration of the presence / absence of the tool corresponding to the input figure, the removal direction, the number of tools used, and the time required for machining. There is an effect that high-reliability machining can be performed using a tool with increased productivity.

  In addition, as for the tool designation method, at least the step of clarifying the presence or absence of designation in the tool designation item of the designation input related to machining, and designation by tool designation / cutting condition designation input for each process, or automatic determination is selected For each process, the tool designation / cutting condition designation input is paired with the pattern of the figure to clearly specify the tool limit dimension, the tool is designated by the tool number registered in the tool file, and the figure input stage If the tool is specified in, a step that gives a warning to the effect that it is impossible to machine due to its consistency as a result of the arithmetic processing, and there is a machining residue, and the roughing tool is not used for finishing, the finishing tool Consists of a step that decides to be used for roughing depending on the situation, so if you choose whether to specify tool selection or automatic decision, There is an effect that can be will be specified by the tool number for each process, performs highly reliable processing with suits tool machining conditions.

  In addition, as for the method of selecting and determining the fixture, at least the machine tool file fixture input for each machine tool is paired with the diameter and length of the part that can be chucked by the input material graphic and finish graphic. Search by parameter, and determine and select / decide based on the principle of “fixing the immediate vicinity of the part to be machined”, so the optimum part for chucking will be decided from the input data. With the appropriate chucking, there is an effect that a highly reliable process can be performed.

  In addition, the n-process machining path generation determination process for each machining sequence is at least a step of changing the cutting depth in accordance with the machining allowance variation, and the material shape variation of the turning process is statistically processed for material shape variation. Estimate and correct using the method, casting material, forging material, etc., measure the actual material shape data, modify the input material shape data, and determine the processing cycle and cutting by the difference from the finished shape Measuring time and processing time, measuring the material shape, statistically processing the data collected repeatedly, obtaining the average value and variation, and processing each time measured or processing with statistical data And the step of comparing and discriminating the machining time by the statistical method. Will determine the scan processing path, there is an effect capable of performing high processing of suits reliable material shape to enhance the productivity.

In addition, it is determined whether or not the material measurement and machining method of the n process is a repetitive workpiece of at least the same graphic, and if it is not the same graphic, the machining graphic of the previous machining process is set as the material graphic of the current machining process. A step of determining whether or not a removal direction is designated, a step of performing n-process tool selection processing, a step of performing n-process fixture selection processing, and a step of performing n-process material measurement and processing program generation processing The n process determines whether or not material measurement is necessary. If necessary, it is determined whether or not the same figure work is repeated. If not, the copying method or equal pitch is determined by the input material data. The step of generating the movement path for measuring the interval, the number of machining repetitions counter n1 = 0, and the group repetitions counter n2 = 0 Steps to initialize, repeat counter of n1 = n1 +1 and the number of machining, measure the material by copying method or by equal pitch interval, measure the measurement time, and file the measurement dimension data and measurement time in the data area A step of replacing the material dimension with a measurement dimension, a step of calculating a machining allowance using this result, generating and determining a machining path, and a result of determining whether or not n process material measurement is necessary. If not necessary, it is determined whether or not measurement has already been performed. If measurement has been performed, a step of initializing the number of repetitions of the number of machinings to n1 = 0 and a group repetition number counter to be n2 = 0, and n1 = n1 +1 and a step that advances the counter of the number of workpieces repeatedly, so whether it is a repetitive workpiece of the same figure, the necessity of material measurement No, taking into account the time required for processing and measurement will determine the method of processing a material measure of n processes, there is an effect capable of performing a highly reliable machining increase productivity.

  In addition, the n-process workpiece machining method including on-machine measurement, correction, and re-machining, at least in rough machining, if the cutting power exceeds the allowable value, first reduce the spindle speed to 80% sequentially, If the limit value is exceeded, the feed rate is reduced to 50% sequentially. If the limit value is exceeded, a warning is issued and the process is stopped at the break of the machining block. If not, the feed speed is increased to 200% sequentially. If not, the cutting speed is increased to 150%. In finish machining, the feed speed can be changed by changing the spindle speed. In this case, the critical rotational speed is determined in consideration of the tool life, and after machining the workpiece, all the locations where the dimension difference and tolerance symbol are specified are measured and allowed at the next machining. value The tool position and the machine position are expected to be adjusted so that they are within the range, the tolerance width and length are used as parameters, the measurement points are increased, and the average value of the calculation results is calculated when machining with the same cutting edge of the same tool. When the deviation from the specified tolerance center point is corrected by a combination of tool position correction and machine position correction, and the measured maximum and minimum differences exceed 2/3 of the tolerance width at each specified location, A step for warning as an error in process selection, and if it is determined as a defective product, it is determined whether or not there is a remaining finishing allowance. If there is a remaining finishing allowance, finishing within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool If it is determined that there is no finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, the presence or absence of the remaining finish allowance removal capability is checked against the minimum removal capability value in the machine tool file. If it is determined that there is no remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, it is determined whether or not the warning processing step and the decision process for selecting the remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool are unprocessed processing. In the case of processing, it is determined whether or not it is a new machining process. If it is determined as a new machining process, a step of adding one n process storage number and additionally storing process data and a material measurement data file are read. Calculating a material shape average value, maximum value, minimum value by a statistical processing method such as least square method, 3σ method, etc., calculating a processing path and processing time at the maximum material size, Adopt processing with less processing time by comparing and discriminating the time obtained by adding the material measurement time and the average processing time for each measurement and the processing time of the material shape dimension by statistical processing method. If the processing time of the step and the statistical method is long, determine the number of group repetition counters, determine the presence or absence of statistical processing, and if you do not choose statistical processing, measure the material every time by copying method, If the input material dimensions are replaced with measurement data, the machining path is generated and determined, the workpiece is machined, the workpiece is measured and corrected on the machine, and the statistical processing is selected. If the product is determined to be defective, it is determined whether or not there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, an n-process machine tool is used. It is determined whether or not the finishing allowance is within the removal capacity of the machine, and if it is determined that there is no remaining finishing allowance within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool, the machine tool file If the remaining machine allowance removal capability is determined to be no machine tool, the warning processing step and the remaining work allowance removal capability are determined to determine if there is a machine tool, and the remaining work allowance removal capability is determined. If it is determined that there is a machine tool, it is determined whether or not the decision process that has selected the remaining allowance removal capability machine tool is an unprocessed process, and if it is not processed, it is determined whether or not it is a new process. When it is determined as a new machining process, it is composed of a step of adding one n process storage number and additionally storing process data, so that in rough machining, machining is performed by changing the spindle and feed speed, In finishing machining, conditions for correction and re-machining are determined based on measurement results after machining, and there is an effect that high-precision machining can be performed by selecting a speed suitable for the type of machining.

  In addition, the generation of the turning machining path is at least a combination of a method that equally divides the roughing cut into each step and a constant finishing allowance method, a method that makes the rough cutting cut constant, and a variable finishing allowance method. The selection of the combination is specified by the cutting method of the input items related to machining, or the step of determining whether to automatically determine using productivity, chip removal, tool life, tool material, The evaluation consists of a step of deciding a fixed cut or equally divided cut by simulating the machining time based on the number of positionings and the moving path distance, and the machining path in the fixed cut method, if a cut is made, A step that uses a simple pass method that processes to the point where continuous machining can be performed without changing the finishing allowance, and a variable cutting method that equally divides the roughing cut into each step in order to increase machining productivity. Name The step that adopts the cutting method and the machining allowance subtracted from the finishing allowance are divided by the maximum notch, and the fraction is rounded up. A step that uses equal division processing for each stage of each cycle, and a constant cutting method that uses a constant cutting depth for rough machining in order to increase machining productivity. In addition to adopting a finishing allowance method, a step to perform displacement correction corresponding to the finishing allowance, and as displacement correction, an approximate calculation formula is obtained from actual measurement data, and the correction amount is calculated using cutting, feeding, material strength and workpiece total length as variables. Approximate interpolation of adjacent parts using adjacent measured data using raw measured data, interpolation calculation of material strength and workpiece total length as variables, or cutting load, material, workpiece total length, support method, load Since the calculation step includes a step of calculating and correcting the correction amount using an arithmetic expression with a point or the like as a variable, the cutting path for rough cutting is determined in consideration of processing productivity and the cutting method. As a result, there is an effect that rough processing with high reliability and efficiency can be performed.

The turning path for the bar material is at least a step of selecting whether the machine position is an absolute value or an increment value according to the specified item of the machine tool file, a step of obtaining a cutting speed based on the workpiece material and the tool material, and rotation of the spindle The direction is determined by the tool identification number, and the feed rate is determined by the cutting limit and feed from the tool file, the machine tool limit and the workpiece limit, and the cutting and feed from the cutting condition file. The step of determining the allowable value and the calculation method of the equal division cutting method are as follows: rough machining allowance for each stage, allowable maximum cutting for each stage, theoretical cutting number of times, respectively Roughing allowance for each = {material diameter-(specified diameter + finishing allowance)}
Maximum permissible depth of cut for each stage = Maximum machining load / feed x Specific cutting resistance theoretical number of cuts = (Rough machining allowance for each stage) / (2 x Maximum permissible depth of cut for each stage)
The maximum allowable depth of cut is determined by the highest cutting direction of the workpiece, machine tool, and tool, and the maximum depth of cut used for machining depends on the tool material and input workpiece material, and the specific cutting resistance and The cutting speed and feed are obtained from the cutting condition file, the cutting value is calculated based on the stiffness limit value, each step shape is read from the final finishing shape file, and the finishing allowance is obtained to obtain the pre-finishing dimension and further maximize the length. When the number of cuts divided by the cut is rounded up to an integer, the equal cut depth is obtained, the cutting direction and feed direction are determined, and when a machining program is generated using this equal cut depth, the increase in cutting in the Z direction If it occurs in the middle of machining, the Z direction value at the previous cutting stage is used to prevent the increase in cutting, or if an increase in the cutting in the X direction occurs in the middle of machining, the previous cutting The maximum allowable depth of cut is the number of workpieces, machine tools, and tools as the calculation method of the program of the constant depth of cut method using the X direction value at the step to prevent the increase of the depth of cut. Determine the highest cutting direction with the lowest value, and the maximum cutting value to be used for machining depends on the tool material and input work material, and the specific cutting resistance and cutting speed and feed are obtained from the cutting condition file. The machining path that calculates the cutting value according to the value and sets the machining direction of the outer diameter part as the Z direction cutting and X direction feeding is sent to the point where the finishing allowance and separate process finishing allowance are added to the final finished shape file for each cutting, The remaining part of the previous machining is a path to be sent in the Z +, X- direction or Z-, X- direction, and the machining path is calculated by repeating the work of sending to the previous cutting point and returning to the cutting outer diameter. Read the step shape If the finishing allowance is added, the pre-finishing dimensions are obtained, and the number of incisions obtained by dividing the length by the maximum incision and the remainder to be processed in the case of the next stage machining are obtained. The rough machining allowance for each stage is as follows: Steps to be determined using an equation and rough machining allowance for each step = {material diameter− (designated diameter + finishing allowance)}
If a tool material not specified in the cutting condition file is specified, the tool material conversion table file is searched for the conversion material, and the cutting condition file is searched for the machining condition corresponding to the workpiece material, tool diameter, etc. with the equivalent tool material. The finishing allowance of the inner diameter from the maximum cutting value of the tool is set to 1/3 of the maximum cutting value, and the finishing allowance of the end face is set to 1/2 of the finishing allowance of the diameter. Approximate the processing deflection correction calculation by using the outer diameter machining displacement diagram corresponding to the rough cutting remainder of each step, the difference between the measured data and the reference diameter, and the changed radius amount diagram, considering the proportionality in the primary expression The value is obtained, the program data value to be machined is corrected, and the machining program is generated. The groove tool feed includes the shank size, tool protrusion amount, tool stiffness (X, Z) feed limit from the tool file ( Maximum, minimum), maximum cutting strength, Calculate the maximum allowable load by dividing the allowable cutting limit by the tool rigidity and calculating the maximum allowable load by the specific cutting resistance of the material file from the cutting material, and the feed rate is F = 2 × maximum cutting strength / (specific cutting resistance X groove width) [mm / rev]
The dwell time at the groove bottom is obtained by using the following equation from the dwell rotational speed, the cutting speed obtained from the tool material and the workpiece material, and the diameter of the groove bottom, and t = dwell rotational speed / ( Cutting speed / (60 × π × bottom diameter)) [sec]
The grooving quick return position is a step that switches to fast feed if the workpiece outer diameter is reached from the point when contact with the workpiece at the cutting edge is lost due to the radius of the tool cutting edge. The finishing feed amount for turning is determined by the following formula based on the roughness based on the finish symbol, the relational expression between the roughness and the feed, and the tool edge radius (nose radius) from the tool file, and Hmax = f2. /8Rf2=8R×Hf=(8R×H)1/2×0.8 The finishing feed of the end face of the feed in the X direction by the Z direction tool under the tool condition is 1 / 2.5 of the Z direction feed. As the cutting step and thread cutting method, the following methods are used: cutting method (cutting method), follow-up method, relief second method, combined follow-up method, and cutting method of giving equal cross-sectional area and equally spaced cutting. Material, workpiece hardness The step to use properly according to machine rigidity, tool material, tool rigidity, tool characteristics, the step of giving the cutting depth, screw opening width and cutting edge width by the following formulas respectively, the cutting depth = {(average outer diameter)-(working trough Diameter)} / 2 cutting edge width = 2 × determined tool cutting edge radius × [{(1 / sin (half-width of thread)) − 1} × tan (half-width of thread)
Screw opening width = (P / 2) + (average outer diameter−average effective diameter) × tan (half angle of screw thread)
As for the incision division in the case of the equal cross-section method, the number of incisions is determined by the allowable cutting load due to machine rigidity and tool rigidity, and the total cutting load is divided by the product of the threading cross-sectional area and the specific cutting resistance to obtain the approximate number of incisions. Calculate and multiply by the safety factor, determine the specific cutting resistance from the material file according to the material, calculate the total cutting load by the following formula, and calculate the total cutting load = specific cutting resistance x total cutting cross-sectional area of the tool from the tool file The rigidity, cutting limit, and maximum cutting strength are calculated. The tool rigidity limit is set to half of the roughing due to the condition of thread cutting, the allowable bending limit is divided by the tool rigidity, and the allowable cutting load is calculated. The total cutting load is divided by the allowable cutting load, and rounded up to make an integer. The depth of cut division is obtained by developing the following formula: Thread cross-sectional area / number of divisions (n) = blade width × (hn−h ( n-1)) +2 x (1 2) × {(hn) 2 × tan (half-width of the thread)
− (H (n−1)) 2 × tan (half angle of thread)}
= Cutting edge width x (hn-h (n-1)) + tan (half angle of thread)
× {(hn) 2− (h (n-1)) 2}
Further, the left and right movement amounts of the escape second method and the combination follow-up method are calculated by the following formula: left and right movement amount (Δzn) = (hn−h (n−1)) × tan (half angle of screw thread)
The incision point of the combination follow-up method is composed of the steps to calculate and obtain the reverse of machining based on the final position, so that the allowable infeed amount, feed amount, finishing allowance, tool data, material data Based on this, the turning path of the bar material is determined, and there is an effect that the highly reliable bar material processing can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, tool selection and cutting conditions are set at least. For tool selection of grooving rotary tools, the groove width of the machining part is searched as a key code, and the tool identification number is selected by matching the tool diameter and the length under the neck. The cutting conditions of the step and rotary tool are determined by retrieving the cutting speed from the cutting condition file according to the work material and the tool material, calculating using the tool diameter and calculating the rotation speed, and determining the cutting value based on the tool rigidity. Calculate the number of cuts and repeat the machining process to a predetermined depth, and if there is no tool diameter data corresponding to the specified tool material, workpiece material, cutting speed, and feed speed, the tool diameter below it and above The step of calculating the corresponding feed speed by complementing the tool diameter, the step of complementing that the feed speed of the end mills is proportional to the fourth power of the diameter, and the feed speed of the drills are straightforward. Therefore, the machining settings when using a grooving rotary tool are determined in consideration of the groove width of the machined part, the tool material, and the work material. There is an effect that high-performance processing can be performed efficiently.

  Also, the reamed hole machining program is input, type from final finish dimensions, rotation angle from reference position, hole step, diameter, finish symbol, countersink / dish removal, diameter, countersink angle, depth, number of holes / Since the position data is used, standardized input data is used, and there is an effect that highly reliable processing with few data input mistakes can be performed.

  The reamer machining program at least selects a tool for a prepared hole drill by searching and selecting the reamer diameter and depth as key codes, and the cutting conditions for the prepared hole drill include the work material and the tool material from the tool file. The cutting speed is calculated from the cutting condition file and the rotation speed is calculated to determine the cutting speed, and the feed of the prepared hole drill is obtained from the cutting condition file, and the feed speed is proportional to the diameter. As the complementary calculation step and the reamer tool selection, the reamer diameter and depth are used as key codes to search for and select the reamer, so that the drill selection and cutting conditions for pilot hole machining, and The reamer selection is optimally performed, and there is an effect that the reamer processing can be performed with high reliability and efficiency.

  Further, the machining program for the end face groove cam includes at least a step of selecting and selecting a tool as a key code of the cam groove width, the cam depth = the length of the cutting edge, and the cutting condition of the end face groove cam machining. Determine the cutting speed by calculating the cutting speed based on the workpiece material and the tool material, determine the cutting speed, and the feed of the end face groove cam machining, find the feed of the adjacent diameter from the cutting condition file, the feed speed is the diameter Since it is composed of a step that performs a complementary operation as being proportional to the square of, the tool selection for grooving and the selection of cutting conditions are optimally performed, and the effect that grooving can be performed reliably and efficiently There is.

  Also, the outer diameter finishing machining program obtains the finished surface roughness by at least the finishing method symbol according to the specifications of the final finished shape, the feed rate that satisfies this, the relationship between the roughness and the feed rate, and the tool edge radius (Nose radius) and the step of calculating using the safety factor, the groove finishing is a step of selecting a groove tool and a feed speed based on the specifications of the groove of the final finished shape, and the chamfering of the groove bottom is It is composed of the step of calculating using the tool edge radius x (nose radius) of the groove tool, and the finishing process will determine the tool and cutting speed based on the finishing method symbol and the final finishing shape, There is an effect that optimum processing can be performed based on the symbols used in the drawings.

  The key groove machining program includes at least the key groove input drawing and final finished shape drawing specifications (key groove number, previous stage, rear stage, key groove width, dimensional difference, finishing symbol, total length of key groove, machining Since the processing is based on the specified step, depth, finish symbol, groove type, cutter diameter, reference shoulder step, dimension from the shoulder, angle from the reference position), the input data will be standardized. There is an effect that highly reliable machining with few input errors can be performed.

  In addition, the keyway machining processing program includes at least a step of searching and selecting a cutter using the key diameter as a tool code for selecting a tool for the keyway, and a cutting condition of the keyway as a tool material and a workpiece material. The cutting speed and feed rate per blade are calculated and calculated using the rotation speed and the number of blades, and the side cutter feed speed is calculated from the product of the rotation speed, feed and the number of blades. Therefore, the tool selection and cutting conditions are optimally determined, and there is an effect that the keyway processing can be performed with high reliability and efficiency.

  In addition, the outer diameter gear hobbing program stores at least the specifications of the outer gear hobbing, the final finished shape (external gear number, reference position, angle, gear specifications, tooth profile, module (M), pressure Since it is generated based on angle (PA), number of teeth, torsion angle, tooth width, straddle tooth thickness, finishing method, finishing symbol, input data will be standardized, data input errors will be reduced, and outer diameter gear hob There is an effect that cutting can be performed with high reliability.

  Also, the outer diameter gear hobbing processing program determines at least the step of selecting the tool from gear specifications, tooth profile, PA, and the tool diameter and tooth end height, and determines whether or not processing is possible. If this is not possible, calculate the cutting speed and feed speed based on the warning step, the step of calculating the torsion angle based on the tool diameter and the tip height, and the tool material and workpiece material. The workpiece rotation speed is calculated by dividing the spindle rotation speed by the number of teeth to obtain an integer to obtain the workpiece rotation speed, and the spindle rotation speed is obtained by multiplying the work rotation speed and the number of teeth. Therefore, the tool selection and cutting conditions are optimally determined, and the outer diameter gear hobbing can be optimally performed.

  Also, the outer diameter grinding processing program has at least a step of selecting a grinding wheel material based on the material material and material hardness, and a material hardness (converted hardness) depending on the material material and material hardness (converted hardness). Comparing the length (grinding wheel width) and selecting the processing method from infeed, traverse, and plunge, determining the processing method and determining the cutting conditions (grinding wheel peripheral speed, workpiece peripheral speed, cutting depth); Steps to calculate the grinding wheel speed by calculating the grinding wheel diameter and grinding wheel peripheral speed, steps to calculate the work speed from the work peripheral speed corresponding to the target workpiece diameter, input, final finishing shape, separate process finishing Since it consists of the step of generating a machining path from the machining shape, the tool selection and cutting conditions will be determined optimally, and the effect of optimally performing outer diameter grinding A.

  Further, the inner diameter grinding processing program selects at least the inner diameter grinding tool by selecting the grinding stone material based on the material material and the material hardness, and depending on the material material, the material hardness (converted hardness), the machining part width and the tool cutting edge. The machining method is selected from infeed, traverse, and plunge, and the cutting conditions (grinding wheel circumferential speed, workpiece circumferential speed, depth of cut) are calculated. , A step of calculating the grindstone speed by calculating the grindstone diameter and the grindstone peripheral speed, a step of calculating the work speed by calculating from the work peripheral speed corresponding to the target workpiece diameter, and the Z direction of roughing and finishing The machining path is generated from the step of determining the chopping speed in relation to the amount of the grindstone width per rotation of the workpiece, the input, the final finished shape, and the finished finished shape. And steps, because it is composed, would be optimally determined tool selection, the cutting conditions, there is an effect capable of performing the inside diameter grinding optimally.

  In addition, the n-process workpiece machining program having on-machine measurement, correction, and re-correction includes at least a step of performing correction by measuring the workpiece on the n-process machine and the machine position or tool correction after completion of machining, and determining whether the measurement result is good or bad. If it is determined that the product is defective, it is determined whether there is a remaining finishing allowance. If there is a remaining finishing allowance, it is determined whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool, the finishing process is repeated. The process of checking and determining the presence or absence of the machine tool file with the minimum removal capability of the machine tool file, If it is unprocessed, it is determined whether it is a new machining process. If it is determined to be a new machining process, an n process storage number is incremented by 1 and a new machining process is determined. Since the process data is additionally stored, the correction and reprocessing conditions are determined based on the measurement result, and there is an effect that highly accurate processing can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, the adaptive processing for cutting power in the middle of machining, at least in rough machining, when the cutting power exceeds the allowable value, first reduce the spindle speed to 80% sequentially and still exceed the limit value Next, lower the feed rate to 50% in sequence, and if the limit is exceeded, issue a warning, stop at the break of the machining block, and if the cutting power is less than the allowable value, If the feed rate is increased to 200% successively and further less, then the step consists of the step of increasing the cutting rate to 150% successively. If the value exceeds the allowable value, the spindle speed will be reduced to 80% in sequence, and if it exceeds the limit, a warning will be issued and the machine will stop at the break of the machining block, and the cutting power If it is less than the allowable value, it consists of the steps of increasing the cutting speed up to 150% in order, so that in rough machining, the spindle and feed speed are changed, and in finishing machining, only the spindle speed is changed. Thus, there is an effect that the processing can be performed optimally, and the speed can be changed optimally according to the type of processing, so that highly reliable processing can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, the n-process workpiece machining method including measurement outside the machine, correction, and reworking includes at least a step of performing correction by measuring the workpiece outside the machine and machine position or tool correction after machining, and determining whether the measurement result is good or bad. If it is determined that the product is defective, it is determined whether there is a finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance, it is determined whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. When there is a finishing allowance within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool, a step is performed to repeat the work after attaching the workpiece, and when there is no finish allowance within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool, warning processing is performed. And determining whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, and if it is determined that there is no finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, Compared with the minimum removal capacity of the machine tool file, the presence / absence of the finishing allowance removal capability machine tool is checked and discriminated. Therefore, the correction and reworking conditions are determined, and there is an effect that highly accurate machining can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, the measurement / correction processing after machining the workpiece should be done so that at least the location where the dimension difference and tolerance symbol are specified after machining the workpiece will be measured, and the tool position will be within the tolerance during the next machining. When machining with the same cutting edge of the same tool, the step of expecting the machine position, the step of changing the measurement point based on the tolerance width, the step of calculating the average value of the measurement result, the difference between the maximum and minimum Is a step of correcting the deviation between the average value of the calculation results and the specified tolerance center point by a combination of tool position correction and machine position correction, and the measured difference between the maximum and minimum is the tolerance width of 3 at each specified position. If it exceeds 2 / min, it is composed of a step that outputs a warning as an error in process selection. Therefore, based on the measurement result, the tool position and machine position will be within the allowable values during the next machining. Would be expected correct, reliable with learning effect, an effect which can perform good machining accuracy.

  In addition, the machining program having the n-process material machine outside measurement determines at least whether or not the same figure is a repetitive workpiece, and if it is not the same figure, arranges the material diagram and the machining figure in the n process, As a material figure of the current machining process, the machining figure of each process, the step of determining whether or not the removal direction is designated, and the tool search are performed for each n-process machine tool. Search by file and figure code according to removal direction, find all tools with matching figure processing function codes, and select and determine the optimum tool for machining with the minimum number of tools and maximum productivity as the scale Then, as a fixture search, n-process tool tool file fixture input for each machine tool is chucked from the input figure. Search using the location as a key, Select the limit length and diameter for each processing side as a key, Select the fixtures that are less than the limit length, and arrange them in order of decreasing chucking length, and select and align the installation Select the fixture with the closest chucking diameter for each machining side and determine the fixture that is common to both machining as the optimum. A step of selecting and determining a fixture, a step of performing measurement outside the n-process material machine, a step of determining whether or not n-process material measurement is necessary, and determining whether or not the same graphic work is repeated, In the case of a new workpiece that is not a repeat of the same workpiece, a step for initializing the number of repetitions counter for the number of operations and a group repetition number counter, and a repetition counter for the number of operations Step, measuring the material outside the machine, replacing the material dimension with the measured dimension, calculating the machining allowance using this result and determining the generation of the machining path, and whether the n process requires material measurement If it is not necessary, it is determined whether or not measurement has already been performed, and if measurement is performed, a step for initializing the processing number repetition count counter and the group repetition number counter and a processing number repetition counter are provided. A step of proceeding, a step of machining an n-process workpiece, measuring outside the machine, correcting and re-machining, a step of machining the workpiece and measuring a machining time, and filing machining time data in a file area, and an n-process machine If it is determined as a defective product as a result of external workpiece measurement, the remaining finishing allowance is determined. If there is a remaining finishing allowance, n It is determined whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the process machine tool. If there is a finish allowance within the removal capability of the n process machine tool, the step of reattaching the workpiece and the removal of the n process machine tool are performed. If it is determined that there is no finishing allowance remaining within the capacity, the presence or absence of the remaining allowance removal capability machine tool is checked against the minimum removal capability value in the machine tool file, and it is determined that there is no remaining allowance removal capability machine tool. Determines the step of performing warning processing and the presence or absence of a machine tool with the ability to remove the remaining work allowance. Determines whether it is an unprocessed process. If it is an unprocessed process, it determines whether it is a new process. If it is determined to be a new process, it adds one n process storage number and A step of additionally storing data, a group repetition counter is added if the processing number of repetitions counter is a predetermined value, and a step of 1 is advanced, a material measurement data file for a predetermined number of times is read, and the least square method, 3σ method, The steps to calculate the average value, maximum value, and minimum value of the material shape by statistical processing methods such as, the step to calculate the processing path and processing time at the calculated maximum value of the material size, and the material was measured and processed each time A step of adopting machining with less machining time by comparing and discriminating between the time obtained by adding the material measurement time and the average machining time and the machining time of the material shape dimension by the statistical processing method, and processing by the statistical method If the time is long, it is determined whether the group repetition counter is a predetermined value. If it is not a predetermined value, no statistical processing is performed thereafter. Measuring outside the machine, changing the input material dimensions to measurement data, generating and determining the machining path, machining the workpiece, and if the measurement result is judged as defective, whether there is a remaining finishing allowance If there is a remaining finishing allowance, it is determined whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finish allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, If it is determined that there is no remaining finishing allowance within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool after re-mounting the workpiece and finishing machining, the remaining finish allowance removal ability If it is determined that there is no remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool, the warning processing step and the presence or absence of the remaining work allowance removal capability machine tool are determined. Yes Is determined, it is determined whether or not the decision process that has selected the remaining machining allowance removal machine tool is an unprocessed process, and in the case of an unprocessed process, it is determined whether or not it is a new process. In the case of determination, since it includes a step of adding one n process storage number and additionally storing process data, a tool and a fixture are selected based on graphic input data, and correction is performed based on the measurement result. Thus, the condition for reworking is determined, and there is an effect that highly accurate machining can be efficiently performed with simple input.

  Also, the machining program with n-process material statistical processing and on-machine measurement is at least a method for organizing material statistical processing diagrams and machining figures in n processes. The step of organizing the machining figure, the step of determining whether or not the removal direction is specified, and the tool search are performed by searching for the n direction of the process tool by combining the tool file and the figure code according to the removal direction. Steps for finding all tools with matching processing function codes, steps for selecting and determining the optimum tool for machining with the minimum and maximum productivity as the scale, and fitting search for each process tool Searching for the fixture of the machine tool file that has been entered using the chucking location as a key from the input figure, and each machining side Select the limit length and diameter as the key, select the fixtures below the limit length, align the chucking length in ascending order, and select and align the fixtures with the largest chucking diameter for each processing side. A step of selecting an approximate fixture and determining the fixture common to both processes as an optimum, a step of selecting and determining an optimal fixture in each case when the fixture common to both processes is not obtained, and n processes The step of generating a machining program including on-machine measurement is determined, and the tool selected based on the figure code and removal direction is determined based on the number of tools required for machining and productivity, and the input figure The fixture selected according to is optimally determined according to the machining, and it is possible to perform highly productive machining with high reliability using the optimum tool based on simple data input. A.

  In addition, the n-process workpiece machining method including on-machine measurement, correction, and re-working, if at least the result of the quality measurement after workpiece machining is judged as a defective product, indicates whether there is a remaining finishing allowance. If there is a finishing allowance remaining, determine whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool, and if there is no finishing allowance within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool, Finishing allowance removal capability The presence / absence of a machine tool is checked against the minimum removal capability value in the machine tool file, and when it is determined that there is a remaining finish allowance removing capability, a warning processing step and the remaining finish allowance removing capability If there is a machine tool, and it is determined that there is a machine tool with the ability to remove the remaining work allowance, it is determined whether the decision process that selected the machine tool with the remaining work allowance removal ability is unprocessed or not. In the case of If it is determined whether or not it is a new machining process, it includes a step of adding one n process storage number and additionally storing process data as a new machining process. The conditions for correction and reworking are determined, and there is an effect that machining with high accuracy can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, the machining program with n-process material statistical processing and measurement outside the machine, at least as a method for organizing material statistical processing diagrams and machining figures in the n-process, the previous machining figure is made the material figure of the current machining process. The step of organizing the machining figures of each process using the step, the step of determining whether or not the removal direction is specified, the step of performing the tool selection processing of n processes, and the tool search for each n process relevant machine tool, The tool file and the figure code are combined and searched according to the removal direction, and all the tools that match the figure processing function code are searched. The most suitable tool for machining is selected and determined based on the minimum and maximum productivity of the tool. A step of performing an n-process fixture selection process, and a tool input for each n-process machine tool as a fixture search. Search for fixtures in the machine file by using the chucking location as a key from the input figure, select the limit length and diameter for each processing side as keys, select the fixtures below the limit length, and check the chucking length. Select the fixture that has the closest chucking diameter for each machining side, and select the fixture that is the closest to the chucking diameter for each machining side. When it is not a common tool for machining, it is composed of a step for selecting and determining an optimum fixture for each, and a step for generating a machining program including measurement outside the machine of n processes. The tool selected according to the removal direction is determined based on the number of tools and productivity required for machining, and the fixture selected by the input figure is optimally determined according to the machining. It is effective that can be performed to increase the productivity reliable processing using the optimum tool based on the simple data input.

  In addition, the n-process workpiece machining method, which includes measurement outside the machine, correction, and rework, at least determines the quality of the measurement results, and if it is determined as a defective product, determines whether there is a remaining finishing allowance. If there is a remaining machining allowance, determine whether the finishing allowance is within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool. If there is a finishing allowance within the removal capability of the n-process machine tool, reinstall the workpiece. If it is determined that there are no remaining finishing allowances within the removal capacity of the n-process machine tool and the steps to repeat from the finishing process, the presence / absence of the remaining finish allowance removal capacity machine tool is checked against the minimum removal capacity value of the machine tool file. When it is determined that there is no machine allowance for removing the remaining work allowance, it is determined whether there is a machine tool for removing the remaining work allowance and the step for performing warning processing and the presence / absence of the machine tool for removing the remaining work allowance. Is It is determined whether or not the decision process that has selected the remaining machining allowance removal machine tool is an unprocessed process. In the case of an unprocessed process, it is determined whether or not the process is a new process. Since it includes a step of adding one process storage number and additionally storing process data, correction and reprocessing conditions are determined based on the measurement result, and highly accurate machining is efficiently performed. There is an effect that can be.

  If the data to be read directly with the tool diameter or tool shank specifications is not registered in the cutting condition file, the tool diameter or tool adjacent to the tool specifications to be used is based on the tool diameter or tool shank specifications. Obtain 3 or more data from the cutting condition file of the shank specifications, analyze this data group using the tool diameter and tool shank specifications as variables, obtain an approximate expression, and determine the tool diameter and tool shank specifications of the tool to be used. A series of processes that automatically calculate the cutting conditions and store them in the machining program are entered in the obtained approximate formula and the optimum cutting conditions are determined approximately even for tools that are not registered as data in the file. In other words, there is an effect that almost optimum machining can be performed using any tool.

  The machining method using the numerical control device according to the present invention is suitable for machining a workpiece using a machine capable of measuring the workpiece with the workpiece attached to the machine.

It is a flowchart which shows the processing method by one Example of this invention. FIG. 2 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 1 showing the processing method according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 2 showing a processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which registers the files of step 2 by one Example of this invention. It is a flowchart which processes the tool data of step 220 by one Example of this invention. It is a flowchart of the discrimination | determination of the tool function by a sub cutting edge angle among the tool data processes of step 2203 by one Example of this invention. It is a processing flowchart of classification of a rotary tool data and tool diameter order alignment of step 2209 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a finishing shape figure process flowchart of step 6 by one Example of this invention. It is a figure process flowchart before another process finishing of step 7 by one Example of this invention. It is a pattern identification process flowchart of step 8 by one Example of this invention. It is a pattern identification flowchart of step 807 by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the pattern identification result of step 8 by one Example of this invention. It is a process determination process flowchart of step 9 by one Example of this invention. FIG. 14 is a continuation of FIG. 13 of the machining process determination process flowchart of step 9 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a continuation of FIG. 14 of the machining process determination processing flowchart of step 9 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a process flowchart of the cutting process for every step 907 by one Example of this invention. It is a process flowchart of the one-center hole drilling process of step 923 by one Example of this invention. It is a process flowchart of the one-center hole drilling process of step 924 by one Example of this invention. It is a both center hole drilling process process flowchart of step 925 by one Example of this invention. It is a both center hole support turning process process flowchart of step 926 by one Example of this invention. It is a chucking turning process process flowchart of step 927 by one Example of this invention. It is a process determination process flowchart of step 954 by one Example of this invention. It is a processing program creation process flowchart for every process of step 11 by one Example of this invention. It is a flowchart of the tool selection process of step 1106, 2704, 2904, 3803, 4103 by one Example of this invention. It is a flowchart of the fixture selection process of step 1107, 2705, 2905, 3804, 4104 by one Example of this invention. It is a turning process removal direction determination process flowchart of step 1105 by one Example of this invention. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of n-process workpiece processing and on-machine measurement processing not including the material measurement processing in step 15 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. It is an n-process workpiece | work processing and the machine outside measurement process flowchart which does not include the raw material measurement process of step 16 by one Example of this invention. It is a flowchart of the raw material measurement of n process of step 27 by one Example of this invention, and a machining program production | generation. It is a detailed flowchart of the raw material measurement of n process of step 2706 by one Example of this invention, and a production | generation program production | generation. It is a flowchart of the workpiece process of the n process of step 28 by one Example of this invention, on-machine measurement, correction | amendment, and a rework process. FIG. 32 is a continuation of FIG. 31 of the flowchart of the n-process workpiece machining, on-machine measurement, correction, and rework processing in step 28 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 32 is a continuation of FIG. 32 of the flowchart of the n-process workpiece machining, on-machine measurement, correction, and rework processing in step 28 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of n process outside machine measurement of step 29 by one Example of this invention, machining program generation, work processing, machine outside measurement, amendment, and rework processing. FIG. 34 is a continuation of FIG. 34 of the flowchart of the n-process outside machine measurement, machining program generation, workpiece machining, machine outside measurement, correction, and rework process in step 29 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a continuation of FIG. 35 of the flowchart of the n-process outside machine measurement, machining program generation, workpiece machining, outside machine measurement, correction, and rework processing in step 29 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 36 is a continuation of FIG. 36 of the flowchart of the n-process outside machine measurement, machining program generation, workpiece machining, machine outside measurement, correction, and rework processing in step 29 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a raw material machine outside measurement process flowchart of n process of step 2906 by one Example of this invention. It is a flowchart of a process program generation with the material statistical process of n process of step 38 by one Example of this invention, with a measurement on a machine. It is a process flowchart of the workpiece process of n process of step 39 by one Example of this invention, measurement on a machine, correction | amendment, and rework. It is a flowchart of the processing program generation with the material statistical process of n process of step 41 by one Example of this invention, with the measurement outside a machine. It is a process flowchart of the workpiece process of the n process of step 42 of one Example of this invention, a measurement outside a machine, correction | amendment, and rework. It is explanatory drawing of the raw material shape by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the finishing shape by one Example of this invention. FIG. 45 is a view A of a finished shape diagram (FIG. 44) according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a bottom view of the A view of the finishing shape figure (FIG. 44) by one Example of this invention. It is BB sectional drawing of the finishing shape figure (FIG. 44) by one Example of this invention. It is CC sectional drawing of the finishing shape figure (FIG. 44) by one Example of this invention. It is DD sectional drawing of the finishing shape figure (FIG. 44) by one Example of this invention. FIG. 45 is an E view of the finished shape diagram (FIG. 44) according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is a F view of the finished shape diagram (FIG. 44) according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is a cam diagram of a finish view (FIG. 44) as viewed in F according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is a G view of the finished shape diagram (FIG. 44) according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is a cam diagram of the G view of the finished shape diagram (FIG. 44) according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is an H view of the finished shape diagram (FIG. 44) according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is a sectional view taken along line H of the finished shape diagram (FIG. 44) according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is JJ sectional drawing of the finishing shape figure (FIG. 44) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (1/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (2/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (3/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (4/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (5/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (6/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (7/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (8/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (9/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (10/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (11/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (12/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (13/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (14/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machine tool file data input (15/15) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the attachment method file data input (1/4) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the attachment method file data input (2/4) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the attachment method file data input (3/4) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the attachment method file data input (4/4) by one Example of this invention. 4 is a process file according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (1/4) of the stationary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (2/4) of the stationary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (3/4) of the stationary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (4/4) of the stationary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (1/4) of the rotary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (2/4) of the rotary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (3/4) of the rotary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool file data input (4/4) of the rotary tool by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the process schematic of the outer diameter process displacement by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the difference of the actual measurement data of an outer diameter process displacement by one Example of this invention, and a reference | standard diameter. It is explanatory drawing of the radius amount which the outer-diameter process displacement by one Example of this invention changed. It is explanatory drawing of the groove shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the center hole shape file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the keyway shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the key kind shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the end surface keyway shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the hole shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tap hole shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the internal shape cam shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the end surface direction cam shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cylindrical groove cam shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the groove shape file format of the cylindrical groove cam by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the external form cam shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the end surface groove cam shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the groove shape file format of the end surface groove cam by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of a cylindrical outer plane / cylindrical polygon shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the internal gear shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the external gear shape file format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the taper shape file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the designation | designated input format (dialogue input) regarding the process by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the designation | designated input format (non-interactive input) regarding the process by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the input format of the process designation | designated / tool designation / attachment number / finishing allowance by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the tool specification / cutting condition input format by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the dimension tolerance file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the dimension tolerance file (hole type H) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the basic | foundation tolerance file (dimensional difference (hole) used as a foundation) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the basic tolerance file (IT basic tolerance) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the basic | foundation tolerance file (IT tolerance grade difference) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the screw shape file (M external thread) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the pilot hole file of the screw by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the processing method symbol file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the finishing symbol file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the finishing allowance file (The outer diameter and the refining allowance are not included, but per diameter, grinding) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the finishing allowance file (an outer diameter and a refining allowance are included, per diameter, grinding) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the finishing allowance file (The inside diameter and refining allowance are not included, but per diameter, grinding) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the finishing allowance file (bar material processing) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the material file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the conversion table (1/3) of the tool material by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the conversion table (2/3) of the tool material by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the conversion table (3/3) of the tool material by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (turning) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (side cutter process) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (end mill process) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (drilling) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (tapping) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (reaming process) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (hobbing) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (outside diameter grinding process) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cutting condition file (inner diameter grinding process) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the surface treatment file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the refining file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the shape and position accuracy file by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the cost file by one Example of this invention. It is a constant table | surface of the tool life equation by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the general matter and material shape by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format (1/3) of the finishing shape (sequence numbers 16-36) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format (2/3) of the finishing shape (sequence numbers 16-36) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format (3/3) of the finishing shape (sequence numbers 16-36) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format (1/3) of the finishing shape (sequence number 37-53) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format (2/3) of the finishing shape (sequence number 37-53) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format (3/3) of the finishing shape (sequence number 37-53) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (length which straddles a step, center hole grooving) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (key groove, end surface key groove) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (hole) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (tap hole) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (inner shape cam) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (end surface direction cam) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (cylindrical groove cam) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (outer shape cam) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (end surface groove cam) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (cylindrical flat surface / cylindrical polygon) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (internal gear) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the data input format of the finishing shape (external gear) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (1/2) of the final finishing shape (sequence number 16-40) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (2/2) of the final finishing shape (sequence number 16-40) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (1/2) of the final finishing shape (sequence number 41-53) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (2/2) of the final finishing shape (sequence number 41-53) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 54-60) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 61-63) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 64-66) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 67-72) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 73-76) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 77-80) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 81, 82) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file of the final finishing shape (sequence number 83) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (1/2) of the intermediate finishing shape (sequence number 16-40) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (2/2) of the intermediate finish shape (sequence number 16-40) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (1/2) of the intermediate finishing shape (sequence number 41-53) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the file (2/2) of the intermediate finishing shape (sequence number 41-53) by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the turning removal volume by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the product of turning process removal volume / removal volume and average radius by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the machining allowance cross-sectional area and the allowance direction length by the bar raw material by one Example of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the turning machining allowance cross-sectional area and the machining allowance direction length by the raw material figure input by one Example of this invention.

Explanation of symbols

  Step 14 Judgment of necessity of on-machine measurement, Step 15 Processing of workpiece measurement, correction, and rework.

Claims (1)

Measuring an error between an actual shape of a workpiece machined according to a machining program and a target shape instructed by the machining program while the workpiece is fixed to a machine;
Based on the measurement result, a remaining machining portion in which the machining allowance remains beyond a predetermined reference value is specified in the workpiece, and the machining for correction machining for making the machining allowance of the remaining machining portion equal to or less than the predetermined reference value Generating a program;
Reworking the workpiece according to the generated machining program for correction machining;
With
A processing method using a numerical controller, wherein the steps are automatically executed in order.

Images